GE Fanuc Automation

Computer Numerical Control Products

Series 16i / 18i / 21i / 20i – Model A

Descriptions Manual

GFZ-63002EN/02 August 1999

 GFL-001
Warnings, Cautions, and Notes
as Used in this Publication

Warning
Warning notices are used in this publication to emphasize that hazardous voltages, currents,
temperatures, or other conditions that could cause personal injury exist in this equipment or
may be associated with its use.
In situations where inattention could cause either personal injury or damage to equipment, a
Warning notice is used.

Caution
Caution notices are used where equipment might be damaged if care is not taken.

Note
Notes merely call attention to information that is especially significant to understanding and
operating the equipment.

This document is based on information available at the time of its publication. While efforts
have been made to be accurate, the information contained herein does not purport to cover all
details or variations in hardware or software, nor to provide for every possible contingency in
connection with installation, operation, or maintenance. Features may be described herein
which are not present in all hardware and software systems. GE Fanuc Automation assumes
no obligation of notice to holders of this document with respect to changes subsequently made.

GE Fanuc Automation makes no representation or warranty, expressed, implied, or statutory

with respect to, and assumes no responsibility for the accuracy, completeness, sufficiency, or
usefulness of the information contained herein. No warranties of merchantability or fitness for
purpose shall apply.

©Copyright 1999 GE Fanuc Automation North America, Inc.

All Rights Reserved.
 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

This section describes the safety precautions related to the use of CNC units. It is essential that these precautions
be observed by users to ensure the safe operation of machines equipped with a CNC unit (all descriptions in this
section assume this configuration). Note that some precautions are related only to specific functions, and thus
may not be applicable to certain CNC units.
Users must also observe the safety precautions related to the machine, as described in the relevant manual supplied
by the machine tool builder. Before attempting to operate the machine or create a program to control the operation
of the machine, the operator must become fully familiar with the contents of this manual and relevant manual
supplied by the machine tool builder.

Contents

1. DEFINITION OF WARNING, CAUTION, AND NOTE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . s–2

2. GENERAL WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . s–3

3. WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS RELATED TO PROGRAMMING . . . . . . . . . . . . . s–5

4. WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS RELATED TO HANDLING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . s–7

5. WARNINGS RELATED TO DAILY MAINTENANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . s–9

s–1
 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS B–63002EN/02

1 DEFINITION OF WARNING, CAUTION, AND NOTE

This manual includes safety precautions for protecting the user and preventing damage to the
machine. Precautions are classified into Warning and Caution according to their bearing on safety.
Also, supplementary information is described as a Note. Read the Warning, Caution, and Note
thoroughly before attempting to use the machine.

WARNING

Applied when there is a danger of the user being injured or when there is a danger of both the user
being injured and the equipment being damaged if the approved procedure is not observed.

CAUTION

Applied when there is a danger of the equipment being damaged, if the approved procedure is not
observed.

NOTE

The Note is used to indicate supplementary information other than Warning and Caution.

 Read this manual carefully, and store it in a safe place.

s–2
B–63002EN/02 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

2 GENERAL WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS

WARNING

1. Never attempt to machine a workpiece without first checking the operation of the machine.
Before starting a production run, ensure that the machine is operating correctly by performing
a trial run using, for example, the single block, feedrate override, or machine lock function or
by operating the machine with neither a tool nor workpiece mounted. Failure to confirm the
correct operation of the machine may result in the machine behaving unexpectedly, possibly
causing damage to the workpiece and/or machine itself, or injury to the user.

2. Before operating the machine, thoroughly check the entered data.

Operating the machine with incorrectly specified data may result in the machine behaving
unexpectedly, possibly causing damage to the workpiece and/or machine itself, or injury to the
user.

3. Ensure that the specified feedrate is appropriate for the intended operation. Generally, for each
machine, there is a maximum allowable feedrate. The appropriate feedrate varies with the
intended operation. Refer to the manual provided with the machine to determine the maximum
allowable feedrate. If a machine is run at other than the correct speed, it may behave
unexpectedly, possibly causing damage to the workpiece and/or machine itself, or injury to the
user.

4. When using a tool compensation function, thoroughly check the direction and amount of
compensation.
Operating the machine with incorrectly specified data may result in the machine behaving
unexpectedly, possibly causing damage to the workpiece and/or machine itself, or injury to the
user.

5. The parameters for the CNC and PMC are factory–set. Usually, there is not need to change them.
When, however, there is not alternative other than to change a parameter, ensure that you fully
understand the function of the parameter before making any change.
Failure to set a parameter correctly may result in the machine behaving unexpectedly, possibly
causing damage to the workpiece and/or machine itself, or injury to the user.

6. Immediately after switching on the power, do not touch any of the keys on the MDI panel until
the position display or alarm screen appears on the CNC unit.
Some of the keys on the MDI panel are dedicated to maintenance or other special operations.
Pressing any of these keys may place the CNC unit in other than its normal state. Starting the
machine in this state may cause it to behave unexpectedly.

7. The operator’s manual and programming manual supplied with a CNC unit provide an overall
description of the machine’s functions, including any optional functions. Note that the optional
functions will vary from one machine model to another. Therefore, some functions described
in the manuals may not actually be available for a particular model. Check the specification of
the machine if in doubt.

s–3
 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS B–63002EN/02

WARNING

8. Some functions may have been implemented at the request of the machine–tool builder. When
using such functions, refer to the manual supplied by the machine–tool builder for details of their
use and any related cautions.

NOTE

Programs, parameters, and macro variables are stored in nonvolatile memory in the CNC unit.
Usually, they are retained even if the power is turned off. Such data may be deleted inadvertently,
however, or it may prove necessary to delete all data from nonvolatile memory as part of error
recovery.
To guard against the occurrence of the above, and assure quick restoration of deleted data, backup
all vital data, and keep the backup copy in a safe place.

s–4
B–63002EN/02 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

3 WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS RELATED TO

PROGRAMMING

This section covers the major safety precautions related to programming. Before attempting to
perform programming, read the supplied operator’s manual and programming manual carefully
such that you are fully familiar with their contents.

WARNING

1. Coordinate system setting

If a coordinate system is established incorrectly, the machine may behave unexpectedly as a
result of the program issuing an otherwise valid move command.
Such an unexpected operation may damage the tool, the machine itself, the workpiece, or cause
injury to the user.
2. Positioning by nonlinear interpolation
When performing positioning by nonlinear interpolation (positioning by nonlinear movement
between the start and end points), the tool path must be carefully confirmed before performing
programming.
Positioning involves rapid traverse. If the tool collides with the workpiece, it may damage the
tool, the machine itself, the workpiece, or cause injury to the user.
3. Function involving a rotation axis
When programming polar coordinate interpolation or normal–direction (perpendicular) control,
pay careful attention to the speed of the rotation axis. Incorrect programming may result in the
rotation axis speed becoming excessively high, such that centrifugal force causes the chuck to
lose its grip on the workpiece if the latter is not mounted securely.
Such mishap is likely to damage the tool, the machine itself, the workpiece, or cause injury to
the user.
4. Inch/metric conversion
Switching between inch and metric inputs does not convert the measurement units of data such
as the workpiece origin offset, parameter, and current position. Before starting the machine,
therefore, determine which measurement units are being used. Attempting to perform an
operation with invalid data specified may damage the tool, the machine itself, the workpiece, or
cause injury to the user.
5. Constant surface speed control
When an axis subject to constant surface speed control approaches the origin of the workpiece
coordinate system, the spindle speed may become excessively high. Therefore, it is necessary
to specify a maximum allowable speed. Specifying the maximum allowable speed incorrectly
may damage the tool, the machine itself, the workpiece, or cause injury to the user.

s–5
 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS B–63002EN/02

WARNING

6. Stroke check
After switching on the power, perform a manual reference position return as required. Stroke
check is not possible before manual reference position return is performed. Note that when stroke
check is disabled, an alarm is not issued even if a stroke limit is exceeded, possibly damaging
the tool, the machine itself, the workpiece, or causing injury to the user.
7. Tool post interference check
A tool post interference check is performed based on the tool data specified during automatic
operation. If the tool specification does not match the tool actually being used, the interference
check cannot be made correctly, possibly damaging the tool or the machine itself, or causing
injury to the user.
After switching on the power, or after selecting a tool post manually, always start automatic
operation and specify the tool number of the tool to be used.
8. Absolute/incremental mode
If a program created with absolute values is run in incremental mode, or vice versa, the machine
may behave unexpectedly.
9. Plane selection
If an incorrect plane is specified for circular interpolation, helical interpolation, or a canned cycle,
the machine may behave unexpectedly. Refer to the descriptions of the respective functions for
details.
10. Torque limit skip
Before attempting a torque limit skip, apply the torque limit. If a torque limit skip is specified
without the torque limit actually being applied, a move command will be executed without
performing a skip.
11. Programmable mirror image
Note that programmed operations vary considerably when a programmable mirror image is
enabled.
12. Compensation function
If a command based on the machine coordinate system or a reference position return command
is issued in compensation function mode, compensation is temporarily canceled, resulting in the
unexpected behavior of the machine.
Before issuing any of the above commands, therefore, always cancel compensation function
mode.

s–6
B–63002EN/02 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

4 WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS RELATED TO HANDLING

This section presents safety precautions related to the handling of machine tools. Before attempting
to operate your machine, read the supplied operator’s manual and programming manual carefully,
such that you are fully familiar with their contents.

WARNING

1. Manual operation
When operating the machine manually, determine the current position of the tool and workpiece,
and ensure that the movement axis, direction, and feedrate have been specified correctly.
Incorrect operation of the machine may damage the tool, the machine itself, the workpiece, or
cause injury to the operator.
2. Manual reference position return
After switching on the power, perform manual reference position return as required. If the
machine is operated without first performing manual reference position return, it may behave
unexpectedly. Stroke check is not possible before manual reference position return is performed.
An unexpected operation of the machine may damage the tool, the machine itself, the workpiece,
or cause injury to the user.
3. Manual numeric command
When issuing a manual numeric command, determine the current position of the tool and
workpiece, and ensure that the movement axis, direction, and command have been specified
correctly, and that the entered values are valid.
Attempting to operate the machine with an invalid command specified may damage the tool, the
machine itself, the workpiece, or cause injury to the operator.
4. Manual handle feed
In manual handle feed, rotating the handle with a large scale factor, such as 100, applied causes
the tool and table to move rapidly. Careless handling may damage the tool and/or machine, or
cause injury to the user.
5. Disabled override
If override is disabled (according to the specification in a macro variable) during threading, rigid
tapping, or other tapping, the speed cannot be predicted, possibly damaging the tool, the machine
itself, the workpiece, or causing injury to the operator.
6. Origin/preset operation
Basically, never attempt an origin/preset operation when the machine is operating under the
control of a program. Otherwise, the machine may behave unexpectedly, possibly damaging the
tool, the machine itself, the tool, or causing injury to the user.

s–7
 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS B–63002EN/02

WARNING

7. Workpiece coordinate system shift

Manual intervention, machine lock, or mirror imaging may shift the workpiece coordinate
system. Before attempting to operate the machine under the control of a program, confirm the
coordinate system carefully.
If the machine is operated under the control of a program without making allowances for any shift
in the workpiece coordinate system, the machine may behave unexpectedly, possibly damaging
the tool, the machine itself, the workpiece, or causing injury to the operator.

8. Software operator’s panel and menu switches

Using the software operator’s panel and menu switches, in combination with the MDI panel, it
is possible to specify operations not supported by the machine operator’s panel, such as mode
change, override value change, and jog feed commands.
Note, however, that if the MDI panel keys are operated inadvertently, the machine may behave
unexpectedly, possibly damaging the tool, the machine itself, the workpiece, or causing injury
to the user.

9. Manual intervention

If manual intervention is performed during programmed operation of the machine, the tool path
may vary when the machine is restarted. Before restarting the machine after manual intervention,
therefore, confirm the settings of the manual absolute switches, parameters, and
absolute/incremental command mode.

10. Feed hold, override, and single block

The feed hold, feedrate override, and single block functions can be disabled using custom macro
system variable #3004. Be careful when operating the machine in this case.

11. Dry run

Usually, a dry run is used to confirm the operation of the machine. During a dry run, the machine
operates at dry run speed, which differs from the corresponding programmed feedrate. Note that
the dry run speed may sometimes be higher than the programmed feed rate.

12. Cutter and tool nose radius compensation in MDI mode

Pay careful attention to a tool path specified by a command in MDI mode, because cutter or tool
nose radius compensation is not applied. When a command is entered from the MDI to interrupt
in automatic operation in cutter or tool nose radius compensation mode, pay particular attention
to the tool path when automatic operation is subsequently resumed. Refer to the descriptions of
the corresponding functions for details.

13. Program editing

If the machine is stopped, after which the machining program is edited (modification, insertion,
or deletion), the machine may behave unexpectedly if machining is resumed under the control
of that program. Basically, do not modify, insert, or delete commands from a machining program
while it is in use.

s–8
B–63002EN/02 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

5 WARNINGS RELATED TO DAILY MAINTENANCE

WARNING

1. Memory backup battery replacement

When replacing the memory backup batteries, keep the power to the machine (CNC) turned on,
and apply an emergency stop to the machine. Because this work is performed with the power
on and the cabinet open, only those personnel who have received approved safety and
maintenance training may perform this work.
When replacing the batteries, be careful not to touch the high–voltage circuits (marked and
fitted with an insulating cover).
Touching the uncovered high–voltage circuits presents an extremely dangerous electric shock
hazard.

NOTE

The CNC uses batteries to preserve the contents of its memory, because it must retain data such as
programs, offsets, and parameters even while external power is not applied.
If the battery voltage drops, a low battery voltage alarm is displayed on the machine operator’s panel
or screen.
When a low battery voltage alarm is displayed, replace the batteries within a week. Otherwise, the
contents of the CNC’s memory will be lost.
Refer to the maintenance section of the operator’s manual or programming manual for details of the
battery replacement procedure.

s–9
 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS B–63002EN/02

WARNING

2. Absolute pulse coder battery replacement

When replacing the memory backup batteries, keep the power to the machine (CNC) turned on,
and apply an emergency stop to the machine. Because this work is performed with the power
on and the cabinet open, only those personnel who have received approved safety and
maintenance training may perform this work.
When replacing the batteries, be careful not to touch the high–voltage circuits (marked and
fitted with an insulating cover).
Touching the uncovered high–voltage circuits presents an extremely dangerous electric shock
hazard.

NOTE

The absolute pulse coder uses batteries to preserve its absolute position.
If the battery voltage drops, a low battery voltage alarm is displayed on the machine operator’s panel
or screen.
When a low battery voltage alarm is displayed, replace the batteries within a week. Otherwise, the
absolute position data held by the pulse coder will be lost.
Refer to the maintenance section of the operator’s manual or programming manual for details of the
battery replacement procedure.

s–10
B–63002EN/02 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

WARNING

3. Fuse replacement
For some units, the chapter covering daily maintenance in the operator’s manual or programming
manual describes the fuse replacement procedure.
Before replacing a blown fuse, however, it is necessary to locate and remove the cause of the
blown fuse.
For this reason, only those personnel who have received approved safety and maintenance
training may perform this work.
When replacing a fuse with the cabinet open, be careful not to touch the high–voltage circuits
(marked and fitted with an insulating cover).
Touching an uncovered high–voltage circuit presents an extremely dangerous electric shock
hazard.

s–11
B–63002EN/02 Table of Contents
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . s–1

I. GENERAL
1. GENERAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3

2. LIST OF SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6

II. NC FUNCTION
PREFACE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23

1. CONTROLLED AXES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
1.1 NUMBER OF THE ALL CONTROLLED AXES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
1.2 MACHINE CONTROLLED AXES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
1.2.1 Number of Controlled Paths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
1.2.2 Number of Basic Controlled Axes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
1.2.3 Number of Basic Simultaneously Controlled Axes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
1.2.4 Number of Controlled Axes Expanded (All) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
1.2.5 Number of Simultaneously Controlled Axes Expanded (All) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
1.2.6 Axis Control by PMA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
1.2.7 Cs Contour Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
1.3 LOADER CONTROLLED AXES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
1.4 AXIS NAMES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
1.5 INCREMENT SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
1.5.1 Input Unit (10 Times) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
1.6 MAXIMUM STROKE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29

2. PREPARATORY FUNCTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
2.1 T SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
2.2 M SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34

3. INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
3.1 POSITIONING (G00) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
3.2 SINGLE DIRECTION POSITIONING (G60) (M series) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
3.3 LINEAR INTERPOLATION (G01) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
3.4 CIRCULAR INTERPOLATION (G02, G03) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
3.5 HELICAL INTERPOLATION (G02, G03) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
3.6 HELICAL INTERPOLATION B (G02, G03) (M series) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
3.7 POLAR COORDINATE INTERPOLATION (G12.1, G13.1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
3.8 CYLINDRICAL INTERPOLATION (G07.1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
3.9 INVOLUTE INTERPOLATION (G02.2, G03.2) (M series) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50

c–1
TABLE OF CONTENTS B–63002EN/02

3.10 EXPONENTIAL FUNCTION INTERPOLATION (G02.3, G03.3) (M series) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51

3.11 SMOOTH INTERPOLATION (G05.1) (M series) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
3.12 HYPOTHETICAL AXIS INTERPOLATION (G07) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
3.13 SPIRAL INTERPOLATION, CONICAL INTERPOLATION (M series) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
3.14 NURBS INTERPOLATION (G06.2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57

4. THREAD CUTTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
4.1 EQUAL LEAD THREAD CUTTING (G33) (WITH G CODE SYSTEM A: G32) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
4.2 MULTIPLE–THREAD CUTTING (G33) (T series) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
4.3 VARIABLE LEAD THREAD CUTTING (G34) (T series) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
4.4 CONTINUOUS THREAD CUTTING (T series) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
4.5 CIRCULAR THREADING (G35, G36) (T series) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62

5. FEED FUNCTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
5.1 RAPID TRAVERSE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
5.2 CUTTING FEED RATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
5.2.1 Tangential Speed Constant Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
5.2.2 Cutting Feed Rate Clamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
5.2.3 Per Minute Feed (G94) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
5.2.4 Per Revolution Feed (G95) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
5.2.5 Inverse Time Feed (G93) (M series) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
5.2.6 F1–digit Feed (M series) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
5.3 OVERRIDE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
5.3.1 Feed Rate Override . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
5.3.2 Second Feed Rate Override . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
5.3.3 Rapid Traverse Override . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
5.3.4 Override Cancel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
5.3.5 Jog Override . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
5.4 AUTOMATIC ACCELERATION/DECELERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
5.5 RAPID TRAVERSE BELL–SHAPED ACCELERATION/DECELERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
5.6 LINEAR ACCELERATION/DECELERATION AFTER CUTTING FEED INTERPOLATION . . . 70
5.7 BELL–SHAPED ACCELERATION/DECELERATION
AFTER CUTTING FEED INTERPOLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
5.8 LINEAR ACCELERATION/DECELERATION BEFORE CUTTING FEED INTERPOLATION . . 72
5.9 ERROR DETECTION (T series) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
5.10 EXACT STOP (G09) (M series) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
5.11 EXACT STOP MODE (G61) (M series) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
5.12 CUTTING MODE (G64) (M series) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
5.13 TAPPING MODE (G63) (M series) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
5.14 AUTOMATIC CORNER OVERRIDE (G62) (M series) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
5.15 DWELL (G04) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
5.16 POSITIONING BY OPTIMUM ACCELERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75

6. REFERENCE POSITION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
6.1 MANUAL REFERENCE POSITION RETURN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
6.2 SETTING THE REFERENCE POSITION WITHOUT DOGS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
6.3 AUTOMATIC REFERENCE POSITION RETURN (G28, G29(ONLY FOR M SERIES )) . . . . . . . 78

c–2
B–63002EN/02 TABLE OF CONTENTS

6.4 REFERENCE POSITION RETURN CHECK (G27) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79

6.5 2ND, 3RD AND 4TH REFERENCE POSITION RETURN (G30) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
6.6 FLOATING REFERENCE POSITION RETURN (G30.1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
6.7 REFERENCE POSITION SHIFT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
6.8 BUTT–TYPE REFERENCE POSITION SETTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
6.9 LINEAR SCALE WITH ABSOLUTE ADDRESSING REFERENCE MARKS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82

7. COORDINATE SYSTEMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
7.1 MACHINE COORDINATE SYSTEM (G53) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
7.2 WORKPIECE COORDINATE SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
7.2.1 Setting a Workpiece Coordinate System (Using G92) (with G Code System A: G50) . . . . . . 85
7.2.2 Automatic Coordinate System Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
7.2.3 Setting a Workpiece Coordinate System (Using G54 to G59) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
7.3 LOCAL COORDINATE SYSTEM (G52) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
7.4 WORKPIECE ORIGIN OFFSET VALUE CHANGE
(PROGRAMMABLE DATA INPUT) (G10) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
7.5 ADDITIONAL WORKPIECE COORDINATE SYSTEMS (G54.1 OR G54) (M series) . . . . . . . . . 91
7.6 WORKPIECE COORDINATE SYSTEM PRESET (G92.1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
7.7 WORKPIECE COORDINATE SYSTEM SHIFT (T series) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
7.8 PLANE SELECTION (G17, G18, G19) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94

8. COORDINATE VALUE AND DIMENSION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95

8.1 ABSOLUTE AND INCREMENTAL PROGRAMMING (G90, G91) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
8.2 POLAR COORDINATE COMMAND (G15, G16) (M series) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
8.3 INCH/METRIC CONVERSION (G20, G21) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
8.4 DECIMAL POINT INPUT/POCKET CALCULATOR TYPE DECIMAL POINT INPUT . . . . . . . 98
8.5 DIAMETER AND RADIUS PROGRAMMING (T series) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
8.6 LINEAR AXIS AND ROTATION AXIS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
8.7 ROTATION AXIS ROLL-OVER FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99

9. SPINDLE FUNCTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100

9.1 S CODE OUTPUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
9.2 SPINDLE SPEED ANALOG OUTPUT (S ANALOG OUTPUT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
9.3 SPINDLE SPEED SERIAL OUTPUT (S SERIAL OUTPUT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
9.4 SPINDLE OUTPUT CONTROL BY THE PMC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
9.5 CONSTANT SURFACE SPEED CONTROL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
9.6 SPINDLE OVERRIDE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
9.7 ACTUAL SPINDLE SPEED OUTPUT (T series) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
9.8 SPINDLE POSITIONING (T series) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
9.9 SPINDLE SPEED FLUCTUATION DETECTION (G25, G26) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
9.10 CS CONTOUR CONTROL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
9.11 MULTI–SPINDLE CONTROL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
9.12 SPINDLE SYNCHRONIZATION CONTROL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
9.13 SPINDLE ORIENTATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
9.14 SPINDLE OUTPUT SWITCHING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
9.15 THREE–SPINDLE SERIAL OUTPUT (ONLY FOR SINGLE–PATH CONTROL) . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
9.16 SIMPLE SPINDLE SYNCHRONOUS CONTROL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108

c–3
TABLE OF CONTENTS B–63002EN/02

10. TOOL FUNCTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109

10.1 T CODE OUTPUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
10.2 TOOL LIFE MANAGEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
10.2.1 Tool Life Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
10.2.2 Addition of Tool Pairs for Tool Life Management
<512 Pairs (M series) / 128 Pairs (T series)> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
10.2.3 Extended Tool Life Management (M series) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112

11. MISCELLANEOUS FUNCTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113

11.1 MISCELLANEOUS FUNCTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
11.2 1–BLOCK PLURAL M COMMAND . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
11.3 SECOND MISCELLANEOUS FUNCTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
11.4 HIGH-SPEED M/S/T/B INTERFACE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
11.5 M CODE GROUP CHECK FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116

12. PROGRAM CONFIGURATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117

12.1 PROGRAM NUMBER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
12.2 PROGRAM NAME . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
12.3 MAIN PROGRAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
12.4 SUB PROGRAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
12.5 EXTERNAL MEMORY AND SUB PROGRAM CALLING FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
12.6 SEQUENCE NUMBER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
12.7 TAPE CODES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
12.8 BASIC ADDRESSES AND COMMAND VALUE RANGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
12.9 TAPE FORMAT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
12.10 LABEL SKIP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
12.11 CONTROL-IN/CONTROL-OUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
12.12 OPTIONAL BLOCK SKIP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
12.13 ADDITIONAL OPTIONAL BLOCK SKIP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
12.14 TAPE HORIZONTAL (TH) PARITY CHECK AND
TAPE VERTICAL (TV) PARITY CHECK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123

13. FUNCTIONS TO SIMPLIFY PROGRAMMING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124

13.1 CANNED CYCLES (G73, G74, G76, G80-G89, G98, G99) (M series) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
13.2 RIGID TAP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
13.3 EXTERNAL OPERATION FUNCTION (G81) (M series) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
13.4 CANNED CYCLES FOR TURNING (T series) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
13.4.1 Cutting Cycle A (G77) (with G Code System A: G90) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
13.4.2 Thread Cutting Cycle (G78) (with G Code System A: G92) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
13.4.3 Turning Cycle in Facing (G79) (with G Code System A: G94) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
13.5 MULTIPLE REPETITIVE CYCLES FOR TURNING (G70 - G76) (T series) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
13.5.1 Stock Removal in Turning (G71) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
13.5.2 Stock Removal in Facing (G72) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
13.5.3 Pattern Repeating (G73) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
13.5.4 Finishing Cycle (G70) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
13.5.5 Peck Drilling in Z-axis (G74) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
13.5.6 Grooving in X-axis (G75) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
13.5.7 Thread Cutting Cycle (G76) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147

c–4
B–63002EN/02 TABLE OF CONTENTS

13.6 CANNED CYCLES FOR DRILLING (G80 - G89) (T series) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149

13.7 CHAMFERING AND CORNER R (T series) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
13.8 OPTIONAL ANGLE CHAMFERING/CORNER ROUNDING (M series) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
13.9 DIRECT DRAWING DIMENSIONS PROGRAMMING (T series) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
13.10 PROGRAMMABLE MIRROR IMAGE (G50.1, G51.1) (M series) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
13.11 MIRROR IMAGE FOR DOUBLE TURRETS (G68, G69) (T series) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
13.12 INDEX TABLE INDEXING (M series) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
13.13 CANNED CYCLES FOR CYLINDRICAL GRINDING (T series) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
13.13.1 Traverse Grinding Cycle (G71) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
13.13.2 Traverse Direct Gauge Grinding Cycle (G72) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
13.13.3 Oscillation Grinding Cycle (G73) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
13.13.4 Oscillation Direct Gauge Grinding Cycle (G74) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
13.14 SURFACE GRINDING CANNED CYCLE (M series) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
13.14.1 Plunge Grinding Cycle (G75) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
13.14.2 Plunge Direct Grinding Cycle (G77) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
13.14.3 Continuous Feed Plane Grinding Cycle (G78) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
13.14.4 Intermittent Feed Plane Grinding Cycle (G79) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
13.15 INFEED CONTROL (M series) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
13.16 FIGURE COPYING (G72.1, G72.2) (M series) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
13.16.1 Rotation Copy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
13.16.2 Linear Copy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172

14. TOOL COMPENSATION FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173

14.1 TOOL OFFSET (T series) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
14.1.1 Tool Offset (T Code) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
14.1.2 Tool Geometry Compensation and Tool Wear Compensation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
14.1.3 Y Axis Offset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
14.2 TOOL NOSE RADIUS COMPENSATION (G40, G41, G42) (T series) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
14.3 CORNER CIRCULAR INTERPOLATION FUNCTION (G39) (T series) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
14.4 TOOL LENGTH COMPENSATION (G43, G44, G49) (M series) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
14.5 TOOL OFFSET (G45, G46, G47, G48) (M series) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
14.6 CUTTER COMPENSATION (M series) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
14.6.1 Cutter Compensation B (G40 - 42) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
14.6.2 Cutter Compensation C (G40 - G42) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
14.7 CORNER CIRCULAR INTERPOLATION FUNCTION (G39) (M series) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
14.8 TOOL COMPENSATION MEMORY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
14.8.1 Tool Compensation Memory (M series) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
14.8.2 Tool Offset Amount Memory (T series) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
14.9 NUMBER OF TOOL OFFSETS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
14.9.1 Number of Tool Offsets (M Series) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
14.9.2 Number of Tool Offsets (T Series) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
14.10 CHANGING OF TOOL OFFSET AMOUNT (PROGRAMMABLE DATA INPUT) (G10) . . . . . . 188
14.11 GRINDING-WHEEL WEAR COMPENSATION BY CONTINUOUS DRESSING (M series) . . . 190
14.12 THREE–DIMENSIONAL TOOL COMPENSATION (G40, G41) (M series) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
14.13 GRINDING WHEEL WEAR COMPENSATION (G40, G41) (T seriesS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192

c–5
TABLE OF CONTENTS B–63002EN/02

15. ACCURACY COMPENSATION FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193

15.1 STORED PITCH ERROR COMPENSATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
15.2 STRAIGHTNESS COMPENSATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
15.3 BACKLASH COMPENSATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
15.4 BACKLASH COMPENSATION SPECIFIC TO RAPID TRAVERSE AND CUTTING FEED . . . 195
15.5 PROGRAMMABLE PARAMETER ENTRY (G10, G11) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196

16. COORDINATE SYSTEM CONVERSION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197

16.1 COORDINATE SYSTEM ROTATION (G68, G69) – (M SERIES)
(G68.1, G69.1) – (T SERIES) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
16.2 SCALING (G50, G51) (M series) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
16.3 THREE–DIMENSIONAL COORDINATE CONVERSION (G68, G69) (M series) . . . . . . . . . . . . 201

17. MEASUREMENT FUNCTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202

17.1 SKIP FUNCTION (G31) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
17.2 MULTI-STEP SKIP FUNCTION (G31 P1 - G31 P4) (T series) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
17.3 HIGH-SPEED SKIP SIGNAL INPUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
17.4 TORQUE LIMIT SKIP (G31 P99, G31 P98) (T series) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
17.5 CONTINUOUS HIGH–SPEED SKIP FUNCTION (G31, P90) (M series) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
17.6 TOOL LENGTH AUTOMATIC MEASUREMENT (G37) (M series) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
17.7 AUTOMATIC TOOL OFFSET (G37, G36) (T series) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
17.8 TOOL LENGTH MEASUREMENT (M series) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
17.9 DIRECT INPUT OF TOOL COMPENSATION MEASURED VALUE/DIRECT INPUT OF
WORKPIECE COORDINATE SYSTEM SHIFT AMOUNT (T series) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
17.10 TOOL COMPENSATION VALUE MEASURED VALUE DIRECT INPUT B (T series) . . . . . . . 209
17.11 COUNT INPUT OF TOOL OFFSET VALUES (T series) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
17.12 DIRECT INPUT OF WORKPIECE ZERO POINT OFFSET VALUE MEASURED . . . . . . . . . . . 212
17.13 TOOL LENGTH/WORKPIECE ORIGIN MEASUREMENT B (M series) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212

18. CUSTOM MACRO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213

18.1 CUSTOM MACRO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
18.2 INCREASED CUSTOM MACRO COMMON VARIABLES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
18.3 INTERRUPTION TYPE CUSTOM MACRO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
18.4 PATTERN DATA INPUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
18.5 MACRO EXECUTER FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
18.6 C LANGUAGE EXECUTER FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223

19. SERIES 15 TAPE FORMAT/SERIES 10/11 TAPE FORMAT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224

19.1 SERIES 15 TAPE FORMAT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
19.2 SERIES–10/11 TAPE FORMAT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225

20. FUNCTIONS FOR HIGH SPEED CUTTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226

20.1 HIGH-SPEED CYCLE MACHINING (ONLY AT 1–PATH CONTROL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
20.2 AUTOMATIC CORNER DECELERATION (M series) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
20.3 FEEDRATE CLAMP BY CIRCULAR RADIUS (M series) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229

c–6
B–63002EN/02 TABLE OF CONTENTS

20.4 LOOK–AHEAD CONTROL (G08) (M series) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230

20.5 REMOTE BUFFER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
20.5.1 Remote Buffer (Only at 1–path Control) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
20.5.2 High–speed Remote Buffer A (G05) (Only at 1–path Control) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
20.5.3 High–speed Remote Buffer B (G05) (At 1–path Control) (M series) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
20.6 HIGH–PRECISION CONTOUR CONTROL (ONLY FOR ONE SYSTEM) (M series) . . . . . . . . . 235
20.6.1 Acceleration/Decelera–tion Before Interpolation by Pre-reading Multiple Blocks . . . . . . . . . 235
20.6.2 Automatic Velocity Control Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
20.7 SIMPLE HIGH–PRECISION CONTOUR CONTROL (G05.1) (M series) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
20.8 HIGH–SPEED LINEAR INTERPOLATION (G05) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237

21. AXES CONTROL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238

21.1 FOLLOW UP FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
21.2 MECHANICAL HANDLE FEED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
21.3 SERVO OFF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
21.4 MIRROR IMAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
21.5 CONTROL AXIS DETACH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
21.6 SIMPLE SYNCHRONOUS CONTROL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
21.7 SYNCHRONIZATION CONTROL (ONLY AT 1–PATH CONTROL) (T series) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
21.8 FEED STOP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
21.9 NORMAL DIRECTION CONTROL (G40.1,G41.1,G42.1) (M series) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
21.10 POLYGONAL TURNING (G50.2, G51.2) (T series) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
21.11 POLYGONAL TURNING WITH TWO SPINDLES (T series) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
21.12 AXIS CONTROL WITH PMC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
21.13 SLANTED AXIS CONTROL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
21.14 ARBITRARY AXIS ANGULAR AXIS CONTROL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
21.15 B–AXIS CONTROL (T series) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
21.16 TANDEM CONTROL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
21.17 CHOPPING FUNCTION (G80, G81.1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
21.18 HOBBING MACHINE FUNCTION (G80, G81) (M series) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
21.19 SIMPLE ELECTRIC GEAR BOX (G80, G81) (M series) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252

22. FUNCTIONS SPECIFIC TO 2–PATH CONTROL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253

22.1 WAITING FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
22.2 PATH INTERFERENCE CHECK (T series) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
22.3 BALANCE CUT (G68, G69) (T series) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
22.4 MEMORY COMMON TO PATHS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
22.5 SYNCHRONIZATION/MIX CONTROL (T series) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
22.6 COPYING A PROGRAM BETWEEN TWO PATHS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261

23. MANUAL OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262

23.1 MANUAL FEED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
23.2 INCREMENTAL FEED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
23.3 MANUAL HANDLE FEED (1ST) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
23.4 MANUAL HANDLE FEED (2ND, 3RD) (T SERIES: 2ND) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
23.5 HANDLE FEED IN THE SAME MODE AS FOR JOGGING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264

c–7
TABLE OF CONTENTS B–63002EN/02

23.6 MANUAL PER-ROTATION FEED (T series) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264

23.7 MANUAL ABSOLUTE ON/OFF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
23.8 TOOL AXIS DIRECTION HANDLE FEED AND TOOL AXISDIRECTION
HANDLE FEED B (FOR M SERIES) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
23.8.1 Tool Axis Direction Handle Feed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
23.8.2 Tool Axis Normal Direction Handle Feed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
23.9 MANUAL LINEAR/CIRCULAR INTERPOLATION (ONLY FOR ONE PATH) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
23.10 MANUAL RIGID TAPPING (M series) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
23.11 MANUAL NUMERIC COMMAND . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267

24. AUTOMATIC OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268

24.1 OPERATION MODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
24.1.1 DNC Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
24.1.2 Memory Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
24.1.3 MDI Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
24.2 SELECTION OF EXECUTION PROGRAMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
24.2.1 Program Number Search . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
24.2.2 Sequence Number Search . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
24.2.3 Rewind . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
24.2.4 External Workpiece Number Search . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
24.3 ACTIVATION OF AUTOMATIC OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
24.3.1 Cycle Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
24.4 EXECUTION OF AUTOMATIC OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
24.4.1 Buffer Register . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
24.5 AUTOMATIC OPERATION STOP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
24.5.1 Program Stop (M00, M01) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
24.5.2 Program End (M02, M30) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
24.5.3 Sequence Number Comparison and Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
24.5.4 Feed Hold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
24.5.5 Thread Cutting Cycle Retract (T series) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
24.5.6 Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
24.6 RESTART OF AUTOMATIC OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
24.6.1 Program Restart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
24.6.2 Tool Retract & Recover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
24.6.3 Manual Intervention and Return . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
24.7 MANUAL INTERRUPTION DURING AUTOMATIC OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
24.7.1 Handle Interruption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
24.8 SCHEDULING FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276
24.9 SIMULTANEOUS INPUT AND OUTPUT OPERATIONS
(AT 1–PATH CONTROL) (M series) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277
24.10 RETRACE FUNCTION (M series) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277
24.11 RIGID TAPPING RETURN (M series) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277

25. PROGRAM TEST FUNCTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278

25.1 ALL-AXES MACHINE LOCK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
25.2 MACHINE LOCK ON EACH AXIS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
25.3 AUXILIARY FUNCTION LOCK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
25.4 DRY RUN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
25.5 SINGLE BLOCK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279

c–8
B–63002EN/02 TABLE OF CONTENTS

26. SETTING AND DISPLAY UNIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280

26.1 SETTING AND DISPLAY UNIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
26.1.1 CNC Control Unit with 7.2″/8.4″ LCD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
26.1.2 CNC Control Unit with 9.5″/10.4″ LCD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
26.1.3 Separate–Type Small MDI Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283
26.1.4 Separate–Type Standard MDI Unit (Horizontal Type) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
26.1.5 Separate–Type Standard MDI Unit (Vertical Type) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285
26.1.6 Separate–Type FA Full Keyboard (Vertical Type) (for 160i/180i/210i) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286
26.2 EXPLANATION OF THE KEYBOARD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287
26.2.1 Explanation of the Function Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288
26.2.2 Explanation of the Soft Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289

27. DISPLAYING AND SETTING DATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290

27.1 DISPLAY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291
27.2 LANGUAGE SELECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
27.3 CLOCK FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
27.4 RUN TIME & PARTS NUMBER DISPLAY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
27.5 SOFTWARE OPERATOR’S PANEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295
27.6 DIRECTORY DISPLAY OF FLOPPY CASSETTE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297
27.7 GRAPHIC DISPLAY FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298
27.7.1 Graphic Display Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298
27.7.2 Dynamic Graphic Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299
27.7.3 Background Drawing (M series) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305
27.8 SERVO WAVEFORM FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306
27.9 SCREENS FOR SERVO DATA AND SPINDLE DATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
27.9.1 Servo Setting Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
27.9.2 Servo Adjustment Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
27.9.3 Spindle Setting Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308
27.9.4 Spindle Adjustment Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308
27.9.5 Spindle Monitor Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309
27.10 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION DISPLAY FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310
27.11 HELP FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312
27.12 DATA PROTECTION KEY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314
27.13 DISPLAYING OPERATION HISTORY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314
27.14 MACHINING TIME STAMP FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314
27.15 REMOTE DIAGNOSIS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315
27.16 DIRECTORY DISPLAY AND PUNCH FOR A SPECIFIED GROUP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317
27.17 CLEARING THE SCREEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317
27.18 PERIODIC MAINTENANCE SCREEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318
27.19 TOUCH PAD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318
27.20 MAINTENANCE INFORMATION SCREEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318
27.21 COLOR SETTING SCREEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319
27.22 CONTRAST ADJUSTMENT SCREEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319

c–9
TABLE OF CONTENTS B–63002EN/02

28. PART PROGRAM STORAGE AND EDITING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320

28.1 FOREGROUND EDITING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
28.2 BACKGROUND EDITING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
28.3 EXPANDED PART PROGRAM EDITING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322
28.4 NUMBER OF REGISTERED PROGRAMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322
28.5 PART PROGRAM STORAGE LENGTH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322
28.6 PLAY BACK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322
28.7 EXTERNAL CONTROL OF I/O DEVICE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322
28.8 CONVERSATIONAL PROGRAMMING OF FIGURES (ONLY AT 1–PATH CONTROL) . . . . . 323
28.9 PASSWORD FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323

29. DIAGNOSIS FUNCTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324

29.1 SELF DIAGNOSIS FUNCTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325

30. DATA INPUT/OUTPUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326

30.1 READER/PUNCH INTERFACES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327
30.2 INPUT/OUTPUT DEVICES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328
30.2.1 FANUC Floppy Cassette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328
30.2.2 FANUC Program File Mate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328
30.2.3 FANUC Handy File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328
30.3 EXTERNAL PROGRAM INPUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328
30.4 DATA INPUT/OUTPUT USING A MEMORY CARD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329
30.5 DNC1 CONTROL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330
30.6 DNC2 CONTROL (ONLY AT 1–PATH CONTROL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331
30.7 DATA SERVER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332
30.8 DATA INPUT/OUTPUT FUNCTION BASED ON THE I/O LINK AND
DATA INPUT/OUTPUT FUNCTION B BASED ON THE I/O LINK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333
30.9 POWER MOTION MANAGER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334

31. SAFETY FUNCTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335

31.1 EMERGENCY STOP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336
31.2 OVERTRAVEL FUNCTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338
31.2.1 Overtravel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338
31.2.2 Stored Stroke Check 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338
31.2.3 Stored Stroke Check 2 (G22, G23) (M series) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338
31.2.4 Stored Stroke Checks 3 (M series) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339
31.2.5 Stored Stroke Checks 2 and 3 (T series) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339
31.2.6 Stroke Limit Check Before Movement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340
31.2.7 Externally Setting the Stroke Limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341
31.2.8 Chuck/Tail Stock Barrier (T series) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342
31.3 INTERLOCK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344
31.3.1 Interlock per Axis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344
31.3.2 All Axes Interlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344
31.3.3 Interlock for Each Axis Direction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344
31.3.4 Start Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344
31.4 EXTERNAL DECELERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345
31.5 ABNORMAL LOAD DETECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345
31.6 SERVO/SPINDLE MOTOR SPEED DETECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345

c–10
B–63002EN/02 TABLE OF CONTENTS

32. STATUS OUTPUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346

32.1 NC READY SIGNAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347
32.2 SERVO READY SIGNAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347
32.3 REWINDING SIGNAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347
32.4 ALARM SIGNAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347
32.5 DISTRIBUTION END SIGNAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347
32.6 AUTOMATIC OPERATION SIGNAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347
32.7 AUTOMATIC OPERATION START SIGNAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347
32.8 FEED HOLD SIGNAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347
32.9 RESET SIGNAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347
32.10 IN–POSITION SIGNAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347
32.11 MOVE SIGNAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347
32.12 AXIS MOVE DIRECTION SIGNAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348
32.13 RAPID TRAVERSING SIGNAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348
32.14 TAPPING SIGNAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348
32.15 THREAD CUTTING SIGNAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348
32.16 CONSTANT SURFACE SPEED CONTROL SIGNAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348
32.17 INCH INPUT SIGNAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348
32.18 DI STATUS OUTPUT SIGNAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348
32.19 POSITION SWITCH FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348

33. EXTERNAL DATA INPUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349

33.1 EXTERNAL TOOL COMPENSATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350
33.2 EXTERNAL PROGRAM NUMBER SEARCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350
33.3 EXTERNAL WORKPIECE COORDINATE SYSTEM SHIFT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350
33.4 EXTERNAL MACHINE ZERO POINT SHIFT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350
33.5 EXTERNAL ALARM MESSAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350
33.6 EXTERNAL OPERATOR’S MESSAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351
33.7 SUBSTITUTION OF THE NUMBER OF REQUIRED PARTS AND
NUMBER OF MACHINED PARTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351

34. KEY INPUT FROM PMC (EXTERNAL KEY INPUT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352

35. PERSONAL COMPUTER FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353

35.1 BUILT–IN PERSONAL COMPUTER FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354
35.2 HIGH–SPEED SERIAL BUS (HSSB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356

III. AUTOMATIC PROGRAMMING FUNCTION

1. OUTLINE OF CONVERSATIONAL AUTOMATIC PROGRAMMING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359

2. CONVERSATIONAL AUTOMATIC PROGRAMMING FUNCTION FOR LATHES . . 360

2.1 Symbol CAPi T . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361
2.1.1 Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361
2.1.2 Applicable Machines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361
2.1.3 Outline of the Conversational Automatic Programming Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362

c–11
TABLE OF CONTENTS B–63002EN/02

2.2 SUPER CAPi T . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368

2.2.1 Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368
2.2.2 Applicable Machines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368
2.2.3 Outline of the Conversational Automatic Programming Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369
2.3 SYMBOLIC CAP T . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375
2.3.1 Features of Symbolic CAP T . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375
2.3.2 Applicable Machines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375
2.3.3 Conversational Automatic Programming Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 376
2.4 MANUAL GUIDE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381
2.4.1 Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381
2.4.2 Supported Machine Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 383
2.4.3 Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384
2.4.4 Display Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385

3. CONVERSATIONAL AUTOMATIC PROGRAMMING FUNCTION

FOR MACHINING CENTERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388
3.1 Super CAPi M . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389
3.2 OUTLINE OF THE MACRO LIBRARY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390
3.3 OUTLINE OF THE CONVERSATIONAL AUTOMATIC PROGRAMMING FUNCTION . . . . . 392
3.4 OTHER OPTIONAL FUNCTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 395

IV. HAND CNC (Series 20i)

1. OUTLINE OF HAND CNC (Series 20i) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 401

2. LIST OF SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 402

3. MACHINING GUIDANCE FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 420

4. GUIDANCE PROGRAMMING FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 424

APPENDIX
A. RANGE OF COMMAND VALUE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 429
A.1 T SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 430
A.2 M SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 433

B. FUNCTIONS AND TAPE FORMAT LIST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 436

B.1 T SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 437
B.2 M SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 442

C. LIST OF TAPE CODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 448

D. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS BASIC UNIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 451

E. PRINT BOARD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 454

F. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS MDI UNIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 468

G. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF EACH UNIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 478

c–12
I. GENERAL
B–63002EN/02 GENERAL 1. GENERAL

1 GENERAL

The FANUC Series 16i, 160i, 18i, 180i, 21i, and 210i are super–compact
ultra–thin CNC models with built–in liquid crystal displays. Each CNC
unit is a mere 60 mm deep and features, immediately behind the liquid
crystal display, a small CNC printed circuit board developed by utilizing
state–of–the–art LSI and surface–mount technologies.
Super–compact ultra–thin open CNC models are also available. The
CNC printed circuit board incorporates PC functions that are fully
compatible with the IBM PC(*).
The amount of cabling in the electrical unit of the machine can be
significantly reduced by using a high–speed serial servo bus, which
connects the CNC control unit and multiple servo amplifiers by a single
optical fiber cable. Another innovation which simplifies the electrical
unit of the machine tool is the use of compact distributed I/O modules,
which can be separately mounted on the machine operator’s panel and
control panel.
* IBM PC is a registered trademark of International Business
Machines Corporation.

This manual describes the following models and may use the following
abbreviations.
Model name Abbreviation

FANUC Series 16i–TA Series 16i–TA

Series 16i
FANUC Series 16i–MA Series 16i–MA

FANUC Series 160i–TA Series 160i–TA

Series 160i
FANUC Series 160i–MA Series 160i–MA

FANUC Series 18i–TA Series 18i–TA

Series 18i
FANUC Series 18i–MA Series 18i–MA

FANUC Series 180i–TA Series 180i–TA

Series 180i
FANUC Series 180i–MA Series 180i–MA

FANUC Series 21i–TA Series 21i–TA

Series 21i
FANUC Series 21i–MA Series 21i–MA

FANUC Series 210i–TA Series 210i–TA

Series 210i
FANUC Series 210i–MA Series 210i–MA

3
1. GENERAL GENERAL B–63002EN/02

Model name Abbreviation

FANUC Series 20i–TA Series 20i–TA

Series 20i
FANUC Series 20i–FA Series 20i–FA

For ease of understanding, the models may be categorized as follows:

T series: 16i–TA, 160i–TA, 18i–TA, 180i–TA, 21i–TA, 210i–TA
M series: 16i–MA, 160i–MA, 18i–MA, 180i–MA, 21i–MA, 210i–MA
F series: 20i–FA (Refer to M series)

Related manuals The following table lists the manuals related to the FANUC Series 16i,
160i, 18i, and 180i. This manual is indicated by an asterisk(*).

Table 1(a) Manuals Related to the Series 16i, 160i, 18i, and 180i
Specification
Manual name
number
Descriptions B–63002EN *

Connection Manual (Hardware) B–63003EN

Connection Manual (Function) B–63003EN–1

Operator’s Manual (for Lathe) B–63004EN

Operator’s Manual (for Machining Center) B–63014EN

Maintenance Manual B–63005EN

Parameter Manual B–63010EN

Macro Compiler/Macro Executor, Programming Manual B–61803E–1

FAPT Macro Compiler (for PCs), Programming Manual B–66102E

FANUC Super CAPi T Operator’s Manual B–63284EN

FANUC Super CAPi M Operator’s Manual B–62194EN

FANUC Super CAP M Programming Manual B–62153E

Graphic Conversation II for Lathe Operator’s Manual B–61804E–2

FANUC Symbolic CAP T Basic Module V1 Operator’s

B–62824EN
Manual

FANUC Symbolic CAP T C/Y–Axis Module V1 Operator’s

B–62824EN–1
Manual

4
B–63002EN/02 GENERAL 1. GENERAL

The following table lists the manuals related to the FANUC Series 21i and
210i. This manual is indicated by an asterisk (*).
Table 1(b) Manuals Related to the Series 21i and 210i
Specification
Manual name
number
Descriptions B–63002EN *

Connection Manual (Hardware) B–63083EN

Connection Manual (Function) B–63003EN–1

Operator’s Manual (for Lathe) B–63084EN

Operator’s Manual (for Machining Center) B–63094EN

Maintenance Manual B–63085EN

Parameter Manual B–63090EN

Macro Compiler/Macro Executor Programming Manual B–61803E–1

FAPT Macro Compiler (for PCs) Programming Manual B–66102E

The following table lists the manuals related to the FANUC Series 20i–A.
This manual is indicated by an asterisk (*).
Table 1(c) Manuals Related to the Series 20i
Specification
Manual name
number
Descriptions B–63002EN *

Connection Manual (Hardware) B–63003EN

Connection Manual (Function) B–63003EN–1

Operator’s Manual (for Lathe) B–63374EN

Operator’s Manual (for Milling) B–63384EN

Maintenance Manual B–63005EN

Parameter Manual B–63380EN

Programming Manual (Macro Compiler/Macro Executor) B–61803E–1

Manuals related to the

–series servo motor Manual related to the –series control motor
Specification
Manual name
number
FANUC AC Servo Motor  series Descriptions B–65142E

FANUC AC Servo Motor  series Parameter Manual B–65150E

FANUC AC Spindle Motor  series Descriptions B–65152E

FANUC AC Spindle Motor  series Parameter Manual B–65160E

FANUC Servo Motor Amplifier  series Descriptions B–65162E

FANUC Servo Motor  series Maintenance Manual B–65165E

5
2. LIST OF SPECIFICATIONS GENERAL B–63002EN/02

2 LIST OF SPECIFICATIONS

NOTE
For details on Series 20i specifications, see Chapter IV.

 : Standard  : Standard option  : Option

: Function included in another option

Note) The use of some combinations of options is restricted.

Series 16i Series 18i Series 21i

Item Specifications Series 160i Series 180i Series 210i
MA TA MA TA MA TA
Axis control
Up to 12 axes
((8 machine axes)
(1 path)   — — — —
+ (4 loader axes))
Up to 18 axes
((7 machine axes)
(2 paths)   — — — —
+ (4 loader axes))
Totall controlled
T ll d axes Up to 10 axes
(Machine–controlled axes plus loader– ((6 machine axes)
(1 path) — —   — —
controlled axes) + (4 loader axes))
(Machine controlled axes including Cs–
(Machine–controlled Cs
axis)
Up to 14 axes
((5 machine axes)
(2 paths) — — —  — —
+ (4 loader axes))
Up to 4 axes (4 machine axes) — — — —  
Up to 8 axes
((4 machine axes) + — — — — — 
(4 loader axes))
1–path      
Controlled paths
2–path   —  — —
2 axes —  —  — 
Controlled axes per path
3 axes  —  —  —
Machine–controlled axes

Simultaneously controlled
2 axes      
axes per path
Up to 8 axes (single–path sys-
  — — — —
tem) (including Cs–axis)
Up to 7 axes (2–path system)
  — — — —
((6 feed axes) + (Cs–axis))
Controlled axis expansion Up to 6 axes (single–path sys-
— —   — —
(total) tem) (including Cs–axis)
Up to 5 axes (2–path system)
— — —  — —
((4 feed axes) + (Cs–axis))
Up to 4 axes (single–path sys-
— — — —  
tem) (including Cs–axis)

6
B–63002EN/02 GENERAL 2. LIST OF SPECIFICATIONS

Series 16i Series 18i Series 21i

Item Specifications Series 160i Series 180i Series 210i
MA TA MA TA MA TA
Simultaneously controlled axis Up to 6 axes   — — — —
Machine–controlled

expansion (total) Up to 4 axes — —    

Up to 4 axes simultaneously
axes

Axis control by PMC for each path (not supported      

for the Cs–axis)
1 axis per path  —  —  
Cs contour control
2 axes per path —  —  — —
Controlled paths 1–path     — 
Controlled axes Up to 4 axes     — 
Simultaneously controlled
Up to 4 axes     — 
axes
Axis control by PMC Up to 4 axes     — 
3 basic axes: X, Y, Z; Addi-
tional axes: U, V, W, A, B, or  —  —  —
C
With G code system A
Axis name 2 basic axes: X, Z; Additional —  —  — 
axes: Y, A, B, or C
With G code system B or C
2 basic axes: X, Z; Additional — — —
axes: Y, U, V, W, A, B, or C
Axis recomposition For 2–path system only —  —  — —
1 set —  —   
Simple
Sim le synchronous control 3 sets — —  — — —
4 sets  — — — — —
Slanted axis control     — 
Slanted axis control for arbitrary axis     — 
B–axis control —  —  — 
Tandem control     — —
Torque control PMC axis control required
Controlled axis detach      
Chopping  —  — — —
Hobbing machine function  —  — — —
Simple electric gearbox  —  — — —
0.001mm, 0.001deg, 0.0001
Minimum input increment      
inch
0.0001mm, 0.0001deg,
Increment system 1/10      
0.00001 inch
Flexible feed gear Optional DMR      
Learning control     — —
Preview repetitive control     — —
Dual position feedback      
Fine acceleration/deceleration      
HRV control      
Inch/metric switching      
All axes/each axis/each axial
Interlock direction/block start block/cut-      
ting block start
Machine lock All axes/each axis      
Emergency stop      
Overtravel      
Stored stroke check 1      

7
2. LIST OF SPECIFICATIONS GENERAL B–63002EN/02

Series 16i Series 18i Series 21i

Item Specifications Series 160i Series 180i Series 210i
MA TA MA TA MA TA
External stroke limit setting  —  —  —
Stored stroke check 2  —  —  —
Stored stroke check 3  —  — — —
Stored stroke check 2, 3 —  —  — 
Stroke limit check before travel     — —
Chuck/tailstock barrier —  —  — 
Mirror image Each axis      
Follow–up      
Servo–off/mechanical handle feed      
Chamfering on/off —  —  — 
Backlash compensation      
Separate backlash compensation
     
for rapid traverse and cutting feed
Stored pitch error compensation      
Gradient compensation     — —
Straightness deviation
    — —
compensation
Position switch      
Tool post interference check
For 2–path system only *1   —  — —
(between 2 paths)
Abnormal load detection      
Fine torque sensing *1     — —

Operation
Automatic operation (memory)      
Reader/punch interface
DNC operation
required
MDI operation      
For single–path system only
Scheduling function
*1
Program number search      
Sequence number search      
Sequence number collation stop      
Program restart      
Tool retract and return     — —
Manual intervention and return      
Machining return and restart  —  — — —
Rigid tapping return  —  —  —
Buffer register      
Dry run      
Single block      
Jog feed      
Manual reference position return      
Reference position return setting
     
without dog
Butt–type reference position return
     
setting
Reference position shift     — —

Note) *1 For the Series 16i, 18i, and 21i only

*2 For the Series 160i, 180i, and 210i only

8
B–63002EN/02 GENERAL 2. LIST OF SPECIFICATIONS

Series 16i Series 18i Series 21i

Item Specifications Series 160i Series 180i Series 210i
MA TA MA TA MA TA
1 unit per path      
Manual handle feed 2 units —  —  — 
2 or 3 units  —  —  —

1,
10,
m,
n
Manual handle feed magnification
m: 0 to 127; n: 0 to 1000
Handle feed in tool axis direction  —  — — —
(Tool axis direction) +
Handle feed in tool axis direction B  —  — — —
(Vertical direction)
Manual handle interrupt      
Incremental feed
1,
10,
100,
1000      
Jogging/handle feed mode      
Manual numeric command *1     — —
Manual linear/circular interpolation For single–path system only      —

Interpolation functions
G00 (Linear interpolation type
Positioning      
positioning enabled)
Unidirectional positioning G60  —  —  —
Exact stop mode G61  —  —  —
Exact stop G09  —  —  —
Linear interpolation      
Supported for multiple quad-
Circular interpolation      
rants
Exponential interpolation  —  — — —
For a specified number of se-
conds or rotations (To specify
dwell for a specified number of
Dwell      
rotations for MA, the thread-
ing/synchronous feed function
is necessary.)
Polar coordinate interpolation     — 
Cylindrical interpolation      
(Circular interpolation) +
Helical interpolation (Linear interpolation for up to 2      —
axes)
(Circular interpolation) +
Helical interpolation B (Linear interpolation for up to 4  — — — — —
axes)
Involute interpolation  —  — — —
Hypothetical axis interpolation     — —
Spiral/conical interpolation  —  — — —
High–precision contour control
Smooth interpolation  — — — — —
function required
Threading/synchronous feed      
Multi–start threading —  —  — 
Threading retract —  —  — 
Continuous threading —  —  — 
Variable–lead threading —  —  — 
Circular threading —  —  — —
Polygon turning —  —  — 
Polygon turning between spindles —  —  — 

Note) *1 For the Series 16i, 18i, and 21i only

*2 For the Series 160i, 180i, and 210i only

9
2. LIST OF SPECIFICATIONS GENERAL B–63002EN/02

Series 16i Series 18i Series 21i

Item Specifications Series 160i Series 180i Series 210i
MA TA MA TA MA TA
Skip G31      
High–speed skip      
Continuous high–speed skip  —  — — —
Multi–step skip     — 
Torque–limit skip —  —  — 
Reference position return G28      
Reference position return check G27      
2nd reference position return      
3rd/4th reference position return      
Floating reference position return     — —
Normal–direction control  —  —  —
Gentle–curve normal–direction con-
 —  — — —
trol
Continuous dressing For grinder  —  — — —
In–feed control For grinder  —  — — —
Balance cut For 2–path system only —  —  — —
Index table indexing  —  —  —
High–speed cycle machining For single–path system only     — —
High–speed cycle machining retract     — —
High–speed linear interpolation     — —

Feed functions
Up to 240 m/min (1 m)      
Rapid traverse
Up to 100 m/min (0.1 m)
Rapid traverse override Fo, 25, 50, 100%      
Feed per minute      
Threading/synchronous feed
Feed per rotation function required for the M se-   
ries
Feed per rotation without position
—  —  — —
coder
Constant tangential speed control      
Cutting feedrate clamp      
Rapid traverse: Linear
Automatic acceleration/deceleration      
Cutting feed: Exponential
Rapid traverse bell–shaped accel-
     
eration/deceleration
Positioning by optimum acceleration      —
Linear acceleration/deceleration af-
     
ter cutting feed interpolation
Bell–shaped acceleration/decelera-
     
tion after cutting feed interpolation
Linear acceleration/deceleration be-
Feed per minute only     — —
fore cutting feed interpolation
Feedrate override 0 to 254%      
2nd feedrate override 0 to 254%     — —
Feed by F with one digit  —  —  —
Inverse time feed  —  — — —

Note) *1 For the Series 16i, 18i, and 21i only

*2 For the Series 160i, 180i, and 210i only

10
B–63002EN/02 GENERAL 2. LIST OF SPECIFICATIONS

Series 16i Series 18i Series 21i

Item Specifications Series 160i Series 180i Series 210i
MA TA MA TA MA TA
Jog override 0 to 655.34%      
Override cancel      
Manual feed per rotation —  —  — 
External deceleration      
Feed stop     — —
Look–ahead control  —  —  —
Simple high–precision contour con-
 —  — — —
trol
Bell–shaped acceleration/decelera- Simple high–precision contour
 —  — — —
tion before look–ahead interpolation control required
64–bit RISC (single–path sys-
High–precision contour control  — — — — —
tem only)
High–precision contour control
NURBS interpolation  — — — — —
required

Program input
Automatic recognition of EIA
Tape code      
RS244 and ISO 840
Label skip      
Parity check Horizontal parity, vertical parity      
Control in/out      
1 block      
Optional block skip
9 blocks      
Maximum value ± with 8 digits      
O with 4 digits      
Program number
O with 8 digits *1     — —
Sequence number N with 5 digits      
Combined programming in a
Absolute/incremental programming      
single block allowed
Decimal point input, pocket calcula-
*1      
tor type decimal point input
Input unit (10 times)      
Diameter/radius programming (X–
—  —  — 
axis)
Plane selection G17, G18, G19      
Rotary axis designation      
Rotary axis roll–over      
Polar coordinate command  —  —  —
Coordinate system setting      
Automatic coordinate system setting      
Coordinate system shift —  —  — 
Direct input of coordinate system
—  —  — 
shift
Workpiece coordinate system G52, G53, G54 to G59      
Workpiece coordinate system preset      
Addition of workpiece
work iece coordinate 48 sets  —  —  —
systems 300 sets  —  — — —
Direct input of measured offset from
workpiece origin
Note) *1 For the Series 16i, 18i, and 21i only
*2 For the Series 160i, 180i, and 210i only

11
2. LIST OF SPECIFICATIONS GENERAL B–63002EN/02

Series 16i Series 18i Series 21i

Item Specifications Series 160i Series 180i Series 210i
MA TA MA TA MA TA
Manual absolute on/off      
Direct drawing dimension program-
—  —  — 
ming
‘A —  —  — 
G code system
B/C —  —  — 
Chamfering/corner rounding —  —  — 
Optional–angle chamfering/corner
 —  —  —
rounding
Programmable data input G10      
Subprogram call 4 levels of nesting      
Custom macro B      
Addition to custom macro common
#100 to #199, #500 to #999      
variables
Macro variables common to 2 paths For 2–path system — — —
Pattern data input *1      
Interrupt–type custom macro      
Canned cycle —  —  — 
Multiple repetitive canned cycle —  —  — 
Multiple repetitive canned cycle II Pocket profile —  —  — 
Canned cycle for drilling      
Small–diameter peck drilling cycle  —  —  —
Canned cycle for grinding For grinder     — —
Arc radius R programming      
Arc radius R programming with 9
—  —  — —
digits
Mirror image of facing tool posts —  —  — 
Automatic corner override      —
Automatic corner deceleration  —  — — —
Feedrate clamp by arc radius  —  —  —
Scaling  —  —  —
Coordinate system rotation      —
Three–dimensional coordinate con-
    — —
version
Programmable mirror image  —  —  —
Figure copy  —  — — —
Retrace  —  — — —
Series 15 tape format     — —
Series 10/11 tape format — — — —  
For single–path system only
Conversational programming     — —
*1
Up to 1MB *1 — — — —  
Macro executor
Up to 4MB *1     — —
C macro executor Up to 4MB *1     — —
Note) *1 For the Series 16i, 18i, and 21i only
*2 For the Series 160i, 180i, and 210i only

12
B–63002EN/02 GENERAL 2. LIST OF SPECIFICATIONS

Series 16i Series 18i Series 21i

Item Specifications Series 160i Series 180i Series 210i
MA TA MA TA MA TA
Graphic conversation functions for machining center
Super CAPi M *1  —  —  —
NC format output *1  —  —  —
Conversational C programming *1  —  —  —
Contour figure repetition *1  —  —  —
Background drawing *1  —  —  —
U–axis conversational function *1  —  —  —
Auxiliary preparation menu function *1  —  —  —
Contour profile block expansion *1  —  —  —
Contour pocket machining B *1  —  —  —

Graphic conversation functions for lathe

For single–path lathe
Super CAPi T —  —  — —
For 2–path lathe *1
Contour groove machining function —  —  — 
Interactive program input for com-
2–path lathes only —  —  — 
posite lathes
Spindle positioning type Y–axis ma-
—  —  — 
chining
NC format output *1 —  —  — 
C–axis conversational programming *1 —  —  — 
Y–axis conversational programming *1 —  —  — 
4000 P–code macro variables *1 —  —  — 
Back machining by subspindle *1 —  —  — 
Chuck data expansion 60 types *1 —  —  — 
Tool/chuck/workpiece interference
—  —  — 
check *1
T code/offset set expansion *1 —  —  — 

For single–path lathe

Symbol CAPi T —  —  — —
For 2–path lathe *1
Auxiliary machining *1 —  —  — —
Automatic tool determination *1 —  —  — —
Automatic tool determination B *1 —  —  — —
Animated simulation *1 —  —  — —
Animated simulation for vertical
—  —  — —
lathe *1
C–axis FAPT *1 —  —  — —
Y–axis FAPT *1 —  —  — —
Back machining *1 —  —  — —
Balance cut FAPT For 2–path lathe only *1 —  —  — —
Conversational screen display lan-
—  —  — —
guage expansion *1
Sub–memory addition *1 —  —  — —
File name storage on Floppy Cas-
—  —  — —
sette *1
Note) *1 For the Series 16i, 18i, and 21i only
*2 For the Series 160i, 180i, and 210i only

13
2. LIST OF SPECIFICATIONS GENERAL B–63002EN/02

Series 16i Series 18i Series 21i

Item Specifications Series 160i Series 180i Series 210i
MA TA MA TA MA TA
Basic module of Symbolic CAP T For single–path lathe *2 —  —  — 
C/Y–axis module of Symbolic
—  —  — 
CAP T *2
2–path control module of Symbolic
—  —  — —
CAP T *2

Manual guide For 1–path lathes —  —  — 

X minus area cutting —  —  — 
C–axis machining A —  —  — 
C–axis machining B —  —  — 

Miscellaneous/spindle functions
Miscellaneous function M with 8 digits      
Second auxiliary function B with 8 digits      
Miscellaneous function lock      
High–speed M/S/T/B interface      
Wait For 2–path lathe only   —  — —
Multiple miscellaneous–function
3 pieces      
commands
M code group check     — —
Spindle function S with 5 digits, binary output      
Spindle serial output S with 5 digits, serial output      
3–spindle serial output units For single–path system only — —   — —
3–/4–spindle serial output units For single–path system only   — — — —
Spindle analog output S with 5 digits, analog output      
Constant surface speed control      
Constant surface speed control
—  —  — —
without position coder
Spindle override 0% to 254%
Actual spindle speed output —  —  — 
Spindle speed fluctuation detection     — 
1st spindle orientation      
1st spindle output switching      
2nd spindle orientation      
2nd spindle output switching      
3rd spindle orientation — —   — —
3rd spindle output switching — —   — —
3rd/4th spindle orientation   — — — —
3rd/4th spindle output switching   — — — —
Spindle synchronization      
Simple spindle synchronization      
Multiple spindle control     — 
Spindle positioning —  —  — 
Rigid tapping      
Three–dimensional rigid tapping     — —
Rigid tapping by manual handle  —  — — —
Note) *1 For the Series 16i, 18i, and 21i only
*2 For the Series 160i, 180i, and 210i only

14
B–63002EN/02 GENERAL 2. LIST OF SPECIFICATIONS

Series 16i Series 18i Series 21i

Item Specifications Series 160i Series 180i Series 210i
MA TA MA TA MA TA
Tool functions, tool compensation functions
T7+1/T6+2 —  —  — 
Tool function
T with 8 digits  —  —  —
±with 6 digits, 32 items  —  —  —
±with 6 digits, 64 items  —  —  —
±with 6 digits, 99 items  —  —  —
±with 6 digits, 200 items  —  —  —
±with 6 digits, 400 items  —  —  —
Tool com
compensation
ensation data ±with 6 digits, 499 items  —  — — —
±with 6 digits, 999 items  —  — — —
±with 6 digits, 9 or 16 sets —  —  — 
±with 6 digits, 32 sets —  —  — 
±with 6 digits, 64 sets —  —  — 
±with 6 digits, 99 sets —  —  — —
Separate memory for geome-
Tool offset memory B  —  —  —
try and wear
Separate memory for geome-
try and wear
Tool offset memory C Separate memory for length  —  —  —
compensation and cutter com-
pensation
Tool length compensation  —  —  —
Tool offset      
Y–axis offset —  —  — 
Cutter compensation B  —  — — —
Cutter compensation C  —  —  —
Three–dimensional tool compensa-
 —  — — —
tion
Tool–tip radius compensation —  —  — 
Tool geometry/wear compensation —  —  — 
Tool life management      
Addition to tool life management 128 sets —  —  — —
sets 512 sets  —  —  —
Extended tool life management — — —
Tool offset value counter input —  —  — 
7–digit tool offset value —  —  — —
Tool length measurement  —  —  —
Automatic tool length measurement  —  —  —
Tool length workpiece origin mea-
 —  — — —
surement B *1
Automatic tool compensation —  —  — 
Direct input of measured tool com-
—  —  — 
pensation value
Direct input of measured tool com-
—  —  — 
pensation value B *1
Grinding–wheel wear compensation  —  — — —
Automatic modification of tool offset —  —  — —
Note) *1 For the Series 16i, 18i, and 21i only
*2 For the Series 160i, 180i, and 210i only

15
2. LIST OF SPECIFICATIONS GENERAL B–63002EN/02

Series 16i Series 18i Series 21i

Item Specifications Series 160i Series 180i Series 210i
MA TA MA TA MA TA
Editing
10m — — — —  
20m — —    
40m      
80m      
160m      
Part program storage length
320m      
640m      
1280m      
2560m   — — — —
5120m   — — — —
63      
125      
Registered programs
rograms 200      
400     — —
1000     — —
Part program editing      
Program protection      
Background editing      
Expanded part program editing      
Program copy between 2 paths For 2–path system only — — —
Playback      
Machining time stamp     — —

Setting, display
Status display      
Clock function      
Current position display      
Program display 31–character program name      
Parameter setting display      
Self–diagnosis function      
Alarm display      
Alarm history display      
Operator message history display *1
Operation history display *1      
Help function *1      
FACTOLINK *1      
Reading the information of
mounted printed circuit board,
Remote diagnosis
parameter, CNC data, alarm
status, etc.
Run time and parts number display      
Actual speed display      
Display of actual spindle speed and
  
T code
Floppy Cassette directory display      
Directory display and punch for a
     
specified group *1
Graphic function *1      

16
B–63002EN/02 GENERAL 2. LIST OF SPECIFICATIONS

Series 16i Series 18i Series 21i

Item Specifications Series 160i Series 180i Series 210i
MA TA MA TA MA TA
For the Series 21i, tool path
Dynamic graphic display    —
drawing only *1
Background drawing (without CAP) *1  —  — — —
Optional path name display For 2–path system only   —  — —
Servo adjustment screen      
Spindle adjustment screen Serial output only
Graphic display circuit re-
Servo waveform display
quired
Hardware/software system configu-
     
ration display
Periodic maintenance screen *1      
Maintenance information display *1      
Software operator’s panel      
General–purpose switch on soft-
     
ware operator’s panel
Touch pad      
English      
Japanese (kanji)      
German/French *1      
Display
Dis lay language Italian *1      
Chinese *1      
Spanish *1      
Korean *1      
Data protection key 4 types      
Screen clear *1      

Data input/output
Reader/punch interface
     
(channel 1)
Reader/punch interface
Reader/punch interface
     
(channel 2)
Simultaneous input/output operation For single–path system only  —  — — —
Remote buffer For single–path system only      
High–speed remote buffer A For single–path system only      
High–speed remote buffer B For single–path system only  —  —  —
For single–path system only
Data server     — —
*1
External I/O device control      
Part program uploading/down-
loading, CNC data read/write,
DNC1 control      
PMC data transfer, memory
operation control, etc. *1
For a single–path system only
Part program uploading/down-
DNC2 control loading, CNC data read/write,      
PMC data transfer, memory
operation control, etc. *1
Modem card control *1      
External tool compensation      
External message      

Note) *1 For the Series 16i, 18i, and 21i only

*2 For the Series 160i, 180i, and 210i only

17
2. LIST OF SPECIFICATIONS GENERAL B–63002EN/02

Series 16i Series 18i Series 21i

Item Specifications Series 160i Series 180i Series 210i
MA TA MA TA MA TA
External machine zero point shift      
External data input Including three items above      
External key input      
External programming      
External workpiece number search 9999      
External program number search 1 to 9999
Memory card input/output *1      
Screen hard copy *1      
Power Mate CNC manager *1      

Others
NC ready, servo ready, auto-
matic operation, automatic op-
eration start, automatic opera-
tion halt, reset, NC alarm, dis-
Status output signal      
tribution completion, rewind-
ing, inch input, cutting, in–
position, threading, tapping,
etc.
7.2″ monochrome LCD *1      
9.5″ monochrome LCD *1      
Control unit built–in
built in display
8.4″ color LCD *1      
10.4″ color LCD      
Without option slot (60 mm)      
Control unit o
option
tion slots (de
(depth)
th) 2 optional slots (110 mm)      
4 optional slots (170 mm)     — —
Separate–type MDI for
     
7.2″/8.4″ LCD (small) *1
Separate–type MDI for
     
7.2″/8.4″ LCD (standard) *1
Separate–type MDI for
9.5″/10.4″ LCD (standard, hor-      
izontal type) *1
Separate–type MDI for
MDI unit
9.5″/10.4″ LCD (standard, ver-
tical type)      
(MDI for 10.4″ LCD, for the
Series 160i, 180i, and 210i)
Separate–type MDI for 10.4″
LCD (PC key, vertical type)      
*2
Touch pad (10.4″ LCD)     — —
Note) *1 For the Series 16i, 18i, and 21i only
*2 For the Series 160i, 180i, and 210i only

18
B–63002EN/02 GENERAL 2. LIST OF SPECIFICATIONS

Series 16i Series 18i Series 21i

Item Specifications Series 160i Series 180i Series 210i
MA TA MA TA MA TA
Basic instruction: 5 s/step
Maximum ladder steps: 5,000
PMC–SA1 — — — —  
(The ladder editing function is
limited.)
Basic instruction: 0.085 s/
step
PMC–SA5 — — — —  
Maximum ladder steps:
16,000
Basic instruction: 0.085 s/
step
PMC–SB5     — —
Maximum ladder steps:
24,000
Basic instruction: 0.085 s/
PMC system
step
PMC–SB6 Maximum ladder steps:     — —
32,000
Step sequence function
Basic instruction: 0.085 s/
step
PMC–Si Maximum ladder steps:     — —
32,000
IEC1131–3
Up to 2MB
     
(PMC–SB5/SB6 required)
C
Battery–powered memory ex-
    — —
pansion
I/O unit model A      
I/O unit model B      
Machine interface (I/O Link) Operator’s panel I/O module      
Maximum DI/DO points: 1024/1024 Connector panel I/O module      
Power magnetics cabinet I/O
     
module
Manual pulse generator      
Pendant–type manual pulse genera- With axis selection switch and
     
tor magnification selection switch
Cordless manual pulse generator Used in Japan only      
FANUC AC servo motor  se-
Applicable servo motor ries (with serial interface pulse      
coder)
FANUC servo amplifier  se-
Applicable servo amplifier      
ries
2–phase pulse interface for
Separate position detector interface
separate pulse coder/linear      
unit (for closed control)
optical scale
Linear scale interface with absolute
     
addressing reference mark
Applicable spindle motor FANUC AC spindle motor, etc.      
FANUC servo amplifier  se-
     
Applicable
A licable sspindle
indle am
amplifier
lifier ries
Analog interface      
Control unit supply voltage 24 VDC ±10%      
Note) *1 For the Series 16i, 18i, and 21i only
*2 For the Series 160i, 180i, and 210i only

19
II. NC FUNCTION
B–63002EN/02 NC FUNCTION PREFACE

PREFACE

This part describes the functions that can be performed on all models. For
the functions available with each model, see the list of specifications in
Part I.

23
1. CONTROLLED AXES NC FUNCTION B–63002EN/02

1 CONTROLLED AXES

24
B–63002EN/02 NC FUNCTION 1. CONTROLLED AXES

1.1 The number of all controlled axes is the sum of the number of machine
controlled axes and the number of loader controlled axes. The machine
NUMBER OF THE ALL controlled axes include Cs axis.
CONTROLLED AXES 16i–MA/16i–TA/160i–MA/160i–TA (1–path)
: 12 axes (8 machine axes + 4 loader axes)
16i–MA/16i–TA/160i–MA/160i–TA (2–path)
: 18 axes (7 machine axes
2 paths+4 loader axes)
18i–MA/18i–TA/180i–MA/180i–TA (1–path)
: 10 axes (6 machine axes + 4 loader axes)
18i–TA/180i–TA (2–path)
: 18 axes (5 machine axes
2 paths+4 loader axes)
21i–MA/210i–MA
: 4 axes (4 machine axes)
21i–TA/210i–TA
: 8 axes (4 machine axes + 4 loader axes)
20i–FA : 4 axes (4 machin axes)
20i–TA : 2 axes (2 machin axes)

25
1. CONTROLLED AXES NC FUNCTION B–63002EN/02

1.2
MACHINE
CONTROLLED AXES

1.2.1 Two–path control is available in 16i–MA, 16i–TA, and 18i–TA,

Number of Controlled 160i–MA, 160i–TA, 180i–TA
In 18i–MA, 180i–MA, 21i–MA, 21i–TA, 210i–MA, 210i–TA, 20i–FA,
Paths 20i–TA number of controlled paths is one.

1.2.2 16i–MA/18i–MA/160i–MA/180i–MA/21i–MA/210i–MA/20i–FA
(each path) : 3 axes
Number of Basic
16i–TA/18i–TA/160i–TA/180i–TA/210i–TA/210i–TA/20i–TA
Controlled Axes (each path) : 2 axes

1.2.3 16i–MA/18i–MA/160i–MA/180i–MA/21i–MA/210i–MA (each path) :

3 axes
Number of Basic
16i–TA/18i–TA/160i–TA/180i–TA/21i–TA/210i–TA/20i–TA (each path) :
Simultaneously 2 axes
Controlled Axes 20i–FA : 3 axes

1.2.4 16i–MA/16i–TA/160i–MA/160i–TA (1–path) :

Max. 8 axes (including Cs axis)
Number of Controlled
16i–MA/16i–TA/160i–MA/160i–TA (2–path) :
Axes Expanded (All) Max. 7 axes (6 feed axes + Cs axis)
18i–MA/18i–TA/180i–MA/180i–TA (1–path) :
Max. 6 axes (including Cs axis)
18i–TA/180i–TA (2–path) :
Max. 5 axes (4 feed axes + Cs axis)
21i–MA/21i–TA/210i–MA/210i–TA/20i–FA :
Max. 4 axes (including Cs axis)
20i–TA: Max. 2 axes

1.2.5 16i–MA/16i–TA/160i–MA/160i–TA (each path) : Max. 6 axes

Number of 18i–MA/18i–TA/180i–MA/180i–TA (each path) : Max. 4 axes
21i–MA/21i–TA/210i–MA/210i–TA/20i–FA : Max. 4 axes
Simultaneously
Controlled Axes
Expanded (All)

1.2.6 16i–MA/16i–TA/18i–MA/18i–TA/21i–MA/21i–TA/160i–MA/160i–
Axis Control by PMA TA/180i–MA/180i–TA/210i–MA/210i–TA/20i–FA (each path) :
Max. simultaneous 4 axes (Cs axis is disable.)

1.2.7 16i–MA/16i–TA/18i–MA/18i–TA/21i–MA/21i–TA/160i–MA/160i–
Cs Contour Control TA/180i–MA/180i–TA/210i–MA/210i–TA (each path) :
1 axis

26
B–63002EN/02 NC FUNCTION 1. CONTROLLED AXES

1.3 Number of controlled paths : 1–path

Number of controlled axes : Max. 4 axes
LOADER Number of simultaneously controlled axes : Max. 4 axes
CONTROLLED AXES Number of controlled axes by PMA : Max. 4 axes

1.4
AXIS NAMES T series :
The two basic axes are always set to X and Z. Additional axes can be
selected from A, B, C, U, V, W, and Y freely. For the 16-TB (2–path
control), the two basic axes are always set to X and Z on each path, and
additional axes can be selected freely from A, B, C, U, V, W, and Y.

NOTE
If U, V, or W is used as an axis name, the G code system
must be either B or C.

M series :
The three basic axes are set to X, Y, and Z. Additional axes can be
selected from A, B, C, U, V, and W freely.
For two–path control, X, Y, and Z are always used as the names of the
three basic axes. Additional axes can be assigned any of A, B, C, U,
V, and W as their names.

27
1. CONTROLLED AXES NC FUNCTION B–63002EN/02

1.5 There are two increment systems as shown in the tables below. One of the
increment systems can be selected using a parameter.
INCREMENT SYSTEM

NOTE
If IS-C is selected, option ”increment system 1/10” is
required.

Table 1.5(a) IS–B

Least
Least input increment command Abbreviation
increment

0.001 mm (diameter programming) 0.0005 mm

Metric input 0.001 mm (radius programming) 0.001 mm

0.001 deg 0.001 deg
0.0001 inch (diameter programming) 0.0005 mm

Inch input 0.0001 inch (radius programming) 0.001 mm

Millimeter 0.001 deg 0.001 deg

IS B
IS–B
machine 0.001 mm (diameter programming) 0.00005 inch

Metric input 0.001 mm (radius programming) 0.0001 inch

0.001 deg 0.001 deg
0.0001 inch (diameter programming) 0.00005 inch

Inch input 0.0001 inch (radius programming) 0.0001 inch

0.001 deg 0.001 deg

Table 1.5(b) IS–C

Least
Least input increment command Abbreviation
increment

0.0001 mm (diameter programming) 0.00005 mm

Metric input 0.0001 mm (radius programming) 0.0001 mm

Millimeter 0.0001 deg 0.0001 deg

machine 0.00001 inch (diameter programming) 0.00005 mm

Inch input 0.00001 inch (radius programming) 0.0001 mm

0.0001 deg 0.0001 deg
IS C
IS–C
0.0001 mm (diameter programming) 0.000005 inch

Metric input 0.0001 mm (radius programming) 0.00001 inch

Millimeter 0.0001 deg 0.0001 deg

machine 0.00001 inch (diameter programming) 0.000005 inch

Inch input 0.00001 inch (radius programming) 0.00001 inch

0.0001 deg 0.0001 deg

28
B–63002EN/02 NC FUNCTION 1. CONTROLLED AXES

The least command increment is in millimeters or inches, depending on

the machine tool. One of them must be selected using a parameter
beforehand.
The least input increment can be switched between metric input and inch
input by using a G code (G20 or G21) or a setting parameter.

1.5.1 The following least input increments can be set using a parameter:
Input Unit (10 Times) Increment system Least input increment

IS–B 0.01 mm, 0.01 deg, or 0.001 inch

IS–C 0.001 mm, 0.001 deg, or 0.0001 deg

NOTE
The minimum input increment for inch input is not affected.

1.6 The following table lists the maximum strokes of machine tools that are
allowed by the control unit:
MAXIMUM STROKE
Maximum stroke = Least command increment
99999999
Increment system Maximum stroke

±99999.999 mm
Millimeter machine
±99999.999 deg
IS B
IS–B
±9999.9999 inch
Inch machine
±99999.999 deg

±9999.9999 mm
Millimeter machine
±9999.9999 deg
IS C
IS–C
±999.99999 inch
Inch machine
±9999.9999 deg

NOTE
1 The values (in mm or inches) in the table are diameter
values if diameter programming is specified, or radius
values if radius programming is specified.
2 A command that exceeds the maximum stroke is not
allowed.

29
2. PREPARATORY FUNCTIONS NC FUNCTION B–63002EN/02

2 PREPARATORY FUNCTIONS

30
B–63002EN/02 NC FUNCTION 2. PREPARATORY FUNCTIONS

2.1 The following G codes are provided. The G codes are classified into
three: A, B, and C. One of the G code types can be selected using a
T SERIES parameter. In this manual, G code system B is assumed.

G code list for T series (1/3)

G code
Gro p
Group F nction
Function
A B C
G00 G00 G00 Positioning (Rapid traverse)
G01 G01 G01 Linear interpolation (Cutting feed)
01
G02 G02 G02 Circular interpolation CW or Helical interpolation CW
G03 G03 G03 Circular interpolation CCW or Helical interpolation CCW
G04 G04 G04 Dwell
G05 G05 G05 High speed cycle cutting, high–speed remote buffer A
G07 G07 G07 Hypothetical axis interpolation
G07.1 G07.1 G07.1
00 Cylindrical interpolation
(G107) (G107) (G107)
G10 G10 G10 Programmable data input
G10.6 G10.6 G10.6 Tool retract and return
G11 G11 G11 Programmable data input mode cancel
G12.1 G12.1 G12.1
Polar coordinate interpolation mode
(G112) (G112) (G112)
21
G13.1 G13.1 G13.1
Polar coordinate interpolation cancel mode
(G113) (G113) (G113)
G17 G17 G17 XpYp plane selection
G18 G18 G18 16 ZpXp plane selection
G19 G19 G19 YpZp plane selection
G20 G20 G70 Input in inch
06
G21 G21 G71 Input in mm
G22 G22 G22 Stored stroke check function on
09
G23 G23 G23 Stored stroke check function off
G25 G25 G25 Spindle speed fluctuation detection off
08
G26 G26 G26 Spindle speed fluctuation detection on
G27 G27 G27 Reference position return check
G28 G28 G28 Return to reference position
G30 G30 G30 00 2nd, 3rd and 4th reference position return
G30.1 G30.1 G30.1 Floating reference point return
G31 G31 G31 Skip function
G32 G33 G33 Thread cutting
G34 G34 G34 Variable–lead thread cutting
01
G35 G35 G35
Circular threading
G36 G36 G36

31
2. PREPARATORY FUNCTIONS NC FUNCTION B–63002EN/02

G code list for T series (2/3)

G code
Gro p
Group F nction
Function
A B C
G36 G36 G36 Automatic tool compensation X
G37 G37 G37 00 Automatic tool compensation Z
G39 G39 G39 Corner circular interpolation
G40 G40 G40 Tool nose radius compensation cancel
G41 G41 G41 07 Tool nose radius compensation left
G42 G42 G42 Tool nose radius compensation right
G50 G92 G92 Coordinate system setting or max. spindle speed setting
00
G50.3 G92.1 G92.1 Workpiece coordinate system preset
G50.2 G50.2 G50.2
Polygonal turning cancel
(G250) (G250) (G250)
20
G51.2 G51.2 G51.2
Polygonal turning
(G251) (G251) (G251)
G52 G52 G52 Local coordinate system setting
00
G53 G53 G53 Machine coordinate system setting
G54 G54 G54 Workpiece coordinate system 1 selection

G55 G55 G55 Workpiece coordinate system 2 selection

G56 G56 G56 Workpiece coordinate system 3 selection

14
G57 G57 G57 Workpiece coordinate system 4 selection
G58 G58 G58 Workpiece coordinate system 5 selection
G59 G59 G59 Workpiece coordinate system 6 selection
G65 G65 G65 00 Macro calling
G66 G66 G66 Macro modal call
12
G67 G67 G67 Macro modal call cancel
G68 G68 G68 Mirror image for double turrets ON or balance cut mode
04 Mirror image for double turrets OFF or balance cut mode
G69 G69 G69
cancel
G70 G70 G72 Finishing cycle
G71 G71 G73 Stock removal in turning
G72 G72 G74 Stock removal in facing
G73 G73 G75 00 Pattern repeating
G74 G74 G76 End face peck drilling
G75 G75 G77 Outer diameter/internal diameter drilling
G76 G76 G78 Multiple threading cycle

32
B–63002EN/02 NC FUNCTION 2. PREPARATORY FUNCTIONS

G code list for T series (3/3)

G code
Gro p
Group F nction
Function
A B C
G71 G71 G72 Traverse grinding cycle (for grinding machine)
Traverse direct constant–dimension grinding cycle
G72 G72 G73
01 (for grinding machine)
G73 G73 G74 Oscilation grinding cycle (for grinding machine)
Oscilation direct constant–dimension grinding cycle
G74 G74 G75
(for grinding machine)
G80 G80 G80 Canned cycle for drilling cancel
G83 G83 G83 Cycle for face drilling
G84 G84 G84 Cycle for face tapping
G86 G86 G86 10 Cycle for face boring
G87 G87 G87 Cycle for side drilling
G88 G88 G88 Cycle for side tapping
G89 G89 G89 Cycle for side boring
G90 G77 G20 Outer diameter/internal diameter cutting cycle
G92 G78 G21 01 Thread cutting cycle
G94 G79 G24 Endface turning cycle
G96 G96 G96 Constant surface speed control
02
G97 G97 G97 Constant surface speed control cancel
G98 G94 G94 Per minute feed
05
G99 G95 G95 Per revolution feed
 G90 G90 Absolute programming
03
 G91 G91 Incremental programming
 G98 G98 Return to initial level
11
 G99 G99 Return to R point level

33
2. PREPARATORY FUNCTIONS NC FUNCTION B–63002EN/02

2.2 The following G codes are provided :

M SERIES
G code list for M series (1/4)
G code Group Function

G00 Positioning

G01 Linear interpolation

G02 Circular interpolation/Helical interpolation CW

01
G03 Circular interpolation/Helical interpolation CCW
G02.2, G03.2 Involute interpolation
G02.3, G03.3 Exponential function interpolation
G04 Dwell, Exact stop
High speed cycle machining, high–speed remote buffer A/B, high–preci-
G05
sion contour control, simple high–precision contour control
G07 Hypothetical axis interpolation
G07.1 (G107) Cylindrical interpolation
00
G08 Look–ahead control
G09 Exact stop
G10 Programmable data input
G10.6 Tool retract and recover
G11 Programmable data input mode cancel
G12.1 Polar coordinate interpolation mode
25
G13.1 Polar coordinate interpolation cancel mode

G15 Polar coordinates command cancel

17
G16 Polar coordinates command
G17 XpYp plane selection Xp: X axis or its parallel axis

G18 02 ZpXp plane selection Yp: Y axis or its parallel axis

G19 YpZp plane selection Zp: Z axis or its parallel axis

G20 Input in inch
06
G21 Input in mm
G22 Stored stroke check function on
04
G23 Stored stroke check function off
G25 Spindle speed fluctuation detection off
24
G26 Spindle speed fluctuation detection on

34
B–63002EN/02 NC FUNCTION 2. PREPARATORY FUNCTIONS

G code list for M series (2/4)

G code Group Function

G27 Reference position return check

G28 Return to reference position
G29 Return from reference position
00
G30 2nd, 3rd and 4th reference position return
G30.1 Floating reference point return
G31 Skip function
G33 01 Thread cutting
G37 Automatic tool length measurment
00
G39 Corner offset circular interpolation
G40 Cutter compensation cancel

G41 07 Cutter compensation left

G42 Cutter compensation right
G40.1 (G150) Normal direction control cancel mode
G41.1 (G151) 19 Normal direction control left side on
G42.1 (G152) Normal direction control right side on
G43 Tool length compensation + direction
08
G44 Tool length compensation – direction
G45 Tool offset increase
G46 Tool offset decrease
00
G47 Tool offset double increase
G48 Tool offset double decrease
G49 08 Tool length compensation cancel

G50 Scaling cancel

11
G51 Scaling
G50.1 Programmable mirror image cancel
22
G51.1 Programmable mirror image
G52 Local coordinate system setting
00
G53 Machine coordinate system selection
G54 Workpiece coordinate system 1 selection

G54.1 Additional workpiece coordinate system selection

G55 Workpiece coordinate system 2 selection
G56 14 Workpiece coordinate system 3 selection
G57 Workpiece coordinate system 4 selection
G58 Workpiece coordinate system 5 selection
G59 Workpiece coordinate system 6 selection

35
2. PREPARATORY FUNCTIONS NC FUNCTION B–63002EN/02

G code list for M series (3/4)

G code Group Function

G60 00 Single direction positioning

G61 Exact stop mode
G62 Automatic corner override
15
G63 Tapping mode
G64 Cutting mode

G65 00 Macro call

G66 Macro modal call
12
G67 Macro modal call cancel

G68 Coordinate rotation

16
G69 Coordinate rotation cancel

G72.1 Rotational copy

00
G72.2 Linear copy
G73 Peck drilling cycle
09
G74 Counter tapping cycle
G75 01 Plunge grinding cycle (for grinding machine)
G76 09 Fine boring cycle
G77 Direct constant–dimension plunge grinding cycle(for grinding machine)
G78 01 Continuous–feed surface grinding cycle(for grinding machine)
G79 Intermittent–feed surface grinding cycle(for grinding machine)
G80 Canned cycle cancel/external operation function cancel

G81 Drilling cycle, spot boring cycle or external operation function

G82 Drilling cycle or counter boring cycle
G83 Peck drilling cycle
G84 Tapping cycle
09
G85 Boring cycle
G86 Boring cycle
G87 Back boring cycle
G88 Boring cycle
G89 Boring cycle
G90 Absolute command
03
G91 Increment command

G92 Setting for work coordinate system or clamp at maximum spindle speed
00
G92.1 Workpiece coordinate system preset
G94 Feed per minute
05
G95 Feed per rotation

36
B–63002EN/02 NC FUNCTION 2. PREPARATORY FUNCTIONS

G code list for M series (4/4)

G code Group Function

G96 Constant surface speed control

13
G97 Constant surface speed control cancel

G98 Return to initial point in canned cycle

10
G99 Return to R point in canned cycle
G160 In–feed control function cancel(for grinding machine)
20
G161 In–feed control function(for grinding machine)

37
3. INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS NC FUNCTION B–63002EN/02

3 INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS

38
B–63002EN/02 NC FUNCTION 3. INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS

3.1 Positioning is done with each axis separately (Non linear interpolation
type positioning).
POSITIONING (G00) Either of the following tool paths can be selected accroding to bit 1 of
parameter No. 1401.
Non linear interpolation positioning
The tool is positioned with the rapid traverse rate for each axis
separately. The tool path is normally straight.
Linear interpolation posioning
The tool path is the same as in linear interpolation (G01). The tool is
positioned within the shortest possible time at a speed that is not more
than the rapid traverse rate for each axis.

Linear interpolation Start position

positioning

Non linear interpolation

End position positioning

It is decelerated, to a stop at the end point, and imposition check is

performed (checks whether the machine has come to the specified
position). The in-position check can be suppressed using a parameter.
Width of imposition can be set as a parameter.

Format

G00 IP _ ;

39
3. INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS NC FUNCTION B–63002EN/02

3.2 M series It is always controlled to perform positioning to the end point from a
single direction, for better precision in positioning. If direction from start
SINGLE DIRECTION point to end point is different from the predecided direction, it once
POSITIONING (G60) positions to a point past the end point, and the positioning is reperformed
(M series) for that point to the end point.
Even if the direction from start point to end point is the same as predecided
direction, the tool stops once before the end point.

Exceeded
amount

End point Temporary stop

Format

G60 IP _ ;

40
B–63002EN/02 NC FUNCTION 3. INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS

3.3 Linear interpolation is done with tangential direction feed rate specified
by the F code.
LINEAR
INTERPOLATION
X axis
(G01)
End point
(200, 150)

(Program example)
G01 G90 X200. Z150. F200 ;
Start point

Z axis

Format

G01 IP _ F_ ;
F : Feedrate

41
3. INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS NC FUNCTION B–63002EN/02

3.4 Circular interpolation of optional angle from 0° to 360 ° can be specified.

G02: Clockwise (CW) circular interpolation
CIRCULAR G03: Counterclockwise (CCW) circular interpolation
INTERPOLATION
(G02, G03) Yp Xp Zp

G03 G03 G03

G02 G02 G02

Xp Zp Yp
G17 G18 G19

Feed rate of the tangential direction takes the speed specified by the F
code. Planes to perform circular interpolation is specified by G17, G18,
G19. Circular interpolation can be performed not only on the X, Y, and
Z axis but also on the parallel axes of the X, Y, and Z axes.
G17: Xp-Yp plane
G18: Zp-Xp plane
G19: Yp-Zp plane
where
Xp: X axis or its parallel axis
Yp: Y axis or its parallel axis
Zp: Z axis or its parallel axis
Parameter is set to decide which parallel axis of the X, Y, Z axes to be the
additional axis.

Format
Arc on the Xp-Yp plane
G02 R_
G17 Xp_ Yp_ F_ ;
G03 I_ J_
Arc on the Zp-Xp plane
G02 R_
G18 Zp_ Xp_ F_ ;
G03 K_ I_
Arc on the Yp-Zp plane
G02 R_
G19 Yp_ Zp_ F_ ;
G03 J_ K_
I_. J_, K_:Distance of the X, Y, Z axes from the start point to the center of
the circle
R:Arc radius (For an arc having a central angle of 180° or greater, specify
an R value with a minus sign. A complete circumference cannot be speci-
fied.)
End point End point End point
(x, y) (z, x) (y, z)
Y X Z
X Start Z Start Y Start
i point k point j point
j i k
Center Center Center

42
B–63002EN/02 NC FUNCTION 3. INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS

When the option for specifying arc radius R with nine digits is selected
for the T series, the valid radius range for circular interpolation is
expanded as follows:

Without the option for specifying arc radius R with nine digits
Input increments

Metric input Inch input

Increment IS–B 0.001 to 99999.999mm 0.0001 to 9999.9999inch

system
IS–C 0.0001 to 9999.9999mm 0.00001 to 999.99999inch

With the option for specifying arc radius R with nine digits
Input increments

Metric input Inch input

Increment IS–B 0.001 to 999999.999mm 0.0001 to 99999.9999inch

system
IS–C 0.0001 to 99999.9999mm 0.00001 to 9999.99999inch

43
3. INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS NC FUNCTION B–63002EN/02

3.5 Helical interpolation performs circular interpolation of a maximum of

two axes, synchronizing with other optional two axes circular
HELICAL interpolation. Thread cutting of large radius threads or machining of solid
INTERPOLATION cams are possible by moving a tool in a spiral.
(G02, G03) The commanded speed is the speed of the tangential direction of the arc.
Thus, the speed of a linear axis is expressed as follows:
Lengthoflinearaxis
F

Arclength

Tool path

X Y

Tangential speed along an arc by circular interpolation

is the rate specified in programming.

Format
Arc on the Xp-Yp plane
G02
G17 Xp_ Yp_ R_ α_ (β_) F_ ;
G03 I_ J_
Arc on the Zp-Xp plane
G02 R_
G18 Zp_ Xp_ α_ (β_) F_ ;
G03 K_ I_
Arc on the Yp-Zp plane
G02 R_
G19 Yp_ Zp_ α_ (β_) F_ ;
G03 J_ K_

α, β: Optional axis other than the circular interpolation axes

44
B–63002EN/02 NC FUNCTION 3. INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS

3.6 M series Helical interpolation B moves the tool in a helical manner. This
interpolation can be executed by specifying the circular interpolation
HELICAL command together with up to four additional axes in simple
INTERPOLATION B high–precision contour control mode.
(G02, G03) (M series)
Basically, the command can be specified by adding two movement axes
to a standard helical interpolation command (see Section 3.5). Address
F should be followed by a tangential velocity, which has been determined
by also taking movement along the linear axes into consideration.

Tool path

X Y

The feedrate equals the tangential velocity determined

by also taking movement along the linear axes into
consideration.

Format

With an arc in the Xp–Yp plane

G02 I_ J_
G17 Xp_ Yp_ R_ α_ β_ γ_ δ_ F_ ;
G03
With an arc in the Zp–Xp plane
G02 I_ K_
G18 Zp_ Xp_ R_ α_ β_ γ_ δ_ F_ ;
G03
With an arc in the Yp–Zp plane
G02 J_ K_
G19 Yp_ Zp_ R_ α_ β_ γ_ δ_ F_ ;
G03

α_ β_ γ_ δ: Any axis to which circular interpolation is not

applied. Up to four axes can be specified.

45
3. INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS NC FUNCTION B–63002EN/02

3.7 The function in which contour control is done in converting the command
programmed in a cartesian coordinate system to the movement of a linear
POLAR COORDINATE axis (movement of a tool) and the movement of a rotary axis (rotation of
INTERPOLATION a workpiece) is the polar coordinate interpolation. It is an effective
(G12.1, G13.1) function when a straight line groove is cut on the outer diameter of a
workpiece or when a cam shaft is ground.
Whether the polar coordinate interpolation is done or not is commanded
by a G code.
These G codes shall be commanded in a single block.

Format

G12.1; Polar coordinate interpolation mode

(Polar coordinate interpolation shall be done.)
G13.1; Polar coordinate interpolation cancel mode
(Polar coordinate interpolation is not done.)

Explanations
Polar coordinate The axes (linear axis and rotary axis) on which polar coordinate
interpolation mode interpolation is done are set beforehand by parameters.
(G12.1) Change the mode to polar coordinate interpolation mode by commanding
G12.1, and a plane (hereinafter referred to as polar coordinate
interpolation plane) is selected in which linear axis is made to the first
axis of the plane, and virtual axis being a right angle with the linear axis
is made to the second axis of the plane. Polar coordinate interpolation is
carried out on this plane.
In the polar coordinate interpolation made, the command of linear
interpolation (G01) and circular interpolation (G02, G03) is possible.
And both absolute command (G90) and incremental command (G91) are
possible.
For the program command it is possible to apply cutter compensation.
For the path after cutter compensation is done, polar coordinate
interpolation can be made.
As for feedrate, specify the tangential speed (relative speed between the
workpiece and the tool) on the polar coordinate interpolation plane
(cartesian coordinate system) with F.

Polar coordinate The polar coordinate interpolation cancel mode is obtained by G13.1
interpolation cancel command.
mode (G13.1)

46
B–63002EN/02 NC FUNCTION 3. INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS

Examples
Polar coordinate
interpolation by X axis
(Linear axis) and C axis
(Rotary axis)

C (Virtual axis)

C axis Path after cutter

compensation
Programmed path

N204 N203
N205
N200 X axis
N202 N201
Tool
N208
N206 N207 Z axis

(X axis is diameter programming and C axis is radius programming)

00001;
:
N100 G90 G00 X120.0 C0 Z_ ; Positioning to the starting position
N200 G12.1; Starting polar coordinate interpolation
N201 G42 G01 X40.0 F D01;
N202 C10.0;
N203 G03 X20.0 C20.0 R10.0 ;
Contour program
N204 G01 X-40.0 ;
(Program in cartesian coordinate
N205 G-10.0 ; system of X-C plane)
N206 G03 X-20.0 C-20.0 I10.0 K0 ;
N207 G01 X40.0 ;
N208 C0 ;
N209 G40 X120.0 ;
N210 G13.1 ; Canceling polar coordinate
N300 Z_ ; interpolation
N400 X_ C_ ;
:
M30 ;

47
3. INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS NC FUNCTION B–63002EN/02

3.8 When the form on the expanded side view of a cylinder (from on the
cylinder coordinate system) is commanded by a program command, the
CYLINDRICAL NC converts the form into a linear axis movement and a rotary axis
INTERPOLATION movement then performs a contour control. This feature is called the
(G07.1) cylindrical interpolation.
Cylindrical interpolation is commanded with G07.1.

Format
G07.1 (Name of rotary axis) Radius value of cylinder ;
Cylindrical interpolation mode
G07.1 (Name of rotary axis) 0 ;
Cancellation mode of cylindrical interpolation

Explanations
Cylindrical interpolation Cylindrical interpolation is made between the rotary axis specified in the
mode block of G07.1 and the other optional linear axis.
Circle interpolation command is allowed as well as linear interpolation,
during cylindrical interpolation mode. Also, absolute command and
incremental command can be made. Cutter compensation can be added
to the program command. Cylindrical interpolation is made for the path
after cutter compensation.
Feed rate gives the tangential speed on the expanded plane of the cylinder
with F.

Cancellation mode of G07.1 (Name of rotary axis) 0; Cancellation mode of cylindrical

cylindrical interpolation interpolation is made when commanded as above.

48
B–63002EN/02 NC FUNCTION 3. INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS

Examples

An example of a program C
O0001 (CYLINDRICAL INTERPOLATION);
N1 G00 G00 Z100.0 C0;
N2 G01 G18 Z0 C0;
N3 G7.1 C57299; Z R
N4 G01 G42 Z120.0 D10 F250;
N5 G40.0;
N6 G02 Z90.0 C60.0 R30.0 ;
N7 G01 Z70.0;
N8 G03 Z60.0 C70.0 R10.0;
N9 G01 C150.0;
N10 G03 Z70.0 C190.0 R75.0;
N11 G01 Z110.0 C230.0;
N12 G02 Z120.0 C270.0 R75.0;
N13 G01 G360.0;
N14 G40 Z100.0;
N15 G07.1 C0;
N16
M30;

mm
N05 N12 N13
120
110 N06
N11
90
N07
70
N08 N09 N10
60

C
0 30 60 70 150 190 230 270 360 deg

49
3. INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS NC FUNCTION B–63002EN/02

3.9 M series With the following command, the involute curve machining can be
performed. Approximate involute curve with a minute straight line or arc
INVOLUTE is not needed. Therefore, the programming becomes simple and reduces
INTERPOLATION the tape length. The distribution of the pulse will not be interrupted
(G02.2, G03.2) during the continuous minute block high speed operation, so fast, smooth
involute curve machining is possible.
(M series)
Start point
Start point
(I, J)
End point
R (X, Y)
(I, J)
R
Basic
circle Basic
End point
(X, Y) circle

Clockwise involute Counterclockwise involute

interpolation interpolation

Format
Xp–Yp plane

G02.2
G17 Xp_ Yp_ I_ J_ R_ F_ ;
G03.2

Zp–Xp plane

G02.2
G18 Zp_ Xp_ K_ I_ R_ F_ ;
G03.2

Yp–Zp plane

G02.2
G19 Yp_ Zp_ J_ K_ R_ F_ ;
G03.2

G02.2 : Clockwise involute interpolation

G03.2 : Counterclockwise involute interpolation
Xp, Yp, Zp : End point coordinate value
I, J, K : Distance to the center of the basic circle of the involute
curve from start point
R : Radius of basic circle
F : Cutting feedrate

50
B–63002EN/02 NC FUNCTION 3. INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS

3.10 M series In synchronization with the travel of the rotary axis, the linear axis (X
axis) performes the exponential function interpolation. With the other
EXPONENTIAL axes, the linear interpolation the X axis is performed.
FUNCTION This function is effective for the tapered constant helix machining in the
INTERPOLATION tool grinding machine.
This function is the best for the fluting with the end mill etc. and grinding.
(G02.3, G03.3)
(M series) X (Linear axis)

∆X

∆A A (Rotary axis)

Tapered constant helix machining Z

A
B
X
r
J

U
X

51
3. INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS NC FUNCTION B–63002EN/02

Format

Positive rotation (ω=0)

G02.3 X_Y_ Z_ I_ J_ K_ R_ F_ Q_ ;

Negative rotation (ω=1)

G03.3 X_Y_ Z_ I_ J_ K_ R_ F_ Q_ ;

X_ : Command terminal point by Absolute or incremental

Y_ : Command terminal point by Absolute or incremental
Z_ : Command terminal point by Absolute or incremental
I_ : Command of angle I (The command unit is 0.001 deg.
The range of command is 1 to ±89deg)
J_ : Command of angle J (The command unit is 0.001 deg.
The range of command is 1 to ±89deg)
K_ : Amount of division of the linear axis in the exponential function
interpolation (amount of span). The command range is a
positive value.)
R_ : Command of constant value R in the exponential function
interpolation.
F_ : Command of initial feed rate.
The command is the same as the normal F code. The feed rate
shall be given by the synthesized speed including the rotary
axis.
Q_ : Command of feed rate at terminal point.
The command unit is based on the reference axis. Within the
CNC, the tool is interpolated between the initial feed rate (F_)
and final feed rate (Q_) depending on the amount of linear axis
travel.

Explanations The exponential function relation expression between the linear axis and
the rotary axis is defined as in the following :
 1
X()  R
(e K–1)
. . . . . Travel of linear axis (1)
tan(I)

A()  (–1) 
360
 . . . . . Travel of rotation axis (2)

2
K= tan (J)
tan (I)

ω=0 or 1
R, I, J are constant and θ is the angle (radian) of rotation.
Also from the equation (1),
X
tan(I)
(X)  K
n {  1}
R
Thus, when the tool moves from X1 to X2 along the linear axis, the angle
moved about the rotation axis is calculated as follows:

X 2
tan(I) X
tan(I)

  K
{ n (  1)  n ( 1  1) }
R R

Specify formulas (1) and (2) in commands using the format described
above.

52
B–63002EN/02 NC FUNCTION 3. INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS

3.11 M series Either of two types of machining can be selected, depending on the
program command.
SMOOTH
For those portions where the accuracy of the figure is critical, such as
INTERPOLATION at corners, machining is performed exactly as specified by the program
(G05.1) (M series) command.
For those portions having a large radius of curvature where a smooth
figure must becreated, points along the machining path are
interpolated with a smooth curve, calculated from the polygonal lines
specified with the program command (smooth interpolation).
In smooth interpolation mode, the CNC automatically determines,
according to the program command, whether an accurate figure is
required, such as at corners, or a smooth figure is required where the
radius of curvature is large. If a block specifies a travel distance or
direction which differs greatly from that in the preceding block, smooth
interpolation is not performed for that block. Linear interpolation is
performed exactly as specified by the program command. Programming
is thus very simple.
Examples

Interpolated by smooth curve

N17

N16
N15 N14 N13 N12
N11
N1
N2 N10
N3 N4 N5 N6 N7

N8 N9

Interpolated by smooth curve Linear interpolation

Linear interpolation

N17

N16
N15 N14 N13 N12
N1 N11

N2 N10
N3 N4 N5 N6 N7

N8 N9

Smooth interpolation can be specified in high–speed contour control

mode (between G05 P10000 and G05 P0). For details of high–speed
contour control, see Section 20.6.
Format Starting of smooth interpolation mode
G05.1 Q2X0Y0Z0;

Cancelation of smooth interpolation mode

G05.1 Q 0φ;

53
3. INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS NC FUNCTION B–63002EN/02

3.12 In helical interpolation, when pulses are distributed with one of the
circular interpolation axes set to a hypothetical axis, sine interpolation is
HYPOTHETICAL AXIS enable.
INTERPOLATION When one of the circular interpolation axes is set to a hypothetical axis,
(G07) pulse distribution causes the speed of movement along the remaining axis
to change sinusoidally. If the major axis for threading (the axis along
which the machine travels the longest distance) is set to a hypothetical
axis, threading with a fractional lead is enabled. The axis to be set as the
hypothetical axis is specified with G07.

 2
0 Z

2

Format
G07  0; Hypothetical axis setting
G07  1; Hypothetical axis cancel
Where,  is any one of the addresses of the controlled axes.

54
B–63002EN/02 NC FUNCTION 3. INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS

3.13 M series Spiral interpolation is enabled by specifying the circular interpolation

command together with a desired number of revolutions or a desired
SPIRAL increment (decrement) for the radius per revolution.
INTERPOLATION, Conical interpolation is enabled by specifying the spiral interpolation
CONICAL command together with one or two additional axes of movement, as well
as a desired increment (decrement) for the position along the additional
INTERPOLATION (M
axes per spiral revolution.
series) Spiral interpolation and conical interpolation do not support bell–shaped
acceleration/deceleration after interpolation for cutting feed.

Spiral interpolation

+Y

+X

Conical interpolation

+Z

+Y

+X

55
3. INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS NC FUNCTION B–63002EN/02

Format

Spiral interpolation

Xp–Yp plane

G02
G17 X_ Y_ I_ J_ Q_ L_ F_ ;
G03

Zp–Xp plane
G02
G18 Z_ X_ K_ I_ Q_ L_ F_ ;
G03

Yp–Zp plane
G02
G19 Y_ Z_ J_ K_ Q_ L_ F_ ;
G03

X,Y,Z : Coordinates of the end point

L : Number of revolutions (positive value without a decimal point)
Q : Radius increment or decrement per spiral revolution
I, J, K : Signed distance from the start point to the center (same as the
distance specified for circular interpolation)
F : Feedrate

Conical interpolation

Xp–Yp plane
G02
G17 X_ Y_ I_ J_ Q_ L_ F_ ;
G03

Zp–Xp plane
G02
G18 Z_ X_ K_ I_ Q_ L_ F_ ;
G03

Yp–Zp plane
G02
G19 Y_ Z_ J_ K_ Q_ L_ F_ ;
G03

X,Y,Z : Coordinates of the end point

L : Number of revolutions (positive value without a decimal point)
Q : Radius increment or decrement per spiral revolution
I, J, K : Two of the three values represent a signed vector from the start
point to the center. The remaining value is a height increment or
decrement per spiral revolution in conical interpolation
When the Xp–Yp plane is selected:
The I and J values represent a signed vector from the start point
to the center.
The K value represents a height increment or decrement per
spiral revolution.
F : Feedrate (determined by taking movement along the linear axes
into consideration)

56
B–63002EN/02 NC FUNCTION 3. INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS

3.14 Many computer–aided design (CAD) systems used to design metal dies
for automobiles and airplanes utilize non–uniform rational B–spline
NURBS (NURBS) to express a sculptured surface or curve for the metal dies.
INTERPOLATION
(G06.2) This function enables NURBS curve expression to be directly specified
to the CNC. This eliminates the need for approximating the NURBS
curve with minute line segments. This offers the following advantages:
1. No error due to approximation of a NURBS curve by small line
segments
2. Short part program
3. No break between blocks when small blocks are executed at high
speed
4. No need for high–speed transfer from the host computer to the CNC
When this function is used, a computer–aided machining (CAM) system
creates a NURBS curve according to the NURBS expression output from
the CAD system, after compensating for the length of the tool holder, tool
diameter, and other tool elements. The NURBS curve is programmed in
the NC format by using these three defining parameters: control point,
weight, and knot.

CAD (Designing a metal die)

Generating a metal die surface

(NURBS surface or curve)

CAM (Creating an NC part program)

Studying the machining

method and others

Tool compensation file

NC part program after tool compensation

(NURBS curve)

NURBS curve (control point, weight, knot)

CNC equipment Machine tool

Fig. 3.14 NC part program for machining a metal die according to a

NURBS curve

57
3. INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS NC FUNCTION B–63002EN/02

NURBS interpolation must be specified in high–precision contour

control mode (between G05 P10000 and G05 P0). The CNC executes
NURBS interpolation while smoothly accelerating or decelerating the
movement so that the acceleration on each axis will not exceed the
allowable maximum acceleration of the machine. In this way, the CNC
automatically controls the speed in order to prevent excessive strain being
imposed on the machine.

Format

G05 P10000 ; (Start high–precision contour control mode)

...
G06.2 [P_] K_ X_ Y_ Z_ [R_ ] [F_ ] ;
K_ X_ Y_ Z_ [R_ ] ;
K_ X_ Y_ Z_ [R_ ] ;
K_ X_ Y_ Z_ [R_ ] ;
...
K_ X_ Y_ Z_ [R_ ] ;
K_ ;
...
K_ ;

G01 ...
...G05 P0 ; (End high–precision contour control mode)

G06.2 : Start NURBS interpolation mode

P_ : Rank of NURBS curve
X_ Y_ Z_ : Control point
R_ : Weight
K_ : Knot
F_ : Feedrate

58
B–63002EN/02 NC FUNCTION 4. THREAD CUTTING

4 THREAD CUTTING

59
4. THREAD CUTTING NC FUNCTION B–63002EN/02

4.1 By feeding the tool synchronizing with the spindle rotation, thread
cutting of the specified lead is performed. In addition to straight threads,
EQUAL LEAD taper threads and scroll threads can be cut with equal leads.
THREAD CUTTING
L
(G33) (WITH G CODE L

SYSTEM A: G32)

Straight thread

L Taper thread

Scroll thread

Format
G33 IP_ F_ :
F_ : Lead along the long axis
(axis having the largest amount of travel)

Explanations To form a single thread, threading is generally performed several times

from rough machining to finish machining along the same path.
Threading starts when the one-revolution signal from the position coder
attached to the spindle is detected. So threading always starts at the same
point on the circumference of the workpiece, and threading is performed
along the same path on the workpiece. In this case, however, the shaft
must rotate at a constant speed during operations from rough machining
to finish machining. If the spindle speed changes, an accurate thread may
not be produced.
The following shows the specifiable lead range:
M series Specifiable lead range
Metric input F1 to F50000 (0.01 to 500.00mm)
Inch input F1 to F99999 (0.0001 to 9.9999inch)

T series Specifiable lead range

Metric input 0.0001 to 500.0000mm
Inch input 0.000001 to 9.999999inch

NOTE
Leads exceeding the maximum cutting feed speed when
converted to per minute feed speed cannot be specified.

60
B–63002EN/02 NC FUNCTION 4. THREAD CUTTING

4.2 T series
MULTIPLE–THREAD
CUTTING (G33)
(T series)

Multiple–thread screws

Format
Constant–lead threading

G33 IP_ F_ Q_ ;
G33 IP_ Q_ ;
IP _ : End point
F_ : Lead in longitudinal direction
Q_ : Threading start angle

4.3 T series Variable lead thread cutting can be done by commanding long axis
direction lead and lead increase/decrease per spindle rotation.
VARIABLE LEAD
THREAD CUTTING
(G34) (T series)

Format
G34 IP_ F_ K_ :
F_ : Long axis direction lead at start point
K_ : Lead increase/decrease per spindle rotation

Command value range of

lead increase/decrease (K) per spindle rotation:

Metric input ±0.0001 to ±500.0000 mm/rev

Inch input ±0.000001 to ±9.999999 inch/re

61
4. THREAD CUTTING NC FUNCTION B–63002EN/02

4.4 T series Continuous thread cutting in which thread cutting command block is
continuously commanded is available. As it is controlled so that the
CONTINUOUS spindle synchronism shift (occurred when shifting from one block to
THREAD CUTTING another) is kept to a minimum, special threads like threads which leads
(T series) or shape change during the cycle can also be cut.

G33 G33
G33

4.5 T series Using the G35 and G36 commands, a circular thread, having the specified
lead in the direction of the major axis, can be machined.
CIRCULAR
THREADING L
(G35, G36) (T series)

Circular thread

Format
G35 X (U) _ Z (W) _ I_K_ F_ Q_
G36 R___

G35 : Clockwise circular threading command

G36 : Counterclockwise circular threading command

X (U) : Specify the arc end point (in the same way as for G02,
G03).
Z (W)

I, K : Specify the arc center relative to the start point, using

relative coordinates (in the same way as for G02, G03).
R : Specify the arc radius.
F : Specify the lead in the direction of the major axis.
Q : Specify the shift of the threading start angle (0 to 360°
in units of 0.001°)

62
B–63002EN/02 NC FUNCTION 5. FEED FUNCTIONS

5 FEED FUNCTIONS

63
5. FEED FUNCTIONS NC FUNCTION B–63002EN/02

5.1 Positioning of each axis is done in rapid motion by the positioning

command (G00).
RAPID TRAVERSE There is no need to program rapid traverse rate, because the rates are set
in the parameter (per axis).
Least command increment Rapid traverse rate range

0.001mm, deg 30 to 240000mm/min, deg/min

0.0001mm, deg 30 to 100000mm/min, deg/min
0.0001inch 3.0 to 9600.0inch/min
0.00001inch 3.0 to 4000.0inch/min

NOTE
The above feed rates are limits according to the NC’s
interpolation capacity when the high-resolution detection
interface is equipped. When the whole system is
considered, there are also limits according to the servo
system. For details, refer to Appendix A.

64
B–63002EN/02 NC FUNCTION 5. FEED FUNCTIONS

5.2 Feed rates of linear interpolation (G01), and circular interpolation (G02,
G03) are commanded with numbers after the F code.
CUTTING FEED RATE

5.2.1 In cutting feed, it is controlled so that speed of the tangential direction is

Tangential Speed always the same commanded speed.
Constant Control

5.2.2 Cutting feed rate upper limit can be set as parameters. If the actual cutting
Cutting Feed Rate feed rate (feed rate with override) is commanded exceeding the upper
limit, it is clamped to a speed not exceeding the upper limit.
Clamp

5.2.3 With the per minute feed mode G94, tool feed rate per minute is directly
Per Minute Feed (G94) commanded by numerical value after F.
Least command increment Cutting feed rate range

0.001mm, deg 1 to 240000mm/min, deg/min

0.0001mm, deg 1 to 100000mm/min, deg/min
0.0001inch 0.01 to 9600.0inch/min
0.00001inch 0.01 to 4000.0inch/min

NOTE
The above feed rates are limits according to the NC’s
interpolation capacity. When the whole system is
considered, there are also limits according to the servo
system. For details, see Appendix A.

65
5. FEED FUNCTIONS NC FUNCTION B–63002EN/02

5.2.4 With the per revolution feed mode G95, tool feed rate per revolution of
Per Revolution Feed the spindle is directly commanded by numeral after F. A position coder
must be mounted on the spindle.
(G95) For the T series, however, the feed–per–revolution command can be
enabled by setting the corresponding parameter accordingly, even when
the position coder is not installed (feed per revolution without position
coder).
M series Least command increment Cutting feed rate range

0.001mm, deg 0.01 to 500.00mm/rev, deg/rev

0.0001mm, deg 0.01 to 500.00mm/rev, deg/rev
0.0001inch 0.0001 to 9.9999inch/rev
0.00001inch 0.0001 to 9.9999inch/rev

T series Least command increment Cutting feed rate range

0.001mm, deg 0.0001 to 500.0000mm/rev, deg/rev

0.0001mm, deg 0.0001 to 500.0000mm/rev, deg/rev
0.0001inch 0.000001 to 9.999999inch/rev
0.00001inch 0.000001 to 9.999999inch/rev

NOTE
The above feed rates are limits according to the NC’s
interpolation capacity. When the whole system is
considered there are also limits according to the servo
system. For details, See Appendix A.

5.2.5 M series Inverse time feed mode is commanded by G93, and inverse time by F
Inverse Time Feed code. Inverse time is commanded with the following value in a 1/min
unit.
(G93) (M series) In linear interpolation F= Speed/distance
In circular interpolation F= Speed/radius
When F0 is commanded, alarm occurs.

5.2.6 M series When a 1-digit number from 1 to 9 is commanded after the F, the preset
F1–digit Feed (M speed corresponding the 1-digit number commanded is set as feed rate.
When F0 is commanded, rapid traverse is set.
series) Set the F1-digit feed rate change input signal on from the machine side,
and rotate the manual pulse generator. Feed rate of the currently selected
speed can be changed.
Feed rate set or changed will be memorized even after power is turned
off.

66
B–63002EN/02 NC FUNCTION 5. FEED FUNCTIONS

5.3
OVERRIDE

5.3.1 The per minute feed (G94) and per rotation feed (G95) can be overrided
Feed Rate Override by:
0 to 254% (per every 1%).
In inverse time, feed rate converted to per minute feed is overridden. Feed
rate override cannot be performed to F1-digit feed.
Feed rate also cannot be performed to functions as thread cutting and
tapping in which override is inhibited.

5.3.2 Cutting feed rate can be overrided by:

0 to 254% (per every 1%)
Second Feed Rate
A second override can be performed on feed rats once overrided.
Override No override can be performed on functions as thread cutting and tapping
in which override is inhibited.
This function is used for controlling feed rate in adaptive control, etc.

5.3.3 Rapid traverse rate can be overridden by:

Rapid Traverse F0, 25%, 50%, 100%.
F0: A constant speed per axis can be set by parameter
Override An override of 0% to 100% can be applied in 1% steps using a signal.

5.3.4 Feed rate override and the second feed rate override can be clamped to
Override Cancel 100% by a signal from the machine side.

5.3.5 The manual continuous feedrate and incremental feed rate can be
Jog Override overridden by:
0% to 655.34% (in steps of 0.01%)

67
5. FEED FUNCTIONS NC FUNCTION B–63002EN/02

5.4 Acceleration and deceleration is performed when starting and ending

movement, resulting in smooth start and stop.
AUTOMATIC Automatic acceleration/deceleration is also performed when feed rate
ACCELERATION/ changes, so change in speed is also smoothly done.
DECELERATION Rapid traverse : Linear acceleration/deceleration
(time constant is parameter set per axis)
Cutting feed : Exponential acceleration/deceleration
(time constant is parameter set per axis)
Jogging : Exponential acceleration/deceleration
(time constant is parameter set per axis)

Rapid traverse
FR : Rapid traverse
FR TR : Acceleration/
deceleration time
constant

0
Time
TR TR

Jog feed
FC : Feed rate
FC TC : Acceleration/
deceleration time
constant

0
Time
TC TC

Feed, Dry run

FJ : Jog feed rate
FJ TJ : Jog feed time
constant
FL : Low feed rate after
deceleration

FL
0
Time
TJ TJ

68
B–63002EN/02 NC FUNCTION 5. FEED FUNCTIONS

5.5 The function for rapid traverse bell–shaped acceleration/deceleration

increases or decreases the rapid traverse feedrate smoothly.
RAPID TRAVERSE This reduces the shock to the machine system due to changing
BELL–SHAPED acceleration when the feedrate is changed.
ACCELERATION/ As compared with linear acceleration/deceleration, bell–shaped
acceleration/deceleration allows smaller time constants to be set,
DECELERATION
reducing the time required for acceleration/deceleration.

Linear acceleration/deceleration Bell–shaped acceleration/

for rapid traverse deceleration for rapid traverse

Feedrate

Feedrate
0 0
Time Time
Acceleration

Acceleration
0 0
Time Time

69
5. FEED FUNCTIONS NC FUNCTION B–63002EN/02

5.6
LINEAR
ACCELERATION/ Speed

DECELERATION
AFTER CUTTING
FEED
INTERPOLATION

Time
TC TC

In the linear acceleration/deceleration, the delay for the command caused

by the acceleration/ deceleration becomes 1/2 compared with that in
exponential acceleration/deceleration, substantially reducing the time
required for acceleration and deceleration.
Also, the radius direction error in the circular interpolation caused by the
acceleration/deceleration is substantially reduced.

Z ∆r ∆r: Maximum value of radius

error (mm)
Command
path v : Feedrate (mm/sec)
r : Circular radius (mm)
Actual T1 : Acceleration/
path deceleration time
r constant (sec)
T2 : Time constant of servo
motor (sec)

The maximum value of error in this radius direction is obtained

approximately by the following equation.
2

r  (1 T 1  1 T2 ) Vr
2 2
. . . . . For exponential acceleration/deceleration
2 2
2

r  ( 1 T 1  1 T2 ) Vr . . . . . For linear acceleration/deceleration after
2 2
24 2 cutting feed interpolation
Consequently, in case of the linear acceleration/deceleration after
interpolation, if an error caused by the servo loop time constant is
excluded, the radius directional error will be reduced to 1/12, compared
with the exponential acceleration/deceleration.

70
B–63002EN/02 NC FUNCTION 5. FEED FUNCTIONS

5.7
BELL–SHAPED
Feedrate
ACCELERATION/
B
DECELERATION F
AFTER CUTTING
FEED
INTERPOLATION F/2 A

0 TC/2 Time
TC TC

As shown above in the quadratic curve, it is possible to accelerate and

decelerate the cutting feedrate.
When the acceleration and deceleration section are connected, the
composed curve shapes just like a hanging bell. That is why this kind of
acceleration/deceleration is called bell–shaped acceleration/deceleration.
Considering a time constant as Tc (time spent to accelerate from feedrate
0 up to commanded feedrate F or time spent to decelerate from
commanded feedrate F down to feedrate 0), feedrate accelerates up to 1/2
of the commanded feedrate (F/2) for 1/2 of the time constant (Tc/2). The
acceleration/deceleration curve 0A shown in the figure above can be
expressed by the following equation :
f (t)  2F2 t 2
TC
The curve AB and 0A are symmetric with respect to point A.
The feature of this acceleration/deceleration is that the feedrate change is
small near feedrate 0 and the commanded feedrate.

71
5. FEED FUNCTIONS NC FUNCTION B–63002EN/02

5.8 In response to the cutting feed command , the feedrate before

interpolation, the command feedrate can be directly accelerated/
LINEAR decelerated. This enables a machined shape error caused by the delay of
ACCELERATION/ acceleration/deceleration to be eliminated.
DECELERATION
BEFORE CUTTING
FEED
INTERPOLATION
Exponential
acceleration/deceleration
after cutting feed
interpolation

Interpolation Acceleration/
f (pulse distribution) f
deceleration control

Servo
control Motor
t t
TC

Linear acceleration/
deceleration after cutting
feed interpolation

Interpolation
f (pulse distribution) f

Servo
control Motor
t t

TC TC

Linear acceleration/
deceleration before
cutting feed interpolation

Interpolation (Pulse destribution)

f

Acceleration/decel- Servo
eration applied to control Motor
feedrate command t

TC TC

72
B–63002EN/02 NC FUNCTION 5. FEED FUNCTIONS

5.9 T series Generally, the CNC does not zero the feedrate at the interface of two
blocks during cutting feed.
ERROR DETECTION Because of this, a corner of a tool path may be rounded.
(T series)
This part causes the corner of the tool
path to be rounded.

Feedrate
Time

Programmed tool path

Actual tool–center path

If the error detect signal is used, it is possible to specify that

a block not be started until the acceleration/deceleration
of the previous block has been completed.
Feedrate

Time

NOTE
If the error detect signal is on, a cutting block is not executed
until the acceleration/deceleration of the previous cutting
block has been completed.
This function alone cannot prevent corner rounding due to
delay caused by the servo motor, however.
To prevent corner rounding due to delay caused by the
servo motor, use the in–position check function together
with this function.
After acceleration/
deceleration After servo motor delay
Feedrate

Range od in–position check Time

73
5. FEED FUNCTIONS NC FUNCTION B–63002EN/02

5.10 M series Move command in blocks commanded with G09 decelerates at the end
point, and in–position check is performed. G09 command is not
EXACT STOP (G09) necessary for deceleration at the end point for positioning (G00) and
(M series) in–position check is also done automatically. This function is used when
sharp edges are required for workpiece corners in cutting feed.

Exact stop off

Exact stop on (The in-position

check is performed at the end of
a block.)

5.11 M series When G61 is commanded, deceleration of cutting feed command at the
end point and in–position check is performed per block thereafter. This
EXACT STOP MODE G61 is valid till G64 (cutting mode), G62 (automatic corner override), or
(G61) (M series) G63 (tapping mode) is commanded.

5.12 M series When G64 is commanded, deceleration at the end point of each block
thereafter is not performed and cutting goes on to the next block. This
CUTTING MODE (G64) command is valid till G61 (exact stop mode), G62 (automatic corner
(M series) override), or G63 (tapping mode) is commanded.

5.13 M series When G63 is commanded, feed rate override is ignored (always regarded
as 100%), and feed hold also becomes invalid. Cutting feed does not
TAPPING MODE (G63) decelerate at the end of block to transfer to the next block. And in-tapping
(M series) signal is issued during tapping operation. This G63 is valid till G61
(exact stop mode), G62 (automatic corner override), or G64 (cutting
mode) is commanded.

5.14 M series When G62 is commanded during cutter compensation, cutting feed rate
is automatically overridden at corner. The cutting quantity per unit time
AUTOMATIC CORNER of the corner is thus controlled not to increase. This G62 is valid till G61
OVERRIDE (G62) (exact stop mode), G64 (cutting mode), or G63 (tapping mode) is
(M series) commanded.

74
B–63002EN/02 NC FUNCTION 5. FEED FUNCTIONS

5.15 With the G04 command, shifting to the next block can be delayed.
When commanded with a per minute feed mode (G94), shifting to the next
DWELL (G04) block can be delayed for the commanded minutes.
When commanded with a per rotation feed mode (G95), shifting to the
next block can be delayed till the spindle rotates for the commanded
times.
Dwell may always be performed by time irrespective of G94 and G95 by
parameter selection.

Format
Per second dwell

G94 G04 P_ ;
X_
P_ or X_ : Dwell time commanded in seconds (0.001-99999.999 sec)

Per revolution dwell

G95 G04 P_ ;
X_
P_ or X_ : Spindle rotation angle commanded in rev.
(0.001-99999.999 rev)

5.16 When a rapid traverse command is specified during automatic operation,

the function for positioning by optimum acceleration can be used to adjust
POSITIONING BY the rapid traverse rate, time constant, and loop gain, according to the
OPTIMUM amount of travel for the block. This reduces the time required for
ACCELERATION positioning and position check, therefore reducing the cycle time.
When rapid traverse is specified in automatic operation, the function
adjusts the rapid traverse rate, time constant, and loop gain to one of seven
levels, according to the amount of travel for the block. The relationship
between the amount of travel and the corresponding rapid traverse rate,
time constant, and loop gain is specified in parameters. This function is
not effective for cutting feed.

75
6. REFERENCE POSITION NC FUNCTION B–63002EN/02

6 REFERENCE POSITION

76
B–63002EN/02 NC FUNCTION 6. REFERENCE POSITION

6.1 Positioning to the reference position can be done by manual operation.

With jogging mode (JOG), manual reference position return (ZRN)
MANUAL signals, and signal for selecting manual reference position return axis (±J1
REFERENCE to ±J8) on, the tool the machine is turned on, it decelerates, and when it
POSITION RETURN is turned off again, it stops at the first grid point, and reference position
return end signal is output. This point is the reference position.
By performing manual reference position return, the machine coordinate
system and the work coordinate system is established.
There is only one method available to perform manual reference point
return:
In the grid method, a certain grid of the position detection is appointed as
the reference position. The reference position position can be shifted by
the grid shift function.

6.2 This function moves the machine to around the reference position set for
each axis in the manual continuous feed mode. Then it sets the reference
SETTING position for the machine in the manual reference position return mode
THE REFERENCE without the deceleration signal for reference position return. With this
POSITION WITHOUT function, the machine reference position can be set at a given position
DOGS without the deceleration signal for reference position return.

Explanations
Setting the reference 1 Place the machine in the manual continuous feed mode, and perform
position positioning to a position near but not exceeding the reference position
from reference position return direction (setting by parameter).
2 Enter the manual reference position return mode, then input the feed
axis direction select signal (+) or (–) for the axis.
3 Positioning is made at the grid point located nearest from the current
point to reference position return direction. This point is recorded as
the reference position. If the absolute-position detector is provided,
the set reference position is retained after the power is turned off. In
this case, when the power is turned on again, there is no need for setting
the reference position again.
Reference position 1 After the reference position is set, when the feed axis select signal (+)
return or (–) is input for the axis in the reference position return mode,
reference position return operation is performed in rapid traverse
regardless of which signal (+) or (–) is input.

77
6. REFERENCE POSITION NC FUNCTION B–63002EN/02

6.3
AUTOMATIC
REFERENCE
POSITION RETURN
(G28, G29(ONLY FOR
M SERIES ))

Return to reference With the G28 command, the commanded axis is positioned to the
position (G28) reference position via the commanded point. After positioning, the
reference position return end lamp lights. If G28 was commanded when
reference position return is not performed after power on, reference
position return is done in the same sequence as the manual reference
position return.

G28 IP _ ;

IP : Command intermediate point

Return from reference With the G29 command, the commanded axis is positioned to the point
position (G29) commanded by G29, via the intermediate point commanded by G28.
(M series)

G29 IP _ ;

Reference position
Y
R
Suppose tool change
was performed at R.
The programmer
need not calculate a
concrete movement
B value between the
Intermediate intermediate point
A point and the reference
C position.

Example of use of G28 and G29

78
B–63002EN/02 NC FUNCTION 6. REFERENCE POSITION

6.4 This function is used to check whether the reference position return
command was performed correctly.
REFERENCE When G27 is commanded, the commanded axis is positioned to the
POSITION RETURN specified position, reference position return end signal is output if
CHECK (G27) reference position return is performed to the correct position, and alarm
arises it is not positioned correctly to the reference point.
This function is available after power is turned on an reference point
return is performed.

Format

G27 IP _ ;

6.5 With the G30 command, the commanded axis is positioned to the 2nd,
3rd, or the 4th reference position, via the commanded point. 2nd, 3rd, or
2ND, 3RD AND 4TH 4th reference position return end signal is output when positioning ends.
REFERENCE Set the 2nd, 3rd, and 4th reference position position as parameters.
POSITION RETURN This function is available after power is turned on and reference position
return is performed.
(G30)
G29 can be used to return from the 2nd, 3rd, and 4th reference point (same
as reference position return, G28) (M series only).
This function can be used once reference position return has been
performed after power–on.

Format

P2
G30 P3 IP _ ;
P4
P2, P3, P4: Select from 2nd, 3rd, or 4th reference positions.
If not selected, 2nd reference position return is
automatically selected.

79
6. REFERENCE POSITION NC FUNCTION B–63002EN/02

6.6 It is possible to return the tool to the floating reference position by

commanding the G30.1.
FLOATING The floating reference position is located on the machine and can be a
REFERENCE reference position of some sort of machine operation. It is not always a
POSITION RETURN fixed position but may vary in some cases. The floating reference
position can be set using the soft keys of MDI and can be memorized even
(G30.1)
if the power is turned off.
Generally, the position where the tools can be replaced on machining
center, milling machine is a set position on top of the machinery. The
tools cannot be replaced at any machine angle. Normally the tool
replacement position is at any of the No. 1 to No. 4 reference position.
The tool can be restored to these positions easily by G30 command.
However, depending on the machine, the tools can be replaced at any
position as long as it does not contact the work piece.
In lathes, the tool can generally be changed at any position unless it
touches the workpiece or tailstock.
For machinery such as these, in order to reduce the cycle time, it is
advantageous to replace tools at a position as close as possible to the work.
For this purpose, tool replacement position must be changed for each
work shape and this feature can be easily realized by this function.
Namely, the tool replacement position which is suitable for works can be
memorized as the floating reference position and it is possible to return
the tool to the tool replacement position easily by commanding the
G30.1.

Format
G30.1 IP _ ;

IP : It is the intermediate point to the floating reference position and is

commanded by an absolute value or an incremental value.

Explanations When the G30.1 is commanded, the axis commanded is set to the
intermediate point with rapid traverse at first and then is set to the floating
reference position from the intermediate point with rapid traverse. The
positioning to the intermediate point or to the floating point is performed
at rapid traverse for each axis (non-linear positioning). The floating
reference position return completion signal is output after completing the
floating reference position return.

Examples
G30.1 G90 X50.0 Y40.0 ;
Y
Intermediate point (50, 40)

Floating reference position

Workpiece

80
B–63002EN/02 NC FUNCTION 6. REFERENCE POSITION

6.7 For reference position return using the grid method, you can shift the
reference position without having to move the deceleration dog, simply
REFERENCE by setting the amount of shift in a parameter.
POSITION SHIFT The time required to adjust the reference position is thus greatly reduced
because the deceleration dog need not be adjusted.

Direction of reference
LDEC LSFT position return
Deceleration dog

Machine
Grid point zero point
LSFT : Reference position shift
LDEC : Distance the tool moves between the deceleration dog being
turned off and the first grid point encountered subsequently
(grid point when the reference position shift is 0)
(LDEC is displayed on the diagnostic screen.)

6.8 The butt–type reference position setting function automates the setting of
a reference position by butting the tool against a mechanical stopper on
BUTT–TYPE an axis. This function is provided to eliminate the variations in reference
REFERENCE position setting that arise when the procedure is performed by different
POSITION SETTING operators, and to minimize the amount of work involved in making fine
adjustments after reference position setting.
Select the axis for which the reference position is to be set, then perform
cycle start. The following operations are performed automatically:
1. The torque (force) of the selected axis is reduced so that the butting
feedrate is constant. The tool is butted against the mechanical stopper.
Then, the tool is drawn back a parameter–set amount from the
mechanical stopper.
2. Again, the torque (force) of the selected axis is reduced, then the tool
is butted against the mechanical stopper. Then, the tool is drawn back
a parameter–set amount from the mechanical stopper.
3. The point on the axis to which the tool is drawn back is set as the
reference position.

81
6. REFERENCE POSITION NC FUNCTION B–63002EN/02

6.9 The linear scale with absolute addressing reference marks has reference
marks (one–rotation signals) at intervals that change at a constant rate.
LINEAR SCALE WITH By determining the reference mark interval, the corresponding absolute
ABSOLUTE position can be deduced. The CNC makes a small movement along an
ADDRESSING axis to measure the one–rotation signal interval, then calculates the
absolute position. The reference position can be established without
REFERENCE MARKS
performing positioning to the reference position.

8.0 42.0 8.2 41.8 8.4 41.6 8.6 41.4

Reference marks

Reference mark 1 50.0

Reference mark 2
50.2

Fig. 6.9 Sample linear scale with absolute addressing reference marks

82
B–63002EN/02 NC FUNCTION 7. COORDINATE SYSTEMS

7 COORDINATE SYSTEMS

By teaching the CNC the position the tool is to arrive, the CNC moves
the tool to that position. The position is specified using coordinates on a
certain coordinate system.
There are three types of coordinate systems.
Machine coordinate system
Workpiece coordinate system
Local coordinate system
As necessary, one of the above coordinate systems is used for specifying
coordinates for the target position of the tool.

83
7. COORDINATE SYSTEMS NC FUNCTION B–63002EN/02

7.1 Machine coordinate system is a coordinate system set with a zero point
proper to the machine system.
MACHINE A coordinate system in which the reference point becomes the
COORDINATE parameter-preset coordinate value when manual reference point return is
SYSTEM (G53) performed, is set. With G53 command, the machine coordinate system
is selected and the axis is able to be moved in rapid traverse to the position
expressed by the machine coordinates.

Format

G53 IP _ ;

84
B–63002EN/02 NC FUNCTION 7. COORDINATE SYSTEMS

7.2 A coordinate system in which the zero point is set to a fixed point on the
workpiece, to make programming simple.
WORKPIECE A workpiece coordinate system may be set by using one of the following
COORDINATE methods:
SYSTEM (1) Using G92 (G50 for T series with G code system A)
(2) Automatic setting
(3) Using G54 to G59
When (1) is used, a workpiece coordinate system is established using the
numeric value programmed after G92.
When (2) is used, a workpiece coordinate system is automatically
established upon a manual reference position return, as specified in a
parameter.
When (3) is used, six workpiece coordinate systems must be set from the
MDI panel in advance. The workpiece coordinate system to be used is
selected by specifying a code selected from G54 to G59.

7.2.1
Setting a Workpiece
Coordinate System
(Using G92)
(with G Code System A:
G50)
Format

(G90) G92 IP _ ;

Examples
Example 1 By using the above command, a workpiece coordinate system can be set
so that the current tool position is at a specified position.

M series T series
Z X

ÅÅ
23.0
ÅÅ 375.1 Start
point
φ128.7
Z
X
0 25.2

G92 X25.2 Z23.0 ; Reference point

G92 128.7 Z375.1 ;
(diameter programming)

85
7. COORDINATE SYSTEMS NC FUNCTION B–63002EN/02

Example 2 Set the reference point on the tool holder or turret as shown in the figure
below, then specify G92 at the beginning of the program. By specifying
an absolute command in this condition, the reference point is moved to
a specified position. To move the tool tip to a specified position,
compensate the distance between the reference point and the tool tip by
using tool length compensation (for the M system) or tool offset (for the
T system).

M series T series
Reference
point 700.0

1200.0
ÅÅ Start point

ÅÅ = reference

ÅÅ
position
φ1200.0
Z

X
0 600.0

G92 600.0 Z1200.0 ; G92 1200.0Z700.0 ;

Setting the start point at a given (diameter programming)
reference point on the tool hold- Setting the start point at a given reference
er point on the turret

When a new workpiece coordinate system is created by specifying G92,

it is determined so that a given point on the tool has a given coordinate
value. So, there is no need to be concerned with old workpiece coordinate
systems. Particularly when the start point for machining is determined
based on the workpiece, the G92 command is useful. In this case, a desired
coordinate system can newly be created even if an old workpiece
coordinate system is invalid.

Example 3 T series A workpiece coordinate system can be shifted by using the following
command:
(Shift of a workpiece When this command is specified, a new coordinate system is created so
coordinate system) that the current coordinate value (x, z) at a given point on the tool (for
example, the tool tip) becomes (x+u, z+w).
For the x and u values, diameters must be set if diameter programming
is specified, or radii must be set if radius programming is specified.

Format

(G91) G92 X(u) Z(w) ;

With G code system A: G50U(u)W(w);

86
B–63002EN/02 NC FUNCTION 7. COORDINATE SYSTEMS

Examples

ÅÅÅ
10.2

ÅÅÅ 30.56

ÅÅÅ
Z

When tool A is switched to tool B, G91 G92 X20.4 Z30.56 (diameter

programming) is specified.

7.2.2 When manual reference position return is performed, a workpiece

coordinate system can be set automatically so that the current tool
Automatic Coordinate
position at the reference position becomes a desired position which is set
System Setting using a parameter in advance. This functions as if G92IP__; were
specified at the reference position.
This function can be used when the workpiece coordinate system function
is not provided.

87
7. COORDINATE SYSTEMS NC FUNCTION B–63002EN/02

7.2.3
Setting a Workpiece
Coordinate System
(Using G54 to G59)
Explanations
Setting a workpiece Set six coordinate systems specific to the machine in advance. Then,
coordinate system select one of the six coordinate systems by using G54 to G59.

Format

G54 G54 Workpiece coordinate system 1

G55 G55 Workpiece coordinate system 2
G56 G56 Workpiece coordinate system 3
IP _ ; G57 Workpiece coordinate system 4
G57
G58 Workpiece coordinate system 5
G58 G59 Workpiece coordinate system 6
G59

Set the distance between the machine zero point and the zero point of each
of the six coordinate systems (offset from the workpiece zero point) in
advance.
There are two setting methods.
Using the MDI
Using a program (See Section 7.4.)
Workpiece coordinate systems 1 to 6 are established properly when return
to the reference position is performed after power is turned on.
Immediately after power is turned on, G54 is selected.

Shift of workpiece The six workpiece coordinate systems can be shifted by a specified
coordinate systems amount (external offset from the workpiece zero point).

Workpiece Workpiece Workpiece Workpiece

coordinate 1 coordinate 2 coordinate 3 coordinate 4
(G54) (G55) (G56) (G57)

ZOFS2
ZOFS3
ZOFS4
ZOFS1
Workpiece
coordinate 5
(G58)
EXOFS ZOFS5
Machine reference position
Workpiece
coordinate 6
ZOFS6 (G59)
EXOFS : External reference offset value
ZOFS1 to ZOFS6 : Workpiece reference position offset value

88
B–63002EN/02 NC FUNCTION 7. COORDINATE SYSTEMS

7.3 With G52 commanded, the local coordinate system with the commanded
position as zero point can be set. Once the local coordinate system is set,
LOCAL COORDINATE values specified in subsequent move commands are regarded as
SYSTEM (G52) coordinate values on that coordinate system. Coordinates once set is
valid till a new G52 is commanded. This is used when, for example,
programming of a part of the workpiece becomes easier if there is a zero
point besides the workpiece coordinates’ zero point.

(Local coordinate
system)
IP
Workpiece coordi-
nate system 1 (G54) (Local coordinate
system)
G55 IP
Workpiece G56
zero point off- G57
set value G58 Workpiece coordi-
nate system 6 (G59)

(Machine coordinate system)

Value set by
parameter Zero point of machine coordinate system
Reference position

Format

G52 IP _ ;

Explanations When local coordinate system is set, local coordinate system 1 - 6,

corresponding to workpiece coordinate system 1 - 6 is set. Distance
between zero points are all the same preset value.
If G52 IP0; is commanded, local coordinate system is canceled.

89
7. COORDINATE SYSTEMS NC FUNCTION B–63002EN/02

7.4 G10 command is used to change workpiece origin offsets.

When G10 is commanded in absolute command (G90), the commanded
WORKPIECE ORIGIN workpiece origin offsets becomes the new workpiece origin offsets, and
OFFSET VALUE when G10 is commanded in incremental command (G91), the currently
CHANGE set workpiece origin offsets plus the commanded workpiece origin
offsets becomes the new workpiece offsets.
(PROGRAMMABLE
DATA INPUT) (G10)

Format
G10 L2 Pp IP _ ;

p : Specification the external workpiece origin offset value

p=1–6 : Specifiration the workpiece origin offset value corresponded
to workpiece coordinate systems 1–6
IP : Workpiece origin offset value

90
B–63002EN/02 NC FUNCTION 7. COORDINATE SYSTEMS

7.5 M series Forty-eight workpiece coordinate systems can be added when existing
six workpiece coordinate systems (G54 - G59) are not enough for the
ADDITIONAL operation. Make a command as follows for selection of workpiece
WORKPIECE coordinate system.
COORDINATE Up to 300 additional workpiece coordinate systems can be used.
SYSTEMS
(G54.1 OR G54)
(M series)
Format
G54.1 Pp IP _ ; or G54 Pp IP _ ;

P: 1-48 or 1–300 Number of the additional workpiece coordinate system

The following are the methods of setting and changing of the workpiece
origin offset value as well as those used for the existing workpiece
coordinate systems of G54 to G59.
Method via MDI
Method via program
G10L20Pp;
Custom macro

91
7. COORDINATE SYSTEMS NC FUNCTION B–63002EN/02

7.6 The workpiece coordinate system with its zero position away by the
workpiece zero offset amount from the machine coordinate system zero
WORKPIECE position is set by returning the tool to the reference point by a manual
COORDINATE operation. Also, when the absolute position detector is provided, the
SYSTEM PRESET workpiece coordinate system is automatically set by reading the machine
coordinate value from the detector when power on without performing
(G92.1)
manual reference point return operation. The set workpiece coordinate
may shift by any of the following commands or operation:
When manual interruption is performed with the manual absolute
signal off
When the travel command is performed by the machine lock
When axis travel is performed by the handle interrupt or auto/manual
simultaneous operation
When operation is performed by mirror image
When the setting of local coordinate system is performed by the G52
or change of workpiece coordinate system is performed by the G82
The workpiece coordinate system shifted by the above operation can be
preset by the G code instruction or MDI operation the same as
conventional manual reference point return.

Explanations
Workpiece coordinate The workpiece coordinate system can be preset by commanding the
system preset by G code
command
G92.1 IP 0 ;

IP 0 : The axis address to be preset the workpiece coordinate system

Uncommanded axis is not preset.

Workpiece coordinate The workpiece coordinate system can be preset by the MDI operation
system preset by MDI with soft keys.
operation

92
B–63002EN/02 NC FUNCTION 7. COORDINATE SYSTEMS

7.7 T series When the coordinate system actually set by the G50 command or the
automatic system settingdeviates from the programmed work system,the
WORKPIECE set coordinate system can be shifted.
COORDINATE Set the desired shift amount in the work coordinates system shift memory.
SYSTEM SHIFT
(T series) X
x X–Z : Coordinate system in programming
x–z : Current set coordinate system with shift amount 0

ÅÅÅ
(coordinate system to be modified by shifting)

ÅÅÅ
ÅÅÅ
O
ÅÅÅ z
Shift
Z
O

Set the shift amount from O to O in the work coordinate system shift memory.

Workpiece coordinate system shift

93
7. COORDINATE SYSTEMS NC FUNCTION B–63002EN/02

7.8 A plane subject to circular interpolation, cutter compensation, coordinate

system rotation, or drilling can be selected by specifying a G code.
PLANE SELECTION
(G17, G18, G19) G code Selected plane Xp Yp Zp

G17 Xp–Yp plane

X axis or an Y axis or an Z axis or an
G18 Zp–Xp plane axis parallel axis parallel axis parallel
to the X axis to the Y axis to the Z axis
G19 Yp–Zp plane

Explanations One of the existing parallel axes is determined by an axis address that
appears in the block for which G17, G18, or G19 is specified.

Example 1 When X and U, Y and V, and Z and W are parallel to each other,
respectively
G17 X_ Y_ . . . . XY plane
G17 U_ Y_ . . . . UY plane
G18 X_ W_ . . . WX plane
G18 U_ W_ . . . WU plane

Example 2 Planes remain unchanged in blocks for which G17, G18, or G19 is not
specified.

G18 X_ Z_ . . . . ZX plane
X_ Y_ . . . . Plane not changed (ZX plane)

Example 3 If G17, G18, or G19 is specified for a block, and no axis address is
specified in that block, the axis addresses for the basic three axes are
assumed to be omitted.

G17 . . . . . . . . . . XY plane
G17 X_ . . . . . . . . XY plane
G17 U_ . . . . . . . . UY plane

NOTE
A parameter is used to specify which axis, X, Y, or Z the
additional axis is parallel to. The move command functions
regardless of the plane selection.
For example, suppose that the following is specified:
G17 Z_ ;
Axis Z does not exist on the XpYp plane. The XY plane is
just selected, and the Z axis is moved regardless of the
plane.

94
 8. COORDINATE VALUE AND
B–63002EN/02 NC FUNCTION DIMENSION

8 COORDINATE VALUE AND DIMENSION

95
8. COORDINATE VALUE AND
DIMENSION NC FUNCTION B–63002EN/02

8.1 There are two ways to command travels to the axes; the absolute
command, and the incremental command. In the absolute command,
ABSOLUTE AND coordinate value of the end point is programmed; in the incremental
INCREMENTAL command, move distance of the axis itself is programmed.
PROGRAMMING G90 and G91 are used to command absolute or incremental command.
G90 : Absolute command
(G90, G91)
G91 : Incremental command

Y
End point
70.0

30.0 Start point

40.0 100.0

For the above figure, incremental command programming results in:

G91 X60.0 Y40.0 ;
while absolute command programming results in:
G90 X40.0 Y70.0 ;
Absolute/incremental command, when G code system A at T series is
selected, is not distinguished by G90/G91 but is distinguished by the
address word.
For the A and B axes, no incremental commands are provided.

Absolute command Incremental command Notes

X U X axis move command

Z W Z axis move command

Y V Y axis move command

C H C axis move command

A None A axis move command

B None B axis move command

Example
X_ W_ ;

Incremental command (Z axis move command)

Absolute command (X axis move command)

96
 8. COORDINATE VALUE AND
B–63002EN/02 NC FUNCTION DIMENSION

8.2 M series The end point coordinate value can be input in polar coordinates (radius
and angle). Use G15, G16 for polar coordinates command.
POLAR COORDINATE
COMMAND (G15, G16) G15 : Polar coordinate system command cancel
(M series) G16 : Polar coordinate system command

Plane selection of the polar coordinates is done same as plane selection

in circular interpolation, using G17, G18, G19.
Command radius in the first axis of the selected plane, and angle in the
second axis. For example, when the X-Y plane is selected, command
radius with address X, and angle with address Y. The plus direction of the
angle is counter clockwise direction of the selected plane first axis +
direction, and the minus direction the clockwise direction.
Both radius and angle can be commanded in either absolute or
incremental command (G90, G91).
The center of the polar coordinates is the zero point of the workpiece
coordinates. (However, if the local coordinates are set, it is the zero point
of the local coordinates.)

Examples Both hole cycle

N1 G17 G90 G16;
Polar coordinates command, X-Y plane
N2 G81 X100. Y30. Z-20. R-5. F200.;
100mm radius, 30 × angle
N3 X100. Y150;
100mm radius, 150 × angle
N4 X100. Y270;
100mm radius, 270 × angle
N5 G15 G80;
Polar coordinates cancel

Workpiece coordinate system

150°
30°
270° X

100mm

97
8. COORDINATE VALUE AND
DIMENSION NC FUNCTION B–63002EN/02

8.3 Conversion of inch and metric input can be commanded by the G code
command.
INCH/METRIC G20 : Inch input
CONVERSION G21 : Metric input
(G20, G21) Whether the output is in inch system or metric system is parameter-set
when the machine is installed.
Command G20, G21 at the head of the program.
Inch/metric conversation can also be done by MDI setting.
The contents of setting data differs depending on whether G20 or G21 is
commanded.

8.4 Numerals can be input with decimal points. Decimal points can be used
basically in numerals with units of distance, speed, and angle. The
DECIMAL POINT position of the decimal point is at the mm, inch, deg position.
INPUT/POCKET There are two types of decimal point notation: calculator–type notation
CALCULATOR TYPE and standard notation.
When calculator–type decimal notation is used, a value without decimal
DECIMAL
point is considered to be specified in millimeters, inch or deg. When
POINT INPUT standard decimal notation is used, such a value is considered to be
specified in least input increments.
Use parameters to select input method; whether to input by pocket
calculator type input, or by the usual decimal point input.
Values can be specified both with and without decimal point in a single
program.
Pocket calculator type
Usual decimal point
Program command decimal point
programming
programming

X1000 1000mm 1mm

Command value without Unit : mm Unit : Least input incre-
decimal point ment (0.001 mm)

X1000.0 1000mm 1000mm

Command value with Unit : mm Unit : mm
decimal point

8.5 T series Since the work cross section is usually circular in latches, its dimensions
can be specified in two ways when performing a thing:
DIAMETER AND
RADIUS X axis

PROGRAMMING A

(T series) B R2
R1 Z axis
D1 D2

D1, D2 Diameter programming

R1, R2 Radius programming

When the diameter is specified, it is called diameter programming, and

when the radius is specified, it is called radius programming.
The diameter programming or radius programming can be selected by
parameter for each axis.

98
 8. COORDINATE VALUE AND
B–63002EN/02 NC FUNCTION DIMENSION

8.6 A linear axis refers to an axis moving linearly, and for it values are
specified in mm or inches.
LINEAR AXIS AND A rotation axis refers to a rotating axis, and for it values are specified in
ROTATION AXIS degrees.
For rotation axes, note the following:

Inch-metric switching is not performed.

The machine coordinate system is always normalized to the range
from 0deg to 360deg.

8.7 The rotation axis roll-over function rounds the absolute coordinate value
and relative coordinate value of a rotation axis to a coordinate value
ROTATION AXIS within one rotation. This prevents coordinate values to overflow.
ROLL-OVER In an incremental command, the specified value is regarded as the amount
FUNCTION of travel.
In an absolute command, the specified value is rounded to within one
rotation. The resulting coordinate value is used as the end point. A
parameter is used to specify whether to determine the move direction by
the sign of the specified value or by the move distance (the shortest move
distance to the end point is selected).

99
9. SPINDLE FUNCTIONS NC FUNCTION B–63002EN/02

9 SPINDLE FUNCTIONS

100
B–63002EN/02 NC FUNCTION 9. SPINDLE FUNCTIONS

9.1 Specify the spindle speed with up to five digits immediately after address
S. The 5-digit numeric value is output to the PMC as a 32-bit binary code.
S CODE OUTPUT The code is maintained until another S is specified. The maximum
number of input digits for S can be specified using a parameter.

9.2 The speed of the analog interface spindle is controlled. Specify the spindle
speed with up to five digits immediately after address S. According to the
SPINDLE SPEED specified spindle speed, a speed command is output to the spindle motor
ANALOG OUTPUT in a form of analog voltage. During constant surface speed control, an
(S ANALOG OUTPUT) analog voltage is output so that it matches the spindle speed reached after
constant surface speed control.

9.3 The speed of the serial interface spindle is controlled.

Specify the spindle speed with up to five digits immediately after address
SPINDLE SPEED S. A speed command is output to the spindle motor according to the
SERIAL OUTPUT specified spindle speed. During constant surface speed control, a speed
(S SERIAL OUTPUT) command is output so that it matches the spindle speed reached after
constant surface speed control.

9.4 If a speed command for the spindle motor is input in a form of [sign +
12-bit binary code], the command is output to the spindle motor according
SPINDLE OUTPUT to the input.
CONTROL BY THE
PMC

101
9. SPINDLE FUNCTIONS NC FUNCTION B–63002EN/02

9.5 Whether to perform constant surface speed control is specified using G96
or G97.
CONSTANT SURFACE G96 : Constant surface speed control mode
SPEED CONTROL G97 : Constant surface speed control cancel mode
If the surface speed is specified with an S code (S followed by a numeric
value) in the constant surface speed control mode, the spindle speed is
controlled so that a constant surface speed can be maintained while the
tool position is changing.
The axis on which the calculation for constant surface speed control is
based can be specified with either a parameter or the following command:
G96 Pα ; P0 : Axis specified with a parameter
Pα : αth axis (α = 1 to 8)
The specifiable range of the S code is as follows:
1 to 99999 m/min or feet/min
In the constant surface speed control cancel mode, the spindle speed is
specified using an S code.
In the constant surface speed control mode, a constant surface speed
control on signal is output.
By specifying the following command, the maximum spindle speed can
be set:
G92 S_ ; (where, S-- is the maximum spindle speed in rpm)
The spindle speed is clamped when it reaches the specified maximum
spindle speed.

Generally, a machine that does not have (or which does not use) a position
coder cannot perform feed per rotation under constant surface speed
control. When a certain parameter is set, such a machine can perform feed
per rotation under constant surface speed control, assuming that S 12–bit
code signals R01O to R12O represent a specified spindle speed.
(Constant surface speed control without a position coder)

9.6 To the spindle speed specified by S, an override from 0% to 254% can be

applied (in steps of 1%).
SPINDLE OVERRIDE

9.7 T series Actual spindle speed calculated by the return pulses of the position coder
on the spindle is output in 16-bit binary code.
ACTUAL SPINDLE
SPEED OUTPUT
(T series)

102
B–63002EN/02 NC FUNCTION 9. SPINDLE FUNCTIONS

9.8 T series In turning operation, the spindle connected to the spindle motor rotates
at a certain speed, and the workpiece attached to the spindle is then turned.
SPINDLE The spindle positioning function moves the spindle connected to the
POSITIONING spindle motor by a given angle so that the workpiece attached to the
(T series) spindle is positioned at a desired angle.
With this function, any portion of the workpiece can be drilled.
The spindle position is detected by the position corder attached to the
spindle.
Whether to use the spindle for spindle positioning (spindle positioning
mode) or to use the spindle for spindle rotation (spindle rotation mode)
is command by special M code (set by parameters).
Move command
When commanded:
G00 C_ ;,
The spindle is positioned to the commanded position by rapid
traverse. Absolute (G90) and incremental (G91) command, as well
as decimal point input is possible.
Increment system
Least input increment: 0.001 deg.
Detection unit: (360×N)/4096 deg.
N: Combination ratio of position coder and spindle (N=1, 2, 4)

103
9. SPINDLE FUNCTIONS NC FUNCTION B–63002EN/02

9.9 This function monitor spindle speed, detects a higher level of fluctuation
than the commanded speed and signals an abnormality, if any, to the
SPINDLE SPEED machine side, using an alarm, thereby preventing the spindle from
FLUCTUATION seizure, for example. Whether the spindle speed fluctuation detection is
DETECTION done or not is specified by G code.
G25 : Spindle speed fluctuation detection is off.
(G25, G26)
G26 : Spindle speed fluctuation detection is on.

Format
G26 P_ Q_ R_ ;
P_ : Time from the change of spindle speed to the start of the spindle
speed fluctuation detection (Unit: msec)
Q_ : The ratio of spindle speed to the specified spindle speed
where spindle speed fluctuation detection starts (Units: %)
R_ : Fluctuation ratio regarded as an alarm (Unit: %)

NOTE
1 The value of P, Q, and R remains after the power off.
2 The actual spindle speed is calculated by the return pulses
generated from the position coder attached to the spindle.

Explanations There are two ways in generating an alarm:

An alarm is generated before the specified spindle speed reaches.
An alarm is generated after the specified spindle speed reaches.

104
B–63002EN/02 NC FUNCTION 9. SPINDLE FUNCTIONS

When an alarm is
generated after the
spindle speed becomes Spindle
the commanded speed. speed

r
d
q Specified
q d speed
r

Actual
speed
NO
CHECK CHECK CHECK
Time
Specify Check Alarm
different start
speed

Commanded speed : (Speed commanded by S) x (Spindle override)

Actual speed : Speed detected by position coder
q : (Allowable rate for starting checkup) x (Commanded speed)
r : (Fluctuation rate in which an alarm is given) x (Commanded speed)
d : Fluctuation width in which an alarm is given Cutting by parameter

When an alarm is
generated before the
spindle speed becomes Spindle
speed
the commanded speed.

r
q d Specified
q d speed
r

Actual
speed
NO
CHECK CHECK CHECK

Time
Specify Check Alarm
different start
speed

p : Time between changes in commanded speed and check start.

105
9. SPINDLE FUNCTIONS NC FUNCTION B–63002EN/02

9.10 The serial interface spindle permits positioning and linear interpolation
with another servo axis. Thus, linear interpolation between the spindle
CS CONTOUR and a servo axis can be specified.
CONTROL
Explanations
Control mode The serial interface spindle has two modes.
The spindle rotation control mode controls the speed of the spindle.
(The spindle is rotated according to a speed command.)
The spindle contour control mode (also called Cs contour control)
controls the position of the spindle. (The spindle is rotated according
to a move command.)
These modes are switched by a signal sent from the PMC.

Spindle contour control The axis subject to spindle contour control is placed as one of the CNC
axis control axes. Any of the control axes can be selected as the spindle contour
control axis.
With the 2–path control, two spindles can be controlled. If spindle contour
control is performed for the two spindles, one spindle contour control axis
must be placed for each path. Two spindle contour control axes cannot be
placed for one path.

Move command In manual and automatic operation, a move command for the spindle
contour control axis is programmed in the same way as for a servo axis.
Example) Let the name of the spindle contour control axis be C.
G00 C30.0 ; (Positioning)
G01 X100.0 Y100.0 C90.0 F1000.0 ; (Linear interpolation)
Automatic loop gain Switching from spindle rotation control to spindle contour control
setting when switching If there is a difference in servo loop gain between the axis subject to
between spindle rotation spindle contour control and the other servo axes, linear interpolation
control and spindle with the spindle contour control axis cannot be performed properly.
contour control is made As soon as spindle rotation control is switched to spindle contour
control, an appropriate spindle contour control servo loop gain for a
selected gear is automatically set for a necessary servo axis. The axis
for which the servo loop gain is to be changed, and the spindle contour
control servo loop gain for this axis must be set in parameters for each
gear beforehand.
Switching from spindle contour control to spindle rotation control
As soon as spindle contour control is switched to spindle rotation
control, the original servo loop gain is set for the servo axis
automatically.

106
B–63002EN/02 NC FUNCTION 9. SPINDLE FUNCTIONS

9.11 Up to three spindles can be controlled. The three spindles are called the
first, second, and third spindles. The first and second spindles are made
MULTI–SPINDLE up of serial interface spindles, and the third spindle is of an analog
CONTROL interface spindle. (The second or third spindle may be omitted from the
configuration.)
A spindle speed is specified with a 5-digit numeric value following S.
This command functions on the spindle selected by spindle selection
signals (SWS1 to SWS3). More than one spindle can be selected so that
they can be rotated at the same time by specifying the same command.
Each spindle holds a specified command (spindle speed). When the
spindle is not selected by the spindle selection signal, the spindle rotates
at the held spindle speed. By using this feature, the spindles can be rotated
at different speeds at the same time. For each spindle, a signal to stop
spindle rotation is provided (*SSTP1 to *SSTP3). With these signals,
unnecessary spindles can be placed in the stopped state.
Feedback pulses from the position coders connected to the first and
second spindles can be input to the CNC to perform threading and feed
per rotation. One of the position coders connected to the first and second
spindles is selected by a signal. The feedback pulse from the selected
coder is then input to the CNC. From the third spindle, no feedback pulse
can be input.
The multi–spindle control functions of the M and T series differ as
follows:
For the M series, multi–spindle control is possible only when spindle
gear selection type T is specified.
For the M series, rigid tapping spindle selection signals (RGTSP1,
RGTSP2, and RGTSP3) cannot be used.
When two–path control is performed with the M series, spindle
commands and position coder feedback signals cannot be changed
between the paths (spindle command select signals SLSPA and
SLSPB, and spindle feedback select signals SLPCA and SLPCB are
not supported).

SWS1
*SSTP1 1st Position
Hold spindle coder

SWS2
S *SSTP2 2nd Position
command Hold spindle coder

SWS3 *SSTP3
3rd
Hold
spindle

107
9. SPINDLE FUNCTIONS NC FUNCTION B–63002EN/02

9.12 In machine tools having two spindles (such as a lathe), the speeds of the
two spindles sometimes have to match. This requires when a workpiece
SPINDLE held on the first spindle is transferred to the second spindle while the
SYNCHRONIZATION spindles are rotating, and when acceleration/deceleration is performed
CONTROL while a workpiece is being held by the first and second spindles.
When a workpiece having a different figure is transferred between the
spindles, the rotation phases (rotation angles) of the spindles must also
match.
The serial interface spindle synchronization control function is provided
to provide synchronization control for two spindles.

9.13 You can perform spindle orientation simply by mounting a position coder
on the spindle. Stoppers or pins for physically stopping the spindle at a
SPINDLE specified position are not necessary. A spindle can be instantly oriented,
ORIENTATION even when rotating at high speed, thereby greatly reducing the orientation
time.

9.14 Spindle output switching switches between the two windings, one for low
speed and the other for high speed, incorporated into the special spindle
SPINDLE OUTPUT motors. This ensures that the spindle motor demonstrates stable output
SWITCHING characteristics over a wide range.

9.15 When single–path control is performed, three serial spindles can be

connected.
THREE–SPINDLE The third serial spindle operates as an ordinary third analog spindle. For
SERIAL OUTPUT the third, as well as the first and second serial spindles, all the functions
(ONLY FOR supported by the serial spindle control unit (spindle orientation, spindle
output switching, and spindle switching) can be used.
SINGLE–PATH
When the third spindle orientation function is used, stop–position
CONTROL) external–setting type orientation can also be performed for the third
spindle.

9.16 In simple spindle synchronous control mode, the second spindle can be
controlled as a slave axis of the first spindle.
SIMPLE SPINDLE Thus, control based on the Cs contour axis control function, rigid tapping
SYNCHRONOUS function, and spindle positioning function (T series) can be exercised over
CONTROL the second spindle, under the control of the first spindle.
Note, however, that unlike spindle synchronous control, simple spindle
synchronous control does not guarantee synchronization between the first
and second spindles.
To realize simple spindle synchronous control, two serial spindle
systems, both of which support two–spindle connection, are required.
Moreover, both spindles must be fitted with the spindle–related hardware,
such as detectors, required for the functions used with simple spindle
synchronous control (Cs contour axis control function, rigid tapping
function, and spindle positioning function (T series)).

108
B–63002EN/02 NC FUNCTION 10. TOOL FUNCTIONS

10 TOOL FUNCTIONS

109
10. TOOL FUNCTIONS NC FUNCTION B–63002EN/02

10.1
T CODE OUTPUT
M series A tool can be selected by specifying a tool number of up to eight digits
immediately after address T. The tool number is output to the PMC in a
32-bit binary code. This code is kept till the next T code is commanded.
Maximum input digits are set by parameters.

T series A tool and offset can be selected by specifying a tool number and offset
number of up to eight digits (in total) immediately after address T. The
offset number is specified with the last one or two digits of the T code.
The tool number is specified with the remaining digits after excluding the
one or two digits used to specify the offset number.

When the last one digit is used to specify the offset number:

T 

Offset number
Tool number

When the last two digits are used to specify the offset number:

T 

Offset number
Tool number

The tool number is output in a 32-bit binary code. This code is kept till
the next T code is commanded. Maximum input digits are set by
parameters.

110
B–63002EN/02 NC FUNCTION 10. TOOL FUNCTIONS

10.2
TOOL LIFE
MANAGEMENT

10.2.1
Tool Life Management
Tools are classified into groups, and tool life (hours and times of use) is
set for each group. When use of the tool exceeds the preset hours or times
of use, another tool in the same group which has not yet exceeded the
preset life time is selected. If all the tool in a group exceeds the preset
life time, a signal is output to inform the operator that the tools must be
changed to new tools. With setting the cutter radius compensation
number and the tool length compensation number of the tools,
compensation corresponding to each tool can also be done. (M series)
With use of this function Factory Automation (FA) comes to a reach.
This function has the following features:
Tool life can be set in hours or times of use.
New tool select signal output
This signal is output when a new tool is selected in a group. This can
also be used for automatic measurement in compensations of the new
tools.
Tool change signal
When all the tools of a group has exceeded their life time, this signal
is output to inform the operator.
Tool skip signal
By inputting this signal, tools still not exceeding their life time, can
also be changed.
Tool life management data is display/modification
Tool life management data is displayed on the cRT screen, informing
the operator of the condition of the tools at a single view. If necessary,
the counter value of tool life can be modified via the MDI panel.
Number of groups and number of tools per group is selected by
parameter from the following.
M series T series

Number of Number of
Number of tools Number of tools
groups groups

16 16 16 16

32 8 32 8

64 4 64 4

128 2 _____ _____

111
10. TOOL FUNCTIONS NC FUNCTION B–63002EN/02

10.2.2 The number of groups that can be registered in the tool life management
Addition of Tool Pairs function and the allowable number of tools per group can be selected from
the following four combinations. One of the combinations is selected
for Tool Life using a parameter.
Management
M series T series
<512 Pairs (M series) /
128 Pairs (T series)> Number of Number of
Number of tools Number of tools
groups groups
64 16 16 32
128 8 32 16
256 4 64 8
512 2 128 4

10.2.3 M series The following features are added to the tool life management function for
easier handling:
Extended Tool Life
Management (M series) Setting tool life management data for each tool group by program
Addition, modification, and deletion can be made to only the tool life
management data of a specified group; the tool life management data
of the other groups is left intact.
A tool life is set for each tool group by time or use count.
Displaying and editing tool life management data
All tool life management data is displayed on the screen, and so the
user can understand the current tool state instantly. The following data
items are displayed:
Tool group number of the tool currently used
Tool group number selected next
Tool life Life, life counter value
management List of tool numbers in the group
data Cutter compensation number and tool
length compensation corresponding to
each tool number
Use state for each tool (for example,
indicating whether tool life is reached)
Tool life management data can be modified at the MDI panel. In
addition, tool numbers can be added, changed, and deleted.
Life count override
If a tool life is set by time, actual time obtained by multiplying the use
time of a tool by a magnification (override value) can be added to the
life counter. An override value from 0 to 99.9 is specified in steps of
0.1 by a signal sent from the PMC.
Example)
If the override value is 0.1, and the use time of a tool is ten minutes,
the life counter is incremented by one minute.

112
B–63002EN/02 NC FUNCTION 11. MISCELLANEOUS FUNCTIONS

11 MISCELLANEOUS FUNCTIONS

113
11. MISCELLANEOUS FUNCTIONS NC FUNCTION B–63002EN/02

11.1 When up to eight digits immediately after address M are specified, a

32–bit binary code is output. The maximum number of input digits can
MISCELLANEOUS be specified with a parameter. This binary code is used for on/off control
FUNCTIONS of the machine. A block can usually contain up to three M codes although
only one of them is effective.
The following M codes are used for special purposes:
M00 : Program stop
M01 : Optional stop
M02 : End of program
M30 : End of program and tape rewind
The above M codes can also be output in binary codes.
M98 (sub program call) and M99 (return from sub program) and always
processed in the CNC so, signal will not be output.

11.2 Up to three M codes can be simultaneously specified in one block.

As these M codes are simultaneously sent to PMC side, the machining
1–BLOCK PLURAL M cycle time compared with the conventional 1-block single M command
COMMAND is reduced.
Example)
(i) 1-block single M command
M40;
M50;
M60;
G28G91X0Y0Z0;
:
(ii) 1-block plural M command
M40M50M60;
G28G91X0Y0Z0;
:

NOTE
1 The maximum input value of the first M code is 99999999,
while the maximum input values of the second and third M
codes are 65535.
2 A strobe signal is provided for each of the first to third M
codes (MF, MF2, and MF3).
When all the operations for the first to third M codes are
completed, completion signal FIN is output.

11.3 When an 8-digit number after address B is commanded, a 32-bit binary

code is output to the PMC. This code is kept till the next B code is
SECOND commanded.
MISCELLANEOUS
FUNCTIONS

114
B–63002EN/02 NC FUNCTION 11. MISCELLANEOUS FUNCTIONS

11.4 The communication of execution command signal (strobe signal) and

completion signal is the M/S/T/B function were simplified to realize a
HIGH-SPEED M/S/T/B high-speed execution of M/S/T/B function.
INTERFACE The time required for cutting can be minimized by speeding up the
execution time of M/S/T/B function.
The following describes an example of auxiliary function M code
command. The same applies to the T, S, and B (second auxiliary function)
functions.
When an M code is specified, the CNC inverts the logical level of strobe
signal MF. Thus, when the signal is 0, it becomes 1. When it is 1, it
becomes 0. After inverting strobe signal MF, the CNC assumes the
completion of PMC operation once the logical level of completion signal
MFIN from PMC has become the same as the logical level of strobe signal
MF.
In the usual system, if the leading edge (from “0” to “1”) of the completion
signal FIN of M/S/T/B is received and then the trailing edge (from “1” to
“0”) of the signal FIN is received, it is considered that the operation has
been completed. However, in this system, the operation is considered to
have been completed by a single change of completion signal MFIN.
Example) M10;
M20;

High-speed System Time Chart

M10 M20
M command Mxx
code signal

Strobe signal MF

Operation at PMC side

M function completion
signal MFIN

Conventional System Time Chart

M10 M20
M command Mxx
code signal

Strobe signal MF

Operation at RMC side

Completion signal FIN

115
11. MISCELLANEOUS FUNCTIONS NC FUNCTION B–63002EN/02

NOTE
1 Either the conventional system or the high-speed system
can be selected for communication of strobe signal and
completion signal.
2 In the conventional system, only one completion signal is
available for all functions of M/S/T/B. However, in the high-
speed system, one completion signal is available for each
of M/S/T/B functions.

11.5 The M code group check function checks if a combination of multiple M

codes (up to three M codes) contained in a block is correct.
M CODE GROUP This function has two purpose. One is to detect if any of the multiple M
CHECK FUNCTION codes specified in a block include an M code that must be specified alone.
The other purpose is to detect if any of the multiple M codes specified in
a block include M codes that belong to the same group.

116
B–63002EN/02 NC FUNCTION 12. PROGRAM CONFIGURATION

12 PROGRAM CONFIGURATION

117
12. PROGRAM CONFIGURATION NC FUNCTION B–63002EN/02

12.1 A program number is given to each program to distinguish a program

from other programs. The program number is given at the head of each
PROGRAM NUMBER program, with a 4-digit number (when the 8–digit program number option
is used, however, eight digits following address O ) after the address O.
Program number of the program currently under execution is always
displayed on the CRT screen. Program search of programs registered in
the memory is done with the program number. The program number can
be used in various ways.

12.2 A program name can be given to the program to distinguish the program
from other programs when displaying all the registered program on a
PROGRAM NAME screen. Register the name between the control-out and the control-in.
Any codes usable in the CNC can be used for the program name.
The program name is displayed with the program number in the directory
display of registered programs. Note that the program name displayed is
within 31 characters.
Example) 01234 (PROGRAM FOR ATC);

12.3 A program is divided into the main program and the sub program. The
CNC normally operates according to the main program, but when a
MAIN PROGRAM command calling a sub program is encountered in the main program,
control is passed to the sub program. When a command indicating to
return to the main program is encountered in the sub program, control is
returned to the main program.

118
B–63002EN/02 NC FUNCTION 12. PROGRAM CONFIGURATION

12.4 When there are fixed sequences or frequently repeated patterns in a

program, programming can be simplified by entering these pattern as sub
SUB PROGRAM programs to the memory. Sub program is called by M98, and M99
commands return from the sub program. The sub program can be nested
4 folds.

Main program Sub program Sub program Sub program Sub program
O0001 ; O1000 ; O2000 ; O3000 ; O4000 ;

M98P1000 ; M98P2000 ; M98P3000 ; M98P4000 ;

M30 ; M99 ; M99 ; M99 ; M99 ;

1-loop nesting 2-loop nesting 3-loop nesting 4-loop nesting

Format

Sub program call

M98 P   ;

Number of repetitive Subprogram number

calls

If the number of repetitive calls is omitted, 1 is assumed.

Return from sub program

M99 ;

119
12. PROGRAM CONFIGURATION NC FUNCTION B–63002EN/02

12.5 When memory is used, a program cataloged in the floppy cassette can be
called and executed as a sub program.
EXTERNAL MEMORY A sub program is called from the floppy cassette when the program using
AND SUB PROGRAM the memory executes the following block.
CALLING FUNCTION

Format
Sub program calling
M198 P   ;

Number of repetitive Subprogram number or file number

calls
If the number of repetitive calls is omitted, 1 is assumed.

NOTE
1 Whether address P specifies the file number or program
number is selected by a parameter.
2 In the program called by M198, no more sub program can
be called by M198.

12.6 Sequence number can be given in a 5-digit number after the address N at
the head of the program block.
SEQUENCE NUMBER The sequence number of the program under execution is always displayed
on the screen. The sequence number can also be searched in the program
by the sequence number search function.

12.7 Either the EIA or the ISO code can be used as tape code. The input
program code is distinguished with the first end of block code (EIA: CR,
TAPE CODES ISO: LF). See the List of Tape Codes for tape codes used.

120
B–63002EN/02 NC FUNCTION 12. PROGRAM CONFIGURATION

12.8 The following table shows the basic addresses and the range of values to
be specified. The range, however, is that of CNC. Note that the range of
BASIC ADDRESSES the machine is different from this.
AND COMMAND
VALUE RANGE
Basic Addresses and Function Address Metric input Inch input
Range of Values to Be
Specified (M series) Program number O (*1) 1–9999 1–9999

Sequence number N 1–99999 1–99999

Preparatory function G 0–99 0–99

±99999.999mm ±9999.9999inch (Note2)

IS–B X, Y, Z, Q,
Dimension ±99999.999deg ±99999.999deg
R, I, J, K,
word Setting
word,
A, B, C, U,
unit ±99999.9999mm ±999.99999inch (Note2)
IS–C V, W
±99999.9999deg ±9999.9999deg

Feed per min- IS–B 1–240000mm/min 0.01–9600.00inch/min

ute Setting
ute, F
unit IS–C 1–100000mm/min 0.01–4000.00inch/min

Feed per rotation,

F 0.01–500.00mm/rev 0.0001–9.9999inch/rev
Setting unit

Spindle function S 0–20000 0–20000

Tool function T 0–99999999 0–99999999

M 0–99999999 0–99999999
Miscellaneous func
func-
tion
B 0–99999999 0–99999999

0–99999.999 0–99999.999
IS–B
(sec or rev) (sec or rev)
Dwell, Setting
X P
X,
unit
0–9999.9999 0–9999.9999
IS–C
(sec or rev) (sec or rev)

Program number
P 1–9999 1–9999
specification

Number of repeats P 1–999 1–999

Offset number H, D 0–400 0–400

121
12. PROGRAM CONFIGURATION NC FUNCTION B–63002EN/02

Basic Addresses and Function Address Metric input Inch input

Range of Values to Be
Specified (T series) Program number O (*1) 1–9999 1–9999

Sequence number N 1–99999 1–99999

Preparatory
G 0–99 0–99
function

±99999.999mm ±9999.9999inch (Note2)

IS–B
Dimension X, Y, Z, U, ±99999.999deg ±99999.999deg
word Setting
word, V W,
V, W A, A B,
B
unit C, I, J, K, R ±99999.9999mm ±999.99999inch (Note2)
IS–C
±99999.9999deg ±9999.9999deg

Feed per min- IS–B 1–240000mm/min 0.01–9600.00inch/min

ute Setting
ute, F
unit IS–C 1–100000mm/min 0.01–4000.00inch/min

Feed per rotation, 0.0001–500.000 0.000001–9.999999

F
Screw lead mm/rev inch/rev

Spindle function S 0–20000 0–20000

Tool function T 0–99999999 0–99999999

M 0–99999999 0–99999999
Miscellaneous func
func-
tion
B 0–99999999 0–99999999

0–99999.999 0–99999.999
IS–B
(sec or rev) (sec or rev)
Dwell, Setting
P X
P, X, U
unit
0–9999.9999 0–9999.9999
IS–C
(sec or rev) (sec or rev)

Program number
P 1–9999 1–9999
specification

Number of repeats P 1–999 1–999

Sequence number
P, Q 1–99999 1–99999
specification

NOTE
1 “:” can be used for 0 in ISO Code.
2 Coordinates maximum command value for inch input/metric
output is limited to: ±3937.0078 inch (IS–B)/ ±393.70078
inch (IS–C).

122
B–63002EN/02 NC FUNCTION 12. PROGRAM CONFIGURATION

12.9 The variable block word address format with decimal point is adopted as
tape format. See List of Tape Format in Appendix C for details on tape
TAPE FORMAT formats.

12.10 Label skip function is valid in the following cases, and “LSK” is
displayed on the screen.
LABEL SKIP When power is put on.
When the NC is reset.
When label skip function is in valid, all codes to the first encountered end
of block (EOB) code are ignored.
The ignored part is called ”Reader part”, and section after the first end of
block (EOB) code, “significant information”.

12.11 Information between the control-in and the control-out are regarded as
notes and are ignored.
CONTROL-IN/ The reset codes (ISO code: %, EIA code: ER) cannot be used in this part.
CONTROL-OUT The ignored part is called “Notes”.
ISO code EIA code

Control–out ( Channel 2–4–5 on

Control–in ) Channel 2–4–7 on

12.12 When a slash and number ( /n) is programmed at the head of a program,
and when the machine is operated with the optional block skip switch n
OPTIONAL BLOCK on the machine operator’s panel on, information in the block commanded
SKIP with the /n corresponding to the switch number n is ignored.
If the optional block skip switch n is turned off, information in the /n
commanded block will not be ignored. The block with /n commanded can
be skipped by the operator’s selection.
I can be used for n. The 1 to /1 can be omitted.
Example) /1 N12345 G00 X100.Y200.;

12.13 2 to 9 can also be used for the n of the /n.

ADDITIONAL
OPTIONAL BLOCK
SKIP

12.14 A parity check is made on the number of punch holes for each input tape
character. If the parity does not match, an alarm occurs (TH check). A
TAPE HORIZONTAL parity check is made on each input data block. If the number of characters
(TH) PARITY CHECK in one block (from the code next to EOB to another EOB) is odd, an alarm
AND TAPE VERTICAL occurs (TV check). The TH or TV check cannot be made on the area
skipped by the label skip function. The TH check is not made on the
(TV) PARITY CHECK
command field.A parameter can be used to specify whether the characters
constituting comments are to be counted when obtaining the number of
characters for TV check. The TV check function is validated or
invalidated according to the value set on the MDI panel.

123
13. FUNCTIONS TO SIMPLIFY
PROGRAMMING NC FUNCTION B–63002EN/02

13 FUNCTIONS TO SIMPLIFY PROGRAMMING

124
 13. FUNCTIONS TO SIMPLIFY
B–63002EN/02 NC FUNCTION PROGRAMMING

13.1 M series Canned cycle is a function to simplify commands for machining (boring,
drilling, or tapping, etc. The canned cycle has the positioning plane and
CANNED CYCLES the drilling axis. The positioning plane is specified with the plane
(G73, G74, G76, selection of G17, G18, and G19. The drilling axis is the basic axis X, Y
G80-G89, G98, G99) or Z (that does not compose the positioning plane) or its parallel axis.
(M series) G code Positioning plane Drilling axis

G17 Xp–Yp plane Xp

G18 Zp–Xp plane Yp

G19 Yp–Zp plane Zp

Xp : X axis or its parallel axis

Yp : Y axis or its parallel axis
Zp : Z axis or its parallel axis

The drilling axis address commanded in the same block as the G codes,
G73 - G89, decides whether the drilling axis is the basic axis or its parallel
axis. If the drilling axis address was not commanded, the basic axis
becomes the drilling axis.
Axis other than the drilling axis becomes the positioning axis.
Example)
When U, V, W axes are set as parallel axes for X, Y, Z axes respectively.
G17G81 . . . . Z_ ; Drilling axis is Z axis.
G17G81 . . . . W_ ; Drilling axis is W axis.
G18G81 . . . . Y_ ; Drilling axis is Y axis.
G18G81 . . . . V_ ; Drilling axis is V axis.
G19G81 . . . . X_ ; Drilling axis is X axis.
G19G81 . . . . U_ ; Drilling axis is U axis.
It is not always necessary to command G17, G18, G19 in the same
block as G73 - G89.

NOTE
Z axis can always be appointed the drilling axis by
parameter setting.

Positioning can be commanded with optional axes other than the drilling
axis. The drilling cycle starts after the positioning.
The following explanations are done on the XY plane, and Z axis as the
drilling axis.
The following 13 types of canned cycles are available.

125
13. FUNCTIONS TO SIMPLIFY
PROGRAMMING NC FUNCTION B–63002EN/02

13 types of canned cycles (1/4)

Operation
G code Function
G98 mode G99 mode

Initial level

R point
R point R point level

G73 q d q d High–speed
peck drilling
cycle
q q (Note 1)
d d

q q

Z point Z point

Initial level

Spindle
CCW
Spindle P
Counter
G74 CCW tapping cycle
R point R point R point level
P

Z point
P Z point
P
Spindle CW
Spindle CW

Spindle
CW
Initial
level
Spindle CW
G76 R point R point R point FIne boring
level cycle

P P
OSS Z point OSS q Position
q Z

126
 13. FUNCTIONS TO SIMPLIFY
B–63002EN/02 NC FUNCTION PROGRAMMING

13 types of canned cycles (2/4)

Operation
G code Function
G98 mode G99 mode

Initial level

Drilling cycle
G81 (Spot drilling)
R point
Positon R R point level

Z point Z point

Initial level

Drilling cycle
G82 R point (Counter
R point R point level boring)

P Z point P Z point

Initial level

R point
R point R point level
G83 Peck drilling
q d q d cycle

(Note 1)
q d q d

q q
Z point Z point

Initial level

R point R point

G83 Small hole

q q
pock drilling
d d cycle

d d

Over–load torque d Over–load torque d

Dwell Z point Dwell Z point

127
13. FUNCTIONS TO SIMPLIFY
PROGRAMMING NC FUNCTION B–63002EN/02

13 types of canned cycles (3/4)

Operation
G code Function
G98 mode G99 mode

Initial level

Spindle CW
Spindle CW P Tapping cycle
G84 P
Positon R Positon R R point
level

Z point Z point
P P
Spindle CCW Spindle CCW

Initial level

Boring cycle
G85
R point
Positon R Positon R level

Z point Z point

Spindle CW

Initial level

Spindle CW

G86 R point Boring cycle

Positon R Positon R
level

Z point Z point

Spindle stop Spindle stop

q
OSS

Spindle CW
G87 Not used Back boring
OSS cycle
Z point
P

Spindle CW
R point

128
 13. FUNCTIONS TO SIMPLIFY
B–63002EN/02 NC FUNCTION PROGRAMMING

13 types of canned cycles (4/4)

Operation
G code Function
G98 mode G99 mode

Spindle CW

Initial level
Spindle CW Boring cycle
G88

R point R point
level

Z point Z point
P P Dwell
Dwell
Spindle stop Spindle stop

Initial level
Boring cycle
G89
R point R point R point
level

Z point Z point
P P

Cutting feed Oriented spindle stop (Spindle stops at

OSS
constant rotation position)
Rapid traverse

Manual feed Shift

P Dwell I Initial position level

Z Z point R R point
(Hole bottom position)
Note 1 ”d” of G73 and G84 is set by parameters.

129
13. FUNCTIONS TO SIMPLIFY
PROGRAMMING NC FUNCTION B–63002EN/02

When the drilling axis is Z axis, machining data in the canned cycle is
commanded as follows:

Format
G X_ Y_ Z_ R_ Q_ P_ K_ F_ ;
Drilling mode G ; See previous table.
Drilling position dataX, Y ; Command position of the hole.
Z : Specify hole end position shown in the previous table.
R : Specify R point position shown in the previous table.
Q : Specify cutting quantity with G73, G83, and shift quantity with
G76, G87,
P : Specify dwell time at the hole bottom.
K : Specify how may times to repeat.
When specified K0, drilling data will be set, but no drilling will
be done.
F : Specify feed rate for cutting.

Explanations
R point level return (G99) By specifying G99, return point in canned cycle is specified to R point.
The drilling starts from the end point of the previous block. If the previous
block has ended in the initial point, it begins from the initial point and
returns to the R point.
Example) When G81 was commanded under G99 mode

Initial level
Cutting feed

Rapid traverse
R point

Initial level return (G98) By specifying G98, return point in canned cycle is specified to the initial
level. The drilling starts from the end point of the previous block. If the
previous block has ended in the R point, it begins from the R point and
returns to the initial point.

Initial level Cutting feed

Rapid traverse
R point

130
 13. FUNCTIONS TO SIMPLIFY
B–63002EN/02 NC FUNCTION PROGRAMMING

13.2 In tapping, the feed amount of drilling axis for one rotation of spindle
should be equal to the pitch of screw of tapper. Namely, the following
RIGID TAP conditions must be satisfied in the best tapping:
P= F/S,
where P : Pitch of screw of tapper (mm)
F : Feed rate of drilling axis (mm/min)
S : Spindle speed (rpm)
The rotation of spindle and feed of Z axis are independently controlled in
the tapping cycle G74/G84 (M series), G84/G88 (T series). Therefore, the
above conditions may not always be satisfied. Especially at the hole
bottom, both the rotation of spindle and feed of drilling axis reduce the
speed and stop. After that, they move in the inverse direction while
increasing the speed. However, the above conditions may not be satisfied
in general since each acceleration/deceleration is performed
independently. Therefore, in general, the feed is compensated by
mounting a spring to the inside of holder of tapper to improve the accuracy
of tap cutting.
The rotation of spindle and feed of drilling axis are controlled so that they
are always synchronous each other in the rigid tapping cycle. Namely, in
other than rigid tapping, control for speed only is performed. In the rigid
tapping however, position control is also performed during the rotation
of spindle, that is, the rotation of spindle and feed of drilling axis are
controlled as linear interpolation of two axes.
This allows the following condition to be satisfied also during
acceleration/deceleration at the hole bottom and a tapping of improved
accuracy to be made.
P = F/S
The pitch of screw tap can be directly specified.
Rigid tapping can be performed by executing any of the following
commands:
 M29 S  before tapping command G74/G84 (M series)
or G84/G88 (T series)
 M29 S  in the same block as tapping command G74/G84
(M series) or G84/G88 (T series)
 G74/G84 (M series) or G84/G88 (T series) as rigid tapping G code
(Whether G74/G84 (G84/G88) is used as rigid tapping G code or
ordinary tapping G code can be selected with a parameter.)

131
13. FUNCTIONS TO SIMPLIFY
PROGRAMMING NC FUNCTION B–63002EN/02

Spindle control
(voltage calculation of
spindle speed rpm)

CMR
Distrib- ×4 Error D/A Spindle Spindle
uted counter converter amplifier motor
pulse
Gear ratio
n:m
DMR
×4 Position Gear ratio Spindle
coder 1:p

The Control System of Spindle during Rigid Tapping

Gear ratio of spindle to Least command increment

position coder (1 : p) (detection unit ) deg

1:1 0.088 (1x360 / 4096)

1:2 0.176 (2x360 / 4096)

1:4 0.352 (4x360 / 4096)

1:8 0.703 (8x360 / 4096)

Even use of the spindle motor incorporating the position coder enables
rigid tapping. In this case, the gear ratio of the spindle motor and the
spindle is set by the parameter.
In addition, use of the spindle motor incorporating the position coder
enables rigid tapping but disables threading and per revolution dwell.

132
 13. FUNCTIONS TO SIMPLIFY
B–63002EN/02 NC FUNCTION PROGRAMMING

13.3 M series With the above program, external operation signal is output after
positioning. G80 command cancels the external operation function.
EXTERNAL
OPERATION
FUNCTION (G81)
(M series)
Format

G81 IP _ ;
IP : Optional combination of axis address X, Y, Z, U, V, W, A, B, C

133
13. FUNCTIONS TO SIMPLIFY
PROGRAMMING NC FUNCTION B–63002EN/02

13.4 T series The following three kinds of canned cycle are provided.
CANNED CYCLES
FOR TURNING
(T series)
13.4.1
Cutting Cycle A (G77)
(with G Code System A:
G90)
Straight cutting cycle. The command below actuates a straight cutting cycle.
X axis
R : Rapid traverse
Z W F : Feed
4(R)
3(F) 1(R) U/2
2(F)

X/2
Z axis

Format
G77 X_ Z_ F_ ;

Tapered cutting cycle The command below actuates a tapered cutting cycle.
In the figure below, when the direction of route 1 is –X, R is a negative
value. Inverting the sign of R enables reverse taper cutting.
X axis

Z 4(R)
R : Rapid traverse
3(F) 1(R) F : Feed
U/2
2(F)

R
X/2
W
Z axis

Format
G77 X_ Z_ R_ F_ ;

134
 13. FUNCTIONS TO SIMPLIFY
B–63002EN/02 NC FUNCTION PROGRAMMING

13.4.2
Thread Cutting Cycle
(G78) (with G Code
System A: G92)

Straight thread cutting The command below actuates a straight thread cutting cycle.
cycle
X axis
Z W

4(R)
3(R)
1(R)
2(F)

X/2

Z axis

L
Detailed
chamfered R : Rapid traverse
thread F : Thread cutting
r : Chamfering amount
(parameter)
Approx.
45°
(The chamfered angle in the
r left figure is 45 degrees or less
because of the delay in the
servo system.)

Format
G78 X_ Z_ F_ ;

135
13. FUNCTIONS TO SIMPLIFY
PROGRAMMING NC FUNCTION B–63002EN/02

Tapered thread cutting The command below actuates a tapered thread cutting cycle.
cycle
X axis

Z W

4(R)
U/2 1(R)
3(R
)

2(F)
R
X/2
Z axis

R : Rapid traverse
Detailed F : Thread cutting
chamfered
thread r : Chamfering amount
(parameter)
Approx.
45°

(The chamfered angle in the

r left figure is 45 degrees or less
because of the delay in the
servo system.)

Format
G78 X_ Z_ R_ F_ ;

NOTE
Screw chamfering can be inhibited by entering the
chamfering signal.

136
 13. FUNCTIONS TO SIMPLIFY
B–63002EN/02 NC FUNCTION PROGRAMMING

13.4.3
Turning Cycle in
Facing (G79)
(with G Code System A:
G94)
Face cutting cycle The command below actuates a face cutting cycle.
X axis 1(R)

R : Rapid traverse
F : Feed
2(F) 4(R)
U/2

3(F)

X/2 X/2
0 W
Z axis
Z

Format
G78 X_ Z_ F_ ;

Face tapered cutting The command below actuates a face tapered cutting cycle.
cycle In the following figure, if the direction of the path 1 is negative in Z axis,
the sign of the number following address R is negative.
X axis 1(R
) R : Rapid traverse
F : Feed
2(F) 4(R)
U/2

3(F)

X/ R W
2 Z axis
Z

Format
G79 X_ Z_ R_ F_ ;

137
13. FUNCTIONS TO SIMPLIFY
PROGRAMMING NC FUNCTION B–63002EN/02

13.5 T series A multiple repetitive cycle is composed of several canned cycles. A tool
path for rough machining, for example, is determined automatically by
MULTIPLE giving the data of the finishing work shape. A thread cutting cycle has
REPETITIVE CYCLES also been prepared.
FOR TURNING
(G70 - G76) (T series)

13.5.1 There are two types of rough cutting cycles for external surfaces, type I
and type II.
Stock Removal in
Turning (G71)

Type I If a finishing shape of A to A’ to B is given in the figure below, machining

is done with the cutting depth delta d and the finishing allowance delta
U/2 and delta W.

C
B (R)
A
(R) ∆d
(F)
45° e
(F)

Program
command

R : Rapid traverse ∆U/2

F : Cutting feed
d : Parameter setting A’
∆W

138
 13. FUNCTIONS TO SIMPLIFY
B–63002EN/02 NC FUNCTION PROGRAMMING

Format

G71 U(∆d) R(e) ;

G71 P(ns) Q(nf) U(∆u) W(∆w) F(f) S(s) T(t) ; (ns)

N(ns) . . . . .
...........
. . . . . . . F_
. . . . . . . S_ A block between sequence numbers ns and nf
. . . . . . . T_ specifies the target figure between A and B.
N(nf) . . . . . . ;

∆d : Depth of cut. It is specified without sign. The cutting direction

is determined by the direction of AA’.
e : Clearance
ns : Sequence number of the first block of target figure blocks
nf : Sequence number of the end block of the target figure
blocks
∆u : Distance and direction of finishing allowance along X axis
∆w : Distance and direction of finishing allowance along Z axis
f, s, t : The F, S, and T specified by a block between ns and nf are
ignored during cycle operation. Those specified by the block
of G71 or before are effective.

F, S, and T in the blocks of move commands from A to B are ignored and

those specified in the same block as G71 or before are effective.
G96s (constant surface speed control on) and G97s (constant surface
speed control off) in the blocks of move commands from A to B are
ignored. A G96 or a G97 commanded in the same block as G71 or before
is effective. The following four patterns are given depending on the sign
of delta U and delta W as in the figure below. All of these cutting cycles
are made parallel to Z axis.

B A A
U(+)…W(+) U(+)…W(–)

A’ A’ Both linear and

circular interpolation
A’ A’ are possible.
+X

U(–)…W(+) U(–)…W(–)

A A +Z

For the path from A to A’, the block of sequence number ns specifies a
command including G00 or G01. For the path A’ to B, increase or decrease
must be steady in both X-axis and Z-axis directions.
If the command for the path from A to A’ is G00, the cutting along the path
is performed in the G00 mode. If the command for the path from A to A’
is G01, the cutting is performed in the G01 mode.

139
13. FUNCTIONS TO SIMPLIFY
PROGRAMMING NC FUNCTION B–63002EN/02

Type II Type II differs from Type I in the following point.

Increase in X-axis direction does not need to be steady. Up to 10 pockets
are allowed.

10 ......... 3 2 1

In Z-axis direction, however, increase or decrease must be steady. The

following figure is not allowed for machining.

Change in Z-axis direction

is not steady.

The first cutting does not need to be vertical. Any profile is allowed as far
as the change in Z-axis direction is steady.
For clearance after turning, chamfering is performed along the workpiece
profile.

e (setting by parameter)

The following figure shows an example of a cutting path when there are
two pockets.

30
4
3 13 29 1
2 5
12 18 9 24
14 10 6
23 8 25
11 19 15 7
16
17 22 21 20 26
28
27

140
 13. FUNCTIONS TO SIMPLIFY
B–63002EN/02 NC FUNCTION PROGRAMMING

The offset of tool tip R is not added to the finishing allowance ∆u and ∆w.
It is assumed to be zero for cutting. Generally ∆w=0 is specified.
Otherwise, the tool catches into a side wall. The two axes X(U) and Z(W)
are specified in the first block of the repeat part. If there is no movement
in Z-axis direction, W0 is specified.
This function is effective only in memory mode.
Use of Types I and II Type I:
Used when only one axis is specified in the first block (ns block) in the
repeat part.
Type II
Used when two axes are specified in the first block in the repeat part.
Example)
Type I Type II

G71 10.0 R5.0 ; G71 10.0 R5.0 ;

G71 P100 Q200 … ; G71 P100 Q200 … ;
N100 X(U)_ ; N100 X(U)_ Z(W)_ ;
: :
B200… ; B200… ;

141
13. FUNCTIONS TO SIMPLIFY
PROGRAMMING NC FUNCTION B–63002EN/02

13.5.2 As shown in the figure below, this cycle is the same as G71 except that
Stock Removal in cutting is made parallel to X-axis.
Facing (G72)
∆d
R : Rapid traverse
A’ C F : Feed
A d : Parameter setting
Tool path
(F)
(R)
e
(R)
45°

(F)

Command ∆u/2
B
∆w

Format

G72 W(∆d) R(e) ;

G72 P(ns) Q(nf) U(∆u) W(∆w) F(f) S(s) T(t) ;

∆d, e, ns, nf, ∆u, ∆w, f, s, and t are the same as those in G71.

For the shape to be cut by G72, the following four patterns are considered.
Any of them is cut by repetition of operation parallel to the X axis of the
tool. The signs of delta U and delta W are as follows:

+X

+Z
B B
U(–)…W(+)… U(–)…W(–)…

Both linear and cir-

A’ cular interpolation
A’ AA are possible.
A’ AA A’ It is possible even
there are many
pockets.
U(+)…W(+)… U(+)…W(–)…
B B

This function is effective only in memory mode.

142
 13. FUNCTIONS TO SIMPLIFY
B–63002EN/02 NC FUNCTION PROGRAMMING

13.5.3 This function permits cutting a fixed cutting pattern repeatedly with the
Pattern Repeating position being displaced bit by bit. By this cutting cycle, it is possible to
efficiently cut the work whose rough shape has already been made by
(G73) rough machining, forging, or casting, etc.

R : Rapid traverse ∆k+∆w

F : Cutting feed D
∆w

C ∆u/2
A
(R)

∆u/2
A’
∆w

Pattern to be specified by the program

Point A→ Point A’→ Point B

Format
G73 U(∆i) W(∆k) R(d) ;
G73 P(ns) Q(nf) U(∆u) W(∆w) F(f) S(s) T(t) ;

N(ns) . . . . .
...........
. . . . . . . F_
. . . . . . . S_ The move commands for the target figure from A
. . . . . . . T_ to A’ then to B are specified by blocks between
N(nf) . . . . . . ; sequence numbers ns and nf.

∆i : Distance and direction of the clearance along X axis

(radius programming)
∆k : Distance and direction of the clearance along Z axis
d : Number of divisions which is equal to the number of times
that rough cutting is performed
ns : Sequence number of the first block of target figure blocks
nf : Sequence number of the end block of target figure blocks
∆u : Distance and direction of the finishing allowance along X
axis (diameter or radius programming)
∆w : Distance and direction of the finishing allowance along Z
axis
f, s, t : F, S, and T codes

NOTE
F, S, and T specified by any block between ns and nf are
ignored. Those specified by the block of G73 or before are
effective.

This function is available for only memory mode.

143
13. FUNCTIONS TO SIMPLIFY
PROGRAMMING NC FUNCTION B–63002EN/02

13.5.4 After rough machining with G71, G72 or G73 the following command
Finishing Cycle (G70) actuates finishing.

Format
N_ G70 P(ns) Q(nf) ;
P : Sequence number of cycle start (ns)
Q : Sequence number of cycle end (nf)

NOTE
F, S, and T codes specified in the block of G71, G72 or G73
are ignored. But F, S, and T codes specified in the blocks
from sequence numbers (ns) to (nf) become effective

The function is effective only in memory mode.

144
 13. FUNCTIONS TO SIMPLIFY
B–63002EN/02 NC FUNCTION PROGRAMMING

13.5.5 The following command permits operation as seen in the figure below.
Peck Drilling in Z-axis Chip breaking is possible in this cycle. Also if both x(u) and P are
omitted, the machining is done only in the Z-axis resulting in peck
(G74) drilling.

∆k’ ∆k ∆k ∆k ∆k

Dd A

[0<∆k’∆k]
∆i
C (R)
(F)
(F) U/2
(F) (F) (F) (F)
∆i

∆i’
(R) (R) (R) (R)
X
(X_, Z_) B
[0<∆i’∆i]
W

e R : Rapid traverse
F : Cutting feed

Format
G74 R(e) ;
X_ Z_
G74 X_ Z_
U_W_ P(ns) Q(nf) U(∆u) F(f) ;

e : Amount of return
X : X-axis coordinate of point B
U : Increment for A → B (for G code system A)
Z : Z-axis coordinate of point C
W : Increment for A → C (for G code system A)
∆i : Movement amount in X-axis direction (without sign)
∆k : Depth of cut in Z-axis direction (without sign)
∆d : Clearance amount at the cutting bottom
Usually a positive integer is specified. If X(U) and i are
omitted, however, the sign indicating the direction is added.
f : Feedrate

145
13. FUNCTIONS TO SIMPLIFY
PROGRAMMING NC FUNCTION B–63002EN/02

13.5.6 The following tape command permits operation as seen in the figure
Grooving in X-axis below. This is equivalent to G74 except that X is replaced by Z. Chip
breaking is possible in this cycle. Grooving in the X-axis (in this case,
(G75) Z, W and Q are omitted) is possible.

(R) A

∆i
(F)
(R) e

(F)

(R)
(F)
U/2

(R)

(F)
(R)

(F)

∆d X
∆k
(X_, Z_)
R : Rapid traverse
W F : Cutting feed

Format
G75 R(e) ;
X_ Z_
G75 X_ Z_ P(∆i) Q(∆k) R(∆d) F(f) ;
U_W_

146
 13. FUNCTIONS TO SIMPLIFY
B–63002EN/02 NC FUNCTION PROGRAMMING

13.5.7 A thread cutting cycle as shown below can be made.

Thread Cutting Cycle E A
(R)
(G76)

U/2 (R)

(F)
B
∆d

i D k
X r C

Z
W
R : Rapid traverse
F : Cutting feed

Format
G76 P(m)(r)(a) Q(∆d min) R(d) ;
X_ Z_
G76 X_ Z_
U_W_ R(i) P(k) Q(∆d) F( ) ;

m : Number of final finishing repeats 1 to 99

r : Screw finishing (chamfering amount)
a : Tool tip angle (thread angle)
One of the six angles, 80°, 60°, 55°, 30°, 29°, and 0°, can
be selected as a 2-digit number. m, r, and a are specified in
address P at the same time.
Example)
When m = 2, r = 1.2 , and a = 60 , they are specified as follows:
P02 12 60
m r a
∆bmin: Minimum depth of cut
d : Finishing allowance
i : Difference in thread radius
Straight threading for i = 0
k : Height of the thread (The distance in X-axis direction is
specified with a radius value.)
∆d : Depth of first cut (specified with a radius value)
: Screw lead (same as threading of G32)

147
13. FUNCTIONS TO SIMPLIFY
PROGRAMMING NC FUNCTION B–63002EN/02

Cutting method in detail Tool tip

ÔÔÔÔÔÔÔÔ
B

ÔÔÔÔÔÔÔÔ α ∆d

ÔÔÔÔÔÔÔÔ ∆d n

ÔÔÔÔÔÔÔÔ
First k

ÔÔÔÔÔÔÔÔ
Second
Third

ÔÔÔÔÔÔÔÔ
nth

ÔÔÔÔÔÔÔÔ
d

NOTE
Thread chamfering can be inhibited by entering the
chamfering signal.

148
 13. FUNCTIONS TO SIMPLIFY
B–63002EN/02 NC FUNCTION PROGRAMMING

13.6 T series The canned cycles for drilling enable one block including the G function
to specify the machining which is usually specified by several blocks.
CANNED CYCLES Programming is then simplified.
FOR DRILLING The canned cycles for drilling conform to JIS B 6314.
(G80 - G89) (T series) Canned cycles
Operation
Drilling
G code Drilling at hole Clearance Use
axis
bottom

G80 Cancel

Cutting feed
Rapid
G83 Z axis Intermittent Dwell Deep drilling
traverse
feed

Spindle
G84 Z axis Cutting feed Cutting feed Tapping
reverse

G85 Z axis Cutting feed Dwell Cutting feed Boring

Cutting feed
Rapid
G87 X axis Intermittent Dwell Deep drilling
traverse
feed

Spindle
G88 X axis Cutting feed Cutting feed Tapping
reverse

G89 X axis Cutting feed Dwell Cutting feed Boring

149
13. FUNCTIONS TO SIMPLIFY
PROGRAMMING NC FUNCTION B–63002EN/02

13.7 T series A chamfer or corner are can be inserted between two blocks which
intersect at a right angle as follows. An amount of chamfering or corner
CHAMFERING AND are specifies by address I, K, or R.
CORNER R
(T series)
Chamfering
Z→X
Command Tool movement

G01 Z(W) I(C) ±i ; +X

Specifies movement to point b
with an absolute or incremental 45°
command in the figure on the c
right. i
a d
b
Start point –i
c
45°
Moves as a→b→c
–X

Chamfering
X→Z
Command Tool movement

G01 X(U) K(C) ±k ;

Start point
Specifies movement to point b a
with an absolute or incremental
command in the figure on the Moves as a→b→c
right.

45° d 45°

–z +z
c c
–k b k

Corner R
Z→X
Command Tool movement

G01 Z(W) R ±r ; +x

Specifies movement to point b

with an absolute or incremental r
command in the figure on the c
right. a d
b
Start point
–r c

Moves as a→b→c –x

150
 13. FUNCTIONS TO SIMPLIFY
B–63002EN/02 NC FUNCTION PROGRAMMING

Corner R
X→Z
Command Tool movement

G01 X(U) R ±r ; Start point a

Specifies movement to point b

with an absolute or incremental
Moves as a→b→c
command in the figure on the
right.

–r r
d
–z +z
c b c

NOTE
If C is not used as an axis name, C can be used for a chamfer
address instead of I or K.

X
530.0 N1 Z270.0 R60.0 ;
N2 X860.0 K–3.0 ;
270.0 N3 Z0 ;
C3
N3

N2
R6

N1

151
13. FUNCTIONS TO SIMPLIFY
PROGRAMMING NC FUNCTION B–63002EN/02

13.8 M series The block for chamfering or corner rounding can be inserted
automatically between two optional linear interpolations, or between the
OPTIONAL ANGLE linear interpolation and circular interpolation, or between two circular
CHAMFERING/ interpolations.
CORNER ROUNDING Specifying ”,C_” inserts the block for chamfering, and specifying ”,R_”
inserts the block for corner rounding. They must be specified at the end
(M series)
of the block which specifies the linear interpolation (B01) or circular
interpolation (G02 or G03).
The numeric following C specifies the distance between the virtual corner
intersection and the chamfering start or end point. See the figure below.

N1 G91 G01 X30.0, C10.0 ;

N2 X30.0 Y30.0 ;
(60, 30)

Inserted block for N2

chamfering

N1
(0, 0) 10
10
Virtual corner intersection
(30, 0)

The numeric following R specifies the radius value of corner rounding.

See the figure below.

N1 G91 G01 X30.0, R10.0 ;

N2 X30.0 Y30.0 ;

Arc center for (60, 30)

corner rounding
N2

R
N1
(0, 0) (30, 0)

152
 13. FUNCTIONS TO SIMPLIFY
B–63002EN/02 NC FUNCTION PROGRAMMING

13.9 T series Angles of straight lines, chamfering values, corner rounding values, and
other dimensional values on machining drawings can be programmed by
DIRECT DRAWING directly inputting these values. In addition, the chamfering and corner
DIMENSIONS rounding can be inserted between straight lines having an arbitrary angle.
PROGRAMMING The straight line angle, chamfering value, or corner rounding must be
specified with a comma as follows:
(T series)
,A_
,C_
,R_

NOTE
When A or C is not used as an axis name, the line angle,
chamfering value, or corner rounding can be specified in the
parameter without comma as follows:
A_
C_
R_

Command list

Command Movement of tool

X2_ (Z2_), A_ ; X
(X2 , Z2)

1
A

(X1 , Z1)
Z

X
(X3 , Z3)
A2
, A1_ ;
2 X3_ Z3_, A2_ ;
A1
(X2 , Z2)
(X1 , Z1)
Z

X
(X3 , Z3)
X2_ Z2_, R1_ ;
A2
X3_ Z3_ ; R1
3 or
, A1_, R1_ ; A1
X3_ Z3_, A2_ ; (X2 , Z2)
(X1 , Z1)
Z

153
13. FUNCTIONS TO SIMPLIFY
PROGRAMMING NC FUNCTION B–63002EN/02

Command Movement of tool

X
(X3 , Z3)
X2_ Z2_, C1_ ; A2
X3_ Z3_ ;
4 or
, A1_, C1_ ;
X3_ Z3_, A2_ ; C1 A1
(X2 , Z2)
(X1 , Z1)
Z

X
(X4 , Z4)
(X3 , Z3)
X2_ Z2_, R1_ ;
A2
X3_ Z3_, R2_ ; R2
X4_ Z4_ ;
5 or R1
, A1_, R1_ ;
X3_Z3_, A2_ R2_ ; A1
X4_ Z4_ ; (X2 , Z2)
(X1 , Z1)
Z
X
C2
X2_ Z2_, C1_ ; (X3 , Z3)
(X4 , Z4)
X3_ Z3_, C2_ ;
X4_ Z4_ ; A2
6 or
, A1_, C1_ ;
X3_ Z3_, A2_ C2_ ; (X2 , Z2)
X4_ Z4_ ; C1 A1

(X1 , Z1)
Z

X
C2
X2_ Z2_, R1_ ; (X3 , Z3)
X3_ Z3_, C2_ ; (X4 , Z4)
X4_ Z4_ ; A2
7 or
, A1_, R1_ ; R1
X3_ Z3_ , A2_ C2_ ;
X4_ Z4_ ; A1
(X2 , Z2)
(X1 , Z1)
Z

X
(X4 , Z4)
X2_ Z2_, C1_ ; (X3 , Z3)
X3_ Z3_, R2_ ;
X4_ Z4_ ; A2
8 or R2
, A1_, C1_ ;
X3_ Z3_, A2_ R2_ ; (X2 , Z2)
X4_ Z4_ ; A1
C1
(X1 , Z1)
Z

154
 13. FUNCTIONS TO SIMPLIFY
B–63002EN/02 NC FUNCTION PROGRAMMING

13.10 M series Mirror image can be commanded on each axis by programming. Ordinary
mirror image (commanded by remote switch or setting) comes after the
PROGRAMMABLE programmable mirror image is applied.
MIRROR IMAGE Setting of programmable mirror image
(G50.1, G51.1) G51.1 X_ Y_ Z_ ;
(M series) is commanded and mirror image is commanded to each axis (as if
mirror was set on the axis).
Programmable mirror image cancel
G50.1 X_ Y_ Z_ ;
is commanded and the programmable mirror image is canceled.

NOTE
If mirror image is specified only for one axis on the specified
plane, the operation of the commands is as follows:
Arc command: The rotation direction is reversed.
Cutter compensation: The offset direction is reversed.
Coordinate rotation: The rotation angle is reversed.

When shape of the workpiece is symmetric to an axis, a program for

machining the whole part can be prepared by programming a part of the
workpiece using programmable mirror image and sub program.

Y X=50
Main program
(2) (1) N10 G00 G90 ;
100
N20 M98 P9000 ;
N30 G51.1 X50.0 ;
N40 M98 P9000 ;
N50 G51.1 Y50.0 ;
N60 M98 P9000 ;
60 N70 G50.1 X0 ;
Y=50 (Cancel only X–axis)
50
N80 M98 P9000 ;
N90 G50.1 Y0 ;
Sub program
O9000 ;
G00 G90 X60.0 Y60.0 ;
G01 X100.0 F100 ;
(3) (4) G01 Y100.0 ;
G01 X60.0 Y60.0 ;
0 50 60 100 X M99

155
13. FUNCTIONS TO SIMPLIFY
PROGRAMMING NC FUNCTION B–63002EN/02

13.11 T series Mirror image can be applied to X axis with G code.

G68 : Double turret mirror image on
MIRROR IMAGE FOR G69 : Mirror image cancel
DOUBLE TURRETS When G68 is designated, the coordinate system is shifted to the mating
(G68, G69) (T series) turret symmetrical cutting.
To use this function, set the distance between the two turrets at parameter.

Offset amount
X of tool post A

Tool post A


60
120

Z
180
φ40
φ80
φ120

120

Offset amount
of tool post B
Tool post B

X40.0 Z180.0 T0101 ; Position turret A at
.

G68 ; Shift the coordinate system by the distance A to B (120 mm),
and turn mirror image on.
X80.0 Z120.0 T0202 ; Position turret B at .
G69 ; Shift the coordinate system by the distance B to A, and turn
mirror image on.
X120.0 Z60.0 T101 ; Position turret A at .

156
 13. FUNCTIONS TO SIMPLIFY
B–63002EN/02 NC FUNCTION PROGRAMMING

13.12 M series The index table on the machining center is indexed by using the fourth
axis as an indexing axis.
INDEX TABLE To command for indexing, an indexing angle is only to be specified
INDEXING (M series) following a programmed axis (arbitrary 1 axis of A, B, C as the rotation
axis) assigned for indexing. It is not necessary to command the exclusive
M code in order to clamp or unclamp the table and therefore programming
will become easy.

157
13. FUNCTIONS TO SIMPLIFY
PROGRAMMING NC FUNCTION B–63002EN/02

13.13 T series The repetitive machining specific to grinding can be specified by one
block. Since four types of canned cycles are provided for grinding,
CANNED CYCLES programming is simplified.
FOR CYLINDRICAL
GRINDING (T series)
Traverse grinding cycle
(G71, G72)
G71 : Dwell G72 : Dwell
Skip signal

Oscillating grinding
cycle (73, G74)
G73 G74
: Dwell : Dwell

Skip signal

158
 13. FUNCTIONS TO SIMPLIFY
B–63002EN/02 NC FUNCTION PROGRAMMING

13.13.1
Traverse Grinding
Cycle (G71) X W

(I)
A
 (K)
U (Dwell) (I)
B

 (K) U(Dwell)

G71 A_ B_ W_ U_ I_ K_ H_ ;
A : The first cutting depth
B : The second cutting depth
W : Grinding range
U : Dwell time Maximum command time 9999.999 sec.
I : Feed rate of A and B
K : Feed rate of W
H : Repetition frequency Setting value 1-9999

13.13.2
Traverse Direct Gauge
Grinding Cycle (G72) Skip signal

(Stopping) (Stopping) Skip signal

G72 P_ A_ B_ W_ U_ I_ K_ H_ ;

P : Gauge number (1-4)

If the option of the multi-step skip is employed, gauge number can be

specified. The specifying means of the gauge number is the same as the
multi-step skip. If the option of the multi-step skip is not employed, a
conventional skip signal becomes effective. Commands other than gauge
number are similar to G71.

159
13. FUNCTIONS TO SIMPLIFY
PROGRAMMING NC FUNCTION B–63002EN/02

13.13.3
Oscillation Grinding
Z
Cycle (G73)
W

(K)
U (Dwell) U (Dwell)
A

(B)
(K)

G73 A_ B_ W_ U_ K_ H_ ;

A : Cutting depth
B : Cutting depth
W: Grinding range
U : Dwell time
K : Feed rate
H : Repetition frequency Setting value 1-9999

13.13.4
Oscillation Direct Skip signal
Gauge Grinding Cycle
(G74)
Skip signal
(Stopping)
(Stopping)

G74 P_ A_ (B_) W_ U_ K_ H_ ;

P : Gauge number (1-4)

If the option of the multi-step skip is employed, gauge number can be

specified. The specifying means of the gauge number is the same as the
multi-step skip. If the option of the multi-step skip is not employed, a
convectional skip signal becomes effective. Commands other than gauge
number are similar to G73.

160
 13. FUNCTIONS TO SIMPLIFY
B–63002EN/02 NC FUNCTION PROGRAMMING

13.14 M series In the surface grinding canned cycle, repeated cutting peculiar to grinding
machining normally commanded by a number of blocks, is simply
SURFACE GRINDING programmed by commanding one block which includes the G function.
CANNED CYCLE There are the following 4 types of grinding canned cycle.
(M series) Plunge grinding cycle G75
Plunge direct grinding cycle G77
Continuous feed plane grinding cycle G78
Intermittent feed plane grinding cycle G79

161
13. FUNCTIONS TO SIMPLIFY
PROGRAMMING NC FUNCTION B–63002EN/02

13.14.1 The plunge grinding cycle is possible by the following command.

Plunge Grinding Cycle
(G75)

Format
G75 I_ J_ K_ X(Z)_ R_ F_ P_ L_ ;

I : The first cutting depth

(Cutting direction is by command coding.)
J : The second cutting depth
(Cutting direction is by command coding.)
K : Total cutting depth
X(Z) : Grinding range (Grinding direction is by command coding.)
R : Feed rate of I and J
F : Feed rate of X(Z)
P : Dwell time
L : Grindstone wear compensation number (Note 1)

Note 1) L is specified when performing continuous dressing.

Note 2) X(Z), I, J and K commands are all incremental commands.

Explanations

Y X(Z)

I
(R)  (F)
J P  (R)
 (F) P

X(Z)

The plunge grinding cycle is made up from the following sequence of 6

operations.
The operations from 1 up to 6 are repeated until the grindstone cutting
amount reaches the total cutting amount specified by address K.

Grindstone cutting :
Cuts in Y axis direction by cutting feed only the amount specified by
the first cutting depth 1. The feed rate becomes the rate specified by
R.
Dwell :
Performs dwell for only the time specified by P.
 Grinding :
Shift by cutting feed only the amount specified by X (or Z) in the X
axis direction (or Z axis direction). The feed rate becomes the rate
specified by F.

162
 13. FUNCTIONS TO SIMPLIFY
B–63002EN/02 NC FUNCTION PROGRAMMING

 Grindstone cutting :
Cuts in Y axis direction by cutting feed only the amount specified by
the second cutting depth J. The feed rate becomes the rate specified
by R.
 Dwell :
Performs dwell for only the time specified by P.
 Grinding (return direction) :
Sent at rate specified by F in the reverse direction only the amount
specified by X (or Z).
In case of single block, the operations from 1 to 6 are performed by one
cycle start. When cutting by 1 or J, in the case where the total cutting
depth is reached, the cycle finishes after the following sequence of
operations (up to 6) has been executed. The cutting depth in this case
reaches the total cutting depth position.

When total cutting depth

is reached by the cutting
operation of I or J


I 
K
J 

 

K
I





When total cutting depth

is reached in the middle
of cutting of I or J


K I 
J 
 

K
I




163
13. FUNCTIONS TO SIMPLIFY
PROGRAMMING NC FUNCTION B–63002EN/02

13.14.2 The plunge direct grinding cycle is possible by the following command.
Plunge Direct Grinding
Cycle (G77)
Format
G77 I_ J_ K_ X(Z)_ R_ F_ P_ L_ ;

The command method is the same as the G75 case except for the G code.
Further, even for the operation, the same sequence of 6 operations as the
G75 case is repeated.
G77 differs from G75 as follows: Inputting a skip signal during a cycle
can terminate the cycle after stopping (or terminating) the current
operation sequence.
The following shows the operation at skip signal input for each operation
sequence.

Explanations
Case of during operation Cutting immediately stops and returns to X(Z) coordinate at cycle start.
sequence
and 
(when I and J shift)
Skip signal
Skip signal
(Stopping)
(Stopping)

Case of during operation Dwell immediately stops and returns to X(Z) coordinate at cycle start.
sequence and 
(during dwell)

Case of during operation After shift of X(Z) has finished, returns to X(Z) coordinate at cycle start.
sequence  and 
(when X(Z) shifts)
Skip signal

(Stopping)
Skip signal

(Stopping)

164
 13. FUNCTIONS TO SIMPLIFY
B–63002EN/02 NC FUNCTION PROGRAMMING

13.14.3 The continuous feed plane grinding cycle is possible by the following
Continuous Feed Plane command.
Grinding Cycle (G78)
Format
G78 I_ (J)_ K_ X_ R_ F_ P_ L_ ;

I : Cutting depth (Cutting direction is by command coding.)

J : Cutting depth (Cutting direction is by command coding.)
K : Total cutting depth
X : Grinding range (Grinding direction is by command coding.)
F : Feed rate
P : Dwell time
L : Grindstone wear compensation number (Note 1)

Note 1) L is specified when performing continuous dressing.

Note 2) X, I, J and K commands are all incremental commands.

Z
X

P(Dwell)
(F)
I
I(J)  P(Dwell)
(F)

The continuous feed plane grinding cycle is made up from the following
sequence of 4 operations.
The operations from 1 up to 4 are repeated until the grindstone cutting
depth reaches the total cutting depth specified by address K.
Dwell
Grinding
 Dwell
 Grinding (return direction)
In case of single block, the operation from to are performed by one
cycle start.

NOTE
When J is not commanded, it is regarded as J=1.

165
13. FUNCTIONS TO SIMPLIFY
PROGRAMMING NC FUNCTION B–63002EN/02

Further, the J command effective only at the specified block. It does not
remain as modal information. (Irrespective of ”J” of G75, G77, and G79)
When cutting by I or J, in the case the total cutting depth is reached, the
cycle finishes after the following sequence of operations (up to 4) has been
executed. The cutting depth in this case reaches the total cutting depth
position.

When total cutting depth

is reached by cutting
operation of I or J.


K
I

J


K


I 


When the total cutting

depth is reached in the
middle of cutting of I or
J.


K
I
 
J

K
I 


166
 13. FUNCTIONS TO SIMPLIFY
B–63002EN/02 NC FUNCTION PROGRAMMING

13.14.4 The intermittent feed plane grinding cycle is possible by the following
Intermittent Feed Plane command.
Grinding Cycle (G79)

Format
G79 I_ J_ K_ X_ R_ F_ P_ L_ ;

I : The first cutting depth (Cutting direction is by command coding.)

J : The second cutting depth
(Cutting direction is by command coding.)
K : Total cutting depth
X : Grinding range (Grinding direction is by command coding.)
R : Feed rate of I and J
F : Feed rate of X
P : Dwell time
L : Grindstone wear compensation number (Note 1)

Note 1) L is specified when performing continuous dressing.

Note 2) I, J, K and X commands are all incremental commands.

Z X

I
(R)  (F)
J P  (R)
 (F) P

The intermittent feed plane grinding cycle is made up from the following
sequence of 6 operations.
The operations from 1 up to 6 are repeated until the grindstone cutting
depth reaches the total cutting depth specified by address K.

Grindstone cutting :
Cuts in Z axis direction by cutting feed only the amount specified by
the first cutting depth I. The feed rate becomes the rate specified by
R.
Dwell :
Performs dwell for only the time specified by P.
 Grinding :
Shifts by cutting feed only the amount specified by X in the X axis
direction. The feed rate becomes the rate specified by F.
 Grindstone cutting :
Cuts in Z axis direction by cutting feed only the amount specified by
the second cutting depth J. The feed rate becomes the rate specified
by R.

167
13. FUNCTIONS TO SIMPLIFY
PROGRAMMING NC FUNCTION B–63002EN/02

 Dwell :
Performs dwell for only the time specified by P.
 Grinding (return direction) :
Sent at rate specified by F in the reverse direction only the amount
specified by X.
In the case of a single block, the operations from 1 to 6 are performed by
one cycle start.

168
 13. FUNCTIONS TO SIMPLIFY
B–63002EN/02 NC FUNCTION PROGRAMMING

13.15 M series Controls cutting a certain fixed amount along the programmed figure for
input of external signals at the swing end point.
INFEED CONTROL
(M series)

x
Z

Format
G161 R_ ;

Figure program

G160 ;

G161R_ : Commands the operation mode and start of start

of figure program. Further, specifies the cutting
depth by address R.
Figure program : Programs the workpiece figure in the Y-Z plane by
either linear interpolation (G01) or by circular
interpolation (G02, G03). Multiple blocks can be
commanded.
G160 : Commands cancelling of operation mode
(ending of figure program).

169
13. FUNCTIONS TO SIMPLIFY
PROGRAMMING NC FUNCTION B–63002EN/02

13.16 M series The repeat cutting can be made by the rotation or translation of a figure
commanded with a sub program.
FIGURE COPYING The plane for figure copying is selected by the plane selection commands
(G72.1, G72.2) ( of G17, G18, and G19.
M series)
NOTE
The rotation copy cannot be commanded in the subprogram
which commanded a rotation copy. Similarly, the translation
copy cannot be further commanded in a subprogram which
commanded a translation copy.
However, the translation copy and rotation copy can be
commanded in the subprograms which commanded the
rotation copy and translation copy, respectively.

170
 13. FUNCTIONS TO SIMPLIFY
B–63002EN/02 NC FUNCTION PROGRAMMING

13.16.1 The repeat cutting can be made by the rotation of a figure commanded
Rotation Copy with a sub program using the following commands :
Select the plane on which rotational copy will be performed, using plane
selection commands G17, G18, and G19.

Format
G17 G72.1 P_ L_ Xp_ Yp_ R_ ; Xp–Yp plane
G18 G72.1 P_ L_ Zp_ Xp_ R_ ; Zp–Xp plane
G19 G72.1 P_ L_ Yp_ Zp_ R_ ; Yp–Zp plane

P : Sub program number

L : Number of repetitions
Xp : Xp axis center coordinate of rotation
(Xp : X axis or the axis which is parallel to X axis)
Yp : Yp axis center coordinate of rotation
(Yp : Y axis or the axis which is parallel to Y axis)
Zp : Zp axis center coordinate of rotation
(Zp : Z axis or the axis which is parallel to Z axis)
R : Rotation angle (+ = Counterclockwise direction)

Examples
Y
R10

P4 P3

Start point

P5 P2 P0

P6 P1
X

Main program Sub program

O1000 ; O2000 G03 X_ Y_ R30.0 ; (P2)

N10 G92 X40.0 Y50.0 ; N100 G01 X_ Y_ ; (P3)
N20 G00 G90 X_ Y_ ; (P0) N200 G03 X_ Y_ R10.0 ; (P4)
N30 G01 G17 G41 X_ Y_ D01 F10 ; (P1) N300 G01 X_ Y_ (P5)
N40 G72.1 P2000 L3 X0 Y0 R120.0 ; N400 G03 X_ Y_ R30.0 ; (P6)
N50 G40 G01 X_ Y_ I_ J_ ; (P0) N500 M99 ;
N60 G00 X40.0 Y50.0 ;
N70 M30 ;

171
13. FUNCTIONS TO SIMPLIFY
PROGRAMMING NC FUNCTION B–63002EN/02

13.16.2 The repeat cutting can be made by the translation of a figure commanded
Linear Copy with a sub program using the following commands :
Select the plane of linear copy with the plane selection commands G17,
G18, and G19.

Format
G17 G72.2 P_ L_ I_ J_ ; Xp–Yp plane
G18 G72.2 P_ L_ K_ I_ ; Zp–Xp plane
G19 G72.2 P_ L_ J_ K_ ; Yp–Zp plane

P : Sub program number

L : Number of repetitions
I : Shift amount in Xp direction
J : Shift amount in Yp direction
K : Shift amount in Zp direction

Examples

P4 P5

Start P1P2 P3 P6
P7
point P8 X
P0
70 70 70

Main program Sub program

O1000 ; O2000 G90 G01 X_ ; (P3)

N10 G92 X–20.0 Y0 ; N100 Y_ ; (P4)
N20 G00 G90 X0 Y0 N200 G02 X_ I_ ; (P5)
N30 G01 G17 G41 X_ Y_ D01 F10 ; (P0) N300 G01 Y_ (P6)
N40 Y_ ; (P1) N400 X_ ; (P7)
N50 X_ ; (P2) N500 M99 ;
N60 G72.2 P2000 L3 I70.0 J0 ;
N70 X_ Y_ ; (P8)
N80 X0 ;
N90 G00 G40 X–20.0 Y0 ;
N100 M30 ;

172
B–63002EN/02 NC FUNCTION 14. TOOL COMPENSATION FUNCTION

14 TOOL COMPENSATION FUNCTION

173
14. TOOL COMPENSATION FUNCTION NC FUNCTION B–63002EN/02

14.1 T series
TOOL OFFSET
(T series)

14.1.1 By using this function, shift amount between the reference position
Tool Offset (T Code) assumed when programming and the actual tool position when
machining, can be set as tool offset amount, thus allowing workpiece
machining according to the programmed size without changing the
program.

Reference position
(start point)

X offset amount

Z offset amount

The tool offset can be commanded to X, Y, and Z axes.

Setting value of offset number 1

Offset path
Setting value of offset number 2
T11
T22

T20
Programmed path

Explanations
Offset number The offset number is specified in the last one or two digit of the T code.
Use parameters to select offset number digits (one or two).
When offset number is specified with one digit
T 

Offset number
Tool number
When offset number is specified with two digits
T 

Offset number
Tool number

When the offset number is specified, the corresponding offset amount is

selected, and tool offset starts.
When 0 is selected as offset number, the tool offset is canceled.

174
B–63002EN/02 NC FUNCTION 14. TOOL COMPENSATION FUNCTION

14.1.2 The tool geometry compensation function compensates the tool figure or
Tool Geometry tool mounting position. The tool wear compensation function
compensates the wear of a tool tip. These compensation amounts (offset
Compensation and values) can be set separately. If distinction between them is not necessary,
Tool Wear the total value of them is set as a tool position offset value.
Compensation
Point in the program Point in the program

X-axis
geometry
offset X-axis
value offset
value
X-axis wear
offset value

Z-axis wear Z-axis offset value

offset value Z-axis geometry
offset value

Tool geometry compensation Tool geometry compensation

and tool wear compensation distinguished from tool wear
not distinguished compensation

14.1.3 In the system in which the Y axis is the fourth axis, the Y axis can be
compensated by the tool offset value.When the tool geometry/wear
Y Axis Offset
compensation option is specified, tool geometry/ware compensation is
valid for the Y-axis offset.

NOTE
1 To use the Y-axis offset, the Y axis must be a linear axis.
2 The direct input function of tool offset value or direct input
B function of tool compensation amount measured value
cannot be used for the Y-axis offset.

175
14. TOOL COMPENSATION FUNCTION NC FUNCTION B–63002EN/02

14.2 T series With this function, the programmed tool path can be offset when actually
machining, for value of the tool radius set in the CNC.
TOOL NOSE RADIUS By programming machining pattern using this function (measuring cutter
COMPENSATION radius for actual cutting, and setting the value in the CNC as offset value),
(G40, G41, G42) the tool can machine the programmed pattern, via the offset path. There
is not need to change the program even when tool radius changes; just
(T series)
change the offset value.

Work-
piece
Tool center path Tool
nose

Profile

Cross points of line and line, arc and arc, line and arc is automatically
calculated in the CNC to obtain offset actual tool path. So, Programming
becomes simple, because it is only necessary to program the machining
pattern.

Explanations
Tool nose radius G40 : Tool nose radius compensation cancel
compensation and its G41 : Tool nose radius compensation left
cancellation (G40, G41, G42 : Tool nose radius compensation right
G42) G41 and G42 are commands for tool nose radius compensation mode.
The tool is offset to the left forward in the tool movement in G42 and right
forward in G42. Tool nose radius compensation is cancelled with G40.

G42

Workpiece

G41

176
B–63002EN/02 NC FUNCTION 14. TOOL COMPENSATION FUNCTION

Imaginary tool nose The tool nose at position A in the following figure does not actually exist.
The imaginary tool nose is required because it is usually more difficult to
set the actual tool nose center to the start point than the imaginary tool
nose. (Note) Also when imaginary tool nose is used, the tool nose radius
need not be considered in programming.

Start point
Start point
When programmed using the tool When programmed using the
nose center imaginary tool nose

The position relationship when the tool is set to the start point is shown
in the following figure. The point of tool nose for start point or reference
point i set in offset memory same as tool nose radius compensation
amount.

Setting point of tool nose

2 6 1 2 6 1

7 0 5 7 0 5

3 8 4 3 8 4

2 6 1 2 6 1

7 0 5 7 0 5

3 8 4 3 8 4

Tool nose radius Tool nose radius compensation amount and imaginary tool nose point can
compensation amount be set in the tool nose radius compensation memory.
and assignment of When the last one or two digits of T code is commanded as offset number,
imaginary tool nose corresponding tool nose radius compensation amount and imaginary tool
point (T code) nose point in the tool compensation memory is applied as the tool nose
radius compensation amount and imaginary tool nose point for cutter
radius compensation.

177
14. TOOL COMPENSATION FUNCTION NC FUNCTION B–63002EN/02

Plane selection Cutter radius compensation is done on XY, ZX, YZ planes and on parallel
(G17, G18, G19) axes of X, Y, Z axes.
Plane to perform tool nose radius compensation is selected with G17,
G18, G19.
G17 : Xp-Yp plane Xp : X axis or the parallel axis
G18 : Zp-Xp plane Yp : Y axis or the parallel axis
G19 : Yp-Zp plane Zp : Z axis or the parallel axis
Parameters are used to set which parallel axis of the X, Y, Z axes is to be
the additional axis.

Interference check Tool overcutting is called ’interference’. This function checks whether
interference occurs, if tool nose radius compensation is performed.

Tool nose Programmed

center path path
r

Overcutting Overcutting

14.3 T series During radius compensation for the tool tip, corner circular interpolation,
with the specified compensation value used as the radius, can be
CORNER CIRCULAR performed by specifying G39 in offset mode.
INTERPOLATION
FUNCTION (G39)
(T series)
Format
in offset mode, specify

G39 ;
or I_ J_
G39 I_ K_
J_ K_

178
B–63002EN/02 NC FUNCTION 14. TOOL COMPENSATION FUNCTION

14.4 M series By setting the difference between tool length assumed when
programming and the actual tool length as offsets, workpiece can be
TOOL LENGTH machined according to the size commanded by the program, without
COMPENSATION changing the program.
(G43, G44, G49)
(M series)

ÇÇ ÇÇ
ÇÇ ÇÇ
ÇÇ ÇÇ
Reference
tool

ÇÇ
Difference set as offset value

Explanations
Tool length G43 : Tool length compensation +
compensation and its G44 : Tool length compensation –
cancellation G49 : Tool length compensation cancel
(G43, G44, G49)
In G43 mode, the tool is offset to the + direction for the preset tool length
offset amount. In G44 mode, it is offset to the - direction for the preset
tool length offset amount. G49 cancels tool length compensation.

Tool length Tool length compensation can be performed for three types of axes.
compensation axis Compensation for the Z axis is tool length compensation A. That for the
axis vertical to the selected plane is tool length compensation B. That for
the axis specified by the G43 or G44 block is tool length compensation
C. Which compensation to perform can be selected by a parameter.

Assignment of offset The offset amount can be set in the tool length compensation memory.
amount (H code) By specifying an offset number with the H code, offset amount loaded in
corresponding tool length compensation memory is used as tool length
compensation amount.

Format
Tool length compensation A
G43
G44 H_ ;

Tool length compensation B

G17
G43 H_ ;
G18
G44
G19
Tool length compensation C

G43
G44 α_ H_ ; (alpha: arbitrary 1 axis)

179
14. TOOL COMPENSATION FUNCTION NC FUNCTION B–63002EN/02

14.5 M series The programmed tool movement can be expanded or reduced for offset
amount preset in the tool length compensation memory, by using this
TOOL OFFSET function.
(G45, G46, G47, G48)
(M series)
Explanations
G45, G46, G47, G48 G45: Tool offset expansion
G46: Tool offset reduction
G47: Tool offset double expansion
G48: Tool offset double reduction
By commanding G45 - G48, expansion, reduction, double expansion,
double reduction to axis move commanded in the program can be
performed for the offset amount preset in the tool length compensation
memory. The same offset amount is applied to all move command axes
in the same block as G45 - G48.

G code Tool offset value is positive Tool offset value is negative

G45
Start End Start End
point point point point

G46
Start End Start End
point point point point

G47
Start End Start End
point point point point

G48
Start End Start End
point point point point
Movement distance
Tool offset value
Actual movement distance

Assignment of offset The offset amount can be set in the tool length compensation memory.
amount (D code) By commanding an offset number with the D code, offset amount
corresponding to the number in the tool length compensation memory is
used as tool offset amount.

180
B–63002EN/02 NC FUNCTION 14. TOOL COMPENSATION FUNCTION

14.6 M series
CUTTER
COMPENSATION
(M series)

14.6.1 With cutter compensation B, inside of the sharp angle cannot be cut. In
this case, an arc larger that the cutter radius can be commanded to the
Cutter Compensation B
corner by programming. Other functions are same as cutter radius
(G40 - 42) compensation C.

14.6.2 With this function, the programmed tool path can be offset when actually
Cutter Compensation C machining, for value of the tool radius set in the CNC.
By measuring cutting radius for actual cutting, and setting the value in the
(G40 - G42) NC as offset value, the tool can machine the programmed pattern, via the
offset path. There is no need to change the program even when tool radius
changes; just change the offset value.

Programmed path
Tool center path
Cross point

Cross points of line and line, arc and arc, line and arc is automatically
calculated in the NC to obtain offset actual tool path. So, programming
becomes simple, because it is only necessary to program the machining
pattern.

Cutter compensation and G40 : Cutter radius compensation cancel

its cancellation G41 : Cutter radius compensation left
(G40, G41, G42) G42 : Cutter radius compensation right
G41 and G42 are commands for cutter radius compensation mode. The
cutter is offset to the left forward in the cutter movement in G42 and right
forward in G42. Cutter radius compensation is cancelled with G40.

Assignment of offset The offset amount can be set in the cutter radius compensation memory.
amount (D code) When the D code is commanded as an offset number, corresponding offset
amount in the tool compensation memory is applied as the offset amount
for cutter radius compensation.
The offset can be specified with an H code when the parameter is set
accordingly.

181
14. TOOL COMPENSATION FUNCTION NC FUNCTION B–63002EN/02

Plane selection Cutter radius compensation is done on XY, ZX, YZ planes and on parallel
(G17, G18, G19) axes of X, Y, Z axes.
Plane to perform cutter radius compensation is selected with G17, G18,
G19.
G17 : Xp-Yp plane
G18 : Zp-Xp plane
G19 : Yp-Zp plane
where
Xp : X axis or its parallel axis
Yp : Y axis or its parallel axis
Zp : Z axis or its parallel axis
Parameters are used to set which parallel axis of the X, Y, Z axes is to be
the additional axis.

Plane to perform cutter radius compensation is decided in the axis address

commanded in the g17, G18, or G19 block.
Example)
(U, V, W axes are parallel axes of X, Y, Z axes respectively)
G17 X_ ; XY plane
G17 U_ W_ ; UV plane
G19 Y_ W_ ; YW plane
If axis address of Xp, Yp, or Zp was omitted, compensation plane is
decided regarding that X, Y, or Z was omitted.

Interference check Tool overcutting is called ’interference’. This function checks whether
interference occurs, if cutter radius compensation is performed.

Tool nose Programmed

center path path
r

Overcutting Overcutting

182
B–63002EN/02 NC FUNCTION 14. TOOL COMPENSATION FUNCTION

14.7 M series During cutter compensation B, C, corner circular interpolation, with the
specified compensation value used as the radius, can be performed by
CORNER CIRCULAR specifying G39 in offset mode.
INTERPOLATION
FUNCTION (G39)
(M series)
Cutter compensation B

in offset mode, specify

X_ Y_
G39 X_ Z_ ;
Y_ Z_
or
I_ J_
G39 I_ K_ ;
J_ K_

Cutter compensation C

in offset mode, specify

G39 ;
or I_ J_
G39 I_ K_ ;
J_ K_

183
14. TOOL COMPENSATION FUNCTION NC FUNCTION B–63002EN/02

14.8
TOOL
COMPENSATION
MEMORY

14.8.1 M series One of the tool compensation memory A/B/C can be selected according
Tool Compensation to offset amount.
Tool offset amount range which can be set is as follows:
Memory (M series)
Geometry compensation Tool wear compensation
Increment
system
Metric input Inch input Metric input Inch input

IS-B ±999.999mm ±99.9999inch ±99.999mm ±9.9999inch

IS-C ±999.9999mm ±99.9999inch ±99.9999mm ±9.99999inch

Explanations

Tool compensation There is no difference between geometry compensation memory and tool
memory A wear compensation memory in this tool compensation memory A.
Therefore, amount of geometry offset and tool wear offset together is set
as the offset memory. There is also no differences between cutter radius
compensation (D code) and tool length compensation (H code).
Example

Offset number Compensation D code/H code common

(geometry+wear)

001 10.0 For D code

002 20.0 For D code

003 100.0 For H code

Tool compensation Memory for geometry compensation and tool ware compensation is
memory B prepared separately in tool compensation memory B. Geometry
compensation and tool wear compensation can thus be set separately.
There is no difference between cutter radius compensation (D code) and
tool length compensation (H code).

Reference
point OFSG : Geometry compensation
OFSW : Wear compensation

ÇÇ
ÇÇ
OFSG

ÇÇ
OFSW
ÇÇ
184
B–63002EN/02 NC FUNCTION 14. TOOL COMPENSATION FUNCTION

Example

Offset number Geometry Wear D code/H code

compensation compensation common

001 10.1 0.1 For D code

002 20.2 0.2 For D code

003 100.0 0.1 For H code

Tool compensation Memory for geometry compensation as well as tool wear compensation
memory C is prepared separately in tool compensation memory C. Geometry
compensation and tool wear compensation can thus be set separately.
Separate memories are prepared for cutter radius compensation (for D
code) and for tool length compensation (for H code).
Example

For D code For H code

Offset
number Geometry Wear Geometry Wear
compensation compensation compensation compensation

001 10.0 0.1 100.0 0.1

002 20.0 0.2 300.0 0.3

14.8.2 T series There are two types of tool offset amount memory, which can be selected
Tool Offset Amount according to offset amount.
Tool offset amount range which can be set is as follows:
Memory (T series)
Tool compensation value
Increment
system
Metric input (mm) Inch input (inch)

IS-B –999.999 to +999.999 –99.9999 to +99.9999

IS-C –999.9999 to +999.9999 –99.99999 to +99.99999

The maximum wear compensation value can, however, be modified using

a parameter.
The number of digits used to specify a tool geometry/wear compensation
value can be expanded by selecting the option which enables seven–digit
tool offset specification. When this option is used, tool compensation
values can be specified using up to seven digits for IS–B and eight digits
for IS–C. The valid data range for tool compensation values will thus be
as listed in the following table.
Tool compensation value
Increment
system
Metric input (mm) Inch input (inch)

IS-B 0 to ±9999.999 0 to ±999.9999

0 to ±9999.9999 0 to ±999.99999
IS-C
(0 to ±4000.0000) (0 to ±160.00000)

185
14. TOOL COMPENSATION FUNCTION NC FUNCTION B–63002EN/02

NOTE
1 The range enclosed in parentheses applies when automatic
inch/metric conversion is enabled.
2 The option enabling seven–digit tool offset specification
cannot be used for B–axis offsets for B–axis control.

Tool geometry/wear No distinction is made between the memory for geometry compensation
compensation option not values and that for wear compensation values. The total of the geometry
specified compensation value and wear compensation value for a tool is stored in
compensation memory.
Example

Offset X axis Z axis Y axis Amount of Imaginary

number offset offset offset tool nose tool nose
amount amount amount compensation number

01 10.0 100.1 0 0.5 3

02 20.2 150.3 0 0.7 2

03 30.4 200.5 0 1.0 8

Tool geometry/wear Memory for geometry offset and tool wear offset is prepared separately.
compensation option Geometry offset and tool wear offset can thus be set separately.
specified

ÇÇ
ÇÇ
X axis geometry offset

ÇÇ
ÇÇ
X axis wear offset
Z axis wear offset Z axis geometry offset

Offset X axis offset Z axis offset Y axis offset Tool nose radius Imaginary
number value value value compensation tool nose
value number

Geometry Wear Geometry Wear Geometry Wear Geometry Wear

offset offset offset offset offset offset offset offset

01 10.0 0.0 100.0 0.1 0 0 0.4 0.1 3

02 20.2 0.2 150.0 0.3 0 0 0.5 0.2 2

03 30.4 0.4 200.0 0.5 0 0 1.2 –0.2 8

186
B–63002EN/02 NC FUNCTION 14. TOOL COMPENSATION FUNCTION

14.9
NUMBER OF TOOL
OFFSETS

14.9.1 M series 32 tool offsets (standard)

Number of Tool Offset numbers (D code/H code) 0 - 32 can be used.
D00 - D32, or H00 - H32
Offsets (M Series)
64 tool offsets (optional)
Offset numbers (D code/H code) 0 - 64 can be used.
D00 - D64, or H00 - H64
99 tool offsets (optional)
Offset numbers (D code/H code) 0 - 99 can be used.
D00 - D99, or H00 - H99
200 tool offsets (optional)
Offset numbers (D code/H code) 0 - 200 can be used.
D00 - D200, or H00 - H200
400 tool offsets (optional)
Offset numbers (D code/H code) 0 - 400 can be used.
D00 - D400 or H00 - H400
499 tool offsets (optional)
Offset numbers (D code/H code) 0 - 200 can be used.
D00 - D499, or H00 - H499
999 tool offsets (optional)
Offset numbers (D code/H code) 0 - 400 can be used.
D00 - D999 or H00 - H999

14.9.2 T series 16 tool offsets (standard)

Offset numbers 0 - 16 can be used.
Number of Tool Offsets
(T Series) 32 tool offsets (optional)
Offset numbers 0 - 32 can be used.
64 tool offsets (optional)
Offset numbers 0 - 64 can be used.
99 tool offsets (optional)
Offset numbers 0 - 99 can be used.

187
14. TOOL COMPENSATION FUNCTION NC FUNCTION B–63002EN/02

14.10 Tool offset amount can be set/changed with the G10 command.
When G10 is commanded in absolute input (G90), the commanded offset
CHANGING OF TOOL amount becomes the new tool offset amount. When G10 is commanded
OFFSET AMOUNT in incremental input (G91), the current tool offset amount plus the
(PROGRAMMABLE commanded offset amount is the new tool offset amount.
DATA INPUT) (G10)

Format (M series)
Tool compensation
memory A
G10 L11 P_ R_ ;
P_ : Offset number
R_ : Tool offset amount

Tool compensation
memory B
Setting/changing of geometry offset amount

G10 L10 P_ R_ ;

Setting/changing of tool wear offset amount

G10 L11 P_ R_ ;

Tool compensation
memory C
Setting/changing of geometry offset amount for H code

G10 L10 P_ R_ ;

Setting/changing of geometry offset amount for D code

G10 L12 P_ R_ ;

Setting/changing of tool wear offset amount for H code

G10 L11 P_ R_ ;

Setting/changing of tool ware offset amount for D code

G10 L13 P_ R_ ;

NOTE
L1 may be used instead of L11 for the compatibility with the
conventional CNC’s format.

188
B–63002EN/02 NC FUNCTION 14. TOOL COMPENSATION FUNCTION

Format (T series)
G10 P_ X_ Y_ Z_ R_ Q_ ;
or
G10 P_ U_ V_ W_ C_ Q_ ;
P : Offset number
1–64 :Tool wear offset number
10000+(1–64) : Tool geometry offset number+10000
X : Offset value on X axis (absolute)
Y : Offset value on Y axis (absolute)
Z : Offset value on Z axis (absolute)
U : Offset value on X axis (incremental)
V : Offset value on Y axis (incremental)
W : Offset value on Z axis (incremental)
R : Tool nose radius offset value (absolute)
R : Tool nose radius offset value (incremental)
Q : Imaginary tool nose number

In an absolute command, the values specified in addresses X, Y , Z, and

R are set as the offset value corresponding to the offset number specified
by address P. In an incremental command, the value specified in
addresses U, V, W, and C is added to the current offset value
corresponding to the offset number.

NOTE
1 Addresses X, Y, Z, U, V, and W can be specified in the same
block.
2 Use of this command in a program allows the tool to
advance little by little. This command can also be used input
offset values one at a time from a tape by specifying this
command successively instead of inputting these values
one at a time from the MDI unit.

189
14. TOOL COMPENSATION FUNCTION NC FUNCTION B–63002EN/02

14.11 M series The grinding-wheel cutting and dresser cutting are compensated
continuously during grinding in the canned cycles for surface grinding
GRINDING-WHEEL (G75, and G77 to G79). They are compensated according to the amount
WEAR of continuous dressing.
COMPENSATION BY
CONTINUOUS V

DRESSING (M series)

Explanations
Specification The offset number (grinding-wheel wear compensation number) is
specified by address L in the block for the canned cycles for surface
grinding. The compensation amount set in the offset memory
corresponding to the specified number is the dressing amount.

Compensation Compensation is performed for each cutting operation (each X-axis

movement) in the canned cycles for grinding. Along with X-axis
movement, compensation is performed both in Y-axis direction
(grinding-wheel cutting) and that in V-axis direction (dresser cutting).
That is, compensation is performed for interpolation for the three
coordinates simultaneously. The Y-axis movement amount
(compensation amount) is the specified dressing amount. The V-axis
movement amount is twice the specified dressing amount (diameter).

a : Dressing amount
Dresser

2a
V Y
Grinding
X wheel

X
Workpiece

190
B–63002EN/02 NC FUNCTION 14. TOOL COMPENSATION FUNCTION

14.12 M series In cutter compensation C, two–dimensional offsetting is performed for a

selected plane. In three–dimensional tool compensation, the tool can be
THREE– shifted three–dimensionally when a three–dimensional offset direction is
DIMENSIONAL TOOL programmed.
COMPENSATION
(G40, G41) (M series)

Format
Start–up
(Starting
three–dimensional tool When the following command is executed in the cutter compensation
cancel mode, the three–dimensional tool compensation mode is set :
compensation)
G41 Xp_ Yp_ Zp_ I_ J_ K_ D_ ;
Xp : X–axis or a parallel axis
Yp : X–axis or a parallel axis
Zp : Z–axis or a parallel axis

Canceling
three–dimensional tool
compensation When the following command is executed in the three–dimensional
tool compensation mode, the cutter compensation cancel mode is set :

When canceling the three–dimensional tool compensation mode and

tool movement at the same time
G40 Xp_ Yp_ Zp_ ;
or
Xp_ Yp_ Zp_ D00 ;

When only canceling the vector

G40 ;
or
D00 ;

Selecting offset space

The three–dimensional space where three–dimensional tool com-

pensation is to be executed is determined by the axis addresses spe-
cified in the start–up block containing the G41 command. If Xp, Yp, or
Zp is omitted, the corresponding axis, X–, Y–, or Z– axis (the basic
three axis), is assumed.

(Example)
When the U–axis is parallel to the X–axis, the V–axis is parallel to the
Y–axis, and the W–axis is parallel to the Z–axis

G41 X_ I_ J_ K_ D ; XYZ space

G41 U_ V_ Z_ I_ J_ K_ D_ ; UVZ space
G41 W_ I_ J_ K_ D ; XYW space

191
14. TOOL COMPENSATION FUNCTION NC FUNCTION B–63002EN/02

14.13 T series The grinding wheel compensation function creates a compensation vector
by extending the line between the specified compensation center and the
GRINDING WHEEL specified end point, on the specified compensation plane.
WEAR
COMPENSATION Compensation vector
(G40, G41) (T seriesS)
Programmed path
Compensation
center
Tool center path

Format
Selecting the
compensation center G41 Pn (n=1, 2, 3);
G41 P1; Select the first compensation center
G41 P2; Select the second compensation center
G41 P3; Select the third compensation center

Start–up D_; D code other than 0

Canceling D0;
compensation mode
Holding the G40;
compensation vector

192
 15. ACCURACY COMPENSATION
B–63002EN/02 NC FUNCTION FUNCTION

15 ACCURACY COMPENSATION FUNCTION

193
15. ACCURACY COMPENSATION
FUNCTION NC FUNCTION B–63002EN/02

15.1 The errors caused by machine position, as pitch error of the feed screw,
can be compensated. This function is for better machining precision.
STORED PITCH As the offset data are stored in the memory as parameters, compensations
ERROR of dogs and settings can be omitted. Offset intervals are set constant by
COMPENSATION parameters (per axis). Total offset points are:
Total offset points = 128 × controlled axes.
Optional distribution to each axis can be done by parameter setting. As
each position:
Offset pulse = (-7 to +7) x (magnification)
Where Offset pulse unit is the same as detection unit
Magnification: 0 to 100 times, set by parameter (per axis)

15.2 On a machine having a long stroke, machining precision may be reduced

if the straightness of the axes is poor. The straightness compensation
STRAIGHTNESS function compensates an axis in detection units while the tool is moving
COMPENSATION along another axis, thus improving machining precision.
Moving the tool along an axis (movement axis, specified with a
parameter) compensates another axis (compensation axis, specified with
a parameter), at each pitch error compensation point along the movement
axis.
Example: Pitch error compensation points along the movement axis
0 1 2 3 60 61 126 127

… …

Machine coordinates along the movement axis

a c

γ
α
… …
β
ε
b d

a, b, c, d : Compensation point numbers for the movement axis (same as the numbers
of the pitch error compensation points)
α, β, γ, ε : Compensation value for each compensation point number

The compensation value applied to the compensation axis is (α – β)/(b –

a) for the range between points a and b.

NOTE
1 Straightness compensation is enabled once reference
position return has been performed along the movement
and compensation axes.
2 When the optional straightness compensation function is
used, the optional storage pitch error compensation
function is required.
3 Straightness compensation data is added to the storage
pitch error compensation data when output.

194
 15. ACCURACY COMPENSATION
B–63002EN/02 NC FUNCTION FUNCTION

15.3 This function is used to compensate lost motions proper to the machine
system. Offset amounts come in a range of 0 to ±9999 pulses per axis,
BACKLASH and is set as parameters in detection unit.
COMPENSATION

15.4 Since different backlash compensation values can be used for cutting feed
and rapid traverse, the machining precision is improved.
BACKLASH The following table shows backlash amounts according to the feedrate
COMPENSATION and movement direction. In the table, the backlash compensation amount
SPECIFIC TO RAPID for cutting feed is A, and that for rapid traverse is B. A and B are set in
parameters.
TRAVERSE AND
CUTTING FEED Cutting Rapid Rapid Cutting
feed traverse traverse feed
↓ ↓ ↓ ↓
Cutting Rapid Cutting Rapid
feed traverse feed traverse

Movement in same direction 0 0 ±α ±(–α)

Movement in opposite directions ±A ±B ±(B+α) ±(B+α)

*1) α=(A–B) / 2
*2) Sings (+ and –) indicate directions.

Stop in cutting feed

ÙÙÙÙÙÙ
ÙÙÙÙÙÙ
A
ÙÙÙÙÙÙ
ÙÙÙÙÙÙ
ÙÙÙÙÙÙ
ÙÙÙÙÙÙ
Cutting feed

Stop in rapid traverse

ÙÙÙÙÙÙ
ÙÙÙÙÙÙ
ÙÙÙÙÙÙ
α B α

ÙÙÙÙÙÙ
Rapid traverse

α : Excess of machine movement

ÙÙÙÙÙÙ
ÙÙÙÙÙÙ

195
15. ACCURACY COMPENSATION
FUNCTION NC FUNCTION B–63002EN/02

15.5 Parameters and pitch errors data can be set by programs. therefore,
following uses can be done example.
PROGRAMMABLE
Parameter setting such as pitch errors compensation data, etc. when
PARAMETER ENTRY the attachment is replaced.
(G10, G11) Parameters such as max. cutting speed and cutting feed time constant
can be changed according to the machining conditions.

Format
G10 L50 ;
N_ R_ ; Input of parameters except axis type
N_ P_ R_ ; Input of axis type parameters
:
G11 ;

G10 L50 : Parameter input mode

G11 : Parameter input mode cancel
N_ : Parameter No. (or pitch error data No.+10000)
P_ : Axis No. (in the case of axis type parameter)
R_ : Parameter setting value (or pitch error data)

Note) Some parameters cannot be set.

196
 16. COORDINATE SYSTEM
B–63002EN/02 NC FUNCTION CONVERSION

16 COORDINATE SYSTEM CONVERSION

197
16. COORDINATE SYSTEM
CONVERSION NC FUNCTION B–63002EN/02

16.1 Patterns specified by the program can be rotated. For example, by using
this function, when the attached workpiece comes in a position which is
COORDINATE somewhat rotated from the machine coordinates, the position can be
SYSTEM ROTATION compensated by the rotation instruction.
(G68, G69) – If a pattern is similar to that made by rotating a programmed figure, the
program for the pattern can be created by calling the program for the figure
(M SERIES)
as a sub program, and rotating the coordinates in the program. This
(G68.1, G69.1) – function reduces the programming time and program length.
(T SERIES)
Y

Rotation angle

Rotation
center
X
0

Format
M series
G17
G18 G68 α_ β_ R_ ;
G19

T series
G17
G18 G68.1 α_ β_ R_ ;
G19

α, β : Coordinate valne of rotation center specify two axes from X, Y,

Z axes of G17, G18, G19.(These are always absolute values.)
R : Rotation (+ for the counterclockwise direction.
Specified in absolute value. It can be also specified
in incremental values according to the parameter setting. )

By this command, commands thereafter are rotated in the angle

commanded by R, with the point commanded by alpha, beta as the
rotation center. Rotation angle is commanded in 0.001 x units in a range
of:
–360000  R  360000
The rotation plane is the plane selected (G17, G18, G19) when G68
(G68.1) was commanded.
G17, G18 and G19 may not be commanded in the same block as G68.
When alpha, beta is omitted, the point where G68 (G68.1) was
commanded becomes the rotation center.
G69; (M series), G69.1 ; (T series) Cancels the coordinate system rotation.

198
 16. COORDINATE SYSTEM
B–63002EN/02 NC FUNCTION CONVERSION

16.2 M series Scaling can be commanded to figures commanded in the machining

programs.
SCALING (G50, G51)
(M series)
Format
When each axis is scaling of the same magnification

Format Sign explanation

X_Y_Z_ : Absolute command of
G51 X_ Y_ Z_ P_ ; Scaling start center coordinate value of
scaling
Scaling is effective. P_ : Magnification of scaling
(Scaling mode)

G50 ; Scaling cancellation

By this command, scaling of the magnification specified by P is

commanded with the point commanded by X, Y, Z as its center. G50
cancels to scaling mode.
G50 : Scaling mode cancel
G51 : Scaling mode command
Commandable magnification is as follows :
0.00001 - 9.99999 times or 0.001 - 999.999

Y P3
P4
P4’ P3’

P0 : Center of scaling
P1’ P0 P2’

P1 P2
X
0

If P was not commanded, the magnification set by parameters is applied.

When X, Y, Z are omitted, the point where G51 was commanded becomes
the center of scaling.
Scaling cannot be done to offset amounts such as tool length
compensation, cutter radius compensation, or tool offset.

Scaling
down to 1/2

199
16. COORDINATE SYSTEM
CONVERSION NC FUNCTION B–63002EN/02

A scaling magnification can be set for each axis or for all axes in common.
A parameter can specify whether it should be set for each axis or for all
axes.

Format
Scaling of each axis (Mirror image)

Format Sign explanation

G51 X_ Y_ Z_ I_ J_ K_ ; Scaling X_Y_Z_ : Absolute command of

start center coordinate value of
Scaling is effective. scaling
(Scaling mode) I_J_K_ : Magnification of scaling
of X axis, Y axis, and
G50 ; Scaling cancellation Z axis
(Unit 0.001 or 0.00001 is
selected according to
the parameter.)
The magnification which can be
instructed is as follows.
±0.00001–±9.99999 or
±0.001–±999. 999

If magnifications I, J, or K are not specified, the magnification of each axis

set by a parameter is used.

X axis

Profile of machining program

d Profile after
scaling

0
Y axis
a
b

a/b : X-axis scaling magnification

c/d : Y-axis scaling magnification
o : Center of scaling

200
 16. COORDINATE SYSTEM
B–63002EN/02 NC FUNCTION CONVERSION

16.3 M series Coordinate conversion about an axis can be carried out if the center of
rotation, direction of the axis of rotation, and angular displacement are
THREE– specified. This function is very useful in three–dimensional machining
DIMENSIONAL by a die–sinking machine or similar machine. For example, if a program
COORDINATE specifying machining on the XY plane is converted by the three–
dimensional coordinate conversion function, the identical machining can
CONVERSION
be executed on a desired plane in three–dimensional space.
(G68, G69) (M series)
Z

Y
X Three–dimensional coordinate conversion

Z Y
X

Format
G68 Xpx1 Ypy1 Zpz1 Ii1 Jj1 Kk1 Rα ; Starting

Three–dimensional coordinate
conversion mode
G69 ; Canceling three–dimensional
coordinate
Xp, Yp, Zp : Center of rotation (absolute coordinates ) on the X, Y,
and Z axis or parallel axes
I, J, K : Direction of the axis of rotation
R : Angular displacement

Three–dimensional coordinate conversion can be applied up to two times.

N1 G68 Xpx1 Ypy1 Zpz1 Ii1 Jj1 Kk1 Rα ;
N2 G68 Xpx2 Ypy2 Zpz2 Ii2 Jj2 Kk2 Rβ ;

201
17. MEASUREMENT FUNCTIONS NC FUNCTION B–63002EN/02

17 MEASUREMENT FUNCTIONS

202
B–63002EN/02 NC FUNCTION 17. MEASUREMENT FUNCTIONS

17.1 By commanding axis move after G31, linear interpolation can be

commanded like in G01. If an external skip signal is input during this
SKIP FUNCTION (G31) command, the remainder of this command is cancelled, and program
skips to the next block.
G31 is a one-shot command and is valid for the commanded block only.

G31 G91 X100.0 F100; G31 G90 X200.0 F100;

Y50.0 ; X300.0 Y100.0 ;

Skip signal input (300, 100)

50.0 Skip signal input

200.0
100.0

Actual movement
With no skip signal input

Coordinate value when skip signal is on, is stored in the system variables
#5061 - #5068 of the customer macro, so this function can also be read
with the customer macro function.
#506n : ntn axis skip signal position (n=1–8)
As the skip function can be used when move amount is not clear, this
function can be used for:
Constant feed in grinding machines
Tool measurement with tactile sensor.

203
17. MEASUREMENT FUNCTIONS NC FUNCTION B–63002EN/02

17.2 n blocks with either of P1 to P4 following G31 commanded, the

coordinate value where skip signals (4 types) were input is stored in the
MULTI-STEP SKIP custom macro variables, and at the same time, the remaining movement
FUNCTION of the block is skipped. It is also possible to skip the remaining dwell with
(G31 P1 - G31 P4) the skip signal by parameter, in a block where: G04 is commanded
(dwell).
(T SERIES)
Parameters decide which skip command or dwell command is valid to
which of the four skip signals. The skip signal is not necessarily unique
to a single skip command or dwell command; it is also possible to set a
skip signal to multiple skip command or dwell commands.

17.3 Delay and error of skip signal input is 0–2 msec at the NC side (not
considering those at the PMC side).
HIGH-SPEED SKIP This high-speed skip signal input function keeps this value to 0.1 msec
SIGNAL INPUT or less, thus allowing high precision measurement. This signal is
connected directly to the NC; not via the PMC.

17.4 T series With the motor torque limited (for example, by a torque limit command,
issued through the PMC window), a move command following G31 P99
TORQUE LIMIT SKIP (or G31 P98) can cause the same type of cutting feed as with G01 (linear
(G31 P99, G31 P98) interpolation).
(T series) Skip operation is performed when the motor torque reaches the limit,
when the tool is pushed back for example, during cutting feed.
For details of how to use this function, refer to the manuals supplied by
the machine tool builder.
Format
G31 P99 IP _ F_ ;
G31 P98 IP _ F_ ;

G31 : One–shot G code (G code effective only in the block in which

it is issued)
P99 : Skip operation is performed when the motor torque reaches
the limit or the skip signal is input.
P98 : Skip operation is performed only when the motor torque reaches
the limit (regardless of the skip signal).

17.5 M series The continuous high–speed skip function enables reading of absolute
coordinates by using the high–speed skip signal. Once a high–speed skip
CONTINUOUS signal has been input in a G31P90 block, absolute coordinates are read
HIGH–SPEED SKIP into custom macro variables #5061 to #5068. The input of a skip signal
FUNCTION (G31, P90) does not stops axial movement, thus enabling reading of the coordinates
of two or more points.
(M series)
The rising and falling edges of the high–speed skip signal can be used as
a trigger, depending on the parameter setting.

Format

G31 P90 __ F__

__: Skip axis address and amount of travel

Only one axis can be specified. G31 is a one–shot G code.

204
B–63002EN/02 NC FUNCTION 17. MEASUREMENT FUNCTIONS

17.6 M series Difference between the coordinate value of tool when tool end has reached
the measuring position and coordinate value of the measuring position is
TOOL LENGTH automatically measured, calculated, and added to the currently set tool
AUTOMATIC offset amount by CNC system. The machine must be equipped with
MEASUREMENT measuring devices, for example tactile sensor, so that a signal is sent when
the tool end has reached the measuring position.
(G37) (M series)
Measuring position coordinate value is commanded as follows:

Format
G37 α_ ;

α : The measuring position is commanded in by either X, Y, or Z.

ε ε

Start position

S A B M C

Measuring position

γ : Deceleration point (parameter)

ε : Allowable measuring range (parameter)

The tool is moved from the start position to the deceleration point A in
rapid traverse, tool speed is decelerated to the measurement speed preset
by parameter, and moved on till the measuring position reach signal is
output. In case measuring position reach signal is not output in the
allowable measuring range (from point B to C), and alarm arises.
(New offset amount) = (Old offset amount) + (Measuring position
reach signal detected position) - (measuring position)

205
17. MEASUREMENT FUNCTIONS NC FUNCTION B–63002EN/02

17.7 T series Difference between the coordinate value of tool when tool end has reached
the measuring position and coordinate value of the measuring position is
AUTOMATIC TOOL automatically measured, calculated, and added to the currently set tool
OFFSET (G37, G36) offset amount by CNC system. The machine must be equipped with
(T series) measuring devices, for example tactile sensor, so that a signal is sent when
the tool end has reached the measuring position.
Measuring position coordinate value is commanded as follows:

Format
G36 X_ ;
or
G37 Z_ ;

ε ε

Start position

S A B M C

Measuring position

γ : Deceleration point (parameter)

ε : Allowable measuring range (parameter)

The tool is moved from the start position to the deceleration point A in
rapid traverse, tool speed is decelerated to the measurement speed preset
by parameter, and moved on till the measuring position reach signal is
output. In case measuring position reach signal is not output in the
allowable measuring range (from point B to C), and alarm arises.
(New offset amount) = (Old offset amount) + (Measuring position
reach signal detected position) - (measuring position)

206
B–63002EN/02 NC FUNCTION 17. MEASUREMENT FUNCTIONS

17.8 M series The value displayed as a relative position can be set in the offset memory
as an offset value by a soft key.
TOOL LENGTH Call offset value display screen. Relative positions are also displayed on
MEASUREMENT this screen. Reset the displayed relative position to zero. Set the tool for
(M series) measurement at the same fixed point on the machine by hand. The relative
position display at this point shows difference between the reference tool
and the tool measured and the relative position display value is then set
as offset amounts.

ÇÇ ÇÇ
ÇÇ ÇÇ
Reference tool
ÇÇ ÇÇ
ÇÇ
This difference is set
as offset amount

Fixed point

207
17. MEASUREMENT FUNCTIONS NC FUNCTION B–63002EN/02

17.9 T series This is a function of setting an offset value by key-inputting a workpiece

diameter manually cut and measured from the MDI keyboard.
DIRECT INPUT OF First the workpiece is cut in the longitudinal or in the cross direction
TOOL manually. When a button on the machine operator’s panel is pressed upon
COMPENSATION completion of the cutting, the work coordinate value at that time is
recorded. Then, withdraw the tool, stop the spindle, and measure the
MEASURED VALUE/
diameter if the cutting was on the longitudinal direction or distance from
DIRECT INPUT OF the standard face if it was on the facing. (The standard face is made as Z
WORKPIECE = 0.) When the measured value is entered into the offset number desired
COORDINATE plus 100, NC inputs the difference between the input measured value and
the coordinate value recorded in NC, as the offset value of the offset
SYSTEM SHIFT number.
AMOUNT (T series) The work coordinate system can be shifted using the technique of directly
inputting the measured value for offset. This technique is used when the
coordinate system planned in the program does not match with the
coordinate system set by the G92 command or by the automatic
coordinate system setting.
The procedures are the same as those for direct input for offset, except a
difference of using the standard tool.

x X X-Z:Coordinate system planned in the program

ÇÇÇ
x-z : Coordinate set actually

ÇÇÇ B face

O’
ÇÇÇ z

Z
O α

A face

Reference point
planned in the program β

Cut A or B face and measure Beta or Alpha. Direct input the measured
value.

208
B–63002EN/02 NC FUNCTION 17. MEASUREMENT FUNCTIONS

17.10 T series By installing the touch sensor and by manually making the tool contact
the touch sensor, it is possible to set the offset amount of that tool
TOOL automatically in the tool offset amount memory. It is also possible to set
COMPENSATION the work coordinate system shift amount automatically.
VALUE MEASURED
VALUE DIRECT INPUT
B (T series)
Explanations
Touch sensor The touch sensor has contact faces in two directions along each axis, and
outputs the following four signals by contact detection. These signals are
input to CNC as tool compensation value writing signals.
The contact faces are to be selected according to the shape of the nose of
the tool to be measured.
+MIT1 (+MITX) :
Contact the (+) contact face of the X axis
(Contact in the X+ direction)
–MIT1 (–MITX) :
Contact the (–) contact face of the X axis
(Contact in the X- direction)
+MIT2 (+MITZ) :
Contact the (+) contact face of the Z axis
(Contact in the Z+ direction)
–MIT2 (–MITZ) :
Contact the (–) contact face of the Z axis
(Contact in the Z- direction)

(–) contact face of X axis

(–MITX)

(+) contact face

of Z axis (–) contact face of Z axis
(+MITZ) (–MITZ)

+X

(+) contact face of X axis

(+MITX)
+Z

209
17. MEASUREMENT FUNCTIONS NC FUNCTION B–63002EN/02

Setting method
Setting of tool compensation value
Previously set the distance from the measurement reference position
(a particular point on the machine) to the measuring position (the touch
sensor contact face) to the parameter as the reference value.
As the tool of which the offset amount is to be measured is selected and
is positioned at the measuring position (contact the touch sensor), the
contact detection signal (tool compensation value write signal) from
the touch sensor is received, and the difference between the machine
coordinate value at that time (= the distance from the measured tool
nose tip position at the machine reference position (machine zero
point) to the measuring position) and the reference value (parameter
value) is set in the tool offset amount memory as the tool geometry
offset amount of that tool. The corresponding tool wear offset amount
becomes zero.
Tool offset Machine coordi- Reference value
nate value when (value of parameter)
amount to = tool compensa- + corresponding to
be set tion value write tool compensation
signal turns “1” value write signal
The tool offset amount to be set depends on how to determine the
measurement reference position.
Setting of work coordinate system shift amount
The work coordinate system shift amount along the Z axis is to be set
as follows. When the tool touches the end face of the workpiece, the
touch detection signal (workpiece coordinate system shift write
signal) is output. This signal is used to set the workpiece coordinate
system shift, calculated by subtracting the tool geometry
compensation value (shift of coordinate system due to tool geometry
compensation) from the current machine coordinate (distance between
the end face of the workpiece and the tip of the measurement tool when
it is at the machine reference position (machine zero point)). In this
case the tool geometry offset amount corresponding to the tool must
be programmed previously.
Work coordinate Tool geometry offset
Machine
system shift amount amount of Z axis of
= + coordinate value
along Z axis to be corresponding tool
of Z axis (Zt)
set (EXOFSz) (OFSz)

By the above procedure the work coordinate system with the work edge
(sensor contact point) being taken as the work coordinate system zero
point of the Z axis (the program zero point) is set when the tool is selected
by the program command (T code).

210
B–63002EN/02 NC FUNCTION 17. MEASUREMENT FUNCTIONS

Machine
zero point

+X Zt
OFSZ
–EXOFSZ Measured tool
nose position
+Z at machine ref-
OFSX erence position
Work coordinate system
zero point
(Program zero point)

EXOFSz : Work coordinate system shift amount to be set

OFSz : Tool geometry offset amount
Zt : Machine coordinate value (Distance to work edge)

211
17. MEASUREMENT FUNCTIONS NC FUNCTION B–63002EN/02

17.11 T series By manipulating soft keys, a position value displayed on the relative
position display can be set to the offset memory.
COUNT INPUT OF Call offset value display screen on the screen. Relative positions are also
TOOL OFFSET displayed on this screen. Reset the displayed relative position to zero.
VALUES (T series) Set the tool for measurement at the same fixed point on the machine by
hand. The relative position display at this point shows difference between
the reference tool and the tool measured and the relative position display
value is then set as offset amounts.

17.12 By directly entering the measured deviation of the actual coordinate

system from a programmed workpiece coordinate system, the workpiece
DIRECT INPUT OF zero point offset at the cursor is automatically set so that a command value
WORKPIECE ZERO matches the actual measurement.
POINT OFFSET
VALUE MEASURED

17.13 M series To enable measurement of the tool length, the following functions are
supported: automatic measurement of the tool length by using a program
TOOL LENGTH/ command (G37) (automatic tool length measurement, described in
WORKPIECE ORIGIN Section 17.6) and measurement of the tool length by manually moving the
MEASUREMENT B (M tool until it touches a reference position, such as the workpiece top surface
(tool length measurement, described in Section 17.8). In addition to these
series)
functions, tool length/workpiece origin measurement B is supported to
simplify the tool length measurement procedure, thus facilitating and
reducing the time required for machining setup. This function also
facilitates the measurement of the workpiece origin offsets.

This function allows the operator to specify T/M code commands or

reference position return, by means of a manual numeric command, while
the tool length offset measurement screen is displayed.

212
B–63002EN/02 NC FUNCTION 18. CUSTOM MACRO

18 CUSTOM MACRO

213
18. CUSTOM MACRO NC FUNCTION B–63002EN/02

18.1 A function covering a group of instructions is stored in the memory like

the sub program. The stored function is represented by one instruction
CUSTOM MACRO and is executed by simply writing the represented instruction. The group
of instructions registered is called the custom macro body, and the
representative instruction, the custom macro instruction.

Ordinary program
Custom macro body

A group of
instructions
Custom macro instruction for a certain
function

The programmer need not remember all the instructions in the custom
macro body. He needs only to remember the representative, custom
macro instruction.
The greatest feature in custom macro is that variables can be used in the
custom macro body. Operation between the variables can be done, and
actual values can be set in the variables by custom macro instructions.

Custom macro body

O9011
;

G65 P9011 A10 I5

X#1 Z#4 ;

Variables, #1, #4
Call custom macro body can be used
9011, and set variables instead of unknown
#1=10, #4=5. move amount.

r b
a

Bolt hole circle as shown above can be programmed easily. Program a

custom macro body of a bolt hole circle; once the custom macro body is
stored, operation can be performed as if the CNC itself has a bolt hole
circle function. The programmer need only to remember the following
command, and the bolt hole circle can be called any time.

214
B–63002EN/02 NC FUNCTION 18. CUSTOM MACRO

Format

G65 Pp Rr Aa Bb Kk ;

p : Macro number of the bolt hole circle

r : Radius
a : Initial angle
b : Angle between holes
k : Number of holes

With this function, the CNC can be graded up by the user himself. Custom
macro bodies may be offered to the users by the machine tool builder, but
the users still can make custom macro himself.
The following functions can be used for programming the custom macro
body.

Explanations

Use of Variable Variables: #1 (i=1, 2, 3,.......)

Quotation of variables: F#33 (#33: speed expressed by variables)

Operation between Various operation can be done between variables and constants.
variables The following operands, and functions can be used:
+ (sum), – (difference), * (product), / (quotient), OR (logical sum), XOR
(exclusive logical sum), AND (logical product), SIN (sine), COS
(cosine), TAN (tangent), ATAN (arc tangent), SQRT (square roots), ABS
(absolute value), BIN (conversion from BCD to binary), BCD
(conversion from binary to BCD), FIX (truncation below decimal point),
FUP (raise fractions below decimal point), ROUND (round)
Example : #5 = SIN [[#2 + #4] 3.14 + #4] ABS (#10)

Control command Program flow in the custom macro body is controlled by the following
command.
If [<conditional expression>]GOTO n (n = sequence number)
When <conditional expression> is satisfied, the next execution is done
from block with sequence number n.
When <conditional expression> is not satisfied, the next block is
executed.
When the [<IF conditional expression>] is committed, it executes
from block with n unconditionally.
The following <conditional expressions> are available:
#j EQ #k whether #j = #k
#j NE #k whether #j = #k
#j GT #k whether #j > #k
#j LT #k whether #j < #k
#j GE #k whether #j  #k
#j LE #k whether #j  #k

215
18. CUSTOM MACRO NC FUNCTION B–63002EN/02

WHILE (<conditional expression>) DO m (m = 1, 2, 3)

:
END m
While <conditional expression> is satisfied, blocks from DO m to
END m is repeated.
When <conditional expression> is no more satisfied, it is executed
from the block next to
END m block.
Example
#120 = 1 ;
WHILE [#120 LE 10] DO 1 ;

Repeated 10 times.
#120=#120+1 ;

END

Format of custom macro The format is the same as the sub program.
body

0 Macro number ;

Custom macro body

M99 ;

Custom macro
instruction Simple call
G65 P (macro number) L (times to repeat)
<argument assignment> ;
A value is set to a variable by <argument assignment>.
Write the actual value after the address.
Example A5.0E3.2M13.4
There is a regulation on which address (A - Z) corresponds to which
variable number.
Modal call A
G66 P (macro number) L (times to repeat)
<argument assignment> ;
Each time a move command is executed, the specified custom macro
body is called. This can be canceled by G67.
This function is useful when drilling cycles are programmed as custom
macro bodies.

216
B–63002EN/02 NC FUNCTION 18. CUSTOM MACRO

Macro call by G codes

The macro can also be called by the parameter-set G codes. Instead
of commanding:
N_ G65 P <argument assignment> ;
macro can be called just by commanding:
N_ G** <argument assignment> ;.
G code for calling the macro, and macro program number **** to be
called, are coupled together and set as parameter.
Maximum ten G codes from G01 to G9999 can be used for macro call
(G00 cannot be used).
The G code macro call cannot be used in the macro which was called
by a G code. It also cannot be used in sub programs called by sub
program call with M codes or T codes.
Macro call by M code
Custom macros can be called by pre-determined M codes which are
set by parameters.
The following command
N_ G65 P <Argument assignment> ;
is equivalent to the following command:
N_ Mxx <Argument assignment> ;
The correspondence between M codes (Mxx) and program number
(delta delta delta delta) of a macro shall be set by a parameter.
Signal MF and M code are not sent out the same as the subprogram call
by M code.
Also when this M code is specified in a program called a macro calling
G code or a subprogram calling M or T code, the M code is regarded
as a normal M code.
Up to ten M codes from M01 to M99999999 can be used for custom
macro calling M codes.
Sub program call by M code
An M code can be set by parameter to call a sub program. Instead of
commanding:
N_ G_ X_ Y_ … M98 P ; ,
the same operation can be performed simply by commanding:
N_ G_ X_ Y_ … MXX ;.
As for M98, M codes are not transmitted.
The M code XX for calling the sub program and the sub program
number delta delta delta delta to be called are coupled together and set
by parameter.
Maximum ten M codes from M01 to M99999999 can be used for
macro call.
Arguments cannot be transmitted. It also cannot be commanded in the
same block as the block with M98 command.
When these M codes are commanded in macro called by G code or in
subprogram called by M code or T code, they are regarded as ordinary
M codes.

217
18. CUSTOM MACRO NC FUNCTION B–63002EN/02

Sub program call by T code

By setting parameter, sub program can be called by T codes. When
commanded:
N_ G_ X_ Y_ … Tt ; ,
the same operation is done as when commanded:
#149 = t;
N_ G_ X_ Y_ … M98 P9000; .
The T type code t is stored as arguments of common variable #149.
This command cannot be done in the same block with a sub program
calling M code, or with M98 command. The T code is not output.
When T code is commanded in macros called by G code, or in sub
programs called by M codes or T codes, the T code is treated as
ordinary T codes.
Types of variables Variables are divided into local variables, common variables, and system
variables, according to their variable numbers. Each type has different use
and nature.
Local variables #1 – #33
Local variables are variables used locally in the macro. Accordingly,
in case of multiples calls (calling macro B from macro A), the local
variable used in macro A is never destroyed by being used in macro
B.
Common variables #100 – #149, #500 – #531
Compared with local variables used locally in a macro, common
variables are common throughout the main program, each sub
program called from the main program, and each macro. The common
variable #1 used in a certain macro is the same as the common variable
#i used in other macros. Therefore, a common variable #1 calculated
in a macro can be used in any other macros.
Common variables #100 to #149 are cleared when power is turned off,
but common variables #500 to #531 are not cleared after power is
turned off.

NOTE
The range of common variables can be enlarged to #100 to
#199, and #500 to #999 by the option.

System variables
A variable with a certain variable number has a certain value. If the
variable number is changed, the certain value is also changed.
The certain value are the following:
 16 points DI (for read only)
 48 points DO (for output only)
 Tool offset amount, work zero point offset amount
 Position information (actual position, skip position, block end
position, etc.)
 Modal information (F code, G code for each group, etc.)
 Alarm message (Set alarm number and alarm message, and the
CNC is set in an alarm status. The alarm number and message is
displayed.)

218
B–63002EN/02 NC FUNCTION 18. CUSTOM MACRO

 A date (year, month, day) and time (hour, minute, second) are
indicated.
 Clock (Time can be known. A time can also be preset.)
 Single block stop, Miscellaneous function end wait hold
 Feed hold, Feed rate override, Exact stop inhibition
The number of machining parts is indicated. It can be preset.
External output Value of variables or characters can be output to external devices via the
commands reader/puncher interface with custom macro command. Results in
measurement is output using custom macro.

Limitations
Usable variables
See 6) above.
Usable variable values
Maximum : ±1047
Minimum : ±10-29
Constants usable in <expression>
Maximum : ±99999999
Minimum : ±0.0000001
Decimal point allowed
Arithmetic precision
8-digit decimal number
Macro call nesting
Maximum 4 folds.
Repeated ID numbers
1-3
( ) nesting
Maximum 5 folds.
Sub program call nesting
8 folds (including macro call nesting)

219
18. CUSTOM MACRO NC FUNCTION B–63002EN/02

18.2 The range of common variables can be enlarged to #100 to #199, and #500
to #999 by the option.
INCREASED CUSTOM
MACRO COMMON
VARIABLES

18.3 When custom macro interruption signal is input during automatic

operation, the block currently under execution is interrupted and the
INTERRUPTION TYPE specified custom macro is activated. After execution of this custom
CUSTOM MACRO macro, it returns to the interrupted block and continues execution of the
remaining commands.
:
M96P_ ;
: When custom macro interruption signal is input between M96 block
and M97 block, custom macro specified by P is activated.
M97;
:

This function enables implementation of an application of detecting a

broken tool, entering a custom macro interrupt signal, executing a tool
change cycle using the custom macro, and then restarting machining after
the tool change.

220
B–63002EN/02 NC FUNCTION 18. CUSTOM MACRO

18.4 With this function, custom macro interruption signal can be input on
detection of tool break, tool change cycle can be executed by custom
PATTERN DATA macro, and machining is continued.
INPUT This function simplifies program creation for CNC machining. Instead of
programming in the NC format, the program can be created by selecting
a menu and entering data according to the menu displayed on the CRT
screen. A menu is provided for each type of drilling such as boring and
tapping. A programmer can select data necessary for actual machining
from these menus. Machining data such as hole position and hole depth
is also provided in menus. The programmer can create a program simply
by entering data from the menus.
This function is basically executed by the custom macro created by a
machine tool builder. What menus and machining data to prepare totally
depends on a machine tool builder. Therefore, a machine tool builder can
incorporate their own know-how into this function.

MENU:HOLE PATTERN O9505 N0001

1. TAPPING
2. DRILLING
3. BORING
4. POCKET
5. BOLT HOLE
6. LINEANGLE
7. GRID
8. PECK
9.
10.

>_ S 0 T0000
EDIT **** *** *** 15:56:32
[ MACRO ][ MENU ][ OPR ][ ][(OPRT) ]

Pattern menu display

5 is selected

VAR. : BOLT HOLE O9505 N0001

NO. NAME DATA COMMENT
500 TOOL 0.000
501 KIJUN X 0.000 *BOLT HOLE
502 KIJUN Y 0.000 CIRCLE*
503 RADIUS 0.000 SET PATTERN
504 S. ANGL 0.000 DATA TO VAR.
505 HOLES NO. 0.000 NO.500–505.
506 0.000
507 0.000
ACTUAL POSITION (RELATIVE)
X 0.000 Y 0.000
Z 0.000
>_ S 0 T0000
MDI **** *** *** 15:56:32
[OFFSET ][SETING ][ ][ ][(OPRT) ]

Pattern data display

221
18. CUSTOM MACRO NC FUNCTION B–63002EN/02

18.5 There are two types of NC programs; those which, once created, are
scarcely changed, and those which are changed for each machining type.
MACRO EXECUTER The former are programs created by the custom macro, and the latter are
FUNCTION machining programs. If programs of these types are executed
simultaneously, a battery may run out or the custom macro may be
destroyed by error operation.
Such problems can be solved by this function. The custom macro created
by a machine tool builder is converted to an execute-form program, be
cataloged in the Flash ROM module, and be executed.

Features
Since the program is cataloged after converted to an execute-form
program, the execution speed is high. The machining time is then
reduced, and the precision is improved.
Since the program is cataloged in Flash ROM, there is no problem of
battery extinction or custom macro destruction by error operation. The
reliability is improved.
Since the cataloged program is not displayed on a program screen, the
know-how of the machine tool builder is protected.
Since the custom macro is cataloged in Flash ROM, the program edit
memory can be used efficiently.
The user can call the macro easily without knowing the cataloged
program. A custom macro can be created and executed in the program
edit memory as usual.
An original screen can be created by using the graphic display or
selecting screens by the soft key. The machine tool builder can extend
the control function by using such functions as machining program
creation and edit control, reader/punch interface control, and PMC
data read/write functions.

NOTE
1 When the macro executor is attached, the order-made
macro cannot be specified.
2 To use the macro executor function for graphics display, the
option for the graphics function is required.

222
B–63002EN/02 NC FUNCTION 18. CUSTOM MACRO

18.6 As with the conversational macro function of macro executors/compilers,

the C language executor function is used to customize screens and include
C LANGUAGE unique operations. Application programs for display and operation can
EXECUTER be created in standard C language, in the same way as programs are made
FUNCTION for normal personal computers. A program compiled on a personal
computer is transferred and stored in flash ROM in the CNC via a memory
card. The program is read into memory upon activation of the CNC, and
executed by the C language executor.

Features
Low–cost customization No special additional hardware is needed to run the C language executor
and application programs (*). All available display units are supported.
User applications can be included in the current CNC system.

NOTE
(*) : The flash ROM/DRAM capacity may have to be increased.

Application development Application programs can be developed using an ordinary personal

on a personal computer computer. Program development, from program creation and editing to
compilation/linkage, can also be performed on a personal computer. And,
to a certain extent, debugging is also possible on the personal computer.

High compatibility with C Microsoft Corporation’s C compiler (MS–C) is employed as the C

language application language compiler. It is the de–facto standard C compiler for personal
programs for personal computers. The function library provided by the C language executor has
computers excellent compatibility with the ANSI standards and MS–C. Therefore,
application programs for ordinary personal computers can be transported
to the CNC, except when they are dependent on particular hardware.

Integration of CNC An application program created by the machine tool builder is executed
software and as one task of the CNC software. The application program can display
applications its own screens in place of existing CNC screens. In addition, the
application program can read and write CNC system data via libraries
provided by the C language executor. This enables operation of the
application program to be integrated with CNC software.

Using the C language The C language executor can be used with the macro executor. Not only
executor with the macro executable macros, but also conversational macros can be used together.
executor The screen display portion of a macro program already created by the
machine tool builder can be replaced with a program coded in C. This can
prevent existing software resources from becoming useless.

223
19. SERIES 15 TAPE FORMAT/
SERIES 10/11 TAPE FORMAT NC FUNCTION B–63002EN/02

19 SERIES 15 TAPE FORMAT/SERIES 10/11 TAPE

FORMAT

224
 19. SERIES 15 TAPE FORMAT/
B–63002EN/02 NC FUNCTION SERIES 10/11 TAPE FORMAT

19.1 The programs for the following functions can be created in the Series
10/11 tape format, and be executed by the setting parameter, using the
SERIES 15 TAPE memory.
FORMAT Equal lead threading (G33) (T series): (G32 for G-code system A)
Sub program calling (M98)
Canned cycles (G77, G78, G79) (T series):
(G90, G92, G94 for G-code system A)
Multiple repetitive canned cycles (G71 to G76) (T series)
Canned cycles for drilling (G80 to G85) (T series)
Canned cycles (G73, G74, G76, G80 to G89) (M series)

NOTE
Addresses and range of values to be specified the Series
16/18 format restrictions are placed on the range of
specifiable values of the basic address. Specifying a value
outside the Series 16/18 format range causes a P/S alarm.
The restrictions are placed also on some addresses.

19.2 Memory operation of a program created for the following function in the
Series 10/11 tape format can be performed based on the setting parameter.
SERIES–10/11 TAPE
Equal–lead threading (G33) (T series) ... (G32 with G code system A)
FORMAT
Subprogram call (M98)
Canned cycle (G77, G78, G79) (T series) ... (G90, G92, and G94 with
G code system A)
Multiple repetitive canned cycle (G71 to G76) (T series)
Canned cycle for drilling (G80 to G85) (T series)
Canned cycle (G73, G74, G76, G80 to G89) (M series)

NOTE
Address and value specification range
The restrictions imposed on the Series 21 format are also
imposed on the value specification range for the basic
addresses. When a specified value exceeds the range of
the Series 21 format, a P/S alarm is issued. The use of
addresses may be restricted in some cases.

225
20. FUNCTIONS FOR HIGH SPEED
CUTTING NC FUNCTION B–63002EN/02

20 FUNCTIONS FOR HIGH SPEED CUTTING

226
 20. FUNCTIONS FOR HIGH SPEED
B–63002EN/02 NC FUNCTION CUTTING

20.1 This function converts the profile to be machined into data for high-speed
pulse distribution, using the macro compiler or macro executor. It then
HIGH-SPEED CYCLE calls and executes the data with the CNC command (G05) as a machining
MACHINING (ONLY AT cycle.
1–PATH CONTROL) Up to six axes can be commanded. (Up to six axes can be controlled
simultaneously.)
The following command calls and executes the high-speed cycle
machining data specified by the macro compiler or micro executor.

Format
G05 P10 L ;

P10001 to P10999 : Starting number of the machining cycle to be

called
L1 to L999 : Number of machining cycle repeats (The default
value is L1.)

Up to 999-cycle data can be created. Address P specifies the cycle for

machining. Two or more cycles can be called and executed successively
according to the connection information (in the header). Address L
specifies the number of times that the machining cycle is repeated. The
number of repeats (in the header) can be specified for each cycle.
The following example explains the cycle connection and number of
repeats.
Example)
G05 P10001 L2 is specified for the following cycles:
Cycle 1, connection 2, number of repeats 1
Cycle 2, connection 3, number of repeats 3
Cycle 3, connection 0, number of repeats 1
The cycles of 1,2,2,2,3,1,2,2,2,3 are executed successively.

227
20. FUNCTIONS FOR HIGH SPEED
CUTTING NC FUNCTION B–63002EN/02

20.2 M series This function automatically decelerates the tool at a corner according to
the corner angle. It can prevent a large sag caused by acceleration/
AUTOMATIC CORNER deceleration and servo delay on the junction of two blocks.
DECELERATION If the angle made by two consecutive blocks is less than the angle set by
(M series) the parameter in the cutting mode (G64), the speed is automatically
reduced at the end of the block. When the speed is reduced to the value
set by the parameter or lower, movement of the next block starts.

Block B +Y

Block A

+X

Speed
X axis Y axis

ÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇ
Speed set by parameter

t Time

228
 20. FUNCTIONS FOR HIGH SPEED
B–63002EN/02 NC FUNCTION CUTTING

20.3 M series The machine is accelerated/decelerated automatically when the

movement is started/stopped, so that the machine system should not be
FEEDRATE CLAMP applied with any shock. When programming, therefore, no consideration
BY CIRCULAR needs to be made for acceleration/deceleration.
RADIUS (M series) Especially when performing the high-speed arc cutting, however, the
actual tool passage may bring about some error against the designated arc
during circular interpolation due to this automatic acceleration/
deceleration.
This error can approximately be given by the following formula;

Y ∆r

Command path

Actual path

2

r  1 (T1  T2 ) Vr
2 2
. . . . . . . (1)
2

∆r : Maximum value of radius error (mm)

v : Feedrate (mm/sec)
r : Circular radius (mm)
T1 : Exponential Acceleration/deceleration time constant at cutting (sec)
T2 : Time constant of servo motor (sec)

When performing the actual machining, the actual arc machining radius
(r) and tolerance (delta r) are given, therefore, the maximum permissible
speed v (mm/min.) can be given by the formula-(1).
”Feedrate clamp by circular radius” is such function that the circular
cutting feed is automatically clamped when the feedrate designated may
exceed the permissible tolerance to radial direction against the circular arc
having optional radius designated by the program.

229
20. FUNCTIONS FOR HIGH SPEED
CUTTING NC FUNCTION B–63002EN/02

20.4 M series This function is designed for high–speed precise machining. With this
function, the delay due to acceleration/deceleration and the delay in the
LOOK–AHEAD servo system which increase as the feedrate becomes higher can be
CONTROL (G08) suppressed.
(M series) The tool can then follow specified values accurately and errors in the
machining profile can be reduced.
This function becomes effective when look–ahead control mode is
entered.

Format
G08 P_ ;

P1 : Turn on look–ahead control mode.

P0 : Turn off look–ahead control mode.

In look–ahead control mode, the following functions are available :

Linear acceleration/deceleration before interpolation
Automatic corner deceleration function

230
 20. FUNCTIONS FOR HIGH SPEED
B–63002EN/02 NC FUNCTION CUTTING

20.5
REMOTE BUFFER
20.5.1 When the remote buffer is connected to the host computer or input/output
device via serial interface, a great amount of data can be sent to CNC
Remote Buffer (Only at
consecutively at a high speed.
1–path Control)

RS–232C / RS–422 Host

Remote computer
buffer
CNC

Input/output
device

The remote buffer enables the following operations:

When connected to the host computer online, it performs DNC

operation with high reliability and at a high speed.
The CNC program and parameters can be down-loaded from the host
computer.
When connected to an input/output device, it enables DNC operation,
and various data can be down-loaded. The following input/output
devices can be connected.
FANUC PPR
FANUC FA Card
FANUC FLOPPY CASSETTE
FANUC PROGRAM FILE Mate
FANUC Handy File
Hereafter, the device to which the remote buffer is connected is called
the host computer.

Explanations
Interface between the
remote buffer and host Electrical interface
computer The following two types of interface are prepared as standard
specifications.
 RS-232C Interface
 RS-422 Interface
RS-233C RS-422

Serial voltage interface (start- Balanced transmission serial

Interface
stop) interface (start-stop)

Baud rate 50 to 19,200 BPS 50 to 86,400 BPS (*1)

4800 BPS or less Approx. 800 m (9600 BPS or

Cable
9600 BPS less)
length
Varies according to I/O device. 19,200 BPS or more

231
20. FUNCTIONS FOR HIGH SPEED
CUTTING NC FUNCTION B–63002EN/02

Software interface The following three protocols are prepared as the communication
protocols between the remote buffer and host computer. The protocol can
be selected by a parameter according to the specifications of the device
to be connected.
Maximum
Protocol Features Interface
transfer rate

Protocol A Handshake method. Sending and RS-232C 19200 BPS

receiving are repeated between two
stations. RS-422 86400 BPS

Extended Similar to protocol A. Enables high- RS-422 86400 BPS

protocol A speed transfer of the NC program to
meet high-speed DNC operation.

Protocol B Controls communication with control RS-232C 19200 BPS

codes output from the remote buffer
buffer.
RS-422 86400 BPS

NOTE
The average data transfer rate is lower than the maximum
transfer rate.

232
 20. FUNCTIONS FOR HIGH SPEED
B–63002EN/02 NC FUNCTION CUTTING

20.5.2 Specify G05 only in a block using normal CNC command format. Then
High–speed Remote specify move data in the special format explained below. When zero is
specified as the travel distance along all axes, normal CNC command
Buffer A (G05) format can be used again for subsequent command specification.
(Only at 1–path
Control)

CNC

Remote buffer

RS–232C / RS–422
Host computer

Format
 Binary input operation enabled : G05;
Binary input operation disabled : The travel distance along
all axes are set to zero.
Data format for binary input operation

Byte

High byte
1st axis
Data Low byte
sequence
High byte
2nd axis
Low byte

⋅⋅⋅⋅

High byte
Nth axis
Low byte

Check byte

In the data format for binary input operation, the travel distance along
each axis (2 bytes) per unit time is specified. The travel distances along
all axes are placed sequentially from the first axis, then a check byte is
added. (The data length for one block is [2 x N + 1] bytes).
All data must be specified in binary.

233
20. FUNCTIONS FOR HIGH SPEED
CUTTING NC FUNCTION B–63002EN/02

20.5.3 M series High–speed remote buffer A uses binary data. On the other hand,
High–speed Remote high–speed remote buffer B can directly use NC language coded with
equipment such as an automatic programming unit to perform high–speed
Buffer B (G05) machining.
(At 1–path Control) (M
series)
Format
G05 P01 ; Start high–speed machining
G05 P00 ; End high–speed machining

Example) O1234 ;
:
G05P01 ; ⇐ Start high–speed machining
X_ Y_ Z_ ;
:
G05P00 ; ⇐ End high–speed machining
:
M02 ;

234
 20. FUNCTIONS FOR HIGH SPEED
B–63002EN/02 NC FUNCTION CUTTING

20.6 M series Machining errors by CNC include those caused by acceleration/

deceleration after interpolation. To prevent such errors, the RISC
HIGH–PRECISION processor provides the following functions:
CONTOUR CONTROL Acceleration/deceleration before interpolation by pre-reading
(ONLY FOR ONE multiple blocks. Because executed before interpolation,
SYSTEM) (M series) acceleration/deceleration does not cause a machining error.
Automatic velocity control by smooth acceleration/deceleration. By
pre-reading multiple blocks, changes in the profile and speed, and the
allowable acceleration of the machine can be taken into consideration
to execute smooth acceleration/deceleration.
Smooth acceleration/deceleration increases the feed-forward coefficient.
As a result, the tracking error of the servo system can be reduced.

20.6.1 When cutting feed per minute is specified, tens of blocks are pre-read. The
Acceleration/Decelera– linear acceleration/deceleration is executed for the command speed
before interpolation.
tion Before If acceleration/deceleration is executed after interpolation, the
Interpolation by interpolation data is changed.
Pre-reading Multiple If it is executed for the feedrate before interpolation, the interpolation data
Blocks is not affected.
Since the interpolation data can always be placed on the specified line or
curve, there will be no machining profile error caused by
acceleration/deceleration.

Velocity Distribu-
com- tion
Feedrate mand Interpolation pulse Acceleration/ Servo
calculation calculation deceleration control
after interpolation
Linear interpolation, Linear, exponential
circular interpolation, function, bell type
etc.
Linear
acceleration/
deceleration
before
interpolation
Linear bell type

A change in feedrates for each axis on the junction of two blocks (corner
section) may be greater than the value set in the parameter. In such a case,
the appropriate feedrate (reduced speed) is calculated so that the change
is within the set value at the corner. The feedrate in the former block
automatically reduces to the calculated value.

235
20. FUNCTIONS FOR HIGH SPEED
CUTTING NC FUNCTION B–63002EN/02

20.6.2 This function pre-reads 15 blocks, and automatically controls the

Automatic Velocity feedrate.
The feedrate is determined on the basis of the following items. If the
Control Function command speed exceeds the feedrate, acceleration/deceleration before
interpolation is executed to reduce the speed.
Change in speed for each axis at the corner, and allowable speed
change specified
Acceleration expected for each axis, and allowable acceleration
specified
Change in cutting load estimated by direction of Z-axis movement
In the automatic velocity control mode, acceleration/deceleration is
executed before interpolation. The speed is then reduced automatically so
that the machine is not shocked much.
Therefore, the time constant for automatic velocity control should be
reduced, and the feed-forward coefficient should be increased. The
machining error caused by delay of acceleration/deceleration or the servo
system is then reduced.

236
 20. FUNCTIONS FOR HIGH SPEED
B–63002EN/02 NC FUNCTION CUTTING

20.7 M series By taking full advantage of high–precision contour control using a RISC
processor, this function enables high–speed high–precision machining
SIMPLE without the need for special hardware.
HIGH–PRECISION
CONTOUR CONTROL The function enables look–ahead linear acceleration/deceleration before
interpolation of up to 15 blocks. This results in smooth acceleration/
(G05.1) (M series) deceleration over many blocks, as well as high–speed machining.

Format
G05.1 Q_ ;

Q1 : Start simple high–precision contour control mode

Q0 : End simple high–precision contour control mode
G05.1 A block for specifying G05.1 must not contain any other
command.
Simple high–precision contour control mode can also be
canceled by a reset.

20.8 The high–speed linear interpolation function processes a move command

related to a controlled axis not by ordinary linear interpolation but by
HIGH–SPEED LINEAR high–speed linear interpolation. The function enables the high–speed
INTERPOLATION execution of an NC program including a series of minute amounts of
(G05) travel.

Format
G05 P2 ; Start high–speed linear interpolation

G05 P0 ; End high–speed linear interpolation

G05 A block for specifying G05 must not contain any other command.

237
21. AXES CONTROL NC FUNCTION B–63002EN/02

21 AXES CONTROL

238
B–63002EN/02 NC FUNCTION 21. AXES CONTROL

21.1 Normally, the machine is controlled to move to a commanded position.

However, when the follow up function is applied, actual position in the
FOLLOW UP CNC is revised according to the move of the machine.
FUNCTION Follow up function is activated when:
- Emergency stop is on
Because machine movement during the emergency stop is reported, the
actual position of the machine is reflected in the CNC. Therefore,
machining can be resumed after the emergency stop has been deactivated,
without performing the reference point return again.
However, when a trouble has generated in the position detection system,
the system cannot follow up correctly. So present position in CNC does
not become correct value.
By input signal (follow up signal) from PMC follow up function can also
be applied to:
- Servo off
status. It is also valid in cases when the machine is moved with a
mechanical handle.

21.2 It is possible to move the machine by hand, using the mechanical handle
installed on the machine; not by the NC (servo motor).
MECHANICAL Move distance by the mechanical handle is followed up and actual
HANDLE FEED position in The NC is revised. The mechanical handle feed is done by
inputting the servo off signal of the axis fed. It is necessary, however, to
specify following up of the movement in the servo off status with the
follow up signal.

21.3 Servo on/off control per axis is possible by input signals from PMC. This
function is generally used with the machine clamp.
SERVO OFF

21.4 The MDI-commanded or the program-commanded move direction of

each axis can be reversed and executed.
MIRROR IMAGE Mirror image is set by CRT/MDI setting or by input signals from PMC.
Mirror image can be applied to each axis.

21.5 It is possible to detach or attach rotary tables and attachments with this
function. Switch control axis detach signal according to whether the
CONTROL AXIS rotary tables and attachments are attached or detached. When this signal
DETACH is on, the corresponding axis is excluded from the control axes, so the
servo alarm applied to the axis are ignored. The axis is automatically
regarded as being interlocked. This signal is not only accepted when
power turned is on, so automatic change of attachments is possible any
time with this function.
The same switching as with this signal can also be performed with the
MDI setting.

239
21. AXES CONTROL NC FUNCTION B–63002EN/02

21.6 The traveling command of master axis is given to two motors of master
and slave axes in a simple synchronous control. However, no
SIMPLE synchronous error compensation or synchronous error alarm is detected
SYNCHRONOUS for constantly detecting the position deviation of the master and slave
CONTROL axes to compensate the deviation.
Simple synchronous operation for M series is allowed in the automatic
operation and in the manual operation such as manual continuous feed,
manual handle feed, incremental feed, or manual reference point return.
In simplified synchronous control in the T series, only automatic
operation is allowed; manual operation cannot be performed.
In the manual reference point return, the master and slave axes similarly
move until the deceleration operation is performed. After that, the
detection of grid is performed independently.
The pitch error and backlash compensation are independently performed
for the master and slave axes.
An input signal from PMC can be select whether the slave axis traveling
is carried out based on the traveling command for that axis as in normal
case or whether the slave axis traveling is carried out while synchronizing
with the traveling of the master axis.

240
B–63002EN/02 NC FUNCTION 21. AXES CONTROL

21.7 T series The synchronization control function enables the synchronization of

movements on two axes. If a move command is programmed for one of
SYNCHRONIZATION those two axes (master axis), the function automatically issues the same
CONTROL command to the other axis (slave axis), thus establishing synchronization
(ONLY AT 1–PATH between the two axes. The parking state can be selected to suppress
movement of the slave axis, even if a move command is specified for the
CONTROL)
master axis. If the parking state is used with the synchronization control
(T series) function, the operation can be controlled as follows:
(1) Synchronizes the movement on the slave axis with that of the master
axis.
(2) Performs slave axis movement according to the move command
programmed for the master axis. However, the movement specified
by the command is not made for the master axis itself (master parking).
(3) Updates the slave axis coordinates according to the distance travelled
along the master axis. However, no movement is made for the slave
axis (slave parking).

CAUTION
In the synchronization control described above, an identical
move command is simultaneously output for two servo
processing systems. Positional error between the two servo
motors is not monitored nor is either servo motor adjusted
to minimize the error. That is, synchronization error
compensation is not carried out.

241
21. AXES CONTROL NC FUNCTION B–63002EN/02

21.8 This function usually checks position deviation amount during motion.
If the amount exceeds the parameter set “feed stop position deviation
FEED STOP amount”, pulse distribution and acceleration/deceleration control is
stopped for the while exceeding, and move command to the positioning
control circuit is stopped.
The overshoot at rapid feed acceleration is thus kept to a minimum.

Speed
Specified speed
Actual speed

Time

Feed stop

242
B–63002EN/02 NC FUNCTION 21. AXES CONTROL

21.9 M series The rotation axis (C axis) can be controlled by commanding the G41.1 or
G42.1 so that the tool constantly faces the direction perpendicular to the
NORMAL DIRECTION advancing direction during cutting.
CONTROL
(G40.1,G41.1,G42.1)
(M series)
Format
G40.1 : Normal direction control cancellation mode
(No normal direction control can be performed.)
G41.1 : Normal direction control left side on
(Control is made to allow facing perpendicular to advancing
direction to the left)
G42.1 : Normal direction control right side on
(Control is made to allow facing perpendicular to advancing
direction to the right)

In the normal direction control, control is made so that the tool may be
perpendicular to the advancing direction on the X-Y plane.
With the angle of C axis, the +X direction is defined to be 0 degrees
viewed from the rotation center of C axis. Then, the +Y direction, –X
direction, and –Y direction are defined to be 90, 180, and 270 degrees,
respectively.
When shifting to the normal direction control mode from the cancellation
mode, the C axis becomes perpendicular to the advancing direction where
the G41.1 or G42.1 is at the starting point of commanded block.

+Y

90°

180° 0° +X

Rotation 270°
center

Between blocks, the traveling of C axis is automatically inserted so that

the C axis faces the normal direction at the starting point of each block
according to the change of traveling direction.
Normal direction control is performed for the path after compensation
during the cutter compensation mode. The feed rate of rotation of C axis
inserted at the starting point of each block becomes the federate set by
parameters. However, when dry run is valid, the feed rate is set to the dry
run rate. Also, in the case of rapid traverse (GOO), it becomes the rapid
traverse rate. In the case of circular command, the C axis is allowed to
be rotated first so that the C axis faces perpendicular to the circular starting
point. At this time, the C axis is controlled so that it constantly faces the
normal direction along with the move of circular command.

243
21. AXES CONTROL NC FUNCTION B–63002EN/02

NOTE
The rotation of C axis during normal direction control is
controlled at short distance so that 180 degrees or less may
result.

244
B–63002EN/02 NC FUNCTION 21. AXES CONTROL

21.10 T series A polygonal figure can be machined by turning the workpiece and tool
at a certain ratio.
POLYGONAL Rotation ratio of the workpiece and tool
TURNING Number of tool teeth
(G50.2, G51.2) The polygon can be a quadrilateral or hexagon according to the above
machining conditions.
(T series)
Compared with the machining performed by using C and X axes with
polar-coordinate compensation, this machining requires shorter time. It,
however, cannot form a precise figure of a polygon. Generally, this
method is used for machining of square or hexagonal bolt heads or
hexagonal nuts.
Example)
Rotation ratio of the workpiece and tool : 1 : 2
Number of teeth : Three at every 120° (for a hexagon)

ÇÇÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇÇÇÇ
Tool

ÇÇÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇÇÇÇ Workpiece

The rotation of the tool for polygonal turning is controlled by the CNC
control axis. Hereafter, the rotation axis of this tool is called B axis.
Command G51.2 controls the B axis so that the ratio of the tool speed to
the speed of the workpiece (specified by the S command beforehand)
attached to the spindle becomes the specified value.
The synchronization between the spindle and B axis is canceled by the
command below.
G50.2 ;

245
21. AXES CONTROL NC FUNCTION B–63002EN/02

Format
G51.2 P_ Q_ ;
P and Q : Rotation ratio of spindle to B axis
Command range : Integer value of 1 to 9 for both P and Q
When the value of Q is positive, the rotation direction of B
axis is in positive direction.
When the value of Q is negative, the rotation direction of B
axis is in negative direction.
(Example) When the rotation ratio of spindle to B axis is equal to 1 : 2
and the rotation direction of B axis is positive direction
G51.2 P1 Q2 ;
G50.2 ; Cancel

When synchronous start is commanded by the G51.2, one rotation signal

from the position coder mounted in the spindle is detected and the rotation
of B axis is controlled while being synchronous with the rate of spindle
in response to the rotation ratio (P : Q). Namely, control is made so that
the ratio of spindle to B axis is P : Q. This relationship continues until
the synchronous cancellation command (G50.2 or reset) are carried out.
The direction of rotation of B axis is determined by the symbol Q and is
not affected by the direction of rotation of position coder.
When the G50.2 is commanded, the synchronization of the spindle and
B axis is canceled and the B axis is stopped.

246
B–63002EN/02 NC FUNCTION 21. AXES CONTROL

21.11 T series In the polygonal turning with two spindles, the first spindle is used as a
workpiece rotation axis (master axis). The second spindle is used as a tool
POLYGONAL rotation axis (polygon synchronization axis). Spindle rotation control is
TURNING WITH TWO applied to both spindles with a constant ratio.
SPINDLES (T series) The polygonal turning with two spindles can use different spindle speeds
for the same workpiece, because it performs automatic phase
compensation when a polygon synchronization mode command is issued
or the S command is changed during polygon synchronization mode.
With this function, it is also possible to specify the phase difference
between the master and polygon synchronization axes.
Moreover, polygon turning works with the first and second spindles on
each tool post in a two–path lathe application. However, polygonal
turning does not work with spindles on different tool posts.

21.12 The PMC can directly control any given axis, independently of the CNC.
In other words, moving the tool along axes that are not controlled by the
AXIS CONTROL WITH CNC is possible by entering commands, such as those specifying movimg
PMC distance and feedrate, from the PMC. This enables the control of turrets,
pallets, index tables and other peripheral devices using any given axes of
the CNC.
Whether the CNC or PMC controls an axis is determined by the input
signal provided for that particular axis.
The PMC can directly control the following operations :
(1) Rapid traverse with moving distance specified
(2) Cutting feed–feed per minute, with moving distance specified
(3) Cutting feed–feed per revolution, with moving distance specified
(4) Skip–feed per minute, with moving distance specified
(5) Dwell
(6) Continuons feed
(7) Reference position return
(8) 1st reference position return
(9) 2nd reference position return
(10) 3rd reference position return
(11) 4th reference position return
(12) External pulse synchronization–Main spindle
(13) External pulse synchronization–first manual handle
(14) External pulse synchronization–second manual handle
(15) External pulse synchronization–third manual handle (for M series
only)
(16) Feedrate control
(17) Auxiliary function, Auxliary function 2, Auxliary function 3
(18) Selection of the machine coordinate system
(19) Torque control command
The PMC is provided with four paths to control these operations using
input and output signals.
By issuing commands through these four paths, the PMC can
simultaneously control multiple axes separately. Use parameter to
determine which path controls which axis. Commands may be issued
through one path to two or more axes, thus allowing the PMC to control
multiple axes using one path.

247
21. AXES CONTROL NC FUNCTION B–63002EN/02

21.13 For T series, even if the X axis is not vertical to the Z axis (for T series,
the Y axis not vertical to the Z axis), they are assumed to form a
SLANTED AXIS orthogonal coordinate system, simplifying programming. The movement
CONTROL of each axis is automatically controlled according to the slant angle.

Command
Machine movement

X’ X Y’ Y

θ θ

Z Z
For T series For M series

21.14 For the ordinary angular axis control function of the T series, the X–axis
is always used as the angular axis, while the Z–axis is always used as the
ARBITRARY AXIS perpendicular axis. (For the M series, the Y–axis is always used as the
ANGULAR AXIS angular axis, while the Z–axis is always used as the perpendicular axis.)
CONTROL With arbitrary axis angular axis control, however, any axes can be
specified as the angular and perpendicular axes, by specifying parameters
accordingly.

21.15 T series This function sets an axis (B–axis) independent of the basic controlled
axes X1, Z1, X2, and Z2 and allows drilling, boring, or other machining
B–AXIS CONTROL along the B–axis, in parallel with the operations for the basic controlled
(T series) axes. The X2 and Z2 axes can be used in two–path control mode.
X1

First
tool post
Z1

Third
Workpiece tool post
B

Z2
Second
tool post

X2

248
B–63002EN/02 NC FUNCTION 21. AXES CONTROL

21.16 When enough torque for driving a large table cannot be produced by only
one motor, two motors can be used for movement along a single axis.
TANDEM CONTROL Positioning is performed by the main motor only. The sub motor is used
only to produce torque. With this tandem control function, the torque
produced can be doubled.

Main motor
Table

Ball screw
Sub motor

Example of operation

In general, the NC regards tandem control as being performed for one

axis. However, for servo parameter management and servo alarm
monitoring, tandem control is regarded as being performed for two axes.

21.17 When contour grinding is performed, the chopping function can be used
to grind the side face of a workpiece. By means of this function, while
CHOPPING the grinding axis (the axis with the grinding wheel) is being moved
FUNCTION vertically, a contour program can be executed to instigate movement
(G80, G81.1) along other axes.

In addition, a servo delay compensation function is supported for

chopping operations. When the grinding axis is moved vertically at high
speed, a servo delay and acceleration/deceleration delay occur. These
delays prevent the tool from actually reaching the specified position. The
servo delay compensation function compensates for any displacement by
increasing the feedrate. Thus, grinding can be performed almost up to the
specified position.

There are two types of chopping functions: that specified by

programming, and that activated by signal input.

249
21. AXES CONTROL NC FUNCTION B–63002EN/02

Explanations

R point

Upper dead point

Lower dead point

Time

Format

G81.1 Z__ Q__ R__ F__ ;

Z : Upper dead point
(For an axis other than the Z–axis, specify the axis address.)
Q : Distance between the upper dead point and lower dead point
(Specify the distance as an incremental value, relative to the
upper dead point.)
R : Distance from the upper dead point to point R
(Specify the distance as an incremental value, relative to the
upper dead point.)
F : Feedrate during chopping
G80; Cancels chopping

250
B–63002EN/02 NC FUNCTION 21. AXES CONTROL

21.18 M series Gears can be cut by turning the workpiece (C–axis) in sync with the
rotation of the spindle (hob axis) connected to a hob.
HOBBING MACHINE Also, a helical gear can be cut by turning the workpiece (C–axis) in sync
FUNCTION (G80, G81) with the motion of the Z–axis (axial feed axis).
(M series)

Helical gear

Spindle Hob

C–axis

Gear material

Format

G81 T _ L _ Q _ P _ ;

T : Number of teeth (Specifiable range: 1 to 5000)

L : Number of hob threads (Specifiable range: 1 to 20 with a sign)
⋅ The sign of L specifies the direction of rotation of the C–axis.
⋅ If L is positive, the C–axis rotates in the positive direction (+).
⋅ If L is negative, the C–axis rotates in the negative direction (–).
Q : Module or diametral pitch
For metric input, specify a module.
(Units: 0.00001 mm, Specifiable range: 0.01 to 25.0 mm)
For inch input, specify a diametral pitch.
(Units: 0.00001 inch–1, Specifiable range: 0.01 to 250.0 inch–1)
P : Gear helix angle
(Units: 0.0001 deg, Specifiable range: –90.0 to +90.0 deg)

P and Q must be specified when a helical gear is to be cut.

G80 ; Cancels synchronization between the hob axis and C–axis.

251
21. AXES CONTROL NC FUNCTION B–63002EN/02

21.19 M series To machine (grind/cut) a gear, the rotation of the workpiece axis
connected to a servo motor is synchronized with the rotation of the tool
SIMPLE ELECTRIC axis (grinding wheel/hob) connected to the spindle motor. To
GEAR BOX (G80, G81) synchronize the tool axis with the workpiece axis, an electric gear box
(M series) (EGB) function is used for direct control using a digital servo system.
With the EGB function, the workpiece axis can trace tool axis speed
variations without causing an error, thus machining gears with great
precision.
A dedicated servo axis is also used for the tool axis, connected to the
spindle motor and for which the rotational position must be read directly
by the digital servo system (this axis is called the EGB axis).

α pulses/rev

Position
detector
CNC
Tool axis rotation command Spindle
Spindle amplifier motor
Tool axis

Position
PC coder

Feedback connector for workpiece axis

DMR

Work piece
axis
+ –
Position
Servo amplifier C–axis Detector
control
+
EGB axis
β pulses/rev

Feedback connector for EGB axis

Synchronization
coefficient
Synchroniza-
tion switch

Command connector for EGB axis

Error counter
(dummy connector not required)
+

Format
G81 T _ L _ Q _ P _ ; Starts synchronization.
T : Number of teeth
L : Number of hob threads
Q : Module or diametral pitch
Specify a module in the case of metric input.
Specify a diametral pitch in the case of inch input.
P : Gear helix angle
G80: Cancels synchronization

252
 22. FUNCTIONS SPECIFIC TO 2–PATH
B–63002EN/02 NC FUNCTION CONTROL

22 FUNCTIONS SPECIFIC TO 2–PATH CONTROL

Two paths can be independently controlled to cut the workpiece

simultaneously.
Application to a lathe with one spindle and two paths (T series)
Two paths can operate simultaneously to machine one workpiece
attached to the spindle.
For example, while one path performs external machining, the other
path can perform internal machining. The machining time is then
reduced greatly.

path 1

Spindle

path 2

Application to a lathe with two spindles and two paths (T series)

Two paths can operate simultaneously to machine two workpieces
attached to two spindles. Since each path operates independently, the
productivity is improved as if two lathes were used simultaneously.

path 1

Spindle 1 Spindle 2

path 2

253
22. FUNCTIONS SPECIFIC TO 2–PATH
CONTROL NC FUNCTION B–63002EN/02

Application to transfer line (M series)

A single CNC can independently control two machining centers
mounted on both sides of the transfer line.
Application to transfer line (M series)

Machining center (left)

Conveyer

Machining center (right)

CNC

Two–path control

254
 22. FUNCTIONS SPECIFIC TO 2–PATH
B–63002EN/02 NC FUNCTION CONTROL

Controlling two paths simultaneously and independently

The movement of each path is separately programmed and stored in
the program memory for path. In automatic operation, this function
selects the program for path 1 and that for path 2 from the program
memory. When the paths are activated, the selected programs are
executed simultaneously and independently. To make paths 1 and 2
synchronous during machining, the synchronization function (Section
22.2) can be used.

X1
path 1 con- axis
trol (inter- X2
polation axis
Program
Program memory for and axis
path 1 control)
for path 1
Reader/
punch
inter-
face Z1
Program path 2 con- axis
memory for trol (inter- Z2
Program path 2 polation axis
for path 2 and axis
control)

Only one MDI panel is provided for two paths. The path selection signal
is used to switch the panel operation or display between paths 1 and 2.

255
22. FUNCTIONS SPECIFIC TO 2–PATH
CONTROL NC FUNCTION B–63002EN/02

22.1 The M code controls the timing of paths 1 and 2 during machining. When
the synchronization M code is specified in the machining program of each
WAITING FUNCTION path, the paths are synchronized at the specified block. During automatic
operation, if the synchronization M code is specified at one path, the path
waits until the same M code is specified at the other path. After that, the
next block is executed.
The range of the synchronization M codes to be used is set in a parameter
beforehand.
Example) The synchronization M codes are M100 to M300.

path 1 program path 2 program

01357. ; 02468 ;
G50 X _ Z _ ; G50 X _ Z _ ;
G00 X _ Z _ T0101 ; G00 X _ Z _ T0202 ;
S1000 M03 ; S2000 M03 ;
M100 ; M100 ;
Synchronization
N1100 G01 X _ Z _ F _ ; N2100 G01 X _ Z _ F _ ;

Path 1 (N1100 to N1199) and

path 2 (N2100 to N2199) oper-
N2199 ············ ; ated simultaneously and inde-
M101 ; pendently

N1199 ············ ; [[Synchronization (M101)]]

M101 ; Synchronization
M102 ; N2200 S3000 ;
G00 X _ Z _ T0202 ;
Only path 2 (N2200 to
2299) operated
[[Synchronization (M101)]]
N229 ············ ;
M102 ;
Synchronization
N1300 ············ ; N2300 ············ ;
G00 X _ Z _ T0505 ; G00 X _ Z _ T0707 ;
Path 1 (N1300 to N1399) and
path 2 (N2300 to N2399) oper-
ated simultaneously and inde-
pendently

N1399 ············ ; N2399 ············ ;

M103 ; M103 ;
Synchronization
M30 ; M30 ;
End of program

NOTE
1 While a path is waiting because of a synchronization M code, if a different synchronization M
code is specified from the other path, an alarm occurs. Both paths, then stop operating.
2 Unlike other M codes, the code signal and strobe signal are not output for the synchronization
M code.
3 The synchronization signal is output from the path which is waiting.
4 The synchronization-ignore signal can be used to ignore the synchronization M code specified
in the machining program. This signal is used when only one path is used for machining.

256
 22. FUNCTIONS SPECIFIC TO 2–PATH
B–63002EN/02 NC FUNCTION CONTROL

22.2 T series When one workpiece is machined by two paths operating simultaneously,
paths may come close to each other. If these paths touch each other
PATH because of a program error or setting error, the tool or even the machine
INTERFERENCE may be damaged.
CHECK (T series) If such an accident is expected, the path interference check function
decelerates and stops the paths.

path 2

path 1

To execute the path interference check, the contour of each path (contour
including the tool mounted on the path) must be set as a contact-inhibited
area for each tool beforehand.
This function checks if the contact-inhibited areas of these paths overlap.
If they overlap each other, it determines that the paths have interfered with
each other, and decelerates them till they stop as an alarm.

22.3 T series To machine a fine workpiece, two cutting tools should be applied on both
sides of a workpiece as shown below. When only one tool is applied, the
BALANCE CUT other side of the workpiece may be deflected. Using two cutting tools can
(G68, G69) (T series) make machining precision higher. If, however, these tools are not moved
synchronously, the workpiece will shake and machining will not be done
precisely. The balance cut function makes paths move synchronously.

NOTE
The balance cut function cannot be used if the option of
mirror-image operation of facing paths is specified.

257
22. FUNCTIONS SPECIFIC TO 2–PATH
CONTROL NC FUNCTION B–63002EN/02

22.4 A machine with two paths has different custom macro common variables
and tool compensation memory areas for paths 1 and 2. paths 1 and 2 can
MEMORY COMMON share the custom macro common variables and tool compensation
TO PATHS memory areas provided certain parameters are specified accordingly.

Custom macro common Paths 1 and 2 can share all or part of custom macro common variables
variables #100 to #149 and #500 to #531, provided parameters 6036 and 6037 are
specified accordingly. (The data for the shared variables can be written
or read from either path.)

Tool compensation Path 2 can reference or specify the data in the tool compensation memory
memory area of path 1, provided the CMF bit (bit 5 of parameter 8100) is specified
accordingly. This can be executed only when paths 1 and 2 have identical
data for tool compensation (number of groups, number of columns, unit
system, etc.).

258
 22. FUNCTIONS SPECIFIC TO 2–PATH
B–63002EN/02 NC FUNCTION CONTROL

22.5 T series In 16-TB(2–path control), usually the axes belonging to path 1 (X1,
Z1,...) are moved by the move command of path 1. The axes belonging
SYNCHRONIZATION/ to path 2 (X2, Z2, ...) are moved by that of path 2 (individual path control).
MIX CONTROL The synchronization/mix control function can move an optional axis of
(T series) one path and that of the other path synchronously (synchronization
control). This control function can exchange the move commands for
optional axes between two paths (mix control).

Individual path control The axes belonging to path 1 (X1, Z1,...) are moved by the move
command of path 1. The axes belonging to path 2 (X2, Z2, ...) are moved
by that of path 2.

X1 X2
Z1

ÇÇÇÇÇ ÇÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇÇÇ ÇÇÇÇÇ
Z2

ÇÇÇÇÇ ÇÇÇÇÇ
Synchronization control The move command for an axis (master axis) is given also to another
optional axis (slave axis). These two axes are then moved synchronously.
The slave axis can be moved also by its own move command. Which
command to use can be selected by the synchronization control selection
signal from PMC.

NOTE
1 Synchronization here means issuing the master axis move
command to the master axis and also to the slave axis
simultaneously. The position deviation of master and slave
axes is always detected. It, however, is not compensated
because synchronization compensation is not performed. If
a deviation exceeding the limit set in the parameter is
detected, an alarm occurs and the movements of both axes
are stopped.
2 The master axis and slave axis do not need to belong to the
same path. Two or more slave axes can be specified for one
master axis.

259
22. FUNCTIONS SPECIFIC TO 2–PATH
CONTROL NC FUNCTION B–63002EN/02

Example 1)
The Z2 axis is synchronized with the Z1 axis (machining with both
ends of a workpiece being held).

X1

ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ
Z1 Z2

ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ
Example 2)
The X2 and Z2 axes are synchronized with the X1 and Z1 axes
(balance cut).

X1
Z1

ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ
Z2

X2

Mix control When moving axes, the move commands for optional axes can be
exchanged between two paths.
Example 1)
The move commands for X1 and X2 axes are exchanged.
The program command of path 1 moves X2 and Z1 axes.
The program command of path 2 moves X1 and Z2 axes.

Moved by the command

of path 2.

X1

ÇÇÇÇ ÇÇÇÇ
Z1
ÇÇÇÇ ÇÇÇÇ Z2

ÇÇÇÇ ÇÇÇÇ
X2
Moved by the
command of path 1.

260
 22. FUNCTIONS SPECIFIC TO 2–PATH
B–63002EN/02 NC FUNCTION CONTROL

22.6 In a CNC supporting two–path control, specified machining programs

can be copied between the two paths by setting a parameter accordingly.
COPYING A A copy operation can be performed by specifying either a single program
PROGRAM BETWEEN or a range.
TWO PATHS
Single–program copy

Copy source number: 0001

Copy destination number: Not set

Copy source Copy destination

O0001 O0001

Copy source number: 0001

Copy destination: 0010

Copy source Copy destination

O0001 O0010

Specified–range copy

Copy source number: 0001 to 0100

Copy destination number: Not set

Copy source Copy destination

O0001 O0001
O0010 O0010
O0100 O0100
O1000
O2000

Copy source number: 0001 to 0100

Copy destination: 1000

Copy source Copy destination

O0001 O1000
O0010 O1001
O0100 O1002
O1000
O2000

261
23. MANUAL OPERATION NC FUNCTION B–63002EN/02

23 MANUAL OPERATION

262
B–63002EN/02 NC FUNCTION 23. MANUAL OPERATION

23.1
MANUAL FEED Jogging
Each axis can be moved in the + or - direction for the time the button
is pressed. Feed rate is the parameter set speed with override of:
0 - 655.34%, 0.01% step.
The parameter set speed can be set to each axis.
Manual rapid feed
Each axis can be fed in a rapid feed to the + or - direction for the time
the button is pressed.
Rapid traverse override is also possible.

23.2 Specified move amount can be positioned to the + or - direction with the
button.
INCREMENTAL FEED Move amount of:
(least command increment) x (magnification)
can be specified. The feed rate is that of manual feed.
The possible magnifications to be specified are as follows.
×1, ×10, ×100, ×1000.
Increment system Metric input Inch input

IS–B 0.001, 0.01, 0.1, 1.0 0.0001, 0.001, 0.01, 0.1

IS–C 0.0001, 0.001, 0.01, 0.1 0.00001, 0.0001, 0.001, 0.01

23.3 By rotating the manual pulse generator, the axis can be moved for the
equivalent distance. Manual handle feed is controlled 1 axis at a time.
MANUAL HANDLE The manual pulse generator generates 100 pulses per rotation. Move
FEED (1ST) amount per pulse can be specified from the following magnifications:
×1, ×10, ×M, ×N.
N is parameter set values of 0 - 1000. M is parameter set values of 1–127.
Move distance is :
(Least command increment) x (magnification)
Increment system Metric input Inch input

IS–B 0.001, 0.01, M/1000, 0.0001, 0.001, M/10000,

N/1000 mm N/10000 inch

IS–C 0.0001, 0.001, M/10000, 0.00001, 0.0001, M/100000,

N/1000 mm N/100000 inch

23.4 A 2nd, as well as 3rd manual pulse generator can be rotated to move the
axis for the equivalent distance. Manual handle feed of 3 axes (for T
MANUAL HANDLE system, 2 axes) can be done at a time. Multiplier is common to 1st, 2nd
FEED (2ND, 3RD) and 3rd manual pulse generators.
(T SERIES: 2ND)

263
23. MANUAL OPERATION NC FUNCTION B–63002EN/02

23.5 Although manual handle feed is usually enabled only in the manual
handle-feed mode, it can also be performed in the manual continuous-feed
HANDLE FEED IN THE mode by setting the corresponding parameters. However, manual
SAME MODE AS FOR continuous-feed and manual handle-feed cannot be performed
JOGGING simultaneously. Manual handle-feed can be performed only when manual
continuous-feed is in progress (i.e., an axis is moving).

23.6 T series The feedrates in manual continuous feed (jogging) and incremental feed
can be specified by inputting either feed distance per minute or feed
MANUAL distance per rotation.
PER-ROTATION FEED
(T series) 1 Specification of feed distance per minute or feed distance
per rotation is selected by setting the corresponding
parameter.
2 During manual rapid traverse, feed distance per minute is
always specified.

23.7 When tool is moved by manual operation, whether to add the move
distance to the absolute coordinate value in the workpiece coordinate
MANUAL ABSOLUTE system is selected depending on the input signal *ABSM.
ON/OFF When tool is moved by manual operation when *ABSM is set to 0, the
move distance is added to the absolute coordinate value.
When tool is moved by manual operation when *ABSM is set to 1, the
move distance is ignored, and is not added to the absolute coordinate
value. In this case, the work coordinates is shifted for the amount tool was
moved by manual operation.

23.8 The tool axis direction handle feed function allows the tool to be moved
a specified distance by handle feed, along the axis of the tool, tilted by
TOOL AXIS rotating the rotation axes.
DIRECTION HANDLE Tool axis direction handle feed function B provides two functions: handle
FEED AND TOOL AXIS feed along the tool axis and that perpendicular to the tool axis.
These functions are used for applications such as 5–axis diesinking
DIRECTION HANDLE
machining.
FEED B
(FOR M SERIES)

264
B–63002EN/02 NC FUNCTION 23. MANUAL OPERATION

23.8.1 When the tool axis direction handle mode is selected and the manual pulse
Tool Axis Direction generator is rotated, the tool is moved by the specified travel distance in
the direction of the tool axis tilted by the rotation of the rotary axis.
Handle Feed

A&C,
B&C
Work
piece

23.8.2 When the tool axis normal direction handle mode is selected and the
manual pulse generator is rotated, the tool is moved by the specified travel
Tool Axis Normal
distance in the direction normal to the tool axis tilted by the rotation of
Direction Handle Feed the rotary axis.

A– and C–axes
B– and C–axes

Center of rotation

Tool

A&C , B&C
C

Transverse direction
of the tool (X–axis) Longitudinal direction
of the tool
Y
B
Transverse direction A
of the tool (Y–axis) X

Workpiece

265
23. MANUAL OPERATION NC FUNCTION B–63002EN/02

23.9 In manual handle feed or jog feed, the following types of feed operations
are enabled in addition to the feed operation along a specified single axis
MANUAL (X–axis, Y–axis, Z–axis, and so forth) based on simultaneous 1–axis
LINEAR/CIRCULAR control:
INTERPOLATION Feed along a tilted straight line in the XY plane (M series) (linear feed)
(ONLY FOR ONE or in the ZX plane (T series) (linear feed) based on simultaneous
2–axis control
PATH)
Feed along a circle in the XY plane (M series) (circular feed) or in the
ZX plane (T series) (circular feed) based on simultaneous 2–axis
control

Y or X Y or X

Workpiece

Workpiece

Tool Tool
X or Z X or Z
<<Linear feed>> <<Circular feed>>

NOTE
The X–axis and Y–axis (M series) or Z–axis and Xaxis (T series) must be the first controlled
axis and second controlled axis, respectively.

23.10 M series For execution of rigid tapping, set rigid mode with MDI mode, then
switch to handle mode and select the tapping axis and move a manual
MANUAL RIGID handle. Manual rigid tapping is available when parameter is set.
TAPPING (M series) The rotation direction of the spindle in manual rigid tapping is determined
by a specified tapping cycle G code and the setting parameter.

266
B–63002EN/02 NC FUNCTION 23. MANUAL OPERATION

23.11 The manual numeric command function allows data programmed

through the MDI to be executed in jog mode. Whenever the system is
MANUAL NUMERIC ready for jog feed, a manual numeric command can be executed. The
COMMAND following eight functions are supported:
(1) Positioning (G00)
(2) Linear interpolation (G01)
(3) Automatic reference position return (G28)
(4) 2nd/3rd/4th reference position return (G30)
(5) M codes (miscellaneous functions)
(6) S codes (spindle functions)
(7) T codes (tool functions) (M series)
(8) B codes (second auxiliary functions)
By setting the corresponding parameters, the following commands for
axial motion and the M, S, T, and B functions can be disabled:
(1) Positioning (G00)
(2) Linear interpolation (G01)
(3) Automatic reference position return (G28)
(4) 2nd/3rd/4th reference position return (G30)
(5) M codes (miscellaneous functions)
(6) S codes (spindle functions)
(7) T codes (tool functions) (M series)
(8) B codes (second auxiliary functions)

267
24. AUTOMATIC OPERATION NC FUNCTION B–63002EN/02

24 AUTOMATIC OPERATION

268
B–63002EN/02 NC FUNCTION 24. AUTOMATIC OPERATION

24.1
OPERATION MODE

24.1.1 The part program can be read and executed block by block from the input
DNC Operation device connected to the reader/puncher interface.

24.1.2 Program registered in the memory can be executed.

Memory Operation

24.1.3 Multiple blocks can be input and executed by the MDI unit.
MDI Operation

269
24. AUTOMATIC OPERATION NC FUNCTION B–63002EN/02

24.2
SELECTION OF
EXECUTION
PROGRAMS

24.2.1 Program number currently in need can be searched from the programs
Program Number registered in memory operating the MDI.
Search

24.2.2 The sequence number of the program on the currently selected memory
Sequence Number can be searched using the MDI unit.
When executing the program from half-way (not from the head) of the
Search program, specify the sequence number of the half-way program, and the
program can be executed from the half-way block by sequence number
search.

24.2.3 After program execution has ended, the program in the memory or the
tape reader can be reminded to the program head, with this reset & rewind
Rewind
signal on. (When a portable tape reader with reels is in use)

24.2.4 By specifying work numbers of 01 - 15 externally (from the machine side,

etc.), program corresponding to the work number can be selected.
External Workpiece
The work number equals the program number. For example when work
Number Search number 12 is specified, program, O0012 is selected.

270
B–63002EN/02 NC FUNCTION 24. AUTOMATIC OPERATION

24.3
ACTIVATION OF
AUTOMATIC
OPERATION

24.3.1 Set operation mode to memory operation, MDI operation, or DNC

Cycle Start operation, press the cycle start button, and automatic operation starts.

24.4
EXECUTION OF
AUTOMATIC
OPERATION

24.4.1 Buffer register in CNC equivalent to one block is available for program
Buffer Register read and control of CNC command operation intervals caused by
preprocess time.

271
24. AUTOMATIC OPERATION NC FUNCTION B–63002EN/02

24.5
AUTOMATIC
OPERATION STOP
24.5.1 Automatic operation is stopped after executing the M00 (program stop)
commanded block. When the optional stop switch on the operator’s panel
Program Stop
is turned on, the M01 (optional stop) commanded block is executed and
(M00, M01) the automatic operation stops.
The automatic operation can be restarted by the cycle start button.

24.5.2 The CNC is reset after executing the M02 (end of program) or M30 (end
Program End of tape) commanded block.
(M02, M30)
24.5.3 During program operation, when the block with a preset sequence number
appears, operation stops after execution of the block, to a single block stop
Sequence Number
status. The sequence number can be set by the operator through the MDI
Comparison and Stop panel. This function is useful for program check, etc., because program
can be stopped at optional block without changing the program.

24.5.4 The CNC can be brought to an automatic operation hold status by pressing
the feed hold button on the operator’s panel. When feed hold is
Feed Hold
commanded during motion, it decelerates to a stop.
Automatic operation can be restarted by the cycle start button.

24.5.5 T series When feed hold is commanded during thread cutting cycle by G76 or
Thread Cutting Cycle G78, the tool rapidly relieves to the cycle start point, like in the final
chamfering of the thread cutting cycle. Thread cutting cycle restarts by
Retract (T series) cycle start command.

Rapid traverse Stop point

Rapid
traverse
Chamfering
Ordinary cycle
Move with feed hold
Feed hold was applied here

Without this function, if feed hold is commanded during thread cutting,

it returns and stops at the position where thread cutting circle was started
after thread cutting is ended.

24.5.6 The automatic operation can be ended in a reset status by the reset button
Reset on the MDI panel or by the external reset signal, etc. When reset is
commanded during motion, it decelerates to a stop.

272
B–63002EN/02 NC FUNCTION 24. AUTOMATIC OPERATION

24.6
RESTART OF
AUTOMATIC
OPERATION

24.6.1 This function allows program restart by specifying the desired sequence
Program Restart number, for example after tool break and change, or when machining is
restarted after holidays. The NC memorizes the modal status from the
beginning of the program to the sequence number.
If there are M codes necessary to be output, output the M code by the MDI,
press the start button, the tool automatically moves to the start position,
and the program execution restarts.

24.6.2 These functions are used for replacing tools damaged retraction of tools
Tool Retract & Recover for confirming the cutting conditions, and recovering the tools efficiently
to restart the cutting.
Also, the escape operation can be performed with the tool retract signal
by previously setting the escape amount (position) with a program. This
can be used for retraction for detecting tool damage.
1 Input the tool retract signal during executing the automatic operation.
Then, the automatic operation is halted and the escape operation
(retraction) is performed to the escape position commanded by the
program.
2 Input the tool retract signal to initiate the retract mode.
3 After that, switch the automatic mode to the manual mode to move
tools with manual operation such as the jog feed and handle feed. A
maximum of 10 points can be automatically memorized as travel path.
4 Input the tool recovery signal to return the tool to the retraction
position in the opposite direction along the path moved by manual
operation automatically (recovery operation).
5 Perform the cycle start to return the tool to the position where the tool
retract signal was entered (repositioning). When the recovery
operation completes, the halted automatic operation resumes.

273
24. AUTOMATIC OPERATION NC FUNCTION B–63002EN/02

: Position at which the tool retract signal was input

: Programmed escape position
: Position stored during manual operation
: Retraction path
: Manual operation
: Return operation
: Repositioning

Command the escape amount using the G10.6.

G10.6 _;

The escape data sorted by G10.6 is valid until the next G10.6 is
commanded. Command the following to cancel the escape amount:
G10.6 ; (Single command)

where
The G10.6 is the one-shot G code.
The tool can be retracted to a special location of work coordinate system
when the escape amount is command by the ABSOLUTE (G90). When
the escape amount is commanded by the INCREMENTAL (G91), the tool
can retract by only the commanded escape amount.

24.6.3 In cases such as when tool movement along an axis is stopped by feed hold
Manual Intervention during automatic operation so that manual intervention can be used to
replace the tool: When automatic operation is restarted, this function
and Return returns the tool to the position where manual intervention was started.
To use the conventional program restart function and tool withdrawal and
return function, the switches on the operator’s panel must be used in
conjunction with the MDI keys. This function does not require such
operations.

274
B–63002EN/02 NC FUNCTION 24. AUTOMATIC OPERATION

24.7
MANUAL
INTERRUPTION
DURING AUTOMATIC
OPERATION

24.7.1 During automatic operation, tool can be adjusted by the manual pulse
generator without changing the mode. The pulse from the manual pulse
Handle Interruption
generator is added to the automatic operation command and the tool is
moved for the recommended pulses.
The work coordinate system thereafter is shifted for the pulse commanded
value. Movement commanded by handle interruption can be displayed.

275
24. AUTOMATIC OPERATION NC FUNCTION B–63002EN/02

24.8 Any of the files (programs) stored on a FANUC Handy File, a FANUC
Program File Mate, a FANUC FLOPPY CASSETTE can be selected and
SCHEDULING executed.
FUNCTION A list of the files stored on the Floppy Cassette can be displayed.
Files can be executed in an arbitrary order and executed an arbitrary
number of times by specifying file numbers in a desired order along
with their repeat counts.

File list screen

FILE DIRECTORY F0004 N00020

CURRENT SELECTED:O0002
NO. FILE NAME (METER) VOL
0000 SCHEDULE
0001 PARAMETER 46.1
0002 ALL.PROGRAM 12.3
0003 O0001 1.9
0004 O0002 1.9
0005 O0003 1.9
0006 O0004 1.9
0007 O0005 1.9
0008 O0010 1.9

RMT **** *** *** 09:36:48

[ SELECT ][ ][ ][ ][ ]

Schedule screen (for specifying file numbers and repeat counts)

FILE DIRECTORY F0000 N00020

ORDER FILE NO. REQ.REP CUR.REP
01 0001 2 0
02 0007 25 0
03 0008 6 0
04 0011 9999 0
05 0012 LOOP 0
06
07
08
09
10

>_
RMT **** *** *** 09:36:48
[ PRGRM ][ ][ DIR ][ SCHDUL ][ (OPRT) ]

276
B–63002EN/02 NC FUNCTION 24. AUTOMATIC OPERATION

24.9 M series While a tape is running, a program input from an I/O device connected
to the reader/punch interface can be executed and stored in memory.
SIMULTANEOUS Similarly, a program stored in memory can be executed and output
INPUT AND OUTPUT through the reader/punch interface at the same time.
OPERATIONS
(AT 1–PATH CONTROL)
(M series)
24.10 M series With the retrace function, the tool can be moved in the reverse direction
(reverse movement) by using the REVERSE switch during automatic
RETRACE FUNCTION operation to trace the programmed path. The retrace function also enables
(M series) the user to move the tool in the forward direction again (forward return
movement) along the retraced path until the retrace start position is
reached. When the tool reaches the retrace start position, the tool resumes
movement according to the program.

24.11 M series When rigid tapping is stopped, either by an emergency stop or by a reset,
the tap may cut into the workpiece. The tap can subsequently be drawn
RIGID TAPPING out by using a PMC signal. This function automatically stores
RETURN (M series) information relating to the tapping executed most recently. When a tap
return signal is input, only the rigid tapping cycle return operation is
executed, based on the stored information. The tap is pulled toward the
R point. When a return value  is set in a corresponding parameter, the
pulling distance can be increased by .

Initial point
2nd return
completion
α point

Return 1st return

completion completion
R point point α point

L L

Center of
tapping

Z point (α = 0) (when α is set)

277
25. PROGRAM TEST FUNCTIONS NC FUNCTION B–63002EN/02

25 PROGRAM TEST FUNCTIONS

278
B–63002EN/02 NC FUNCTION 25. PROGRAM TEST FUNCTIONS

25.1 In machine lock condition, the machine does not move, but the position
display is updated as if the machine were moving. Machine lock is valid
ALL-AXES MACHINE even in the middle of a block.
LOCK

25.2 Machine lock can be commanded per axis.

MACHINE LOCK ON
EACH AXIS

25.3 This function inhibits transmitting of M, S, T, B function code signals and

strobe signals to PMC. Miscellaneous functions M00, M01, M02, and
AUXILIARY M30 are executed even when miscellaneous function lock is applied,
FUNCTION LOCK allowing the code signal, strobe signal, and decode signal to be
transmitted normally.

25.4 In the dry run mode, the tool moves at the speed obtained by multiplying
the dry run speed by the override value for manual feeding, regardless of
DRY RUN the specified cutting federate. The dry run speed is specified in the
corresponding parameter. However, the rapid traverse command (G00)
and rapid traverse override value are effective.
Dry run can also be commanded to rapid feed command (G00) by
parameter setting.

25.5 The program can be executed block by block under automatic operation.
SINGLE BLOCK

279
26. SETTING AND DISPLAY UNIT NC FUNCTION B–63002EN/02

26 SETTING AND DISPLAY UNIT

The available operational devices include the setting and display unit
attached to the CNC, the machine operator’s panel, and external
input/output devices such as a tape reader, PPR, Handy File, Floppy
Cassette, and FA Card.

280
B–63002EN/02 NC FUNCTION 26. SETTING AND DISPLAY UNIT

26.1 The setting and display units are shown in Subsections II–26.1.1 to
II–26.1.6.
SETTING AND
DISPLAY UNIT CNC control unit with 7.2″/8.4″ LCD: II–26.1.1
CNC control unit with 9.5″/10.4″ LCD: II–26.1.2
Separate–type small MDI unit: II–26.1.3
Separate–type standard MDI unit (horizontal type): II–26.1.4
Separate–type standard MDI unit (vertical type): II–26.1.5
Separate–type standard MDI unit (vertical type) (for 160i/180i/210i):
II–26.1.6

26.1.1
CNC Control Unit with
7.2″/8.4″ LCD

281
26. SETTING AND DISPLAY UNIT NC FUNCTION B–63002EN/02

26.1.2
CNC Control Unit with
9.5″/10.4″ LCD

282
B–63002EN/02 NC FUNCTION 26. SETTING AND DISPLAY UNIT

26.1.3
Separate–Type Small
MDI Unit

ADDRESS/NUMERIC KEYS

SHIFT KEY

CANCEL KEY

INPUT KEY

EDIT KEYS

FUNCTION KEYS

HELP KEY

RESET KEY

CURSOR KEYS

PAGE–UP/DOWN KEYS

283
26. SETTING AND DISPLAY UNIT NC FUNCTION B–63002EN/02

26.1.4
Separate–Type
Standard MDI Unit
(Horizontal Type)

HELP KEY RESET KEY ADDRESS/NUMERIC KEYS

EDIT KEYS

CANCEL KEY

INPUT KEY

SHIFT KEY CURSOR KEYS

PAGE–UP/DOWN FUNCTION KEYS
KEYS

284
B–63002EN/02 NC FUNCTION 26. SETTING AND DISPLAY UNIT

26.1.5
Separate–Type
Standard MDI Unit
(Vertical Type)

HELP KEY RESET KEY

ADDRESS/NUMERIC KEYS

EDIT KEYS

CANCEL KEY

INPUT KEY

SHIFT KEY CURSOR KEYS

FUNCTION KEYS
PAGE–UP/DOWN KEYS

285
26. SETTING AND DISPLAY UNIT NC FUNCTION B–63002EN/02

26.1.6
Separate–Type
FA Full Keyboard
(Vertical Type)
(for 160i/180i/210i)

The key legends are the same as those of a personal computer keyboard.

286
B–63002EN/02 NC FUNCTION 26. SETTING AND DISPLAY UNIT

26.2
EXPLANATION OF
THE KEYBOARD
No. Key Function

Reset key Used to reset the CNC to release an alarm or other similar state.
(1)

Help key Used to get help with operations such as for the MDI keys, when the operator does
(2) not know what to do next.

Soft keys The soft keys are assigned different functions depending on the application.
(3) The functions currently assigned to the soft keys are displayed on the lowermost line
of the screen.

Address/numeric keys Used to enter letters and numbers.

(4)

Shift key Some of the address keys have two different letters. When the shift key is pressed
first before pressing one of these address keys, the lower-right letter is input. When
(5)
the shift key is pressed, ^ is displayed in the key input buffer indicating that the low-
er-right letter will be input.

Input key Data input by pressing an address or numeric key is stored in the key input buffer,
then displayed. When data input to the key input buffer needs to be written to the
(6)
offset register, press the <INPUT> key. This key is equivalent to soft key [INPUT].
Either key may be used.

Cancel key Used to delete letters or numbers input to the key input buffer.
Example)
(7)
When N001X100Z is displayed on the key input buffer, pressing the cancel key de-
letes the letter Z, and N001X100 is displayed.

Edit keys Used to edit programs.

: Alter

(8) : Insert

: Delete

Function keys Used to switch screens for each function.

(9)

287
26. SETTING AND DISPLAY UNIT NC FUNCTION B–63002EN/02

No. Key Function

Cursor keys Four cursor keys are provided.

: Moves the cursor to the right or forwards in small units.

(10) : Moves the cursor to left or backwards in small units.

: Moves the cursor downward or forwards in large units.

: Moves the cursor upward or backwards in large units.

Page-up/down keys Page-up and page-down keys are provided.

: Used to display the next page.

(11)

: Used to display the previous page.

26.2.1 The function keys select what is displayed. Each function is divided into
Explanation of the sub-functions, and the sub-functions are selected by soft keys.
Function Keys There are six function keys : POS , PROG , OFFSET
SETTING , SYSTEM
, MESSAGE , and GRAPH .

POS : Displays the current position.

PROG : Displays and edits a program stored in memory.

OFFSET
SETTING : Displays an offset value, offset from the workpiece zero point,
custom macro variable, and tool life management data. Allows
data to be input into these items.
SYSTEM
: Displays and sets a parameter and pitch error compensation
value, and displays self diagnostic data.
MESSAGE : Displays an alarm message, external operator message, external
alarm message, and alarm history.
GRAPH : Displays graphic data.

288
B–63002EN/02 NC FUNCTION 26. SETTING AND DISPLAY UNIT

26.2.2 The MDI panel has 10 soft keys (or 5 soft keys), a next-menu key on the
Explanation of the Soft right, and a previous-menu key on the left. The next menu key and
previous menu key are used to select the functions of the soft keys.
Keys These soft keys can be assigned with various functions, according to the
needs.
The following functions are mainly available via the MDI panel:
Actual position display
Contents of program display, program directory display (display of
program number, program name, part program storage length left,
number of programs left)
Program editing
Offset amount display and setting
Commanded value display, MDI input
Parameter setting and display
Alarm message/operator message display
Custom macro variables display and setting
Tool life management data display and setting
Diagnosis
Others
This manual may refer to a display device with 10 + 2 soft keys as a 12
soft key type, and a display device with 5 + 2 soft keys as a 7 soft key type.

289
27. DISPLAYING AND SETTING DATA NC FUNCTION B–63002EN/02

27 DISPLAYING AND SETTING DATA

290
B–63002EN/02 NC FUNCTION 27. DISPLAYING AND SETTING DATA

27.1 The following data are displayed. 7 soft keys can display maximum 640
characters (40 × 16 lines) and 12 soft keys can display maximum 2080
DISPLAY (80 × 26 lines).

Explanations
Indication of statuses The status of the control unit is indicated on the screen. Statuses include
and tool post names the state when an alarm is being activated or when the system is in the edit
mode. The status line is displayed right above the soft key line.

 
––EMG–– OUTPUT

     Status
EDIT STOP MTN FIN ALM hh:mm:ss HEAD1 line
Soft key
line

Operation mode (MDI, MEM, RMT, EDIT, HND, TJOG, THND,

INC, or REF)
Status of automatic operation (STOP, HOLD, STRT, or ****)
***** : Reset
STOP : Automatic operation is in a stopped state.
HOLD : Automatic operation is in a halt state.
STRT : Automatic operation has been started.
 Axis movement/dwell (MTN, DWL, or ***)
 FIN wait state (FIN or ***)
 Emergency stop (--EMG--) (displayed above in 3 and 4)
 Alarm status (ALM, WNG, or ***)
 Clock (hh:mm:ss)
 Name of the path currently selected (only at 2–path control)

NOTE
The name of a path can be specified by the corresponding
parameter with a string of up to seven characters. The characters
may be numbers, letters, katakana characters, or symbols.

 Status display such as program editing (INPUT, OUTPUT, SRCH,

EDIT, LSK, or RSTR)
( and  are displayed in the same column. When a program is
being edited,  is displayed.)
Key input display Data input via the address keys or the numerical keys are displayed at the
left lower part of the screen.

Program number, Program number, sequence number is displayed on the right upper part
sequence number of the screen.
display

Alarm display Alarm number and its contents are displayed briefly.

291
27. DISPLAYING AND SETTING DATA NC FUNCTION B–63002EN/02

Alarm message display Alarm message contents are displayed.

Present position display Relative position and position in the work coordinates are displayed in
3-times magnified characters.

Total position display Relative position, position in the work coordinates, position in the
machine coordinate, and remaining move distance are displayed in one
screen.

Command value display The following two displays are performed.

Previously commanded modal value and command value to be

executed (ACTIVE)

Command value of the next block

Setting (parameter set by Displays setting value.

the operator) display

Tool offset amount Displays offset value. Relative position is also displayed at the same time.
display
Program display Display of program for editing.
Display of program currently under execution.
Display of program list.
A list of program number and program name, of programs stored in
the memory is displayed.
Used memory size and remaining memory size are also displayed.

Parameter display

Self diagnosis result

display

Custom macro variables

display

External operator
message, external alarm
message display

Actual speed and actual Actual feedrate per minute (mm/min or inch/min)
spindle speed Actual spindle speed (rpm)

Program check screen The following are displayed on one screen.

Program number on execution
Sequence number on execution
Program text on execution
Current position
Modal G codes
Modal M codes
T code
Actual feedrate and spindle speed
Status

292
B–63002EN/02 NC FUNCTION 27. DISPLAYING AND SETTING DATA

Operating monitor The load values (torque values) of spindle motor and servo motor are
display displayed in bar chart.
The most recent sampling values are displayed in bar chart display. Set
the rated load value of motor corresponding to each load meter to
parameters. The load meter displays 100% when the load value is the
rated load value.
The load meter can be displayed up to three servo motor axes and a
parameter can be used to select any one of three axes.

Displaying the alarm A maximum of 25 of the most recent alarms generated in CNC can be
history recorded. Each alarm record consists of the following items:
Date and time
Alarm number
Alarm message
Any of the records can be deleted from the alarm history.
In addition, the operator message history can be displayed.

ALARM HISTORY O0100 N00001

97. 02. 14 16:43:48

010 IMPROPER G–CODE
97. 02. 13 8:22:21
506 OVER TRAVEL :+1
97. 02. 12 20:15:43
417 SERVO ALARM :X AXIS DGTL PARAM

MEM **** *** *** 09:36:48

[ ALARM ][ MSG ][ HISTORY ][ ][ (OPRT) ]

Displaying external The history of external operator messages can be stored. The stored
operator message history can be displayed on the external operator message history screen.
history

293
27. DISPLAYING AND SETTING DATA NC FUNCTION B–63002EN/02

27.2 The Japanese, English, German, French, Italian, Spanish, Chinese, and
Korean are prepared as display languages. Select the language to be
LANGUAGE displayed by parameters.
SELECTION

27.3 Time is displayed in the hour/minute/second format on each display

screen. Some screens allows display of the year, month, and day.
CLOCK FUNCTION The custom macro system variable can be used to read the time. The time
will be told through the window at PMC side.

27.4 This function displays the integrated power-on time, the integrated cycle
operation time, the integrated cutting time and timer on the cRT display
RUN TIME & PARTS screen. The integrated cycle operation time, the integrated cutting time
NUMBER DISPLAY and timer can be altered and preset, using the MDI.
In addition to the above, this function displays the count of the total
number of parts machined, the number of parts required and the number
of parts on the screen. Each time M02, M30 or a parameter set M code
is executed, the count of the total in memory is incremented by 1.
If a program is prepared so as to execute M02, M30 or a parameter set M
code each time one part machining is completed, the number of parts
machined can be counted automatically.
If the count of the number of parts reaches the number of parts required,
a signal is output to the PMC side.
It is possible to change and preset the number of parts required and the
number of parts counted, using MDI.
The number of required parts and the number of counted parts can be read
and written using custom macro variables. These values can also be read
using the external data input function.

SETTING(TIMER) O0000 N00000

PARTS TOTAL = 0
PARTS REQUIRED = 25
PARTS COUNT = 10

POWER ON = 0H 0M
OPERATING TIME = 0H 0M 0S
CUTTING TIME = 0H 0M 0S
FREE PURPOSE = 0H 0M 0S
CYCLE TIME = 0H 0M 0S
DATE = 1997/09/25
TIME = 16:20:30
>_
MDI **** *** *** 16:20:30
[ OFFSET ][ SETTING ][ ][ ][ (OPRT) ]

294
B–63002EN/02 NC FUNCTION 27. DISPLAYING AND SETTING DATA

27.5 In this function, functions of switches on the machine operator’s panel is

done by operation on the MDI panel. Mode selection and jogging
SOFTWARE override, etc. can be operated by setting operation via the MDI panel with
OPERATOR’S PANEL this function, thus allowing commitance of corresponding switches on the
machine operator’s panel.
This function is valid only when the screen is displayed with operator’s
panel. Move cursor with the cursor operation keys, and select various
operations, viewing the screen.
The following operations can be done via the MDI panel:
A Model selection
B Manual pulse generator feed axis selection (available only with
manual handle 1)
Move distance selection per pulse of manual pulse generator
C Rapid traverse override
Jogging speed override
Feedrate override
D Optional block skip (Block delete)
Single block
Machine lock
Dry run
E Memory protect
F Feed hole
G Jogging/incremental feed axis direction selection
Manual rapid traverse selection
H General-purpose switch: Eight general-purpose switches are provided
and each of these
switches can be named by up to eight alphanumeric characters.

There is a parameter per groups A to G shown above, which decides

validity of operation function by MDI panel.

OPERATOR’S PANEL O0000 N00000

MODE : MDI AUTO EDIT STEP JOG ZRN

STEP MULT. :
*1 *10 *100
RAPID OVRD. :
100% 50% 25% F0
JOG FEED :1.0%
****************
FEED OVRD. : 140%
******
ACTUAL POSITION (ABSOLUTE)
X 0.000 Z 0.000

S 0 T0000
EDIT **** *** *** 09:36:48
[ MACRO ][ ][ OPR ][ TOOLLF ][ ]

295
27. DISPLAYING AND SETTING DATA NC FUNCTION B–63002EN/02

OPERATOR’S PANEL O0000 N00000

BLOCK SKIP : OFF ON

SINGLE BLOCK : OFF ON
MACHINE LOCK : OFF ON
DRY RUN : OFF ON
PROTECT KEY : PROTECT RELEASE
FEED HOLD : OFF ON

ACTUAL POSITION (ABSOLUTE)

X 0.000 Z 0.000

S 0 T0000
EDIT **** *** *** 09:36:48
[ MACRO ][ ][ OPR ][ TOOLLF ][ ]

296
B–63002EN/02 NC FUNCTION 27. DISPLAYING AND SETTING DATA

27.6 File names in the floppy cassette (FANUC CASSETTE F1) and program
file (FANUC PROGRAM FILE Mate can be listed on the display
DIRECTORY DISPLAY (directory display). Each file name of up to 17 letters can be displayed
OF FLOPPY in directory display.
CASSETTE Files in the floppy cassette are:
Part program, parameter/pitch error compensation data, tool
compensation data, and etc.
When part program in part program memory is written into the floppy
cassette, program number can be given to it as a file name. When NC
parameter is written into the floppy cassette, ”PARAMETER” is given
them as a fixed name. When tool compensation data is written into the
floppy cassette, ”OFFSET” is given to it as a fixed name.

DIRECTORY(FLOPPY) O0000 N00000

NO. FILE NAME (METER) VOL
0001 PARAMETER 46.1
0002 ALL.PROGRAM 12.3
0003 O0001 1.9
0004 O0002 1.9
0005 O0003 1.9
0006 O0004 1.9
0007 O0005 1.9
0008 O0010 1.9
0009 O0020 1.9

EDIT **** *** *** 09:36:48

[ F SRH ][ READ ][ PUNCH ][DELETE ][ ]

297
27. DISPLAYING AND SETTING DATA NC FUNCTION B–63002EN/02

27.7
GRAPHIC DISPLAY
FUNCTION
27.7.1 This function allows display of tool path on the screen, making program
Graphic Display check easier. The following functions are offered.
Function Tool path of the machining program can be displayed. Machining
process can be checked just by viewing the tool path drawing on the
screen.
Program check before machining can be done by displaying the
programmed locus on the screen.
For M system, display is possible with the XY plane, YZ plane, ZX
plane, or isometric; for T system, with the XZ plane.
Scaling of the screen is possible.

Tool path drawing (M series)

O0001 N00012

X 0.000
Y 0.000
Z 0.000

S 0 T0000
MEM **** *** *** 09:36:48
[ PARAM ][ GRAPH ][ ][ ][ ]

Graphic display of tool path (M series)

298
B–63002EN/02 NC FUNCTION 27. DISPLAYING AND SETTING DATA

27.7.2 Created programs can be checked visually by displaying them using

Dynamic Graphic graphic data.
Display
Dynamic graphic display Graphic data can be displayed in the following two drawing modes:
function (for M series)

Tool path drawing mode Tool paths are drawn with lines so programs can be checked closely.
Because tool paths are drawn at a high speed, programs can be checked
quickly.

Two-dimensional drawing

PATH GRAPHIC (EXECUTION) O1000 N00630

S 0 T0000
MDI **** *** *** 09:36:48
[ AUTO ][ START ][ STOP ][REWIND ][ ERASE ]

With the automatic scaling function, figures can be drawn on the center
of the screen at a desired magnification.
On a drawing, any part of a figure can be magnified easily by
specifying its center and scale.

Enlarged-view drawing

PATH GRAPHIC (EXECUTION) O1000 N00630

S 0 T0000
MDI **** *** *** 09:36:48
[ PARAM ][ EXEC ][ SCALE ][ POS ][ (OPRT) ]

299
27. DISPLAYING AND SETTING DATA NC FUNCTION B–63002EN/02

In addition to two-dimensional drawings, isometric projection

drawings and biplanar drawings can be created.

Isometric projection drawing

PATH GRAPHIC (EXECUTION) O1000 N00630

S 0 T0000
MDI **** *** *** 09:36:48
[ AUTO ][ START ][ STOP ][REWIND ][ ERASE ]

Because the current position of a tool is marked on the drawn tool path,
the progress of machining can be monitored accurately.

Biplanar drawing

PATH GRAPHIC (EXECUTION) O1000 N00630

S 0 T0000
MDI **** *** *** 09:36:48
[ AUTO ][ START ][ STOP ][REWIND ][ ERASE ]

300
B–63002EN/02 NC FUNCTION 27. DISPLAYING AND SETTING DATA

Machining profile
drawing mode The profile of a workpiece that changes as the tool moves can be
simulated and drawn three-dimensionally, making it easier to check
programs visually.

Blank figure

SOLID GRAPHIC (BLANK) O0000 N00000

MDI **** *** *** 09:36:48

[ ANEW ][ + ROT ][ – ROT ][ +TILT ][ –TILT ]

Final figure

SOLID GRAPHIC (EXECUTION) O1000 N00000

MEM **** *** *** 09:36:48

[ A.ST ][ F.ST ][ STOP ][ REWIND ][ ]

301
27. DISPLAYING AND SETTING DATA NC FUNCTION B–63002EN/02

The coordinate axes and projection angles can be changed at the

operator’s option.

Modification of a coordinate axis (inclination)

SOLID GRAPHIC (REVIEW) O0000 N00000

MEM **** *** *** 09:36:48

[ ANEW ][ + ROT ][ – ROT ][ +TILT ][ –TILT ]

Modification of a coordinate axis (inclination)

SOLID GRAPHIC (REVIEW) O0000 N00000

MEM **** *** *** 09:36:48

[ ANEW ][ + ROT ][ – ROT ][ +TILT ][ –TILT ]

302
B–63002EN/02 NC FUNCTION 27. DISPLAYING AND SETTING DATA

In addition to three–dimensional drawings, two–dimensional

drawings and tri–planar drawings can be created.

Two-dimensional drawing

SOLID GRAPHIC (EXECUTION) O1000 N00630

MEM **** *** *** 09:36:48

[ A.ST ][ F.ST ][ STOP ][ REWIND ][ ]

Tri-planar drawing

SOLID GRAPHIC (3–PLANE) O1000 N00630

MEM **** *** *** 09:36:48

[ ][ ← ][ → ][ ↑ ][ ↓ ]

303
27. DISPLAYING AND SETTING DATA NC FUNCTION B–63002EN/02

Dynamic graphic display The following two display modes are available:
function (for T series)
Tool path drawing mode Movement of the tool tip is drawn with fine lines.

S 0.38 O0001 N00012

X 0.000
Y 0.000

MEM STOP *** *** 11:41:51

[ HEAD ][ REVIEW ][ PROCES ][ EXEC ][ STOP ]

Animated drawing mode Accurate figures of the material, chuck, and tailstock are displayed on the
screen. An animated simulation illustrates how the material will be cut by
the tool.

*** CHECKING OF NC DATA *** SCALE VALUE 0.576 10–01

*NC SIDE*

O 0300
N 00007
X–AXIS
200.000

Z–AXIS
200.000

S 00000
T 0000
M 000

*** PRESS SOFT KEY *** METRIC

CHECK ORIGI– ACA PATH PARAM– DRAWNG END

START NAL OFF OFF ETER RANGE

304
B–63002EN/02 NC FUNCTION 27. DISPLAYING AND SETTING DATA

*** CHECKING OF NC DATA *** SCALE VALUE 0.576 10–01

*NC SIDE*

O 0300
N 00007
X–AXIS
200.000

Z–AXIS
100.382

S 00000
T 0000
M 003

INTERFERENCEALARM (HD1&CHUCK/TAIL STOCK)

START METRIC

CHECK ORIGI– ACA PATH PARAM– END

START NAL OFF OFF ETER

*** CHECKING OF NC DATA *** SCALE VALUE 0.576 10–01

*NC SIDE*

O 0300
N 00007
X–AXIS
122.700

Z–AXIS
–55.326

S 00000
T 0000
M 003

START METRIC

CHECK ORIGI– ACA PATH PARAM– END

START NAL OFF OFF ETER

27.7.3 M series The background drawing function enables the drawing of a figure for one
program while machining a workpiece under the control of another
Background Drawing
program.
(M series)

Explanations
Program selection Immediately after entering background drawing mode with operation of
MDI key, the program which was selected previously remains selected.
Any program can be selected for background drawing, by using the
background drawing screen.

Parameter setting and drawing method are same as synamic graphic

display.

305
27. DISPLAYING AND SETTING DATA NC FUNCTION B–63002EN/02

27.8 The waveforms of servo data items (errors, torques, timing pulses, etc.)
and signals between the CNC and the PMC can be displayed.
SERVO WAVEFORM
FUNCTION
WAVE DIAGNOS. (GRAPHIC)) O0000 N00000

MDI **** *** ***

[ START ][ TIME→][ ←TIME][ H–DOBL ][ H–HALF ]

On this screen, the sampling period (6 to 32767 ms) and drawing start
conditions can be specified.

306
B–63002EN/02 NC FUNCTION 27. DISPLAYING AND SETTING DATA

27.9
SCREENS FOR
SERVO DATA AND
SPINDLE DATA

27.9.1 On the servo setting screen, parameters required for standard initialization
Servo Setting Screen of the servo motor are listed. The parameters can also be set.

SERVO SETTING O0000 N00000

X AXIS Y AXIS
INITIAL SET BIT 00000011 00000001
MOTOR ID NO. 12 12
AMR 00011111 00011111
CMR 2 2
FEEDGEAR N 3 3
(N/M) M 10 10
DIRECTION SET 111 111
VEROCITY PULSE NO. 8000 8000
POSITION PULSE NO. 8000 8000
REF COUNTER 8000 8000

MDI **** *** *** *** 09:36:48

[ SV.SET ][ SV.TUN ][ ][ ][ (OPRT) ]

27.9.2 On the servo adjustment screen, parameters required for basic adjustment
Servo Adjustment of the servo motor and statuses being monitored are listed for each axis.
Screen
SERVO SETTING O1000 N00000
X AXIS
(PARAMETR) (MONITOR)
FUNC.BIT 00110100 ALARM 1 00110100
LOOP GAIN 3000 ALRAM 2 00110100
TUNING ST. 1 ALARM 3 00000000
SET PERIOD 50 ALARM 4 00000000
INT.GAIN 251 LOOP GAIN 3000
PROP.GAIN –2460 POS ERROR 100
FILTER 2450 CURRENT % 50

>_
MEM STAT MTN *** *** 09:36:48
[ SV.SET ][ SV.TUN ][ ][ ][ (OPRT) ]

307
27. DISPLAYING AND SETTING DATA NC FUNCTION B–63002EN/02

27.9.3 On the spindle setting screen, parameters required for standard

Spindle Setting Screen initialization of the serial spindle are listed. The parameters can also be
set. This screen is only for the main spindle connected to the first
amplifier.

SPINDLE SETTING O0000 N00000

GEAR SELECT :1
SPINDLE :1

(PARAMETER)
GEAR RATIO 50
MAX SPINDLE SPEED 3000
MAX MOTOR SPEED 6000
MAX C AXIS SPEED 100

>_
MDI **** *** *** 09:36:48
[ SP.SET ][ SP.TUN ][ SP.MON ][ ][ (OPRT) ]

27.9.4 On the spindle adjustment screen, parameters required for basic

Spindle Adjustment adjustment of the serial spindle and statuses being monitored are listed.
The screen is only for the main spindle connected to the first amplifier.
Screen
SPINDLE TUNING O1000 N00000

OPERATION : SYNCHRONIZATION CONTROL

GEAR SELECT : 1
SPINDLE : S11
(PARAMETER) (MONITOR)
PROP.GAIN –2460 MOTOR 100
INT.GAIN 241 SPINDLE 150
LOOP GAIN 3000 POS ERR S1 100
MOTOR VOLT 30 POS ERR S2 50
ZRN GAIN % 100 SYN.ERROR 128
REF.SHIFT 2046

>_
MEM STAT MTN *** *** 09:36:48
[ SP.SET ][ SP.TUN ][ SP.MON ][ ][ (OPRT) ]

308
B–63002EN/02 NC FUNCTION 27. DISPLAYING AND SETTING DATA

27.9.5 On the spindle monitor screen, various data items related to the spindle
Spindle Monitor Screen are listed. This screen is only for the main spindle of the first amplifier.

SPINDLE MONITOR O1000 N00000

ALARM : AL–27(PC DISCON.)
OPERATION : SP.CONTOURING CONTROL
FEED SPEED : 100 DEG/MIN
MOTOR SPEED : 150 RPM
0 50 100 150 200(%)
LOAD METER(%)

CONTROL INPUT : MRDY *ESP ORCM

CONTROL OUTPUT : ORAR SST

>_
MEM **** *** *** 09:36:48
[ SP.SET ][ SP.TUN ][ SP.MON ][ ][ (OPRT) ]

309
27. DISPLAYING AND SETTING DATA NC FUNCTION B–63002EN/02

27.10 The configurations of software and hardware required for maintenance of

the CNC are displayed.
SYSTEM The system configuration display function provides the following three
CONFIGURATION screens:
DISPLAY FUNCTION Slot information screen
Software information screen
Hardware (module) information screen

Slot information
SYSTEM CONFIG O1234 N56789

SLOT MODULE_ID SERIES VERSION

00 10D5 :40 B0F1 0002
01 00CF :66 B435 0001
03 019D :41 4068 0001

  

MEM **** *** *** 18:46:43

[ PARAM ][ DGNOS ][ PMC ][ SYSTEM ][ ]

Slot No.
Module ID
 Software ID
 Software series
 Software edition

Software information
SYSTEM CONFIG(SOFTWARE) O1234 N56789

SYSTEM B0F1 0001

BASIC+OPTION–A1 
SERVO 9090 0001
PMC(SYS) 406A 0001
4099 0001
PMC(LAD) FS16 0001
MACRO LIB BZG1 0001
BOOT 60M3 0004
GRAPHIC–1 600W 001Z


MEM **** *** *** 19:14:23
[ PARAM ][ DGNOS ][ PMC ][ SYSTEM ][ ]

Software type
Software series
 Software edition
 Contents of ROM (system ROM only)

310
B–63002EN/02 NC FUNCTION 27. DISPLAYING AND SETTING DATA

Hardware (module) The slot number, board name, modules mounted on the board are
information displayed for each slot.

SYSTEM CONFIG(MODULE) O1234 N56789

SLOT 00 MOTHER BOARD

AXIS CTRL CARD : 0D

DISPLAY CTRL CARD : OE
CPU CARD : 01
FROM DIMM : 47
SRAM DIMM : 23
DRAM DIMM : 86
PMC CPU : O1

 

MEM **** *** *** 19:33:34

[ PARAM ][ DGNOS ][ PMC ][ SYSTEM ][ ]

Slot number (The slot number corresponds to the number

displayed on the slot information screen.)

Name of the PC board inserted in the slot
 Hardware (modules) mounted on the PC board
  Types of hardware (modules), mounted/not mounted

311
27. DISPLAYING AND SETTING DATA NC FUNCTION B–63002EN/02

27.11 When an alarm occurs, or when the operator is not certain what to do next,
HELP FUNCTION pressing the HELP key on the MDI panel displays detailed alarm
information or instructions for operation.
One of the following three screens can be displayed:
On the alarm detail screen, detailed information on the alarm currently
activated is displayed. Using this information, the operator can
identify the cause of the alarm and what action to take. Any alarm
information can be displayed on this screen.
On the operation instruction screen, when the operator is not sure of
what to do next during CNC operation (i.e., program editing and data
input/output) necessary instructions are displayed.
Parameter numbers are listed on the parameter list screen. When the
number of the parameter to be set or referenced is unknown, bring up
this screen.

An alarm detail screen for when an alarm (P/S 94) is activated.

HELP (ALARM DETAIL) O1234 N00001

NUMBER: 094
M’SAGE: P TYPE NOT ALLOWED (COORD CHG)
FUNCTION: RESTART PROGRAM
ALARM:
WHEN COORDINATE SYSTEM SETTING IS
CONDUCTED AFTER HOLDING
AUTOMATIC OPERATION, P–TYPE (WHEN TOOL IS
DAMAGED) PROGRAM
RESTART CANNOT BE EXECUTED.

S 0 T0000
MEM **** *** *** ALM 09:36:48
[ ALAM ][ OPR ][ PARA ][ ][ (OPRT) ]

Parameter list screen

HELP (PARAMETER TABLE) O1234 N00001

1/4
*SETTING (NO.0000 – )
*READER/PUNCHER INTERFACE (NO.0100 – )
*AXIS CONTROL/SETTING UNIT (NO.1000 – )
*COORDINATE SYSTEM (NO.1200 – )
*STROKE LIMIT (NO.1300 – )
*FEED RATE (NO.1400 – )
*ACCEL/DECELERATION CTRL (NO.1600 – )
*SERVO RELATED (NO.1800 – )
*DI/DO (NO.3000 – )

S 0 T0000
MEM **** *** *** 09:36:48
[ ALAM ][ OPR ][ PARA ][ ][ (OPRT) ]

312
B–63002EN/02 NC FUNCTION 27. DISPLAYING AND SETTING DATA

Operation instruction screen

HELP (OPERATION METHOD) O1234 N00001

<<1. PROGRAM EDIT>> 1/4
*DELETE ALL PROGRAMS
MODE : EDIT
SCREEN: PROGRAM
OPR : (O–9999) – <DELETE>

*DELETE ONE PROGRAM

MODE : EDIT
SCREEN: PROGRAM
OPR : (O+PROGRAM NUMBER) – <DELETE>

>_ S 0 T0000
MEM **** *** *** 09:36:48
[ ALAM ][ OPR ][ PARA ][ ][ (OPRT) ]

313
27. DISPLAYING AND SETTING DATA NC FUNCTION B–63002EN/02

27.12 A data protection key can be installed on the machine side for protection
of various NC data. The following three input signals are offered,
DATA PROTECTION according to type of data to be protected.
KEY KEY 1
Allows input of tool compensation amount and work zero point offset
amount.
KEY 2
Allows setting data input and macro variable input.
KEY 3
Allows part program input and editing.

27.13 This function displays a history of the key and signal operations,
performed by the operator, upon the occurrence of a failure or alarm. The
DISPLAYING history can also be displayed for previously generated alarms.
OPERATION HISTORY The following history data is recorded :
MDI key/soft key operation sequences
Example : A to Z, <POS>, <PAGE↑>, [SF1]
On/off status transitions of selected input and output signals
Example : G0000.7↑, SBK↑
NC alarm information
Example : P/S0010
Time (date, time) stamp
Example : 97/09/25
09:27:55
The history data can be output to an input/output device, connected via
the reader/punch interface. Previously output history data can be input
from an input/output device.

27.14 When a machining program is executed, the machining time of the main
program is displayed on the program machining time display screen. The
MACHINING TIME machining times of up to ten main programs are displayed in
STAMP FUNCTION hour/minutes/seconds. When more than ten programs are executed, data
for the oldest programs is discarded.

314
B–63002EN/02 NC FUNCTION 27. DISPLAYING AND SETTING DATA

27.15 The remote diagnosis function allows CNC status monitoring and
modification to CNC data to be performed remotely by menu–based
REMOTE DIAGNOSIS operation. The remote diagnosis function, operating under MS–DOS, is
installed on a standard personal computer, connected as a service terminal
to the CNC via the RS–232C interface, over a telephone line, and so on.
[Personal
computer]

CNC Machine
Toool Telephone
RS–232C line RS–232C
Modem Modem

The remote diagnosis terminal software is sold separately.

The remote diagnosis function provides the following capabilities :

CNC programs
Computer → CNC
 CNC command data for verification
 Searching for a specified program
 Part program
 Deleting a specified program
 Deleting all programs
CNC → computer
 Part program
 Displaying a program directory
 Program number of a program being executed
 Sequence number of a sequence being executed
Computer → CNC
 Parameter
 Pitch error data
 Tool offset value
 Custom macro variable
 Selecting a display screen
 Memory contents
 PMC data
 Displaying a specified message
 All parameters

315
27. DISPLAYING AND SETTING DATA NC FUNCTION B–63002EN/02

CNC → computer
 Alarm information
 Machine position
 Absolute position
 Skip position
 Servo delay
 Acceleration/deceleration delay
 Diagnosis
 Parameter
 Tool life management data
 Display screen status
 Modal information
 Pitch error data
 Tool offset value
 Custom macro variable
 Memory contents
 Ladder program
 Actual feedrate
 Status
 A/D conversion
 PMC data
 Screen character data
 Printed circuit board information
 Ladder title
 Series and edition of PMC/ladder
 All parameters
File function selection
 Listing files
 Referring a file
 Deleting a file
 Copying a file
 Renaming a file
 Linking a file
 Changing the current directory
 Creating a directory
 Deleting a directory

NOTE
An arrow “→” indicates the direction of data flow.

316
B–63002EN/02 NC FUNCTION 27. DISPLAYING AND SETTING DATA

27.16 CNC programs stored in memory can be grouped according to their

names, thus enabling the listing and output of CNC programs on a
DIRECTORY DISPLAY group–by–group basis.
AND PUNCH FOR A To assign multiple CNC programs to a single group, assign names to those
SPECIFIED GROUP programs, beginning each name with the same character string. By
searching through all the program names for a specified character string,
the program numbers and names of all programs having names including
that string are listed.
The CNC programs within a specified group can also be output.
Group–unit program list screen displayed when a search is made
for ”GEAR–1000*”

PROGRAM DIRECTORY(GROUP) O0001 N00010

PROGRAM(NUM.) MEMORY’CHAR.)
–USED: 60 3321
–FREE: 2 429
O0020 (GEAR–1000 MAIN)
O0040 (GEAR–1000 SUB–1)
O0200 (GEAR–1000 SUB–2)
O2000 (GEAR–1000 SUB–3)

>
EDIT **** *** *** *** 16:53:25
[ PRGRM ][ DIR ][ ][ ][ (OPRT) ]

27.17 Displaying the same characters in the same positions on the screen causes
a LCD to degrade relatively quickly. To help prevent this, the screen can
CLEARING THE be cleared by pressing specific keys. It is also possible to specify the
SCREEN automatic clearing of the screen if no keys are pressed at specified with
a parameter.

317
27. DISPLAYING AND SETTING DATA NC FUNCTION B–63002EN/02

27.18 The periodic maintenance screen shows the current statuses of those
consumables that require periodic replacement (backup battery, LCD
PERIODIC backlight, touch pad, etc.). An item whose service life has expired is
MAINTENANCE indicated by the machine run time or the like.
SCREEN
PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE O0001 N12345
(STATUS)
ITEM NAME REMAIN
01 BATTERY FOR CONTROLLER 0H
@ 02 BATTERY FOR PULSECODER 5000H
03 LCD BACK LIGHT 10000H
@ 04 COOLANT 720H
05
06
07
08
09
10
>_
EDIT **** *** *** 19:27:05
[ ][MAINTE ][ ][ ][(OPRT) ]

27.19 A pen input device/touch pad, manufactured by Fujitsu Limited, is used

on the LCD display as follows:
TOUCH PAD
(1) The soft keys below the 10.4–inch color LCD/MDI panel (F0 to F9,
FR, and FL) are replaced by the soft keys on the touch pad.
(2) The cursor displayed on the 10.4–inch color LCD is controlled from
the touch pad.
(3) A touch–pad–type software machine operator’s panel, realized by C
executor, can be used.
(4) A touch–pad–type calculator, realized by C executor, can be used.
(5) A C executor application program can be created by using the touch
pad.

27.20 The history of the maintenance carried out by FANUC service personnel
and machine tool builder can be recorded via the screen. The screen has
MAINTENANCE the following features:
INFORMATION Alphabetical characters can be input from MDI. (Half–size kana can
SCREEN be input only when Japanese display is selected.)
The recording screen can be scrolled, line by line.
Edited maintenance information can be read and punched.
Data can be stored into flash ROM.
Full–size (shift JIS) codes can be displayed. (Input codes are read
only.)

318
B–63002EN/02 NC FUNCTION 27. DISPLAYING AND SETTING DATA

27.21 When the VGA graphic control function is supported, the VGA screen
colors can be set on the color setting screen.
COLOR SETTING
SCREEN
COLORING O0000 N00000

[1]  ALARM 8  SELECT WINDOW BAR

2  TITLE SOFT KEY 1 9  NONE
3  INPUT KEY O/N NO. 10  TITLE BAR INPUT BAR
STATUS
4  CURSOR 11  WINDOW BACKGROUND
5  RESTART NO. 12  LIGHT
ABSOLUTE ORDER
6  SUB TITLE SOFT KEY 2 13  ALTER POSSIBLE DATA
7  DATA TIME 14  SHADOW
15  BACKGROUND
RED 08 GREEN 00 BLUE 00

1(PARAMETER)
COLOR SELECT NO.
[MEM **** *** ***|***|12:34:56| ]

COLOR MAINTE MAINT OPRT +

INF

27.22 Some operators may find the LCD difficult to read, depending on their eye
level relative to the display. To make a monochrome LCD easier to read,
CONTRAST the contrast can be adjusted.
ADJUSTMENT
SCREEN
SETTING(HANDY)

PARAMETER WRITE =1(0:DISABLE 1:ENABLE)

TV CHECK =0(0:OFF 1:ON)
PUNCH CODE =0(0:EIA 1:ISO)
INPUT UNIT =0(O:MM 1:INCH)
I/O CHANNEL =0(0–3:CHANNEL NO.)
SEQUENCE NO. =0(0:OFF 1:ON)
TAPE FORMAT =0(0:NO CNV 1:F15)
SEQUENCE STOP = 0(PROGRAM NO.)
SEQUENCE STOP = 0(SEQUENCE NO.)

CONTRAST (+=[ON:1] –=[OFF:0])

>
MDI **** *** *** BAT 00:00:00
[NO.SRH ][ ON:1 ][ OFF:0 ][+INPUT ][ INPUT ]

319
28. PART PROGRAM STORAGE
AND EDITING NC FUNCTION B–63002EN/02

28 PART PROGRAM STORAGE AND EDITING

320
 28. PART PROGRAM STORAGE
B–63002EN/02 NC FUNCTION AND EDITING

28.1 The following part program storage and editing is possible

FOREGROUND Program tape registration to the memory
 Single program registration
EDITING  Multi program tape registration
Program input via MDI
Program deletion
 Single program deletion
 All programs deletion
 Multi programs deletion by specification the range
Program punching
 Single program punching
 All programs punching
 Multi programs punching by specification the range
Program editing
Change
 Word change
 Change of 1-word to multi-words
Insertion
 Word insertion
 Multi words, and multi blocks insertion
Deletion
 Word deletion
 Deletion to EOB
 Deletion to the specified word
Part program collation
Collation of program stored in the memory and program on the tape
can be done.
Sequence number automatic insertion
The sequence number, where a certain increment value is added to the
sequence number of the previous block can be automatically inserted
at the head of each block in preparation of programs by the part
program editing.
The initial value of sequence number and a certain increment amount
can be set.

28.2 Part program storage and editing can be done during machining. The
same functions as foreground editing can be performed.
BACKGROUND However, it is not possible to delete all programs at one time.
EDITING

321
28. PART PROGRAM STORAGE
AND EDITING NC FUNCTION B–63002EN/02

28.3 The following editing is possible.

EXPANDED PART Conversion
PROGRAM EDITING Address conversion
An address in the program can be converted to another address. For
example address X in the program can be converted to address Y.
Word conversion
A word in the program can be converted to another word. For
example, a programmed M03 can be converted to M04.
Program copy
A part or all of a program can be copied to make a new program.
Program move
A part or all of a program can be moved to make a new program.
Program merge
A new program can be created by merging two programs.

28.4 Number of registered programs can be selected from the following:

63, 125, 200, 400, or 1000.
NUMBER OF
REGISTERED
PROGRAMS

28.5 The following part program storage length can be selected:

10, 20, 40, 80, 160, 320, 640, 1280, 2560, or 5120 m.
PART PROGRAM
STORAGE LENGTH

28.6 Program can be prepared by storing machine position obtained by manual

operation in the memory as program position. Data other than the
PLAY BACK coordinate value (M codes, G codes, feed rates, etc.) are registered in the
memory by the same operation as part program storage and editing.

28.7 Part program registration and punch can be commanded externally.

EXTERNAL Program registration
A part program can be registered in memory through the connected
CONTROL OF I/O input device for background editing using the external read start
DEVICE signal.
Program punch
A part program can be punched through the connected output device
for background editing using the external punch start signal.

322
 28. PART PROGRAM STORAGE
B–63002EN/02 NC FUNCTION AND EDITING

28.8 The following two screens can be displayed with graphic data for
guidance in programming in the CNC format:
CONVERSATIONAL G code list
PROGRAMMING OF Standard format of a G-code block
FIGURES (ONLY AT Programs can be created by referring to guidelines and entering necessary
data interactively.
1–PATH CONTROL)

O0010 N00000
G00 :
G01 :
G02 :
G03 :
G04 :
G10 :
G20 :
G21 :
G25 :
G26 :
G27 :
G28 :

EDIT **** *** *** 11:42:31

[ ][ ][ ][ ][ ]

↓ When G01 is selected

PROGRAM O0010 N00000

G01 :

G01 G G G X (X,Z)
X U
Z W
C
F U
M
S
T
; W
Z

EDIT **** *** *** 11:56:41

[ ][ ][ ][ ][ ]

28.9 The password function (parameter NE9) can be locked using parameter
PASSWD and parameter KEYWD to protect program Nos. 9000 to 9999.
PASSWORD In the locked state, parameter NE9 cannot be set to 0. In this state,
FUNCTION program Nos. 9000 to 9999 cannot be modified unless the correct
keyword is set.
A locked state means that the value set in the parameter PASSWD differs
from the value set in the parameter KEYWD. The values set in these
parameters are not displayed. The locked state is released when the value
already set in the parameter PASSWD is also set in parameter KEYWD.
When 0 is displayed in parameter PASSWD, parameter PASSWD is not
set.

323
29. DIAGNOSIS FUNCTIONS NC FUNCTION B–63002EN/02

29 DIAGNOSIS FUNCTIONS

324
B–63002EN/02 NC FUNCTION 29. DIAGNOSIS FUNCTIONS

29.1 The NC checks the following itself.

SELF DIAGNOSIS Abnormality of detection system
FUNCTIONS Abnormality of position control unit
Abnormality of servo system
Overheat
Abnormality of CPU
Abnormality of ROM
Abnormality of RAM
Abnormality in data transfer between MDI
Abnormality of part program storage memory
Abnormality in tape reader read function
Abnormality in data transfer between PMC
Input/output signals from PMC to CNC, or vice versa, and inner status
of the NC can be displayed.

325
30. DATA INPUT/OUTPUT NC FUNCTION B–63002EN/02

30 DATA INPUT/OUTPUT

The NC has the following input/output data.

These data are input/output via various input/output devices as
CRT/MDI, tape reader, etc.
Input data
The NC has the following input data.
Part program
Tool compensation amount and Work zero point offset value
Tool life management data
Setting data
Custom macro common variable
Pitch error compensation data
Parameters
Output data
The NC has the following output data.
Part program
Tool compensation amount and work zero point offset value
Setting data
Custom macro common variable
Pitch error compensation data
Parameters

326
B–63002EN/02 NC FUNCTION 30. DATA INPUT/OUTPUT

30.1 The following can be input/output via the reader/punch interface.

READER/PUNCH Part program registration/output
INTERFACES Tool offset amount, work zero point offset amount, input/output
Tool life management data input
Custom macro common variable input/output
Pitch error compensation data input/output
Parameter punch input/output

327
30. DATA INPUT/OUTPUT NC FUNCTION B–63002EN/02

30.2 The following Input/Output devices are prepared, which are connectable
to the reader/puncher interface.
INPUT/OUTPUT
DEVICES
30.2.1 When the Floppy Cassette is connected to the NC, machining programs
FANUC Floppy stored in the NC can be saved on a Floppy Cassette, and machining
programs saved in the Floppy Cassette can be transferred to the NC.
Cassette

30.2.2 The built-in hard disk enables data to be stored and it can be connected
FANUC Program File to the reader/puncher interface to input data to CNC. This hard disk has
a large storage capacity of approximately 50,000 m of paper tape data, so
Mate it can register maximum 1024 command programs.
It can be connected to the remote buffer to achieve high-speed transfer of
maximum 86.4 kbps.
The hard disk is sealed to be continuously used under the factory
environment.

30.2.3 The FANUC Handy File is a compact multi functional input/ouput floppy
FANUC Handy File disk unit for use with various types of FA equipment. Programs can be
transferred or edited through operations performed directly on the Handy
File or through remote operation from connected equipment.
Compared with media such as paper tape, a 3.5” floppy disk is both
compact and durable, and eliminates noise during input/output.
Programs with a total capacity of up to 1.44 MB (equivalent to about 3600
m paper tape) can be saved on a single floppy disk.

30.3 By using the external program input start signal, a program can be loaded
from an input unit into CNC memory.
EXTERNAL When an input unit such as the FANUC Handy File or FANUC Floppy
PROGRAM INPUT Cassette is being used, a file can be searched for using the workpiece
number search signals, after which the program can be loaded into CNC
memory.

328
B–63002EN/02 NC FUNCTION 30. DATA INPUT/OUTPUT

30.4 Files on a memory card can be referenced, and different types of data such
as part programs, parameters, and offset data on a memory card can be
DATA INPUT/OUTPUT input and output in text file format.
USING A MEMORY
CARD The major functions are listed below.
Displaying a directory of stored files
The files stored on a memory card can be displayed on the directory
screen.
Searching for a file
A search is made for a file on a memory card and, if found, it is
displayed on the directory screen.
Reading a file
Text–format files can be read from a memory card.
Writing a file
Data such as part programs can be stored to a memory card in text file
format.
Deleting a file
A file can be selected and deleted from a memory card.

CNC

Writing a file

Reading a file
Displaying a
Memory card
directory
Searching for
a file
Deleting a file

329
30. DATA INPUT/OUTPUT NC FUNCTION B–63002EN/02

30.5 DNC1 is a poprietary communication network allowing information

exchange between the cell controller and CNC machine tools.
DNC1 CONTROL DNC1 is classified into two mode, Mode–1 and Mode–2, by the
connection models.

Explanations
Mode–1 In the Mode–1, the cell controller plays as a primary station and controls
multiple CNC machine tools in the multi–point–connection.
This mode is usually used to establish small scale FMS.

Primary station Command Secondary station

Cell controller Response

CNC

Command Secondary station

Response CNC

Mode–2 In the Mode–2, the cell controller and CNC play as a combined station
in the point–to–point connection.
This mode is usually used for drip feeding of continuous small blocks in
the DNC operation such as mold machining.

Command / Response
Combined station Combined station
Response / Command
Cell controller CNC

NOTE
The combined station has combined functions of primary
station and secondary station.

Primary station
This station controls data link and has responsibility of control and
recovery to the other station on the data link. This station corresponds
to the cell controller in the multi–point connection.
Secondary station
This station executes data link control according to the command of
the primary station. This station corresponds to the CNC in the
multi–point connection.
Combined station
This station executes peer–to–peer communication concerning to the
data link control.

330
B–63002EN/02 NC FUNCTION 30. DATA INPUT/OUTPUT

30.6 The FANUC DNC2 is a communication protocol enabling data

transmission between the FANUC CNC unit and a personal computer by
DNC2 CONTROL connecting them via the RS–232C interface.
(ONLY AT 1–PATH
CONTROL) The FANUC DNC2 has the following features:
(1) This protocol is based on the communication protocol LSV2 used by
some CNC manufacturers in Europe, so that software can easily be
established even with a personal computer.
The RS–232C interface is used to connect a personal computer with
the FANUC CNC. The RS–422 interface can also be used to improve
the transmission rate.
(2) This protocol is used for one–to–one (point–to–point) communication
between one FANUC CNC unit and one personal computer.
The protocol cannot provide multi–point communication between one
personal computer and more than one CNC unit.

Command / Response
Personal
CNC
Computer Response / Command

331
30. DATA INPUT/OUTPUT NC FUNCTION B–63002EN/02

30.7 The dara server has the following features:

DATA SERVER (1) Drive high–speed machining operation by calling the subprogram
from a built–in hard disk on the DATA SERVER BOARD(described
as “HDD” below).
(2) Input a NC program in the Host Computer into the HDD by using FTP.
Output a NC program in the HDD into the Host Computer by using
FTP.
(3) Input a NC program in the HDD into the memory of the CNC. Output
a NC program in the memory of the CNC into the HDD.
(4) Delete NC program and display the table of NC programs in the HDD.

Host Computer

Ethernet

Series 16/18 high speed transfer (GET/PUT)

calling
inputting
outputting
NC program

HDD

CNC DATA SERVER BOARD

332
B–63002EN/02 NC FUNCTION 30. DATA INPUT/OUTPUT

30.8 Power Mate programs, parameters, macro variables, and diagnostic

(PMC) data are input/output using FANUC I/O Link.
DATA INPUT/OUTPUT With FANUC I/O Link, slaves in groups 0 to 15 can be connected,
FUNCTION BASED enabling data input/output to and from a maximum of 16 Power Mates.
ON THE I/O LINK AND The ordinary data input/output function based on I/O Link can only be
executed in the foreground. When data input/output function B based on
DATA INPUT/OUTPUT
I/O Link is used, the external I/O device control function is associated
FUNCTION B BASED with I/O Link so that an input/output group number and program number
ON THE I/O LINK can be specified from the PMC. The external I/O device control function
operates in the background. Therefore, when no other background
operation is being performed, data can be input/output, regardless of the
NC mode and the currently selected screen.

Master
FANUC I/O Link
Series 16/18

#0KSlave (Group #0) (Group #1) (Group #15)

Power Mate Power Mate Power Mate

The programs, parameters, macro variables, and diagnostic (PMC) data

of a slave Power Mate are stored in tape format within the part program
storage length; these data items are stored as master program data in a
master program memory area.

Data input/output can be performed between the master and a slave of a

selected group. When the ordinary data input/output function based on
I/O Link is used, a group is selected by means of parameter setting. When
data input/output function B based on I/O Link is used, a group is selected
by issuing the DI signal. Data input/output cannot be performed between
the master and more than one group at a time.

333
30. DATA INPUT/OUTPUT NC FUNCTION B–63002EN/02

30.9 When the power motion series is used as an additional (slave) axis of the
CNC, the power motion manager enables the display and setting of data
POWER MOTION from the CNC. Up to eight slave units can be connected.
MANAGER
The power motion manager supports the following functions:
1) Current position display (absolute/machine coordinate)
2) Parameter display and setting
3) Diagnosis
4) System configuration screen
5) Alarm
POWER MOTION MANAGER/SYSTEM CONFIGURATION O12345678 N12345
1. GROUP0 /PM–E O12345678 N12345 2. GROUP2 /ß

SYSTEM ****–## SYSTEM ****–##

SERVO ****–## SERVO ****–##
PMC ****–##
LADDER ****–##
MACRO ****–##

3. GROUP2 /ß 4. GROUP4 /ß

SYSTEM ****–## SYSTEM ****–##

SERVO ****–## SERVO ****–##

PARAM DGNOS SYSTEM USER HISTRY <OPRT>

The sample screen shows the data for four units, displayed on a 12 soft
key type device. The same data can also be displayed on a 7 soft key type
device.

334
B–63002EN/02 NC FUNCTION 31. SAFETY FUNCTIONS

31 SAFETY FUNCTIONS

335
31. SAFETY FUNCTIONS NC FUNCTION B–63002EN/02

31.1 With the emergency stop, all commands stops, and the machine stops
immediately. Connect the “emergency stop” signal both to the control
EMERGENCY STOP unit and to the servo unit side.
When emergency stop is commanded, servo excitation is also reset, and
servo ready signal will also turn off. Move distance of the machine will
still be reflected in the actual position and machine position will not be
lost (Follow up function). After resetting the emergency stop, operation
can thus be continued without need of another reference point return.
To design a safe machine tool, use an emergency stop signal for it
properly.
The emergency stop signal is intended to bring a machine tool to an
emergency stop. It is input to the CNC control unit, servo amplifier, and
spindle amplifier. Generally, the B contact of a pushbutton switch is used
to input the emergency stop signal.
Closing the contact used for the emergency stop signal (*ESP) releases
the CNC unit from an emergency stop state, thus enabling it to control and
operate the servo motor and spindle motor.
Opening the contact used for the emergency stop signal (*ESP) resets the
CNC unit and brings it to an emergency stop. Opening the contact also
decelerates the servo motor and spindle motor to a stop.
Switching off the electric power of the servo amplifier for a servo motor
applies a dynamic brake to the servo motor. If the servo motor is used for
a horizontal axis, however, a load on the horizontal axis may drop to cause
the servo motor to rotate. To avoid this unintended motion, use a servo
motor with a brake or use another appropriate provision.
Switching off the electric power of the servo amplifier for a spindle motor
suddenly allows the spindle motor to keep rotating from force of habit,
which can be dangerous.
Avoiding this danger requires a control function that detects when the
emergency stop signal (*ESP) contact becomes open, and makes sure that
the spindle motor decelerates to a stop, then switches off the electric
power.
The FANUC control amplifier series is designed with considerations on
the behavior mentioned above. Just supply an emergency stop signal to
the power supply module (hereafter called PSM) of the control amplifier
series. The PSM outputs an electric power MCC control signal. This
signal can be used to switch on and off the electric power supplied to the
power supply module.
Basically, this CNC control unit is designed to use a software limit
function to detect overtravel, so an ordinary overtravel detection limit
switch is unnecessary. However, a stroke end limit switch must be
provided and connected to an emergency stop signal so that the
emergency stop signal can cause the machine to stop if the machine goes
over the software limit because of a servo feedback system failure.
The following diagram shows an example of connecting an emergency
stop signal when the CNC control unit and series control amplifier are
used.

336
B–63002EN/02 NC FUNCTION 31. SAFETY FUNCTIONS

Stroke end limit switch Emergency

stop button
+X –X +Y –Y +Z –Z +4 –4
Power
supply for
relays
Release switch

Spark killer

SK

EMG
Relay
I/O unit connected to the CNC
emg1 (module)
+24
*ESP

α series control amplifier SVM

(PSM) SPM
emg2
+24
*ESP

MCCOFF3
MCCOFF4
External
power supply
L1 L2 L3

Spark killer

SK

3φ
Coil
AC200V
L1

L2

L3

Circuit MCC AC reactor

breaker 1

CAUTION
When connecting the CNC unit to a spindle motor and
amplifier from a manufacturer other than FANUC, you
should develop a sequence that, if the emergency stop
signal contact becomes open when the spindle motor is
running, decelerates the spindle motor to a stop safely,
according to the respective manuals.

337
31. SAFETY FUNCTIONS NC FUNCTION B–63002EN/02

31.2
OVERTRAVEL
FUNCTIONS
31.2.1 When the movable section has gone beyond the stroke end, a signal is
Overtravel output, the axis decelerates to a stop, and overtravel alarm is displayed.
All directions on all axes has overtravel signals.

31.2.2 The movable section of the machine is parameter set in machine

Stored Stroke Check 1 coordinates value. If the machine moves beyond the preset range, it
decelerates to a stop and alarm is displayed. (This function is valid after
manual reference point return at power on.)
This function can be used instead of hardware overtravel limit switch.
When both is equipped with, both are valid.
Unlike overtravel detection, stored stroke check 1 checks whether the
distance between the current position and that at which the tool will be
stopped after deceleration exceeds the limit.

ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ (X1, Y1, Z1, ...)

ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ The shaded part is

ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ
the inhibition area.

ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ
(X2, Y2, Z2, ...)

31.2.3 M series An inhibition area can be specified inside or outside an area set by
Stored Stroke Check 2 parameter or by program. Command distance from the machine
coordinates zero point for limit positions. This function is valid after
(G22, G23) (M series) manual reference point return right after the power on. When specifying
the limits with program, limits or axes X, Y, Z can be set.
The inhibition area can be changed according to the workpiece. The
parameter decides whether the inhibition area is outside or inside the

ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ
specified area.

ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ (X, Y, Z)

ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ
(X, Y, Z)

ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ
(I, J, K)

Inhibition area outside

(I, J, K)

Inhibition area inside

338
B–63002EN/02 NC FUNCTION 31. SAFETY FUNCTIONS

Format
G22 X_ Y_ Z_ I_ J_ K_ ;
On/off of stored stroke check 2 is commanded by program as follows:
G22 : Stored stroke check function on
G23 : Stored stroke check function off

31.2.4 M series The space within the range specified with parameters is inhibited.
Stored Stroke

ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ
(X1, Y1, Z1, ...)
Checks 3 (M series)

ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ
The shaded space is in-
hibited.
(X2, Y2, Z2, ...)

31.2.5 T series The designation of the forbidden area can be specified by parameters or
Stored Stroke Checks program.
The forbidden area can be changed for each workpiece. Selection
2 and 3 (T series) between inside or outside as the forbidden area is made by parameters.

Stored stroke check 2 The designation of the forbidden area can be specified by parameters or
(G22, G23) program.
The forbidden area can be changed for each workpiece. Selection
between inside or outside as the forbidden area is made by parameters.

ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ
(X, Z)
ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ (X, Z)

ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ
(I, K) (I, K)
ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ
Inhibition area outside Inhibition area inside

Stored stroke check 3 Inside the area specified by parameters is the forbidden area.

ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ (X1, Z1,....)

ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ
This shaded area is the forbidden

ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ
area.

(X2, Z2,....)

339
31. SAFETY FUNCTIONS NC FUNCTION B–63002EN/02

Format

G22 X_ Z_ I_ K_ ;
On/off of stored stroke check 2 is commanded by program as follows:
G22 : Stored stroke check function on
G23 : Stored stroke check function off

31.2.6 This function calculates the movement end point at the start of movement
in a block, during automatic operation, based on the current machine
Stroke Limit Check
position and the specified amount of travel, to check whether the end point
Before Movement falls within the inhibited area for stored stroke limit 1, 2, or 3. If the end
point falls within an inhibited area, movement for that block is stopped
immediately upon the start of movement and an alarm is issued.

NOTE
This function checks only whether the end point falls within
an inhibited area. It does not check whether the tool passes
through an inhibited area between the start and end points.
However, an alarm is issued upon a tool’s entering an
inhibited area according to stored stroke limit 1, 2, or 3.
Example 1)

Inhibited area for stored stroke limit 1

or 2

End point

Start point
Stops at point a according to stored
stroke limit 1 or 2.

Inhibited area for stored stroke limit 1

or 2

End
point

Start point→ Stops immediately upon the start of

movement due to stroke limit check
being performed before movement.

340
B–63002EN/02 NC FUNCTION 31. SAFETY FUNCTIONS

Example 2)

Inhibited area for stored stroke limit 2 End

or 3 point

Start point Stops at point a according to stored

stroke limit 2 or 3.

Inhibited area for stored stroke limit 2

or 3

End
point

Start point→ Stops immediately upon the start of movement due to stroke
limit check being performed before movement.

31.2.7 When a new tool is mounted, position the tip of the tool on the two corners
of the limit area, and specify the machine coordinates of the corners in the
Externally Setting the
parameters for stroke limit 1. The machine coordinates are stored in the
Stroke Limit CNC as the limit positions. Then input signals for setting the stroke limit.
Stroke limit setting signals are provided for each axis and each direction.
Checking of the stroke limit can also be selected by turning on or off the
limit release signal common to all axes.

341
31. SAFETY FUNCTIONS NC FUNCTION B–63002EN/02

31.2.8 T series It is used for checking the interference between the chuck and tail stocks
Chuck/Tail Stock and preventing the damage of machines.
Set the area of entry prohibition from the exclusive setting screen
Barrier (T series) according to the shapes of chuck and tail stocks.
When a tool enters the area of entry prohibition during cutting, the
travelling of tool is stopped and an alarm message is displayed. The tool
can be escaped from the prohibition area by moving in the opposite
direction to that on entry. The Yes/No of this function is selected by the
G22 (Stored stroke limit on). G23 (Stored stroke limit off), and signal of
machine side.
G code Tail stock barrier select Chuck barrier Tail stock barrier
signal

G22 0 Yes Yes

G22 1 Yes No

G23 Irrelevant No No

The shape of chuck or tail stock is defined on the setting screen.

Explanations
Dimension definition of
chuck
Outer diameter Inner diameter

ÇÇÇÇÇÇ ÇÇÇÇÇÇ
L L

ÇÇÇÇÇÇ ÇÇÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇÇÇÇ ÇÇÇÇÇÇ
L1 W1

ÇÇÇÇÇÇ ÇÇÇÇÇÇ
W W
L1
W1

ÇÇÇÇÇÇ ÇÇÇÇÇÇ
X X
CZ CZ

ÇÇÇÇÇÇ ÇÇÇÇÇÇ
Z Z

ÇÇÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇÇÇÇ
CX
ÇÇÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇÇÇÇ
CX

ÇÇÇÇÇÇ ÇÇÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇÇÇÇ ÇÇÇÇÇÇ
: Workpiece coordinate system origin

Symbol Description

L Length of chucking claw

W Size of chucking (radius input)

L1 Holding length of chucking claw

W1 Holding difference of chucking claw (radius input)

CX Position of chuck (X axis)

CZ Position of chuck (Z axis)

342
B–63002EN/02 NC FUNCTION 31. SAFETY FUNCTIONS

Dimension definition of
tail stock
X
L

L1
TZ
L2

D3 D2 D1 D Z

: Workpiece coordinate system origin

Symbol Description

L Length of tail stock

D Diameter of tail stock (Diameter input)

L1 Length of tail stock (1)

D1 Diameter of tail stock (1) (Diameter input)

L2 Length of tail stock (2)

D2 Diameter of tail stock (2) (Diameter input)

D3 Hole diameter of tail stock (Diameter input)

TZ Position of tail stock (Z axis)

NOTE
This function cannot be used together with stored stroke
check 2 or 3.

343
31. SAFETY FUNCTIONS NC FUNCTION B–63002EN/02

31.3
INTERLOCK

31.3.1 Axis feed specified to each axis can be stopped separately. If interlock is
Interlock per Axis specified to any of the moving axis during cutting feed, all axes of the
machine movement will decelerate to a stop. When interlock signal is
reset, the moving starts.

31.3.2 Feed of all axes can be inhibited. When all axes interlock is commanded
All Axes Interlock during move, it decelerates and stops. When all axes interlock signal is
reset, the moving restarts.

31.3.3 Feeding of a specific axis in a specific direction can be inhibited

Interlock for Each Axis independently of other axes. If the interlock signal is input to any of the
axes during a cutting feed operation, all axes decelerate and come to a
Direction stop. When the interlock signal for each axis direction is released, the axes
start moving again.

31.3.4 Feeding of all axes can be inhibited only during automatic operation.
Start Lock When the start lock signal is input while the axes are moving, all axes
decelerate and come to a stop. When the start lock signal is released, the
axes start moving again.

344
B–63002EN/02 NC FUNCTION 31. SAFETY FUNCTIONS

31.4 Feed rate can be decelerated by an external deceleration signal from the
machine side. A feed rate after deceleration can be set by parameter.
EXTERNAL External deceleration is prepared every axis and every direction.
DECELERATION When the tool is to be moved in the reverse direction, futile time may not
be wasted since no external deceleration is applied.
By setting the corresponding parameter, whether to make this signal
effective only for rapid traverse mode or for all feed modes can be
specified for each axis and for each direction.
This function allows the maximum of valid strokes and keeps shock to the
machine to a minimum, to stops at stroke end.

31.5 When a cutting tool collides with the machine body or is damaged during
cutting, the load torque applied to the servo motors is larger than during
ABNORMAL LOAD normal feeding or cutting. The abnormal load detection function
DETECTION calculates the load torque and transfers the value from the CNC to the
PMC. If the load torque is larger than the value set in a parameter, the
function stop the motor or reverses the motor rotation to retract the tool
by the distance set in a parameter. In this way, damage to the machine is
prevented.

31.6 The servo axis and spindle motor speeds are monitored. If the speed of
an axis exceeds a preset maximum (specified by parameter setting), the
SERVO/SPINDLE corresponding signal is output to a Y address (specified by parameter
MOTOR SPEED setting) of the PMC.
DETECTION The following diagram illustrates the signal output state.

Speed
Command for axis
Actual motor speed

? rpm (Preset maximum)

(Specified by parameter setting)
Time

Max 2msec (servo motor)

Max 16msec
Max 10msec (spindle motor)

CNC output signal

<Y???#?>(Specified by parameter setting)

Note) The status of each signal is updated every 8 msec.

(Fluctuations in the speed of less than 8 msec duration cannot be detected, therefore.)

345
32. STATUS OUTPUT NC FUNCTION B–63002EN/02

32 STATUS OUTPUT

346
B–63002EN/02 NC FUNCTION 32. STATUS OUTPUT

32.1 This signal is sent to the PMC when NC power is on and control becomes
possible. Sending of this signal will be stopped when NC power is turned
NC READY SIGNAL off.

32.2 This signal is sent to the PMC when the servo system becomes operatable.
Axes necessary to be braked must be braked when this signal is not sent.
SERVO READY
SIGNAL
32.3 This signal shows that tape reader or main program in memory is
rewinding.
REWINDING SIGNAL

32.4 This signal is transmitted when the NC comes under an alarm status.
ALARM SIGNAL

32.5 This signal is sent out when pulse distribution of the M, S, T, or B

functions has ended, so that they can be used after move of the
DISTRIBUTION END commanded block ends.
SIGNAL

32.6 This signal is sent out when it is under automatic operation.

AUTOMATIC
OPERATION SIGNAL

32.7 This signal is sent out when automatic operation is being activated.
AUTOMATIC
OPERATION START
SIGNAL

32.8 This signal is sent out when automatic operation is held by feed hold.
FEED HOLD SIGNAL

32.9 This signal is sent out to show that the NC has been reset.
RESET SIGNAL

32.10 This signal shows that an axis is under in–position status. This signal is
output for all axes.
IN–POSITION SIGNAL

32.11 This signal shows that an axis is moving. This signal is sent out for every
axis.
MOVE SIGNAL This move signal can be combined with the interlock signal to
automatically clamp and unclamp the machine, or control on/off of the
lubricating oil.

347
32. STATUS OUTPUT NC FUNCTION B–63002EN/02

32.12 This signal is output to show move direction of each axis. This signal is
output for each axis.
AXIS MOVE
DIRECTION SIGNAL

32.13 This signal shows that the move command is done under rapid traverse.
RAPID TRAVERSING
SIGNAL

32.14 This signal is output to show that the machine is under tapping mode (G63
for M series) or tapping cycle (G74, G84 for M series), (G84, G88 for T
TAPPING SIGNAL series) is under operation.

32.15 This signal shows that the machine is under thread cutting mode (G33)
or thread cutting cycle (T series).
THREAD CUTTING
SIGNAL

32.16 This signal shows that the machine is under constant surface speed control
mode (G96).
CONSTANT SURFACE
SPEED CONTROL
SIGNAL

32.17 This signal shows that input is done under inch input mode (G20).
INCH INPUT SIGNAL

32.18 To inform the exterior of the states of software operator’s panel, which are
set via CRT/MDI, and machine operator’s panel, following DI state
DI STATUS OUTPUT output signals are sent.
SIGNAL Mode-select check signal
Single-block check signal
Manual absolute on/off check signal
Dry-run check signal
Machine-lock check signal
Auxiliary-function-lock check signal
Optional block-skip check signal
Mirror-image check signal

32.19 The position switch function outputs a signal to a specified

controlled-axis when the machine coordinates of the controlled-axis are
POSITION SWITCH within the range specified by the corresponding parameter.
FUNCTION The parameter specifies an arbitrary controlled-axis and the operating
range (machine coordinates) within which the position switch signal is
output.
Up to ten position switch signals can be output.
This signal is transmitted when the NC comes under an alarm status.

348
B–63002EN/02 NC FUNCTION 33. EXTERNAL DATA INPUT

33 EXTERNAL DATA INPUT

The external data input is as follows.

External tool compensation
External program number search
External work coordinate system shift
External machine zero point shift
External alarm message
External operator message
Substitution of the number of machined parts and number of required
parts

349
33. EXTERNAL DATA INPUT NC FUNCTION B–63002EN/02

33.1 The tool compensation value for the offset number specified in the
program can be externally modified.
EXTERNAL TOOL The input signal designates whether the input tool offset amount is:
COMPENSATION absolute or incremental
geometry offset or tool wear offset
cutter radius compensation amount or tool length compensation
amount
It the machine is equipped with automatic measurement devices of tools
and workpiece, error can be input to the NC with this function.
External tool compensation amount range is:
0 to ±7999
in least command increment.

33.2 A program number from 1 - 9999 can be given from outside to the NC to
call the corresponding program from the NC memory.
EXTERNAL In machines with automatic loading function of various workpiece, this
PROGRAM NUMBER function can be used to automatically select and execute program suitable
SEARCH to the workpiece.

33.3 The work coordinate system can be shifted for the shift amount given
from outside.
EXTERNAL The shift amount specified by an input signal is set as an external offset
WORKPIECE value for workpiece zero points by which the workpiece coordinate
COORDINATE system shifts. The shift amount is an absolute value, not an incremental
value.
SYSTEM SHIFT
The shift amount range is :
0 to ±7999
in least command increment.
The external data input function allows NC operation by data sent from
outside the NC (for example from the machine side).

33.4 The machine coordinate system is compensated by shift amount given

from outside. This shift amount always take absolute value; never an
EXTERNAL MACHINE increment value.
ZERO POINT SHIFT The shift amount range is:
0 to ±9999
in detection unit.
When shift amount is input, the actual machine move distance is the
difference between the previous offset amount and current offset amount.
This function is used t compensate the machine coordinate system error
caused by mechanical deformation.

33.5 By sending alarm number from outside, the NC is brought to an alarm

status; an alarm message is sent to the NC, and the message is displayed
EXTERNAL ALARM on the screen of the NC. Reset of alarm status is also done with external
MESSAGE data.
Up to 4 alarm numbers and messages can be sent at a single time. Alarms
0 to 999 can be sent. To distinguish these alarms from other alarms, the
CNC displays them by adding 1000 to each alarm number. The messages
of up to 32 characters can be sent together with an alarm.

350
B–63002EN/02 NC FUNCTION 33. EXTERNAL DATA INPUT

33.6 Message to the operator is given from outside the NC, and the message
is displayed.
EXTERNAL The message is sent after the message number (0 to 999). Only one
OPERATOR’S message with message number can be sent at a single time. Maximum
MESSAGE 255 characters can be used for a single message.
The message numbers 0 to 99 are displayed along with the message.
To distinguish these alarms from other alarms, the CNC displays them by
adding 2000 to each alarm number. When a message from 100 to 999 is
displayed, the message number is not displayed; only its text is displayed.
An external data will clear the operator messages.

33.7 The number of required parts and the number of machined parts can be
preset externally. Values from 0 to 9999 can be preset.
SUBSTITUTION OF
THE NUMBER OF
REQUIRED PARTS
AND NUMBER OF
MACHINED PARTS

351
34. KEY INPUT FROM PMC
(EXTERNAL KEY INPUT) NC FUNCTION B–63002EN/02

34 KEY INPUT FROM PMC (EXTERNAL KEY INPUT)

When the PMC inputs the code signal corresponding to a key on the MDI
panel to the CNC, the code signal can be input in the same way as with
actual operation of the key on the MDI panel. For example, this function
is usable in the following case:
After allowing to travel the tool at an arbitrary machining position by
using the playback function (option), when to store its positions as the
program command, X, Y, Z, <SHIFT>, etc. must be input via key
operations. However, these operations can be realized simply by
depressing a switch on the operator’s panel at the machine side.
When the switch is pressed, the PMC inputs code signals corresponding
to keys X, Y, Z, and <SHIFT> to the CNC. This produces the same results
as with actual key operations.

352
 35.PERSONAL COMPUTER
B–63002EN/02 NC FUNCTION FUNCTION

35 PERSONAL COMPUTER FUNCTION

The open CNC allows the machine tool builder to incorporate a

high–level man–machine interface, such as conversational automatic
programming and conversational operation that makes maximum use of
the machine tool builder’s know–how.

The personal computer function can be realized in either of two ways: By

using the IBM PC–compatible personal computer function that is built
into the CNC printed circuit board, combined with a 10.4” color LCD, or
by connecting a commercially available IBM PC–compatible personal
computer via the high–speed serial bus.

353
35. PERSONAL COMPUTER
FUNCTION NC FUNCTION B–63002EN/02

35.1 The CNC’s built–in personal computer function has the following
features:
BUILT–IN PERSONAL
High compatibility with the IBM PC(*1)
COMPUTER
Windows 95 operating system, which supports many software
FUNCTION products for the IBM PC(*1)
Optional ISA expansion unit, enabling the installation of
commercially available expansion boards (ISA specification) for the
IBM PC(*1)
Installation combined with the CNC
Direct connection to the CNC via a bus, enabling the high–speed
exchange of a wide range of information
Highly reliable design based on design technologies realized through
the development of CNCs

CNC function + personal computer function board

CNC main body

Personal computer software for open CNC

Item Specification Remarks

Operating system Windows95

NC program memory driver Optional

Dedicated drivers
NC data file driver Optional

Dedicated library CNC/PMC data window

CNC maintenance package

Package software
CNC basic operation package Optional

Visual C ++ *1 Microsoft Corporation

Development tools
Visual Basic *1 Microsoft Corporation

354
 35.PERSONAL COMPUTER
B–63002EN/02 NC FUNCTION FUNCTION

Personal computer hardware for open CNC

(personal computer function built into CNC)

Item Specification Remarks

CPU Intel PentiumTM or Select either CPU.

Intel i486TMDX4 *1

Main memory 32M bytes max. For Pentium

24M bytes max. For i486

Hard disk 1G bytes Built–in

Display 10.4” color TFT LCD (with a Simultaneous display of

touch pad) 256 colors *3
80 characters x 25 lines (ANK) A touch pad is optional.
640 x 480 dots

Ports PCMCIA
1 slot A touch pad is con-

Full keyboard
1 nected to serial port 1.
Serial (RS–232C)
1
Mouse
1
Floppy disk
1

Serial (RS–232C)
1 (additional) Optional

Parallel
1 Optional

Expansion ISA expansion slot (half size)
2 Optional

slots *2

Ambient tem- Operating: +5°C to +40°C

perature Non–operating: –20°C to +60°C

Ambient rela- 30% to 90%

tive humidity No condensation

*1 Intel, i486, and Pentium are registered trademarks of Intel

Corporation.
Windows and Visual Basic are registered trademarks of Microsoft
Corporation.
Visual C++ is a trademark of Microsoft Corporation.
IBM is a registered trademark of IBM Corporation.
*2 Expansion boards for IBM PC are to be provided by the machine tool
builder.
*3 A dedicated driver is required to display more than 16 colors (tones).

355
35. PERSONAL COMPUTER
FUNCTION NC FUNCTION B–63002EN/02

35.2 The high–speed serial bus is a serial interface used to transfer data at high
speed between the CNC control unit and a personal computer installed on
HIGH–SPEED SERIAL the operator panel side.
BUS (HSSB)
By installing a dedicated interface board in a commercially available IBM
PC–compatible personal computer, the CNC control unit can be
connected to the personal computer via the high–speed serial bus. The
high–speed serial bus has the following features:
Large amounts of data can be transferred between the personal
computer and CNC control unit at high speed.
A highly reliable optical fiber cable is used for connection.
The machine tool builder can select an appropriate personal computer
according to the specifications of the machine system.

HSSB interface board HSSB interface board

High–speed
serial bus

Personal computer

Hardware for open CNC (system with commercially available

personal computer connected to CNC via high–speed serial bus)

Item Specification Remarks

Interface board on CNC For option slot Applicable model: 210i

Interface board on per- ISA specification

sonal computer Power supply: +5 V
only

Connection cable Optical fiber cable Maximum length: 50 m

Personal computer CPU: 486 or better The installation environ-

requirements At least one ISA slot ment shall satisfy the
conditions described in
the manual supplied
with the personal com-
puter.

356
III. AUTOMATIC PROGRAMMING
FUNCTION
 AUTOMATIC PROGRAMMING 1. OUTLINE OF CONVERSATIONAL
B–63002EN/02 FUNCTION AUTOMATIC PROGRAMMING

1 OUTLINE OF CONVERSATIONAL AUTOMATIC

PROGRAMMING

FANUC provides conversational automatic programming functions for

lathes and machining centers. Two conversational automatic
programming functions are provided for lathes: Conversational
automatic programming function II (called CAP II) and Super CAP T,
which use different input methods. For machining centers, Super CAP
M is provided.
With these conversational automatic programming functions, the user can
enter data and create machining programs easily by following the
displayed illustrations and instructions.
In addition, program checking and modifications can be performed easily.

359
2. CONVERSATIONAL AUTOMATIC
PROGRAMMING FUNCTION FOR AUTOMATIC PROGRAMMING
LATHES FUNCTION B–63002EN/02

2 CONVERSATIONAL AUTOMATIC PROGRAMMING

FUNCTION FOR LATHES

There are four conversational automatic programming functions for

lathes: Symbol CAPi T and Super CAPi T, Symbolic CAP T and Manual
Guide for lathe.
The difference between the two functions is in the program input method.
Symbol CAPi T uses the symbolic FAPT method for inputting programs.
In Super CAPi T and Manual Guide for lathe programs are entered by
selecting machining types.

360
 2. CONVERSATIONAL AUTOMATIC
AUTOMATIC PROGRAMMING PROGRAMMING FUNCTION FOR
B–63002EN/02 FUNCTION LATHES

2.1
SYMBOL CAPi T

2.1.1 Symbol CAPi T is a conversational automatic programming function for

lathes. It has the following features:
Features
Part figures can be input in a batch by using the symbolic keys.
Even complicated part figures can be input by using the automatic
intersection calculation function.
The automatic process determination function creates necessary
processes automatically.
Any cutting direction or area can be specified.
NC data can be created without superfluous movement, such as cutting
through air.
By using MTF, NC data suitable for the particular machine being used
can be created.
Coloring of screens can be set, and soft keys can be displayed to have
a “raised” look.

2.1.2 Symbol CAPi T can be used with the following lathes:

Applicable Machines 1–spindle/1–turret lathe
1–spindle/2–turret lathe
2–spindle (main spindle and sub spindle)/1–turret lathe
Facing 2–spindles/2 turret type lathes (both turrets independent)
Lathe with Y–axis/C–axis machining functions
Lathe with chasing tool
Vertical lathe

361
2. CONVERSATIONAL AUTOMATIC
PROGRAMMING FUNCTION FOR AUTOMATIC PROGRAMMING
LATHES FUNCTION B–63002EN/02

2.1.3
Outline of the
Conversational
Automatic
Programming Function

Machining types In Super CAPi T, the following machining types can be determined
automatically or selected manually:
Outer surface rough machining
Inner surface rough machining
Outer surface semifinish machining
Inner surface semifinish machining
Outer surface finishing
Inner surface finishing
Grooving/residual machining
Threading
Cutting off
Bar feed
Center drilling/drilling/reaming/tapping
C–axis center drilling/drilling/tapping
C–axis front face nothing
C–axis cylindrical grooving
Y–axis center drilling/drilling/tapping(*1)
Y–axis pattern machining(*1)
Y–axis contouring(*1)
Auxiliary machining(*1)(*2)

NOTE
*1 Y–axis machining and miscellaneous machining are not
determined automatically.
*2 A subprogram can be called from the conversational
program.

362
 2. CONVERSATIONAL AUTOMATIC
AUTOMATIC PROGRAMMING PROGRAMMING FUNCTION FOR
B–63002EN/02 FUNCTION LATHES

Basic menu screen Operations with Super CAPi T always begin with the basic menu screen
shown at the following. If the user cannot determine the next operation
on a conversational screen, the user can press the leftmost soft key
[ESCAPE] to return to the display of this basic menu screen.

=== FAPT EXECUTION PROCESS ===

*NC SIDE*
SERECTION OF MATERIAL & SETTING OF BLANK SIZE O 0000
N 00000
INPUT OF PART FUGURE (INPUT OF BLANK FIGTURE) X–AXIS
0.000

SETTING OF HOME POSITION/INDEX POSITION Z–AXIS

0.000

S 000000
MACHINING DEFINITION T 000000
M 000000
NC DATA PREPARATION

MACHINING SIM-
ULATION

METRIC

END
1 2 3 4 5 6 EXEC

Material selection and When a size is entered, a guide figure can be drawn by pressing the
blank size setting screen [HELP] soft key.

*** BLANK AND PART *** 01–01

*NC SIDE*
NO. MATERIAL
1 S45C O 0000
MATERIAL NO. . ................ MN = 1 2 SOM N 00000
STANDARD SURFACE ROUGHNESS NR = 2 3 FC
DRAWING FORMAT . .............. DF = 2 4 AL X–AXIS
BLANK FUGURE . ................ BF = 1 5 SUS 0.000
BLANK SIZE 6 MATERIAL6
DIAMETER . .......... D = 100. 7 MATERIAL7 Z–AXIS
8 MATERIAL8 0.000
LENGTH . ............ L = 85. 9 MATERIAL9
BASE LINE . .................... ZP = 3. 10 MATERIAL10 S 000000
11 MATERIAL11 T 000000
12 MATERIAL12 M 000000
13 MATERIAL13
DEPTH OF CHUCKING . .......... ZC = 0. 14 MATERIAL14
15 MATERIAL15
16 MATERIAL16
17 MATERIAL17

MM = METRIC

ESCAPE MAT. CURSOR CURSOR NEXT

NAME ↑ ↓ PAGE

363
2. CONVERSATIONAL AUTOMATIC
PROGRAMMING FUNCTION FOR AUTOMATIC PROGRAMMING
LATHES FUNCTION B–63002EN/02

Part figure input screen Part figures are input in a batch by using symbolic keys ( , , , ,
, , , , , and ).
Functions are available for simplifying part figure input; these functions
include the automatic intersection calculation, pocket calculator format
numeric calculation, continuous groove input, chamfering batch input,
and figure copy functions.
The input figures are displayed directly on the screen so that they can be
checked easily.

*** BLANK AND PART *** PART FIGURE S = 1.47 01–06

FIGURE ELEMENT . ........ ↑C→G→R→G→TC↓CG↓TC←G↓C← *NC SIDE*

O 0000
N 00000
X–AXIS
0.000

Z–AXIS
0.000

S 000000
T 000000
M 000000

*** SELECT SOFT KEY ***

METRIC

ESCAPE BACK CORR. CORRE– NEW LIST DRAWNG NEXT

PAGE ERASE CTION MODE RANGE PAGE

Process directory The automatic process determination function automatically creates the
display processes shown on the following.
The automatic process determination function automatically determines
machining types, tool data, cutting areas, and cutting conditions.
On this screen, processes and edit operations (deletion and insertion of
processes) can be selected manually.

*** MACHINING DEFINITION *** KINDS OF MACHINING 04–02

*NC SIDE*
PROC.01CENTER DRILLING T0101 X 150. Z 150.
PROC.02DRILLING T0202 X 150. Z 150. O 0000
PROC.03DRILLING T0303 X 150. Z 150. N 00000
PROC.04ROUGHING OF OUTER FIGURE T0909 X 150. Z 150.
PROC.05ROUGHING OF INNER FIGURE T1111 X 150. Z 150. X–AXIS
PROC.06FINISHING OF OUTER FIGURE T1010 X 150. Z 150. 0.000
PROC.07FINISHING OF INNER FIGURE T1212 X 150. Z 150.
PROC.08ROUGHING OF GROOVE T0505 X 150. Z 150. Z–AXIS
PROC.08FINISHING OF GROOVE T0404 X 150. Z 150. 0.000
PROC.10GROOVING OR NECKING T0606 X 150. Z 150.
PROC.11THREADING T1717 X 150. Z 150. S 000000
PROC.12THREADING T0808 X 150. Z 150. T 000000
PROC.13CUT OFF T0707 X 150. Z 150. M 000000
PROC.14BAR FEED T1515 X 150. Z 150.
PROC.15

*** SELECT SOFT KEY ***

METRIC

ESCAPE PROC. CENTER TURN GROOV. CURSOR CURSOR NEXT

DELETE HOLE THREAD ↑ ↓ PAGE

364
 2. CONVERSATIONAL AUTOMATIC
AUTOMATIC PROGRAMMING PROGRAMMING FUNCTION FOR
B–63002EN/02 FUNCTION LATHES

Tool data input screen Tool data input and modifications are made on this screen. A tool
currently selected is indicated on the screen, allowing the user to easily
check tool data.

*** MACHINING DEFINITION *** TOOL DATA 04–03

PROC.04 ROUGHING OF OUTER FIGURE T0909 X 150. Z 150. *NC SIDE*
MACHINING START POSITION: O 0000
TOOL SELECT NO. . .. TN = 09 DX0 = 150. Z0 = 150. N 00000
TOOL OFFSET NO. . .. TM = 09
TOOL ID NO. . ...... ID = 500 X–AXIS
0.000
TOOL TYPE . ... TP ; GENERAL
Z–AXIS
NOSE RADIUS . ...... RN = 0.8 0.000
CUTTING EDGE . ..... AC = 8.
NOSE ANGLE . ........ AN = 75. S 000000
PROTECTION ANGLE . . AP = 3. T 000000
VIRTUAL TOOL POS. XN = 0.8 M 000000
. ZN = 0.8
SETTING ANGLE . .... AS = –90.
SETTING POSITION . . XS = 0.
. ZS = 0.

HOLDER NO. . ........ ML = 13

TN = METRIC

ESCAPE BACK TAB NEXT TOOL TOLING CURSOR CURSOR CHECK NEXT
PAGE TOOL DATA INFOR. ↑ ↓ PAGE

Screen for setting Cutting directions and cutting areas are specified using the arrow keys.
cutting directions and Any cutting direction and area can be specified.
cutting areas
*** MACHINING DEFINITION *** CUTTING AREA DEFINITION 04–05
PROC.04 ROUGHING OF OUTER FIGURE T0909 X 150. Z 150. *NC SIDE*

O 0000
N 00000
X–AXIS
0.000

Z–AXIS
0.000

S 000000
T 000000
M 000000
CUTTING DIRECTION . ....... CD = ↓

CUTTING AREA DEFINITION:

START POINT END POINT
( 68. / 0. ) ( 27. / 0. )
DIVIDING DIRECTION . .. DS = ↑ DIVIDING DIRECTION .. DE = ↓

CD = METRIC

ESCAPE BACK ↑ ↓ → ← CURSOR CURSOR DRAWNG NEXT

PAGE ↑ ↓ RANGE PAGE

365
2. CONVERSATIONAL AUTOMATIC
PROGRAMMING FUNCTION FOR AUTOMATIC PROGRAMMING
LATHES FUNCTION B–63002EN/02

Screen for setting Cutting conditions are input or modified on this screen. The initial values
cutting conditions are set automatically according to the parameters and blank material.

*** MACHINING DEFINITION *** CUTTING CONDITIONS 04–05

PROC.04 ROUGHING OF OUTER FIGURE T0909 X 150. Z 150. *NC SIDE*

O 0000
N 00000
X–AXIS
0.000

Z–AXIS
0.000

S 000000
T 000000
M 000000
CLEARANCE . ...... CX = 2. CUTTING SPEED .. V = 145.
CZ = 2. FEED RATE . ..... F1 = 0.65
FINISH ALLOWANCE TX = 0. F2 = 0.32
TZ = 0. F3 = 0.6
DEPTH OF CUT . ... D = 3. ANOTHER AREA ? CN = 0
RETURN AMOUNT . .. U = 1.

CX =_ METRIC

ESCAPE BACK CURSOR CURSOR DRAWNG NEXT

PAGE ↑ ↓ RANGE PAGE

NC data creation screen NC data appears, and a tool path is drawn on this screen, allowing the user
to easily check NC data. Switching between animated simulation and tool
path drawing is enabled with a soft key.

*** NC DATA PREPARATION *** O0010

PROC.04 ROUGHING OF OUTER FIGURE T0909 X 71.6 Z 0.46 *NC SIDE*

O 0010
N 00007
X–AXIS
0.000

Z–AXIS
0.000

S 000000
T 000000
M 000000

X77.6Z–22.815F0.6 X71.6Z0.456F0.65
X79.6Z–21.798F0.65
G0Z2.
X66.4
G1Z1.038
X69.6Z–0. 562F0.6
G0X150.:

NC DATA = _ METRIC

NC PROC. SINGLE STOP

DATA STOP STEP

366
 2. CONVERSATIONAL AUTOMATIC
AUTOMATIC PROGRAMMING PROGRAMMING FUNCTION FOR
B–63002EN/02 FUNCTION LATHES

Machining time display The cutting time and rapid traverse time are displayed for each machining
screen type. A bar chart is displayed so that the user can check the time allotment
at a glance.

*** NC DATA PREPARATION *** PROCESS LIST 04–34

*NC SIDE*

O 0000
<–––> 0MIN 52SEC N 00000
NO. CUTTING RAPID
01 CENTER DRILLING 0.02 0.07 X–AXIS
02 DRILLING 0.44 0.08 0.000
03 DRILLING 0.34 0.09
04 ROUGHING OF OUTER FIGURE 0.39 0.09 Z–AXIS
05 ROUGHING OF INNTER FIGURE 0.06 0.08 0.000
06 FINISHING OF OUTER FIGURE 0.18 0.07
07 FINISHING OF INNTER FIGURE 0.06 0.07 S 000000
08 ROUGHING OF GROOVE 1.05 0.08 T 000000
08 FINISHING OF GROOVE 0.41 0.07 M 000000
10 GROOVING OR NECKING 0.16 0.08
11 THREADING 0.30 0.12
12 THREADING 0.06 0.12
13 CUT OFF 1.10 0.08
14 BAR FEED 0.11 0.09

*** PRESS SOFT KEY ***

METRIC

ESCAPE PAGE
EJECT

Animated simulation The user can check the memory operation conditions on the screen. A
screen function for checking for interference between the chuck/tailstock and
tool is provided. An interference check can be made before actual
operation by performing memory operation with the machine lock set to
ON.

*** CHECKING OF NC DATA *** SCALE VALUE 0.922 10–01

*NC SIDE*

O 0010
N 00007
X–AXIS
70.000

Z–AXIS
-20.260

S 000000
T 001010
M 000003

START METRIC

CHECK ORIGI– TOOL PARAM– END

START NAL PATH ETER

367
2. CONVERSATIONAL AUTOMATIC
PROGRAMMING FUNCTION FOR AUTOMATIC PROGRAMMING
LATHES FUNCTION B–63002EN/02

2.2
SUPER CAPi T

2.2.1 Super CAPi T is conversational automatic programming functions a for

Features lathes. It has the following features:
Simple operation
Program input by selecting machining processes
Conversational setup operation by following displayed setup
instructions
Direct execution of conversational programs. The program can also
be converted to an NC format, then executed.
Customization by the machine tool builder.
About Super CAPi T
Super CAPi T is a development of Super CAP T for Series 16i/18i–TA.
It features the following new functions:
1 Background color for the display screen, and 3–D frames for windows
and soft keys
2 Buttons appear “pressed” when selected
3 Machining simulation for turning based on a solid model
(Super CAP T for Series 16i/18i–TA can be used this function)
4 Tool trajectory drawing based on isometric projection in C–/Y–axis
machining simulation
(Super CAP T for Series 16i/18i–TA can be used this function)
5 Selectable screen display colors, with the saving of up to four color
schemes supported
All other functions, such as screen displays, key operations, and
machining functions, are the same as those of super CAP T.
Moreover, machining programs, tool data, and conversational function
parameters created with Super CAP T can also be used with Super CAPi
T.

2.2.2 Super CAPi T can be used with the following lathes:

Applicable Machines 1–spindle/1–turret lathe
1–spindle/2–turret lathe
Facing 2–spindle/2–turret lathe (The two turrets operate
independently of each other.)
2–spindle (main spindle and sub spindle)/1–turret lathe
Lathe with Y–axis/C–axis machining functions
Composite lathe (facing 2–spindles/2 turret type lathes)

368
 2. CONVERSATIONAL AUTOMATIC
AUTOMATIC PROGRAMMING PROGRAMMING FUNCTION FOR
B–63002EN/02 FUNCTION LATHES

2.2.3
Outline of the
Conversational
Automatic
Programming Function

Machining types In Super CAPi T, the following machining types can be selected:
Bar machining
Pattern repeating
Residual machining
End facing
Threading
Grooving
Necking
Center drilling/drilling/reaming/boring/tapping
Single action

NOTE
A command equivalent to one block of an NC program can
be input conversationally.

Subcall

NOTE
A subprogram can be called from the conversational
program.

Auxiliary processes and transfer process

NOTE
The machine tool builder can include machine–specific
operations in the conversational function.

M code/end process
C–axis center drilling/drilling/reaming/boring/tapping
C–axis grooving
C–axis nothing
C–axis cylindrical machining
Y–axis center drilling/drilling/reaming/tapping
Y–axis milling
C–axis milling machining
Balance cut

369
2. CONVERSATIONAL AUTOMATIC
PROGRAMMING FUNCTION FOR AUTOMATIC PROGRAMMING
LATHES FUNCTION B–63002EN/02

Basic menu screen Operations with Super CAPi T always begin with the basic menu screen
shown here. If the user cannot determine the next operation on a
conversational screen, the user can press the leftmost soft key to
return the display to this basic menu screen.

FANUC Super CAP T Ver. Z3.0 CAP. : HEAD–L

PREP A NEW PROCESS PROGRAM

EDIT THE PROCESSING PROGRAM

PROCESSING SIMULATION

DIRECT OPERATION OF CAP PROGRAM

CONVERT TO NC PROGRAM

TOOL,CUTTING CONDITION DATA

TOOL OFFSET DATA

EDIT NC PROGRAM

POSITION
EDIT MEM MEM MEM
MODE MODE MODE MODE
12:05:57 MDI

END
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 +

Conversational program A program can be input easily by following the instructions displayed in
input screen a window.

EDIT THE PROCESSING PROGRAM [CAP. : HEAD–L]

NO. =0194 NAME=BOZAI TEST–1
INTAL SET MATERIAL SHAPE OUT–DIA IN–DIA WORK–LNG MAX–S COOLANT
FC25 BAR 202.000 105.000 2500 ON
FINISHX FINISHZ E–REMOVL PROD–LNG
0.500 0.300 2.000 10.000
PROC(01) AREA HEAD TOOL–NO OUT–SPD FEED/REV CUT–DEPH T–CODE
BAR (R) OUTER END HEAD–L 101 80
PROC(01) AREA HEAD ROUGHNES TOOL–NO
BAR (F) OUTER END HEAD–L 5 101
START X= 0.000 Z= 0.000
↑ X= 48.000 Z= 0.000
CHAMFR X= 50.000 Z= 1.000
← X= 50.000 Z= 15.858
ROUND X= 55.858 Z= 22.929
X= 67.071 Z= 28.536
ROUND X= 70.000 Z= 32.072
← X= 70.000 Z= 35.567
ROUND X= 80.001 Z= 44.227
X= 96.536 Z= 49.000

OUTSIDE DIA.

< DELETE INSERT PROGRM WINDOW PROCES MACHIN TOOL DETAIL PLOT
END OFF EDIT COND. DATA DATA

370
 2. CONVERSATIONAL AUTOMATIC
AUTOMATIC PROGRAMMING PROGRAMMING FUNCTION FOR
B–63002EN/02 FUNCTION LATHES

Conversational program A machining profile can be input easily by using intersection automatic
input screen (inputting a calculation and pocket calculator format calculation.
machining profile) The input profile is displayed directly on the screen so that the user can
check the profile easily.

EDIT THE PROCESSING PROGRAM [CAP. : HEAD–L]

NO. =0194 NAME=BOZAI TEST–1
INTAL SET MATERIAL SHAPE OUT–DIA IN–DIA WORK–LNG MAX–S COOLANT
FC25 BAR 202.000 105.000 2500 ON
FINISHX FINISHZ E–REMOVL PROD–LNG
0.500 0.300 2.000 10.000
PROC(01) AREA HEAD TOOL–NO OUT–SPD FEED/REV CUT–DEPH T–CODE
BAR (R) OUTER END HEAD–L 101 80 0.50 5.000 0101
PROC(01) AREA HEAD ROUGHNES TOOL–NO CUT–SPD FEED/REV T–CODE
BAR (F) OUTER END HEAD–L 5 101 120 0.20 0101
START X= 0.000 Z= 0.000
↑ X= 48.000 Z= 0.
CHAMFR X= 50.000 Z= 1.
← X= 50.000 Z= 15.
ROUND X= 55.858 Z= 22. CONTR FORM (TAPER LINE)
X= 67.071 Z= 28. DIRECTION B=
ROUND X= 70.000 Z= 32. TAPER END X CORD. X= 70.000
← X= 70.000 Z= 35. TAPER END Z CORD. Z= 30.000
ROUND X= 80.001 Z= 44. COMPONENT X I=
X= 96.536 Z= 49. COMPONENT Z/ANGLEK/J= 45.000
LENGTH Q=
ROUGHNESS(1 ~10 )SR= 5

< WINDOW INSERT ALTER ALTER DELETE MACHIN TOOL DETAIL PLOT +
OFF FIGURE COND. DATA DATA

Process directory The entire machining program can be checked easily from the process
display screen directory display screen that also indicates the execution time for each
process.In addition, editing operations including movement, copy, and
deletion of processes can be performed on this screen.

EDIT THE PROCESSING PROGRAM *** PROCESS EDIT *** [CAP. : HEAD–L]
HEAD–L HEAD–R

INTAL SET FC25 BAR INTAL SET FC25 BAR

PROC(01) BAR OUTER END PROC(04) TRANS

ROUGH T0101
0M0S 0M 0S
PROC(02) BAR OUTER END PROC(05) BAR OUTER END
FIN T0101 ROUGH T0101
1M11S  1M31S 
PROC(02) DRILLING (DRILLING) PROC(05) BAR OUTER END
T0808 FIN T0101
0M24S  0M47S 
PROC(03) BAR INNER END PROC(06) BAR INNER END
ROUGH T0303 ROUGH T0303
0M 4S 0M10S yxyxyxyx

HEAD–L 1M42S 01010203030408

HEAD–R 2M35S 04050506060708

< RE–NUM TRANS. DELETE COPY EDIT RETURN PLOT GUIDE

371
2. CONVERSATIONAL AUTOMATIC
PROGRAMMING FUNCTION FOR AUTOMATIC PROGRAMMING
LATHES FUNCTION B–63002EN/02

Program directory Programs created conversationally are listed on the program directory
screen screen. The user can choose from these programs.The figure produced by
a specific program can be displayed in a window for checking.

EDIT THE PROCESSING PROGRAM *** PROGRAM MENU *** [CAP. : HEAD–L]
(REST NO. OF PROGRAM 23 PCS.)
(REST NO. OF PROCES 236 PCS.)
PRG. NO NAME CYCLE TIME CREATED MODIFIED
0194:(EXEC)BOZAI T 1994/05/26 11:19
4257: 1994/05/25 16:55
*** PLOTTING OF PART FIGURE ***

PROGRAM NO. =

INITAL SET FC2

PROC(01) BA T0101
PROC(01) BA T0101
PROC(02) DRILLING T0808
PROC(03) BAR INNER END HEAD–L ROUGH T0303
PROC(03) BAR INNER END HEAD–L FIN T0303

RETURN

Tool/cutting condition/ Tool data, cutting condition data, and pre–tool data can be input easily by
pre–tool automatic following the instructions displayed on the screen.Once data is input,
determination necessary data for machining is determined automatically.

[CAP. : HEAD–L]

101#L OUTER T0101 RN 0.800 AC 90 AN 60 TW 30.000

102#R OUTER T0101 RN 0.800 AC 90 AN 60 TW 30.000
151#L INNER T0303 RN 0.800 AC 90 AN 60 TW 20.000

*** TOOL DATA(1) ***

TOOL–ID NO @NO. 101
TOOL TYPE OUTER (HEAD–L)
TOOL DIREC
ROUGH/FIN COMMON
OUTPUT T 0101
REVOLUT.–D NORMAL TW
NOSE–RADIS RN= 0.800
CUTTING EDG AC= 90
NOSE ANGLE AN= 60 AN
NOSE WIDTH TW= 30.000
IMGNRY NOS TD= 3 AC
TL MATRIAL TM= CARBID

RN

< HEAD–L HEAD–R MENU TOOL TOOL

RETURN LIST FIGURE

372
 2. CONVERSATIONAL AUTOMATIC
AUTOMATIC PROGRAMMING PROGRAMMING FUNCTION FOR
B–63002EN/02 FUNCTION LATHES

Tooling screen Tool assignment to the turret and tool offset measurement for each tool
can be performed easily on the tooling screen which lists the tools used
in the machining program.

*** HEAD–L TOOLING DATA *** [CAP. : HEAD–L]

PAGE 01/01
PROC PROCNAME USING TOOL GEOMETRY OFS X GEOMETRY OFS Z RN/WN/DD/TR/TW T–CODE
01 BAR (R) –200.000 –200.000 RN 0.800 0101
01 BAR (F) –200.000 –200.000 RN 0.800 0101
02 DRILLING DRILL –200.000 –200.000 DD 30.000 0803
03 BAR (R) –200.000 –200.000 RN 0.800 0303
03 BAR (F) –200.000 –200.000 RN 0.800 0303

GEOXETRY OFS X

< HEAD–L HEAD–R Y–AXIS WEAR PREPAR TOOL RETURN

OFFSET OFFSET DISPLY

Setup instructions By following the setup instructions displayed conversationally, tool

geometry compensation, tool–change position, chuck barrier, and
tailstock barrier can be set easily.

[CAP. : HEAD–L]

101#L OUTER T0101 RN 0.800 AC 90 AN 60 TW 30.000

102#R OUTER T0101 RN 0.800 AC 90 AN 60 TW 30.000
151#L INNER T0303 RN 0.800 AC 90 AN 60 TW 20.000

*** TOOL PREPARATION *** NO. 101

3. BRING THE TOOL EDGE IN CONTACT WITH X= –200.000

THE SENSOR FROM Z–AXIS DIRECTION Z= –200.000

4
2

< PRE–PG NXT–PG RETURN

373
2. CONVERSATIONAL AUTOMATIC
PROGRAMMING FUNCTION FOR AUTOMATIC PROGRAMMING
LATHES FUNCTION B–63002EN/02

NC program output The machining program created conversationally can be run directly.
function The program can also be converted and executed as an NC program.
Furthermore, when modifications are made to the NC program obtained
by the conversion, a much more efficient machining program can be
created.

Machining program created conversationally NC program

(ISO/EIA code)

G00 X_ Z ;
G01 X_ Z_ F_ ;
M_ S_ ;
G02 X_ Z_ R_ ;

Machining simulation A variety of machining simulations, such as simultaneous animated

simulation for the facing 2–spindle 2–path lathe, animated simulation for
the 1–spindle/2–turret 2–path lathe, and animated simulation of
C–axis/Y–axis machining can be performed.

HEAD1 HEAD2 O0134 P0001

X1 0.000 X2 50.000
Z1 0.000 X2 –0.661
C1 0.000 C2 0.000

ACT G00 ACT G02

X 0.000 X 0.000
Z 0.000 Z 0.000
C 0.000 C 0.000

NXT G00 NXT G02

X 0.000 X 4.223
Z 0.000 Z –0.961
C 0.000 C 0.000

0M00S 2M30S

30.3 30.3
500% MEM STOP *** *** 12:14:58 STOP

< SPEED SPEED PLOT PROG HEAD WORK PROCES EXEC SINGLE +
UP DOWN ON/OFF PIECE STEP

Adding By using the software package provided for the macro compiler/executor,
machine–specific unique auxiliary operations specific to the machine, such as measurement on the
know–how machine, bar feeder, cutting–off, and transfer of blanks, can easily be
included in the conversational function.The newly added processes can
be displayed and edited the same as with other existing processes.

374
 2. CONVERSATIONAL AUTOMATIC
AUTOMATIC PROGRAMMING PROGRAMMING FUNCTION FOR
B–63002EN/02 FUNCTION LATHES

2.3
SYMBOLIC CAP T

2.3.1 Symbolic CAP T is a conversational automatic programming function for

Features of lathes. It has the following features:
User–friendly operation procedure that is easy to use, even by
Symbolic CAP T
beginners
Symbolic CAP T is easy even for beginners to use, thanks to its
support of graphical menus (icons) and mouse–driven conversational
processing. In addition, it provides a wealth of help messages.
Operating procedure for experienced operators
Symbolic CAP T commands can be entered from the keyboard,
enableing experienced operators to operate the system quickly.
Customizing
Symbolic CAP T can be customized. It is possible to assign a
frequently used function to a menu that is constantly displayed,
allowing that function to be called merely by clicking a button.
One–click switching of screen
The screen can be switched between that for maching definition and
that for figure preparation simply by clicking button. Therefore, even
if a figure is found to be missing during machining definition, figure
input need not be repeated from the very beginning.
Symbolic figure input
Blank and part figures can be entered using conventional symbolic
figure input based on arrows.
Fully automatic process determination
An optimum machining type, a tool, a portion to be cut, and machining
conditions can be automatically selected simply by entering blank and
part figures. Even beginners can create machining programs quickly
and easily.
Machining simulation
Three–dimensional animated machining simulation and tool path
drawing are performed simultaneously. Animated machining
simulation allows the operator to actually observe the progress of
machining. Tool path drawing enables the operator to check the tool
path generated by a machining program in detail.,

2.3.2 Symbolic CAP T can be used with the following lathes, simply by adding
Applicable Machines an optional module:
Basic module VI
1 spindle, 1 turret (1 path)
C–/Y–axis module(*)
Lathe supporting Y–/C–axis machining

375
2. CONVERSATIONAL AUTOMATIC
PROGRAMMING FUNCTION FOR AUTOMATIC PROGRAMMING
LATHES FUNCTION B–63002EN/02

2.3.3
Conversational
Automatic
Programming
Function

Figure input Symbolic input

CAD input
CAD data input (DXF)

Machining type Symbolic CAP T can automatically determine the following machining
types. It also supports manual selection.
Basic module/2–path control module
Center hole machining (center drilling, drilling, reaming, tapping)
Roughing (outer, inner, or end surface) (normal or reverse tool)
Semi–finishing (outer, inner, or end surface) (normal or reverse
tool)
Finishing (outer, inner, or end surface) (normal or reverse tool)
Rough grooving (outer, inner, or end surface)
Finish grooving (outer, inner, or end surface)
Rough/finish grooving (outer, inner, or end surface)
Threading (outer, inner, or front surface)
C–/Y–axis module
Milling and hole machining using the C– and Y–axes
Hole machining (end, side, or cylindrical surface)
Contouring (end, side, or cylindrical surface)
Pocketing (end, side, or cylindrical surface)
Grooving (end, side, or cylindrical surface)

376
 2. CONVERSATIONAL AUTOMATIC
AUTOMATIC PROGRAMMING PROGRAMMING FUNCTION FOR
B–63002EN/02 FUNCTION LATHES

Symbolic CAP T basic

screen Symbolic CAP T is easy to use for all users, from beginners to experts,
thanks to its support of graphical menus (icons) and mouse–driven
conversational processing.

Material selection and

blank dimension setting Blanks having standard shapes, such as bars and tubes, can be
screen specified easily.
Complicated blank figures can be prepared in the same way as the
figures for parts.

377
2. CONVERSATIONAL AUTOMATIC
PROGRAMMING FUNCTION FOR AUTOMATIC PROGRAMMING
LATHES FUNCTION B–63002EN/02

Part figure input screen

Figures for parts can easily be input by using symbolic keys such as
arrows.
The input figures are drawn on the screen, thus making checking
easier.

CAD input facilitates the input of complicated figures.

378
 2. CONVERSATIONAL AUTOMATIC
AUTOMATIC PROGRAMMING PROGRAMMING FUNCTION FOR
B–63002EN/02 FUNCTION LATHES

Machining definition
The automatic process determination function automatically creates
the processes shown below.
The automatic process determination function automatically
determines the machining type, tool data, cutting area, and cutting
conditions.
The operator can easily modify the automatically determined
machining type, tool data, cutting area, or cutting conditions, or
manually create processes, using the screen shown below.

The specified cutting area is drawn as shown below, thus allowing the
area to be checked visually.

379
2. CONVERSATIONAL AUTOMATIC
PROGRAMMING FUNCTION FOR AUTOMATIC PROGRAMMING
LATHES FUNCTION B–63002EN/02

NC data preparation
A tool path can be created without redundancy.
The format of the NC data can be customized using an NC machine
file.
Three–dimensional animated machining simulation and tool path
drawing allow the operator to observe the progress of the machining.

The completed part figure can be checked from its end surface, by
rotating the workpiece.

380
 2. CONVERSATIONAL AUTOMATIC
AUTOMATIC PROGRAMMING PROGRAMMING FUNCTION FOR
B–63002EN/02 FUNCTION LATHES

2.4
MANUAL GUIDE

2.4.1 The manual guide displays instructions for guiding the operator step by
Features step through the operations of a new machine. It enables the operator to
learn all types of operations, from simple handle–based cutting to
complicated machining.
The displayed instructions form three machining manipulation steps,
each of which can be used according to the learned level of the operator.

Manual guide machining mechanism

Cycle machining
Bar machining
Grooving
Threading
Hole making

Displayed instruction–based
machining and single machining
Machining
Displayed instruction–based
complexity
handle machining

Manual machining
Ordinary handle
machining

Operator’s learned level

381
2. CONVERSATIONAL AUTOMATIC
PROGRAMMING FUNCTION FOR AUTOMATIC PROGRAMMING
LATHES FUNCTION B–63002EN/02

Manual machining
As the first step of using a newly introduced machine, the operator can
perform longitudinal and radial cutting or hole making using ordinary
X–axis and Z–axis handles without entering a machining program.
These handles can be used at any time provided that the manual guide
screen is displayed and no automatic operation or animated simulation
is selected. With these handles, the operator can perform manual
machining while watching the display of the machine current position
on the screen.
All operators who are familiar with the operation of general–purpose
lathes having mechanical handle feed mechanisms can perform this
manual machining without feeling out of place.
The machine operator’s panel is equipped with switches for auxiliary
functions such as spindle rotation and tool change in addition to tool
movement.
The manual guide does not require mode switching unlike ordinary
NC units. Usually the JOG and handle modes are selected. Operating
a different type of manual guide operation directs the PMC to select
a necessary mode, hence automatic mode switching. Therefore, the
operator can perform various operations easily without bewaring of
mode switching.
Displayed instruction–based machining and single machining
As the second step of learning how to operate, the operator can perform
slant–line and circular cutting using the displayed instruction–based
handle.
The following two operation types are available in this step.
1) Displayed instruction–based machining
Supplying data for linear or circular cutting enables approaching,
linear, or circular machining.
Recording these machining operations in the CNC’s memory by
teaching enables them to be used repeatedly as a playback
operation program. In addition, using the synchronous feeding
function of the displayed instruction–based handle during
playback operation enables controlling of tool movement.
2) Single machining
Supplying tool paths for rapid traverse, linear, and circular
movement one by one enables execution of the respective
machining operations. In addition, using the synchronous feeding
function of the displayed instruction–based handle enables
controlling of tool movement.
When supplying a tool path, you can use simple figure end point
calculation.
Similarly to single machining, these machining operations can be
taught and used repetitively as playback operation.
In addition to these machining functions, the auxiliary function
switches (such as spindle rotation and tool change) on the machine
operator’s panel can be used in the same manner as for the manual
machining stated in the previous item. Moreover, the auxiliary
functions and the above machining operations can be taught
together.

382
 2. CONVERSATIONAL AUTOMATIC
AUTOMATIC PROGRAMMING PROGRAMMING FUNCTION FOR
B–63002EN/02 FUNCTION LATHES

Cycle machining
As the third step of learning how to operate, the operator can cause
complex machining to be automatically executed simply by entering
necessary data to cyclic machining.
The following types of cyclic machining are available.
1) Bar machining (outer, inner, and end surfaces)
2) Grooving (ordinary and trapezoidal grooves)
3) Threading (general, metric, inch, PT, and PF threads)
4) Hole making (center drilling, hole making, reaming, and boring)
5) Tapping
6) C–axis machining type A (C–axis hole making and C–axis
grooving)
7) C–axis machining type B (C–axis milling and C–axis cylindrical
machining)
A powerful contour calculation function is available especially for bar
machining, so arbitrary contour figures can be entered.
In these cyclic machining processes, the necessary auxiliary functions
such as spindle rotation and tool change are output automatically. The
operator need not manipulate these auxiliary functions on the machine
operator’s panel.

2.4.2 Because of a basic concept of simple machining, the manual guide

Supported Machine supports the following simple lathes:
Tools Single–spindle/single–tool post lathe (X– and Z–axes)
Single–spindle/facing–tool post lathe (X– and Z–axes)
; the X negative range machining option is required.
Single–spindle (with C–axis)/single–tool post lathe (X–, Z–, and
C–axes) ; the C–axis machining type A/B option is required.

383
2. CONVERSATIONAL AUTOMATIC
PROGRAMMING FUNCTION FOR AUTOMATIC PROGRAMMING
LATHES FUNCTION B–63002EN/02

2.4.3 The following flowchart shows the entire manual guide procedure from
Operation preparation for machining to playback operation.

Set parameters (usually unnecessary)

Set tool data

Machining based on no
displayed instructions?

yes
Perform displayed
instruction–based machining

Teach and save information

Perform repetitive machining or

perform drawing for check purposes

no
Single machining?

yes

Perform single machining

Teach and save information

Perform repetitive machining or

perform drawing for check purposes

no
Cyclic machining?

yes
Enter data, perform trial machining, and
perform drawing for check purposes

Save information

no
All processes specified?

yes
Make checks using animated
simulation

Perform playback operation

384
 2. CONVERSATIONAL AUTOMATIC
AUTOMATIC PROGRAMMING PROGRAMMING FUNCTION FOR
B–63002EN/02 FUNCTION LATHES

2.4.4 The major feature of the manual guide is that all operation types can be
Display Screen specified on a single screen.
The single display screen of the manual guide consists of a status display
window for displaying data (such as current position and spindle rotation
speed) necessary for operations, graphic window for displaying entered
figures and drawings for animated simulation, and program window for
entering and displaying machining programs.
The soft key menu for selecting machining and manipulation types is
accompanied by icons representing the respective types, thus enabling the
operator to understand them easily.

Screen example 1) Manual guide operation screen

385
2. CONVERSATIONAL AUTOMATIC
PROGRAMMING FUNCTION FOR AUTOMATIC PROGRAMMING
LATHES FUNCTION B–63002EN/02

When machining data is entered, a window is displayed on the screen as

required.

Screen example 2) Window for entering data for displayed

instruction–based machining

The same screen can also be used for solid model–based machining
simulation.

Screen example 3) Machining simulation

386
 2. CONVERSATIONAL AUTOMATIC
AUTOMATIC PROGRAMMING PROGRAMMING FUNCTION FOR
B–63002EN/02 FUNCTION LATHES

A list of created and registered machining programs can be displayed in

a window.

Screen example 4) Program list window

The instructions for measuring workpiece end face positions required in

setting up lathing are also displayed in a window.

Screen example 5) Window for displaying instructions for workpiece

end face measurement

387
3. CONVERSATIONAL AUTOMATIC
PROGRAMMING FUNCTION FOR AUTOMATIC PROGRAMMING
MACHINING CENTERS FUNCTION B–63002EN/02

3 CONVERSATIONAL AUTOMATIC PROGRAMMING

FUNCTION FOR MACHINING CENTERS

Super CAPi M is provided as the conversational automatic programming

function for machining centers. As with Super CAPi T and Super CAPi
M use a machining process selection method for input.
Super CAPi M is a development of conventional Super CAP M.
It features greatly improved display screens that use VGA graphics, while
its operation is simple, in the same way as Super CAP M.

388
 3. CONVERSATIONAL AUTOMATIC
AUTOMATIC PROGRAMMING PROGRAMMING FUNCTION FOR
B–63002EN/02 FUNCTION MACHINING CENTERS

3.1 Super CAPi M is performed by using conversational control software and

a custom macro program. In Super CAPi M, therefore, many macro
Super CAPi M instructions dedicated to conversational operation are provided as well as
the standard custom macro instructions. FANUC supplies a standard
macro library to the machine tool builder. The machine tool builder can
make additions and modifications to the standard macro library to
develop unique functions. The following sections explain the
specifications of the conversational automatic programming function of
the standard macro library supplied by FANUC.

Features Super CAPi M is a development of Super CAP M. It features the

following new functions:
(1) Background color for the display screen; 3–D frames for the windows
and soft keys.
(2) Finer and faster machining simulation based on a solid model.
(3) Cross–sectional display of a product based on a solid model.
(4) Selectable screen colors; up to four color schemes can be registered
(5) Improved visual interface for contour machining, with display of the
contour figure during contour programming.
All other functions, such as screen displays, key operations, and
machining functions, are the same as those of super CAP M.

Moreover, machining programs, tool data, and conversational function

parameters created with Super CAPi M can also be used with Super CAP
II M.

389
3. CONVERSATIONAL AUTOMATIC
PROGRAMMING FUNCTION FOR AUTOMATIC PROGRAMMING
MACHINING CENTERS FUNCTION B–63002EN/02

3.2
OUTLINE OF THE
MACRO LIBRARY
Machining type In Super CAPi M, the following machining types can be selected:
Drilling (eight types + hole position menu: Nine types)
Facing (six types)
Side facing (eight types including contour side)
Pocketing and grooving (eight types including contour pocketing)
2 + 1/2 machining (eight types)
NC language (eight types)
Machining of multiple workpieces (five types)
U axis machining (eight types)

PROGRAM O1000 PAGE:01/ CREATING

01 DRILLING 02 PECK DRILING 03 BORING

04 FINE BORING 04 BACK BORING 06 TAPPING

07 REAMING 08 FACING

SELECT SOFTKEY.

< 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 GUIDAN PROCES

CE END

Conversational program An easy–to–understand guide figure and message are displayed for each
input screen input item on the screen.

PROGRAM O1000 PAGE:01/ CREATING

MAX NUM.OF TOOLS–10
NO. CYCLE PROCESS TOOL NAME
001 AUXILIARY INITAL SETING
002 FACING FACING PREP. FACE MIL
FACING PREP. FACE MIL
FACING SQUARE BIDIR
PROCESS END

HOLE :TAPPING
GROUP COPY :YB= UNUSED RETURN POINT: I=
WK SURFACE : B= FEEDRATE CHG:YC= UNCHANGE
TAP DEPTH : V= KIND OF TAP : A= NORMAL
CHAMFER DIA : C= TOOL ID NO. : T=
INPUT THE Z COORD OF THE UPPER SURFACE OF THE WORKPIECE.

< F.S PROCES TOOL GUIDAN INPUT

AUTO WINDOW INFOM CE END

390
 3. CONVERSATIONAL AUTOMATIC
AUTOMATIC PROGRAMMING PROGRAMMING FUNCTION FOR
B–63002EN/02 FUNCTION MACHINING CENTERS

Tool/cutting condition/ Tool data, cutting condition data, and pre–tool data can be input easily by
pre–tool automatic following the instructions displayed on the screen.
determination Once data is input, necessary data for machining is determined
automatically.

PROGRAM O1000 PAGE:01/ CREATING

CUTTING DATA1/2 PROCESS4 PROCESS3 PROCESS2 PRO-
NO. CYCLE P
001 AUXILIARY CESS1
I
002 FACING TOOL ID NO.T=
F 25. 14. 12. 3.
TOOL NAME
F Q= TAP DRILL DRILL CENT DRILL
FACING S
TOOL DTA E= 10. 8. 4. 3.
P
H OFFSET NO. H= 125. 114. 112. 103.
R POINT R= 10. 3. 3. 3.
Z POINT Z= -20. -29.6 -24.8 -3.
DWELL D= 0. 0. 0. 0.
COOLANT M=COOLNT M7 COOLNT M7 COOLNT M7 COOLNT M
7
SPINDL SPEED S= 254. 3180. 5000. 4240.
FEED RATE F= 280. 318. 50. 42.
SPEED OFFST YD= * * * *
SPEED CHG PT YE= * * * *
PITCH J= 1.1 * * *
HOLE :TAPPING
GROUP COPY :YB= UNUSED RETURN POINT: I=
WK SURFACE : B= 0. FEEDRATE CHG:YC= UNCHANGE
TAP DEPTH : V= 20. KIND OF TAP : A= NORMAL
CHAMFER DIA : C= TOOL ID NO. : T= 25.
INPUT THE TOOL ID NUMBER OF THE TOOL TO BE USED.

< F.S. WINDOW TOOL GUIDAN INPUT

AUTO CHANCE INFORM CE END

Immediate checking of Input data is indicated graphically, and so checking can be done
input data immediately. If a data value exceeds an allowable limit, an alarm message
appears on the screen and the cursor appears at the position of the data in
question.

PROGRAM O1000 PAGE:01/ CREATING

NO. CYCLE PROCESS TOOL NAME

001 AUXILIARY INITAL SETING
002 FACING FACING PREP. FACE MIL
FACING PREP. FACE MIL
FACING SQUARE BIDIR
PROCESS END
003 HOLE TAPPING CENTER D
TAPPING DRILL
TAPPING DRILL
TAPPING TAP

HOLE PATTERN :PARALLELOGRM

COORDINATES :W= V LENGTH :V= 75. O V ANGLE : C= 90.
X CO–ORD :X= 0. U NUMBER :D= 3. OMIT POINT 1 :YF= *
Y–CO–ORD :Y= 0. V NUMBER :E= 2. OMIT POINT 2 :YG= *
U LENGTH :U= 75. X–U ANGLE :A= 0. OMIT POINT 3 :YH= *

RETURN

391
3. CONVERSATIONAL AUTOMATIC
PROGRAMMING FUNCTION FOR AUTOMATIC PROGRAMMING
MACHINING CENTERS FUNCTION B–63002EN/02

3.3
OUTLINE OF THE
CONVERSATIONAL
AUTOMATIC
PROGRAMMING
FUNCTION

Basic menu screen Operations with Super CAPi M always begin with the following basic
menu screen. When the leftmost soft key on a conversational screen
is pressed, the display is returned to the previous screen.

SUPER C.A.P.M

PROGRAM MAKE OR EDIT

OPTIMUM PROGRAM

PROGRAM CHECK

CONVERT NC FORMAT

MEM MEM C.A.P. DATA

MODE MODE

<
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

Conversational program Even a complicated machining profile can be input easily by using the
input screen (inputting symbolic input and automatic intersection calculation functions.
contours) The input profile is displayed directly on the screen so that the user can
easily check the profile.

PROGRAM O410(DEMO) PAGE:01/

2
NO.CYCLE PROCESS TOOL NAME TOOL NO N–DIAFEED SPINDL
001 AUXILIARY INITAL SETING
002 U–AXS MACHIN OUTER CONTOR
1 START OF U_AXIS
2 START POINT U= 50. Z= 0
3 LINE U= 50. Z= 17.
4 CHAMFERING U= 53. Z= 20.
5 LINE U= 67. Z= 20.
6 CHAMFERING 3 U= 70. Z= 23.
7 LINE U= 70. Z= 30.
8 LINE U= 80. Z= 60.
9 LINE 4 5 U= 80. Z= 70.
10 CONTOUR END
PROCESS END
003 U–AXS MACHIN INNER CONTOR CENTER DRILL 3. 3.000 17 16
INNER CONTOR DRILL 19. 20.000 239 100
INNER CONTOR
1 (START OF U_AXIS)

SELECT FROM SOFT–KEYS. IF BLOCK IS TANGENT, PRESS “TANGENT” SOFT–KEY.

6
< ←→ ↑↓ TANGNT CHAMF. CRNR–R CANCEL CONTOR +
END

392
 3. CONVERSATIONAL AUTOMATIC
AUTOMATIC PROGRAMMING PROGRAMMING FUNCTION FOR
B–63002EN/02 FUNCTION MACHINING CENTERS

Conversational program Programmed data is listed in an easy–to–understand form.

editing screen On this screen, editing operations such as movement, copy, and deletion
of processes can be performed.

PROGRAM O1234 PAGE:01/ EDITING

NO. CYCLE PROCESS TOOL NAME TOOL NO N–DIA FEED SPINDL
001 AUXILIARY INITAL SETING
002 FACING FACING PREP. FACE MILL 72. 40.000 773. 1431.
FACING PREP. FACE MILL 73. 50.000 309. 572.
FACING FACING BIDIR
PROCESS END
003 SIDE CUTING SIDE PREP. END MILL 65. 10.000 229. 1272.
SIDE PREP. END MILL 66. 12.000 572. 2120.
SIDE CUTING SQUARE O SIDE
PROCESS END
004 HOLE TAPPING CENTER DRILL 3. 3.000 42. 4240.
TAPPING DRILL 12. 4.000 50. 5000.
TAPPING DRILL 14. 8.000 318. 3180.
TAPPING TAP 25. 10.000 280. 254.
HOLE PATERN PARALLELOGRM
PROCESS END
005 AUXILIARY FND OF PROG.

< MOVE COPY DELETE ALTER INSERT

Process optimization The machining order can be changed automatically to reduce the number
edit function of times tools are changed. The machining order can also be specified
manually.
With these functions, the time required for machining can be reduced.

Process (1)
φ5 center drilling
φ10 drilling Automatic Optimized program
process
alteration φ5 center drilling of Process(1)
Process (2) φ5 center drilling of Process(2)
φ5 center drilling of Process(3)
φ5 center drilling
φ10 drilling of Process(1)
φ6.8 drilling
φ6.8 drilling of Process(2)
φM8 tapping φM8 tapping of Process(2)
φ7 drilling of Process(3)
Process (3)
φ5 center drilling
φ7 drilling

393
3. CONVERSATIONAL AUTOMATIC
PROGRAMMING FUNCTION FOR AUTOMATIC PROGRAMMING
MACHINING CENTERS FUNCTION B–63002EN/02

Full graphic function Machining profiles, tool figures, and tool paths can be drawn in the
isometric mode, biplane drawing mode, and so forth.
In addition, an animated simulation function is provided to display a solid
drawing of the workpiece figure to be machined.

PATH GRAPHIC (EXECUTION)

01234 N01000
X 0.000
Y 0.000
Z 0.000

Y
X
MEM **** *** *** 16:16:05

< PATH GRAPH ROTA– 3-PLAN DRAW

GRAPH PARAM TION START

394
 3. CONVERSATIONAL AUTOMATIC
AUTOMATIC PROGRAMMING PROGRAMMING FUNCTION FOR
B–63002EN/02 FUNCTION MACHINING CENTERS

3.4
OTHER OPTIONAL
FUNCTIONS
NC program output A machining program created conversationally can be run directly. The
function program can also be converted and then executed as an NC program form.
Furthermore, when modifications are made to the NC program obtained
by the conversion, a more efficient machining program can be created.

PATH GRAPHIC (EXECUTION)

CONVERT NC FORMAT O1234 N01234
X –65.000
O2000→O2001 Y 40.000
G04X0.; Z 3.000
G00Z3.;
X–65.Y40.; F 500.000
G90Z3.; S 5000
F500.; T 15
G01Z–22.;
G04X0.; Z
G00Z3.; Y
G52X0.Y0.Z0.;
M30; X

MACHINING TIME 34.5

00:06:21

PRESS RETURN SOFTKEY MEM **** *** *** 11:21:05

< RETURN

Contour repeat function In programming for an arbitrary figure, a certain section of a figure can
be repeated more than once. Three types of repetitions are available:
Inversion, rotation, and parallel displacement. By combining these types,
program data can be utilized more than once in a program.

PROGRAM 01000 PAGE :01/ CREATING

NO. CYCLE PROCESS TOOL NAME

001 INITIAL SETING Y
002 SIDE CUTING CONTOR PREP. END MILL
1 START POINT X= –30.0
2 APPROACII X= 0
3 → X= 100.0 R2 R1
4 ↑ X= 100.0 END PT.
5 CORNER R R= 30.0 START PT.
6 → X= 200.0
K

(X, Y) X
CONTOUR FORM (ROTATION COPY)
NO. OF REPEAT : R=
CENTER X : X=
CENTER Y : Y=
ANGLE K : K=

< GUIDAN INPUT

CE END

395
3. CONVERSATIONAL AUTOMATIC
PROGRAMMING FUNCTION FOR AUTOMATIC PROGRAMMING
MACHINING CENTERS FUNCTION B–63002EN/02

Background drawing A machining program can be created and checked using the drawing
function function while another program is being executed for machining.
By using this function, the NC can be used more efficiently.

PATH GRAPHIC (EXECUTION)

01234 NO1234
X –100.000
Y 52.000
Z 10.000

X Y

50.4

MEM STRT *** *** 17:44:23 DRAWING

< SINGLE STOP

OFF

U–axis conversational
function
Programs for the following cutting operations with the lathe can be input
conversationally:
Contouring (outer surface/inner surface/end face)
Grooving (outer surface/inner surface/end face)
Threading (external/internal)

PROGRAM O4008(DEMO) PAGE :01/ EDITING

01 OUTER CONTOR 02 INTER CONTOR 03 FACE CONTOR

04 OUTER GROOVE 04 INNER GROOVE 06 FACE GROOVE

07 OUTER THREAD 08 INNER THREAD

SELECT FROM SOFT–KEYS.

< 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 GUIDAN PROCES

CE END

396
 3. CONVERSATIONAL AUTOMATIC
AUTOMATIC PROGRAMMING PROGRAMMING FUNCTION FOR
B–63002EN/02 FUNCTION MACHINING CENTERS

In addition, simulation for the machining profile, removal, tool path, and
others functions are enabled during cutting.

PATH GRAPHIC (EXECUTION)

O4010 N04010 X 0.000
Y 0.000
Z 1.000
U 9.000
F 10.000
S 100
T 126

X
Z

62.5
X
MEM STOP *** *** 14:56:57 STOP

SINGLE STOP 1BOLCK

ON EXEC.

Conversational C When a custom macro program is replaced with a program coded in C,

language programming programs such as those for automatic tool setting and automatic cutting
function condition setting can be executed at high–speed.
Programs are developed on a personal computer.

397
IV. HAND CNC (Series 20i)
B–63002EN/02 HAND CNC (Series 20i) 1. OUTLINE OF HAND CNC (Series 20i)

1 OUTLINE OF HAND CNC (Series 20i)

The Series 20i CNC has been developed for general purpose milling
machines and general–purpose lathes. These kind of general–purpose
machine tools differ greatly from regular CNC machine tools. For this
reason, CNC units for controlling these machine tools are provided with
many exclusive functions. Generally a CNC unit developed exclusively
for these kind of general–purpose machine tools is called a “hand CNC”
to differentiate it from other CNC units.

The Series 20i has a machining guidance function that does not use NC
statement programs as an exclusive function for general–purpose
machine tools. This machining guidance function allows you to easily
perform a variety of machining processes as if you were operating a
general–purpose machine without any special knowledge of CNC; all you
need to do is to set the minimum required data such as position data.

As this function has been made using the macro executer, machine tool
manufacturers can modify or add to its functions to develop their own
program functions.

If you install the optional guidance programming function, you can also
make NC statement programs using menu selection. In addition to basic
NC program statements, these menus are provided with pattern
machining processes called “cycle machining.” For example, on the
Series 20i–FA, you can easily execute complex machining such as plane
machining or pocket machining.

401
2. LIST OF SPECIFICATIONS HAND CNC (Series 20i) B–63002EN/02

2 LIST OF SPECIFICATIONS

FANUC Series 20i–TA CNC for general–purpose lathes

FANUC Series 20i–FA CNC for general–purpose milling
machines

 : Standard  : Option
: Function included in another option
— : Relevant function not available : Standard option
 : Standard function usable in machining guidance function
Or, standard specification usable in macro executer
 : Option usable in machining guidance
Or, option usable in macro executer

Series 20i
Item Specifications
For Milling
For Lathe
Machine

Guidance Programming or NC
Program Editing Function
Axis control (1)
W/out W/ W/out W/

2 axes   — —
Max controlled axes
Max.
4 axes (machine 4 axes) — —  

Controlled path 1–path    

2 axes   — —
Machine–controlled axes

Controlled axes
3 axes — —  

Simultaneous 2 axes   — —
Simultaneous controllable axes
Simultaneous 3 axes — —  

Controllable axes expansion (to-

Max. 4 axes — —  
tal)

Axis control by PMC — —  

Basic axes: X, Y, Z, Additional axes: any axis

— —  
from U, V, W, A, B, C
Axis name
Basic two axes: X, Z   — —

Least input increment 0.001 mm, 0.001 deg, 0.0001 inch    

Increment system 1/10 *1 0.0001 mm, 0.0001 deg, 0.00001 inch — —  

Flexible feed gear Optional DMR    

402
B–63002EN/02 HAND CNC (Series 20i) 2. LIST OF SPECIFICATIONS

Series 20i
Item Specifications
For Milling
For Lathe
Machine

Guidance Programming or NC
Program Editing Function
Axis control (2)
W/out W/ W/out W/

Fine Acc & Dec control    

HRV control    

Inch/metric conversion    

All axes/each axis/each axis direction/cutting

Interlock    
block start

Machine lock All axes/each axis    

Emergency stop    

Overtravel    

Stored stroke check 1    

Stroke limit external setting — —  

Stored stroke check 2 — —  

Mirror image Each axis    

Follow–up    

Servo–off/mechanical handle feed    

Chamfering on/off   — —

Backlash compensation    

Backlash compensation for each rapid

   
traverse and cutting feed

Stored pitch error compensation    

Unexpected disturbance torque detec-

   
tion function

403
2. LIST OF SPECIFICATIONS HAND CNC (Series 20i) B–63002EN/02

Series 20i
Item Specifications
For Milling
For Lathe
Machine

Guidance Programming or NC
Program Editing Function
Operation
W/out W/ W/out W/

Automatic operation (memory)    

DNC operation Reader/puncher interface is required. —  — 

MDI operation —  — 

Program number search —  — 

Sequence number search —  — 

Program restart — —  

Manual intervention return —  — 

Buffer register    

Dry run    

Single block    

Jog feed    

Manual reference position return    

Reference position setting without dog    

1 unit/2 units/3 unit   — —

Manual handle feed
1 unit/2 units/3 units/4 units — —  

1,
10,
m,
n

Manual handle feed rate    
m: to 127, n: to 1000

Manual handle interruption    

Incremental feed
1,
10,
100,
1000    

Jog and handle simultaneous mode    

404
B–63002EN/02 HAND CNC (Series 20i) 2. LIST OF SPECIFICATIONS

Series 20i
Item Specifications
For Milling
For Lathe
Machine

Guidance Programming or NC
Program Editing Function
Interpolation
W/out W/ W/out W/

Positioning G00    

Single direction positioning G60 — —  

Exact stop mode G61 — —  

Exact stop G09 — —  

Linear interpolation    

Circular interpolation Multi–quadrant is possible    

Dwell Dwell in seconds    

Circular interpolation plus max. 2 axes linear

Helical interpolation — —  
interpolation

Thread cutting, synchronous cutting   — —

Multi–thread cutting   — —

Thread cutting retract   — —

Continuous thread cutting *4   — —

Variable lead thread cutting *4   — —

Skip function G31    

Torque limit skip   — —

Reference position return G28    

Reference position return check G27    

2nd reference position return    

405
2. LIST OF SPECIFICATIONS HAND CNC (Series 20i) B–63002EN/02

Series 20i
Item Specifications
For Milling
For Lathe
Machine

Guidance Programming or NC
Program Editing Function
Feed function
W/out W/ W/out W/

Rapid traverse Max. 240 m (1 µm)    

Rapid traverse override F0, 25, 50, 100%    

Feed per minute    

Feed per revolution   — —

Tangential speed constant control    

Cutting feedrate clamp    

Rapid traverse: linear

Automatic acceleration/deceleration    
Cutting feed: exponential function

Linear acceleration/deceleration after

   
cutting feed interpolation

Bell–shaped acceleration/deceleration
   
after cutting feed interpolation

Feedrate override 0 to 254%    

Jog override 0 to 655.34%    

Override cancel    

Manual feed per revolution   — —

Advanced preview control — —  

406
B–63002EN/02 HAND CNC (Series 20i) 2. LIST OF SPECIFICATIONS

Series 20i
Item Specifications
For Milling
For Lathe
Machine

Guidance Programming or NC
Program Editing Function
Program input (1)
W/out W/ W/out W/

Tape code EIA RS244/ISO 840 automatic recognition    

Label skip    

Parity check Horizontal and vertical parity    

Control in/out    

Optional block skip 1    

Max. programmable dimension 8–digit    

Program number O4–digit    

Sequence number N5–digit    

Absolute/incremental programming Combined use in the same block    

Decimal point input/pocket calculator

   
type decimal point input

Input unit 10 time multiply — —  

Diameter/radius programming (X axis)   — —

Plane selection G17, G18, G19 — —  

Rotary axis designation — —  

Rotary axis roll over — —  

Coordinate system setting    

Automatic coordinate system setting    

Coordinate system shift   — —

Direct input of coordinate system   — —

Workpiece coordinate system G52, G53, G54 to G59 — —  

Workpiece coordinate system preset *4 — —  

Manual absolute on/off    

G code system A   — —

G code system B/C   — —

Chamfering/corner R   — —

Optional chamfering/corner R *4 — —  

Programmable data input G10    

Sub program call 4 folds nested    

407
2. LIST OF SPECIFICATIONS HAND CNC (Series 20i) B–63002EN/02

Series 20i
Item Specifications
For Milling
For Lathe
Machine

Guidance Programming or NC
Program Editing Function
Program input (2)
W/out W/ W/out W/

Custom macro B    

Canned cycles   — —

Multiple repetitive cycles *5 —  — —

Multiple repetitive cycles II Pocket profile *5 —  — —

Canned cycles for drilling — —  

Circular interpolation by R
   
programming

Automatic corner override *4 — —  

Scaling *4 — —  

Coordinate system rotatio *4 — —  

Programmable mirror image *4 — —  

Macro executer A Max. 1.5MB (including machining guidance)    

Additional custom memory 0.5MB Max. 2 MB including macro executor  —  —

Additional custom memory 1MB Max. 2.5 MB including macro executor —  — 

Additional custom memory 1.5MB Max. 3 MB including macro executor  —  —

Machining guidance function    

Guidance programming function *2 —  — 

NC program editing function *2    

408
B–63002EN/02 HAND CNC (Series 20i) 2. LIST OF SPECIFICATIONS

Series 20i
Item Specifications
For Milling
For Lathe
Machine

Guidance Programming or NC
Program Editing Function
Auxiliary/Spindle function
W/out W/ W/out W/

Auxiliary function M8–digit    

Auxiliary function lock    

High speed M, S, T interface    

Multiple command of auxiliary function 3    

Spindle function S5–digit, binary output    

Spindle serial output S5–digit, serial output    

Spindle analog output S5–digit, analog output    

Constant surface speed control   — —

Spindle override 0 to 254%

1st spindle orientation    

1st spindle output switching function    

Rigid tap *4 — —  

Rigid tapping by manual handle *4 — —  

Series 20i
Item Specifications
For Milling
For Lathe
Machine

Guidance Programming or NC
Program Editing Function
Tool function/Tool compensation (1)
W/out W/ W/out W/

T7+1/6T+2–digit   — —
Tool function
T8 digits — —  

6 digits 16   — —

Tool offset 6 digits 32 — —  

6 digit 64 *4 — —  

Tool offset memory B Geometry/wear memory *4 — —  

Distinction between geometry and wear, or

Tool offset memory C between cutter and tool length compensation — —  
*4

Tool length compensation — —  

409
2. LIST OF SPECIFICATIONS HAND CNC (Series 20i) B–63002EN/02

Series 20i
Item Specifications
For Milling
For Lathe
Machine

Guidance Programming or NC
Program Editing Function
Tool function/Tool compensation (2)
W/out W/ W/out W/

Tool offset   — —

Cutter compensation C — —  

Tool nose radius compensation   — —

Tool geometry/wear compensation   — —

Tool offset value counter input   — —

Offset value measurement direct input   — —

Series 20i
Item Specifications
For Milling
For Lathe
Machine

Guidance Programming or NC
Program Editing Function
Editing operation
W/out W/ W/out W/

10 m    

20 m    

40 m    
Part program storage length
80 m    

160 m    

320 m — —  

63    

Registered programs 125 — —  

200 — —  

Part program editing —  — 

Program protect —  — 

Background editing —  — 

Extended part program editing Usable only on NC program editing function —  — 

Playback —  — 

410
B–63002EN/02 HAND CNC (Series 20i) 2. LIST OF SPECIFICATIONS

Series 20i
Item Specifications
For Milling
For Lathe
Machine

Guidance Programming or NC
Program Editing Function
Setting and display (1)
W/out W/ W/out W/

Status display    

Clock function    

Current position display    

Program display Program name 16 characters —  — 

Parameter setting and display    

Self–diagnosis function    

Alarm display    

Alarm history display    

Operation history display    

Help function    

Reading mounted PCB data, reading CNC

Remote diagnostic function data such as parameters, or reading alarm
status, etc.

Run hour and parts count display    

Actual speed display    

Display of spindle speed and T code at

 
all screens

Directory display of floppy cassette —  — 

Directory display and punch for each

—  — 
group

Graphic display    

Dynamic graphic display    

Servo setting screen    

Spindle setting screen Only for serial interface

Servo waveform display

Display of hardware and software

   
configuration

Periodic maintenance screen    

Maintenance information screen    

Software operator’s panel    

411
2. LIST OF SPECIFICATIONS HAND CNC (Series 20i) B–63002EN/02

Series 20i
Item Specifications
For Milling
For Lathe
Machine

Guidance Programming or NC
Program Editing Function
Setting and display (2)
W/out W/ W/out W/

Software operator’s panel general

   
purpose switch

English    

Japanese (Chinese character)    

German/French    

Italian    
Multi language display
Multi–language
Chinese    

Spanish    

Korean    

Portuguese    

Data protection key    

Erase CRT screen display    

Series 20i
Item Specifications
For Milling
For Lathe
Machine

Guidance Programming or NC
Program Editing Function
Data input/output (1)
W/out W/ W/out W/

Reader/puncher interface Reader/puncher (Ch.1) interface    

Reader/puncher (Ch.2) interface    

Remote buffer — — — 

Input/output simultaneous operation    

Modem speed control    

External data input    

External key input    

External program input —  — 

412
B–63002EN/02 HAND CNC (Series 20i) 2. LIST OF SPECIFICATIONS

Series 20i
Item Specifications
For Milling
For Lathe
Machine

Guidance Programming or NC
Program Editing Function
Data input/output (2)
W/out W/ W/out W/

External workpiece number search 15 —  — 

External memory card input/output —  — 

Screen hard copy    

Power Mate CNC manager    

Series 20i
Item Specifications
For Milling
For Lathe
Machine

Guidance Programming or NC
Program Editing Function
Machining guidance function
W/out W/ W/out W/

Linear/circular machining    

Corner machining    

Pocket machining Circle, square, track — —  

Pattern positioning Circle, square, grid, arbitrary — —  

Drilling Drill, center, tap *3    

Side machining Circle, square, track — —  

Limit machining Square profile limit — —  

Polygon limit machining Polygons up to convex hexagons — —  

Roughing Max. 28 points (TA only)    

Plane machining — —  

Thread cutting   — —

Groove cutting Regular groove, trapezoidal groove   — —

Tool offset function — —  

X minus area switching function   — —

413
2. LIST OF SPECIFICATIONS HAND CNC (Series 20i) B–63002EN/02

Series 20i
Item Specifications
For Milling
For Lathe
Machine

Guidance Programming or NC
Program Editing Function
Guidance Programming Function
W/out W/ W/out W/

Feed instruction G00, G01, G02, G03 —  — 

Coordinate system G50 (TA), G55 to G59 (FA) —  — 

Constant surface speed control G96, G97 —  — —

MAIW/N feed per revolution G98, G99 —  — —

Chamfering/Corner R —  — —

Tool nose radius compensation G40 to G42 —  — —

Cutter compensation G40 to G42 — — — 

Tool length compensation G43, G44, G49 — — — 

Plane selection G17 to G19 — — — 

Coordinate system rotation G68, G69 — — — 

Thread cutting G32 —  — —

Thread cutting (G92) —  — —

Pocket machining — — — 

Side machining — — — 
Cycles
Plane machining — — — 

Pattern positioning — — — 

Drilling — — — 

Inch/metric conversion G20, G21 —  — 

Contour profile symbolic input G01, G02, G03 — — — 

414
B–63002EN/02 HAND CNC (Series 20i) 2. LIST OF SPECIFICATIONS

Series 20i
Item Specifications Specifications
For Milling
For Lathe
Machine

Guidance Programming or NC
Program Editing Function
Others (1)
W/out W/ W/out W/

NC ready, servo ready, automatic operation,

automatic operation start lamp, feed hold,
Status output signal reset, NC alarm, distribution end, rewinding,    
inch input, cutting, thread cutting, tapping,
etc.

Controller integrated display unit 8.4″ color LCD    

W/out option slots    

Control unit dimensions (depth)
2 option slots — —  

MDI unit 8.4″ LCD/MDI (separate type)    

Basic instruction: 4.5 µs/step

PMC–SA1 Max. step number ladder: 5,000    
(basic ladder instruction limited)
PMC system
Basic instruction: 0.085 µ/step
PMC–SA5    
Max. step number ladder: 16,000

I/O Unit MODEL A    

I/O Unit MODEL B    

DI 72 points/DO 56
   
points
Machine interface (I/O link) O erator s panel
Operator’s anel I/O
Max. DI/DO points: 1024/1024 points module DI 48 points/DO 32
   
points

Separate wiring I/O module    

Control panel I/O module    

Manual pulse generator    

FANUC AC servo motor a series (with serial

Connectable servo motor    
interface pulse coder)

Connectable servo amp. FANUC servo pump a series    

Connectable position detector interface Pulse coder/optical scale (2–phase pulse

   
unit (for full–closed control) interface)

Connectable spindle motor FANUC AC spindle motor, etc.    

Connectable spindle amp. FANUC servo amp. a series    

Analog interface    

Controller input power supply DC24 V10%    

Operation: 0°C to 58°C

Unit ambient temperature    
Storage: –20°C to 60°C

415
2. LIST OF SPECIFICATIONS HAND CNC (Series 20i) B–63002EN/02

Series 20i
Item Specifications Specifications
For Milling
For Lathe
Machine

Guidance Programming or NC
Program Editing Function
Others (2)
W/out W/ W/out W/

Regular: 75% max., no condensation

Ambient relative humidity short–term: (within 1 month) 95% max.,    
no condensation

Operation: 0.5G max.

Vibration    
Storage: 1G max.

NOTE
1 The FANUC standard machining guidance function and guidance programming function do not
support setting unit IS–C. This setting unit can be supported by remodeling by the machine tool
manufacturer.
2 Parameter settings allows you to enable or disable display of the NC program editing screen.
There are two editing methods:
Editing by guidance programming (option)
Editing by NC language
The following four methods of use are possible by setting options and parameters.

416
B–63002EN/02 HAND CNC (Series 20i) 2. LIST OF SPECIFICATIONS

Guidance program function Guidance program function

(w/ options) (w/out options)

Parameter No.9320#6(NPR)=0 Parameter No.9320#6(NPR)=0

Parameter No.9320#6(NPR)=1 Parameter No.9320#6(NPR)=1

À Á Â Ã

(1) “Guidance programming function” only

Exactly the same method of use as the “guidance programming
function” on the Series 20–FA/TA is possible by setting parameter
No.9320#6(NPR) to “0” when the “guidance programming function”
(option) is not added on.

CUSTOM
Guidance programming screen Machining guidance screen
PROG

In this case, the CNC language screen can be displayed by pressing the
[NC language] soft key, and programs can be edited or made in this
screen. However, screen functions are limited and some functions such
as the extended part program editing function cannot be used.
(2) “Guidance programming function” + “NC program editing function”
You can use both the same NC program editing screen and the
guidance programming function as other CNCs (e.g. Series 21i) by
setting parameter No.9320#6(NPR) to “0” when the “guidance
programming function” (option) is not added on.

417
2. LIST OF SPECIFICATIONS HAND CNC (Series 20i) B–63002EN/02

CUSTOM
Guidance programming screen Machining guidance screen
PROG

[Interactive] [NC language]

Guidance programming screen

function menu screen
(no program list screen)

In this case, the program list screen in the guidance programming

function cannot be used. However, the extended part program editing
function can be used by adding on options.
Also, NC program conversion can be selected for machining programs
that have been made using the guidance programming function by
using [NC conversion] displayed in the function menu screen of the
guidance programming screen. In this case, the program currently
displayed at that time is converted to an NC program.
(3) “NC program editing function” only
You can display the same NC program editing screen as other CNCs
(e.g. Series 21i) and make and edit NC programs in that screen by
setting parameter No.9320#6(NPR) to “0” when the “guidance
programming function” (option) is not added on.

CUSTOM
NC program editing screen Machining guidance screen
PROG

(4) W/out CNC program editing function

When the “guidance programming function” (optional) is not added
on, and parameter No.9320#6(NPR) is set to “0”, CNC programs
cannot be edited or made.

Machining guidance screen

418
B–63002EN/02 HAND CNC (Series 20i) 2. LIST OF SPECIFICATIONS

NOTE
3 In drilling using the machining guidance function for a lathe,
only drilling can be used.
4 The FANUC standard machining guidance function and
guidance programming function do not support these
functions. The machining guidance function can be
supported by remodeling by the machine tool manufacturer.
5 This function cannot be used on the machining guidance
function and macro executor.

419
3. MACHINING GUIDANCE FUNCTION HAND CNC (Series 20i) B–63002EN/02

3 MACHINING GUIDANCE FUNCTION

Series 20i–FA Machining In addition to manual operation, this function allows you to easily
Guidance Function machine complex shapes such as inclined straight lines or arc by
operation like that on the control panel of a general–purpose milling
machine.
This function is provided as a FANUC standard function. As it has
been prepared in the form of a macro program using the macro
executor, the machine tool manufacturer can modify its functions.
That macro program is supplied by FANUC as a sample program. (A
Non–disclosure Agreement is required.)
During machining in manual operation, select the machining method
from the machining guidance menu, enter the required data and
machine the desired profile.
Position data can be input by numerical value keys or moving the tool
by the handle and pressing buttons.
The following machining menus are provided as basic functions:
1) Linear machining
2) Circular machining
3) Corner machining
4) Pocket machining (circle, square, track)
5) Pattern positioning (circle, square, grid, arbitrary)
The following machining menus are optional:
1) Drilling (drill, center, tap)
2) Side machining (circle, square, track)
3) Limit machining (square profile limit)
4) Polygon limit machining (polygons up to convex hexagons)
5) Roughing
6) Plane machining
7) Tool offset function
For details of the machining guidance function, refer to the “Series
20i–FA Machining Guidance Function Operator’s Manual
(B–62174E–1).”

420
B–63002EN/02 HAND CNC (Series 20i) 3. MACHINING GUIDANCE FUNCTION

Screen example 1) Linear machining

Screen example 2) Tapping

Screen example 3) Polygon limit machining

421
3. MACHINING GUIDANCE FUNCTION HAND CNC (Series 20i) B–63002EN/02

Series 20i–TA Machining In addition to manual operation, this function allows you to easily
Guidance Function machine complex shapes such as inclined straight lines or arc by
operation like that on the control panel of a general–purpose milling
machine.
This function is provided as a FANUC standard function. As it has
been prepared in the form of a macro program using the macro
executor, the machine tool manufacturer can modify its functions.
That macro program is supplied by FANUC as a sample program. (A
Non–disclosure Agreement is required.)
During machining in manual operation, select the machining method
from the machining guidance menu, enter the required data and
machine the desired profile.
Position data can be input by numerical value keys or moving the tool
by the handle and pressing buttons.
The following machining menus are provided as basic functions:
1) Linear machining
2) Circular machining
3) Corner machining
4) Drilling (drill)
5) Roughing (max. 28 points)
6) Roughing
7) Groove cutting (regular groove, trapezoidal groove)
The following machining menu is optional:
1) XW/ X minus area switching function
For details of the machining guidance function, refer to the “Series
20i–TA Machining Guidance Function Operator’s Manual
(B–62204E–1).”
Screen example 1) Circular machining

422
B–63002EN/02 HAND CNC (Series 20i) 3. MACHINING GUIDANCE FUNCTION

Screen example 2) Thread cutting

Screen example 3) Groove cutting

423
4. GUIDANCE PROGRAMMING FUNCTION HAND CNC (Series 20i) B–63002EN/02

4 GUIDANCE PROGRAMMING FUNCTION

This function allows you to easily create or edit NC statement

machining programs by means of menu selection. This function is
optional on the Series 20i as it is a hand CNC developed for
general–purpose machine–tools that do not use NC statement
machining programs.
This function is supplied as a FANUC standard function. Its contents
cannot be modified.
The following menus are provided for the Series 20i–FA:
1) Feed instruction (G00, G01, G02, G03)
2) Coordinate system (G55 to G59)
3) Cutter compensation (G40 to G42)
4) Tool length compensation (G43, G44, G49)
5) Plane selection (G17 to G19)
6) Coordinate system rotation (G68, G69: optional NC function
required)
7) Inch/metric conversion (G20, G21: optional NC function required)
8) Plane machining (square plane)
9) Drilling (drill, center, tap, boring)
10) Drilling pattern position (circle periphery, arc, square, grid,
arbitrary)
11) Side machining (outer side of circle, inner side of circle, outer side
of square, outer side of track)
12) Pocket machining (circle, square, track)
The following menus are provided on the Series 20i–TA:
1) Feed instruction (G00, G01, G02, G03)
2) Coordinate system (G50)
3) Constant surface speed control (G96, G97)
4) MAIW/N feed per revolution (G98, G99)
5) Chamfering/Corner R (optional NC function required)
6) Tool nose radius compensation (G40, G42: optional NC function
required)
7) Thread cutting (G32, G92)
8) Inch/metric conversion (G20, G21: optional NC function required)

424
B–63002EN/02 HAND CNC (Series 20i) 4. GUIDANCE PROGRAMMING FUNCTION

Screen example 1) Feed instruction (Series 20i–FA)

Screen example 2) Drilling pattern position (Series 20i–FA)

Screen example 3) Pocket machining (track) data input screen (Series 20i–FA)

425
4. GUIDANCE PROGRAMMING FUNCTION HAND CNC (Series 20i) B–63002EN/02

Screen example 4) Screen example 4) Program list screen (Series 20i–TA)

Screen example 5) Thread cutting menu (Series 20i–TA)

Screen example 6) Corner radius data input screen (Series 20i–TA)

426
APPENDIX
B–63002EN/02 APPENDIX A. RANGE OF COMMAND VALUE

A RANGE OF COMMAND VALUE

429
A. RANGE OF COMMAND VALUE APPENDIX B–63002EN/02

A.1
T SERIES

Linear axis
In case of metric input,
feed screw is metric
Increment system
IS–B IS–C
Least input increment 0.001 mm 0.0001 mm
Least command increment X : 0.0005 mm X : 0.00005 mm
Y : 0.001 mm Y : 0.0001 mm
Max. programmable
±99999.999 mm ±9999.9999 mm
dimension
Max. rapid traverse *1 240000 mm/min 100000 mm/min
Feedrate range *1 Feed per minute : Feed per minute :
1 to 240000 mm/min 1 to 100000 mm/min
Feed per revolution Feed per revolution
0.0001 to 500.0000 0.0001 to 500.0000
mm/rev mm/rev
Incremental feed 0.001, 0.01, 0.1, 1mm/ 0.0001, 0.001, 0.01,
step 0.1 mm/step
Tool compensation 0 to ±999.999 mm 0 to ±999.9999 mm
Backlash compensation 0 to ±0.255 mm 0 to ±0.255 mm
Dwell time 0 to 99999.999 sec 0 to 99999.999 sec

In case of inch input,

feed screw is metric
Increment system
IS–B IS–C
Least input increment 0.0001 inch 0.00001 inch
Least command increment X : 0.00005 inch X : 0.000005 inch
Y : 0.0001 inch Y : 0.00001 inch
Max. programmable
±9999.9999 inch ±393.70078 inch
dimension
Max. rapid traverse *1 240000 mm/min 100000 mm/min
Feedrate range *1 Feed per minute : Feed per minute :
0.01 to 9600 inch/min 0.01 to 4000 inch/min
Feed per revolution Feed per revolution
0.000001 to 0.000001 to 9.999999
9.999999 inch/rev
inch/rev
Incremental feed 0.0001, 0.001, 0.01, 0.00001, 0.0001,
0.1 inch/step 0.001, 0.01 inch/step
Tool compensation 0 to ±99.9999 inch 0 to ±99.9999 inch
Backlash compensation 0 to ±0.255 mm 0 to ±0.255 mm
Dwell time 0 to 99999.999 sec 0 to 9999.9999 sec

430
B–63002EN/02 APPENDIX A. RANGE OF COMMAND VALUE

In case of inch input,

feed screw is inch
Increment system
IS–B IS–C
Least input increment 0.0001 inch 0.00001 inch
Least command increment X : 0.00005 inch X : 0.000005 inch
Y : 0.0001 inch Y : 0.00001 inch
Max. programmable
±9999.9999 inch ±999.99999 inch
dimension
Max. rapid traverse *1 9600 inch/min 4000 inch/min
Feedrate range *1 Feed per minute : Feed per minute :
0.01 to 9600 inch/min 0.01 to 4000 inch/min
Feed per revolution Feed per revolution
0.000001 to 9.999999 0.000001 to 9.999999
inch/rev inch/rev
Incremental feed 0.0001, 0.001, 0.01, 0.00001, 0.0001,
0.1 inch/step 0.001, 0.01 inch/step
Tool compensation 0 to ±99.9999 inch 0 to ±99.9999 inch
Backlash compensation 0 to ±0.0255 inch 0 to ±0.0255 inch
Dwell time 0 to 99999.999 sec 0 to 9999.9999 sec

In case of metric input,

feed screw is inch
Increment system
IS–B IS–C
Least input increment 0.001 mm 0.0001 mm
Least command increment X : 0.00005 inch X : 0.000005 inch
Y : 0.0001 inch Y : 0.00001 inch
Max. programmable
±99999.999 mm ±9999.9999 mm
dimension
Max. rapid traverse *1 9600 inch/min 960 inch/min
Feedrate range *1 Feed per minute : Feed per minute :
1 to 240000 mm/min 1 to 100000 mm/min
Feed per revolution Feed per revolution
0.0001 to 500.0000 0.0001 to 500.0000
mm/rev mm/rev
Incremental feed 0.001, 0.01, 0.1, 1mm/ 0.0001, 0.001, 0.01,
step 0.1 mm/step
Tool compensation 0 to ±999.999 mm 0 to ±999.9999 mm
Backlash compensation 0 to ±0.0255 inch 0 to ±0.0255 inch
Dwell time 0 to 99999.999 sec 0 to 9999.9999 sec

431
A. RANGE OF COMMAND VALUE APPENDIX B–63002EN/02

Rotation axis
Increment system
IS–B IS–C
Least input increment 0.001 deg 0.0001 deg
Least command increment ±0.001 deg ±0.0001 deg
Max. programmable
±99999.999 deg ±9999.9999 deg
dimension
Max. rapid traverse *1 240000 deg/min 100000 deg/min
Feedrate range *1 1 to 240000 deg/min 1 to 100000 deg/min
Incremental feed 0.001, 0.01, 0.1, 0.0001, 0.001, 0.01,
1deg/step 0.1 deg/step
Tool compensation 0 to ±999.999 mm 0 to ±999.9999 mm
Backlash compensation 0 to ±0.255 deg 0 to ±0.255 deg

NOTE
*1 The feedrate range shown above are limitations depending
on CNC interpolation capacity.
As a whole system, limitations depending on servo system
must also be considered.

432
B–63002EN/02 APPENDIX A. RANGE OF COMMAND VALUE

A.2
M SERIES
Linear axis
In case of metric input,
feed screw is metric
Increment system
IS–A IS–B IS–C
Least input increment 0.01 mm 0.001 mm 0.0001 mm
Least command 0.01 mm 0.001 mm 0.0001 mm
increment
Max. programmable
±999999.99 mm ±99999.999 mm ±9999.9999 mm
dimension
Max. rapid traverse *1 240000 mm/min 240000 mm/min 100000 mm/min
Feedrate range *1 1 to 240000 1 to 240000 1 to 100000
mm/min mm/min mm/min
Incremental feed 0.01, 0.1, 1, 10 0.001, 0.01, 0.1, 0.0001, 0.001,
mm/step 1mm/step 0.01, 0.1 mm/
step
Tool compensation 0 to ±999.99 0 to ±999.999 0 to ±999.9999
mm mm mm
Dwell time 0 to 99999.999 0 to 99999.999 0 to 99999.999
sec sec sec

In case of inch input,

feed screw is metric
Increment system
IS–A IS–B IS–C
Least input increment 0.001 inch 0.0001 inch 0.00001 inch
Least command 0.01 inch 0.0001 inch 0.00001 inch
increment
Max. programmable ±99999.999 ±9999.9999 ±393.70078
dimension inch inch inch
Max. rapid traverse *1 240000 mm/min 240000 mm/min 100000 mm/min
Feedrate range *1 0.01 to 9600 0.01 to 9600 0.01 to 4000
inch/min inch/min inch/min
Incremental feed 0.001, 0.01, 0.1, 0.0001, 0.001, 0.00001,
1 inch/step 0.01, 0.1 0.0001, 0.001,
inch/step 0.01 inch/step
Tool compensation 0 to ±99.999 0 to ±99.9999 0 to ±99.9999
inch inch inch
Dwell time 0 to 99999.999 0 to 99999.999 0 to 9999.9999
sec sec sec

433
A. RANGE OF COMMAND VALUE APPENDIX B–63002EN/02

In case of inch input,

feed screw is inch
Increment system
IS–A IS–B IS–C
Least input increment 0.001 inch 0.0001 inch 0.00001 inch
Least command in- 0.001 inch 0.0001 inch 0.00001 inch
crement
Max. programmable ±99999.999 ±9999.9999 ±9999.9999
dimension inch inch inch
Max. rapid traverse *1 9600 inch/min 0.01 to 9600 4000 inch/min
inch/min
Feedrate range *1 0.01 to 9600 0.01 to 9600 0.01 to 4000
inch/min inch/min inch/min
Incremental feed 0.001, 0.01, 0.1, 0.0001, 0.001, 0.00001,
1 inch/step 0.01, 0.1 0.0001, 0.001,
inch/step 0.01 inch/step
Tool compensation 0 to ±99.999 0 to ±99.9999 0 to ±99.9999
inch inch inch
Dwell time 0 to 99999.999 0 to 99999.999 0 to 9999.9999
sec sec sec

In case of metric input,

feed screw is inch
Increment system
IS–A IS–B IS–C
Least input increment 0.01 mm 0.001 mm 0.0001 mm
Least command 0.001 inch 0.0001 inch 0.00001 inch
increment
Max. programmable
±999999.99 mm ±99999.999 mm ±9999.9999 mm
dimension
Max. rapid traverse *1 9600 inch/min 9600 inch/min 4000 inch/min
Feedrate range *1 1 to 240000 1 to 240000 1 to 100000
mm/min mm/min mm/min
Incremental feed 0.01, 0.1, 1, 10 0.001, 0.01, 0.1, 0.0001, 0.001,
mm/step 1mm/step 0.01, 0.1 mm/
step
Tool compensation 0 to ±999.99 0 to ±999.999 0 to ±999.9999
mm mm mm
Dwell time 0 to 99999.999 0 to 99999.999 0 to 9999.9999
sec sec sec

434
B–63002EN/02 APPENDIX A. RANGE OF COMMAND VALUE

Rotation axis
Increment system
IS–B IS–C
Least input increment 0.001 deg 0.0001 deg
Least command in- ±0.001 deg ±0.0001 deg
crement
Max. programmable
±99999.999 deg ±9999.9999 deg
dimension
Max. rapid traverse *1 240000 deg/min 100000 deg/min
Feedrate range *1 1 to 240000 deg/min 1 to 100000 deg/min
Incremental feed 0.001, 0.01, 0.1, 1 0.0001, 0.001, 0.01, 0.1
deg/step deg/step

NOTE
*1 The feedrate range shown above are limitations depending
on CNC interpolation capacity.
As a whole system, limitations depending on servo system
must also be considered.

435
B. FUNCTIONS AND TAPE FORMAT LIST APPENDIX B–63002EN/02

B FUNCTIONS AND TAPE FORMAT LIST

436
B–63002EN/02 APPENDIX B. FUNCTIONS AND TAPE FORMAT LIST

B.1 Some functions cannot be added as options depending on the model.

In the tables below, IP :presents a combination of arbitrary axis
T SERIES
addresses using X and Z.
x = 1st basic axis (X usually)
z = 2nd basic axis (Z usually)

(1/5)
Functions Illustration Tape format

IP
Positioning (G00) G00 IP_ ;
Start point

IP
Linear interpolation (G01) G01 IP_ F_;
Start point

Start point
G02 R_
Circular interpolation G17 X_ Y_ F_ ;
(G02, G03) G03 I_ J_
R G02
I G02 R_
G18 X_ Z_ F_ ;
G03 I_ K_
K (x, z)
G02 R_
(x, z) G03 G19 Y_ Z_ F_ ;
G03 J_ K_

R I
Start
K point

Dwell (G04) X_ ;
G04
P_

Cylindrical interpolation G07.1 IP_R_;

(G07.1) Cylindrical interpolation mode
(G107) G07.1 IP0 ;
Cylindrical interpolation mode
cancel
R: Radius of cylinder

Polar coordinate interpolation G12.1 ;

(G12.1, G13.1) Polar coordinate interpolation
(G112, G113) mode
G13.1 ;
Polar coordinate interpolation
mode cancel

Change of offset value by Tool geometry offset value

program(G10) G10 P_ X_ Z_ R_ Q_ ;
P=1000+Geometry offset number
Tool wear offset value
G10 P_ X_ Z_ R_ Q_ ;
P=Wear offset number

437
B. FUNCTIONS AND TAPE FORMAT LIST APPENDIX B–63002EN/02

(2/5)
Functions Illustration Tape format

Plane selection G17 ;

(G17, G18, G19) G18 ;
G19 ;

Inch/metric conversion Inch input : G20

(G20, G21) Metric input : G21

Stored stroke check 2, 3 (X, Z) G22X_ Z_ I_K_ ;

(G22, G23) G23 ;

(I, K)

Spindle speed fluctuation G25 ;

detection (G25, G26) G26 P_ Q_ R_ ;

Reference position return IP

G27 IP_ ;
check (G27)
Start position

Reference position (G28)

Reference position return G28 IP_ ;
(G28)
Intermediate position G30 IP_ ;
2nd, reference position re- IP
turn (G30)
2nd reference
position (G30) Start position

ÇÇÇ G41

ÇÇÇ
Cutter compensation G41
(G40, G41, G42) G42 P_ ;

ÇÇÇ ÇÇÇ
G40

ÇÇÇ ÇÇÇ
P : Tool offset number
G40 : Cancel

ÇÇÇ ÇÇÇ
G42
Tool

Skip function (G31) IP G31 IP_ F_;

Skip
Start signal
position
F
Thread cutting (G32) Equal lead thread cutting
G32 IP_ F_;

Variable–lead threading G34 IP_ F_K_;

438
B–63002EN/02 APPENDIX B. FUNCTIONS AND TAPE FORMAT LIST

(3/5)
Functions Illustration Tape format

Measurement
Automatic tool compensation position G36 X xa ;
(G36, G37) G37 Z za ;
Measurement
position arrival
signal

Start
position
Compensation
value

Tool–tip radius compensation

ÇÇÇ G41 G41

ÇÇÇ
(G40, G41, G42) G42 IP_ ;

ÇÇÇ ÇÇÇ G40 : Cancel

ÇÇÇ ÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇ
G42
G40

Coordinate system setting G50 X_ Z_ ;

X
Spindle speed setting Coordinate system setting
(G50) G50 S_ ; Spindle speed setting

Polygon turning G51.2 (G251) P_Q_ ;

(G50.2, G51.2) P,Q :Rotation ratio of spindle and
(G250, G251) rotary axis
G50.2 (G250) ; Cancel

Workpiece coordinate G50.3 IP 0 ;

system preset (G50.3)

Local coordinate system G52 IP _ ;

setting (G52) Local coordinate
x
IP Workpiece
y
coordinate

Machine coordinate system G53 IP _ ;

selection (G53)
Workpiece coordinate system G54
selection (G54 to G59) IP :
Offset from IP _ ;
workpiece G59
reference
point
Workpiece coordinate
system

Machine coordinate system

439
B. FUNCTIONS AND TAPE FORMAT LIST APPENDIX B–63002EN/02

(4/5)
Functions Illustration Tape format

Custom macro One–shot call

(G65, G66, G67) Macro G65 P_L <argument> ;
O_ ; P : Program number
G65 P_L_ ; L : Repetition count
M99 ; Modal call
G66 P_L <argument> ;
G67 ; Cancel

Mirror image for double G68 ;

turret (G68, G69) Mirror image for double turret on
G69 ; Mirror image cancel

Canned cycle for drilling See Chapter 13, “Functions to G80 ; Cancel
(G80 to G89) Simplify Programming” in Part II. G83 X(U)_C(H)_Z(W)_R_Q_P_F_M_K_;
G84 X(U)_C(H)_Z(W)_R_P_F_M_K_;
G85 X(U)_C(H)_Z(W)_R_P_F_M_K_;
G87 Z(W)_C(H)_X(U)_R_Q_P_F_M_K_;
G88 Z(W)_C(H)_X(U)_R_P_F_M_K_;
G89 Z(W)_C(H)_X(U)_R_P_F_M_K_;
Feed per minute (G98) mm/min inch/min G98 … F_ ;
mm/rev inch/rev
Feed per revolution (G99) G99 … F_ ;

Constant surface speed m/min or feet/min G96 S_ ;

control (G96/G97) G97 ; Cancel
N (rpm)

Chamfering, Corner R k
Ck
X_ ; R_ P_ ;

Ci
i Z_ ; R_ P_ ;
R

440
B–63002EN/02 APPENDIX B. FUNCTIONS AND TAPE FORMAT LIST

(5/5)
Functions Illustration Tape format

Canned cycle Refer to II.14. FUNCTIONS TO N_ G70 P_ Q_ ;

(G71 to G76) SIMPLIFY PROGRAMMING G71 U_ R_ ;
(G90, G92, G94) G71 P_ Q_ U_ W_ F_ S_ T_ ;
G72 W_ R_ ;
G72 P_ Q_ U_ W_ F_ S_ T_ ;
G73 U_ W_ R_ ;
G73 P_ Q_ U_ W_ F_ S_ T_ ;
G74 R_ ;
G74 X(u)_ Z(w)_ P_ Q_ R_ F_ ;
G75 R_ ;
G75 X(u)_ Z(w)_ P_ Q_ R_ F_ ;
G76 P_ Q_ R_ ;
G76 X(u)_ Z(w)_ P_ Q_ R_ F_ ;

G94 X_ Z_ K_ F_ ;

G90
X_ Z_ I_ F_ ;
G92

Absolute/incremental G90_ ; Absolute programming

programming G91_ ; Incremental programming
(G90/G91) G90_ G91_ ;
(With G code system B or C) Absolute and incremental
programming

Return to initial point/R point G98 G98_ ;

I point
(G98, G99) G99_ ;
(With G code system B or C)
G99
R point

Z point

441
B. FUNCTIONS AND TAPE FORMAT LIST APPENDIX B–63002EN/02

B.2 Some functions cannot be added as options depending on the model.

In the tables below, IP :presents a combination of arbitrary axis
M SERIES
addresses using X,Y,Z,A,B and C (such as X_Y_Z_A_).
x = 1st basic axis (X usually)
y = 2nd basic axis (Y usually)
z = 3rd basic axis (Z usually)

(1/6)
Functions Illustration Tape format

IP
Positioning (G00) G00 IP_ ;
Start point

IP
Linear interpolation (G01) G01 IP_ F_;
Start point

Start point
G02 R_
Circular interpolation G17 X_ Y_ F_ ;
(G02, G03) G03 I_ J_
R G02
J
G02 R_
G18 X_ Z_ F_ ;
G03 I_ K_
I (x, y)
(x, y) G03 G02 R_
G19 Y_ Z_ F_ ;
Start point G03 J_ K_

R J

Helical interpolation z G02 R_

(G02, G03) G17 X_ Y_ _F_ ;
G03 I_ J_

G02 R_
G18 X_ Z_ _F_ ;
Start G03 I_ K_
point (xyz)
G02 R_
(x, y) G19 Y_ Z_ _F_ ;
G03 J_ K_
When G03 is specified for
the XY plane : Any address other than that of
a circular interpolation axis

Dwell (G04) X_ ;
(In case of X–Y plane) G04
P_

Cylindrical interpolation G07.1 IP_R_ ;

(G07.1) Cylindrical interpolation mode
R : Radius of cylinder
G07.1 IP 0 ;
Cylindrical interpolation mode cancel

442
B–63002EN/02 APPENDIX B. FUNCTIONS AND TAPE FORMAT LIST

(2/6)
Functions Illustration Tape format

Look–ahead control G08 P1 ;

(G08) Look–ahead control mode on
G08 P0 ;
Look–ahead control mode off

Exact stop (G09) Velocity

G09 IP_;
Time

Change of offset
value by program G10 P_R_;

ÇÇÇ
(G10)

Cutter compensation B
ÇÇÇ G41 G17

ÇÇÇ
G41

ÇÇÇ
(G39 – G42) G18 G42 H_ ;
G40

ÇÇÇ ÇÇÇ
G19
Cutter compensation C

ÇÇÇÇÇÇ
(G40 – G42)
H : Tool offset
G42
Tool G40 : Cancel

Tool length offset A G43

Z_ H_ ;
(G43, G44, G49) Offset G44

G43
Z H_ ;
G44

H : Tool offset
G49 : Cancel

G17 G43 Z_
Tool length offset B G18 Y_
(G43, G44, G49) G44 H_ ;
G19 X_

G17 G43
G18 H_ ;
G19 G44

H : Tool offset
G49 : Cancel

Polar coordinate input Local coordinate G17 G16 Xp_Yp ⋅⋅⋅ ;

(G15, G16) system G18 G16 Zp_Xp ⋅⋅⋅ ;
Yp
Xp G19 G16 Yp_Zp ⋅⋅⋅ ;
G15 ; Cancel
Yp

Xp
Workpiece coordinate
system

Plane selection G17 ;

(G17, G18, G19) G18 ;
G19 ;

443
B. FUNCTIONS AND TAPE FORMAT LIST APPENDIX B–63002EN/02

(3/6)
Functions Illustration Tape format

Inch/metric G20 ; Inch input

conversion (G20, G21)
G21 ; Metric input

Stored stroke check (XYZ) G22 X_Y_Z_I_J_K_ ;

(G22, G23)
G23 ; Cancel

(IJK)
IP
Reference position return G27 IP_ ;
check (G27)
Start point
Reference position (G28)
Reference position return G28 IP_ ;
(G28)
Intermediate position G30 IP_ ;
2nd, reference position re- IP
turn (G30)
2nd reference
position (G30) Start point
Reference position
Return from reference G29 IP_ ;
position to start point
(G29)

Intermediate position IP

IP
Skip function (G31) G31 IP_ F_;

Skip signal
Start point

ÅÅ
ÅÅ
Threading (G33) F G33 IP _ F ;
F : Lead

ÅÅ
ÅÅ
ÅÅ
ÅÅ
ÇÇÇ G41 G17

ÇÇÇ
Cutter compensation C G41
(G40 to G42) G18 G42 D_ ;

ÇÇÇ ÇÇÇ
G19

ÇÇÇ ÇÇÇ D : Tool offset number

ÇÇÇ ÇÇÇ
G42 G40 : Cancel
G40

Normal–direction control G41.1 (G151)

(G40.1, G41.1, G42.1) Normal–direction control left
(G150, G151, G152) G42.1 (G152)
Normal–direction control right
G40.1 (G150)
Normal–direction control cancel

444
B–63002EN/02 APPENDIX B. FUNCTIONS AND TAPE FORMAT LIST

(4/6)
Functions Illustration Tape format

Tool length compensation A G43

(G43, G44, G49) Z_ H_ ;
Offset G44

G43
Z H_ ;
G44

H : Tool offset number

G49 : Cancel

Tool length compensa- Z_

G17 G43
tion B Y_
G18 G44 H_ ;
(G43, G44, G49) X_
G19
G17 G43
G18 H_ ;
G19 G44

H : Tool offset number

G49 : Cancel

Tool length compensation C G43

(G43, G44, G49) _H_ ;
G44

 : Any address of a single axis

H : Tool offset number
G49 : Cancel

Tool offset (G45 to G48) G 45 Increase G45

G46
IP Decrease G47 IP _ D_ ;
G 46
2 times G48
G 47 increase D : Tool offset number
2 times
G 48 IP
decrease

Compensation value

Scaling (G50, G51) P4 P3 G51 X_Y_Z_ P_

;
P4 ’ P3’ I_J_K_
IP
P, I, J, K : Scaling magnification
X, Y, Z : Coordinates of center of
P1’ P2’ scaling
G50 ; Cancel
P1 P2

Programmable mirror image Mirror G51.1 IP_ ;

(G50.1, G51.1) G50.1 ; ⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅ Cancel
IP

Local coordinate system G52 IP_ ;

setting (G52)
x Local coordinate
IP
y Workpiece
coordinate

445
B. FUNCTIONS AND TAPE FORMAT LIST APPENDIX B–63002EN/02

(5/6)
Functions Illustration Tape format

Machine coordinate system G53 IP_ ;

selection (G53)

Workpiece coordinate G54

IP
system selection Offset from : IP _ ;
(G54 to G59) workpiece G59
Additional workpiece coordi- origin
nate system selection G54.1 P _ IP_ ;
Workpiece
(G54.1)
coordinate system

Machine coordinate system

Unidirectional positioning G60 IP_ ;

IP
(G60)

Cutting mode G64_ ; Cutting mode

Exact stop mode v G61_ ; Exact stop mode
Tapping mode G63_ ; Tapping mode
G64
t

Automatic corner override G62_ ; Automatic corner override

v

G61
t

Custom macro One–shot call

(G65, G66, G67) Macro G65 P_L <argument> ;
O_ ; P : Program number
G65 P_L_ ; L : Repetition count
M99 ; Continuous–state call
G66 P_L <argument> ;
G67 ; Cancel

Coordinate system rotation G17 X_Y_

Y
(G68, G69) G68 G18 Z_X_ R;
G19 Y_Z_

(x y) G69 ; Cancel
X
XY plane

Canned cycles Refer to II.14. FUNCTIONS TO G80 ; Cancel

(G73, G74, G80 – G89) SIMPLIFY PROGRAMMING
G73
G74
G76
X_ Y_ Z_ P_ Q_ R_ F_ K_ ;
G81
:
G89

Absolute/incremental G90_ ; Absolute command

programming (G90/G91)
G91_ ; Incremental command

G90_ G91_ ; Combined use

446
B–63002EN/02 APPENDIX B. FUNCTIONS AND TAPE FORMAT LIST

(6/6)
Functions Illustration Tape format

Change of workpiece
Ç
Ç
G92 IP_ ;
coordinate system (G92)
IP

ÇÇ G92 IP_ ;

ÇÇ
Workpiece coordinate
system change (G92)
IP

Workpiece coordinate G92.1 IP 0 ;

system preset (G92.1)
Feed per minute/rotation mm/min inch/min G98 F_ ;
(G94, G95) mm/rev inch/rev G99 F_ ;

Constant surface speed G96 S_ ;

control (G96, G97) G97 S_ ;

Initial point return / R point G98_ ;

G98
return (G98, G99) Initial
level G99_ ;
G99
R level

Z point

447
C. LIST OF TAPE CODE APPENDIX B–63002EN/02

C LIST OF TAPE CODE

ISO code EIA code

Custom
Remarks macro B
Character 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 Character 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
Not
Used
used
0    0   Number 0
1      1   Number 1
2      2   Number 2
3      3     Number 3
4      4   Number 4
5      5     Number 5
6      6     Number 6
7        7     Number 7
8      8   Number 8
9      9     Number 9
A    a     Address A
B    b     Address B
C      c       Address C
D    d     Address D
E      e       Address E
F      f       Address F
G      g       Address G
H    h     Address H
I      i       Address I
J      j     Address J
K      k     Address K
L      l     Address L
M      m     Address M
N      n     Address N
O        o     Address O
P    p       Address P
Q      q     Address Q
R      r     Address R
S      s     Address S
T      t     Address T
U      u     Address U
V      v     Address V
W        w     Address W
X      x       Address X
Y      y     Address Y

448
B–63002EN/02 APPENDIX C. LIST OF TAPE CODE

ISO code EIA code

Custom
Remarks macro B
Character 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 Character 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
Not
Used
used
Z      z     Address Z
Delete
DEL          Del         (deleting a


mispunch)
No. punch.
With EIA
code, this
code cannot
NUL  Blank 


be used in a
significant
information
section.
BS    BS     Backspace


HT    Tab       Tabulator


LF or NL    CR or EOB   End of block
Carriage
CR      ___ 


return
SP    SP   Space  
Absolute
%      ER    
rewind stop
Control out
(    (2–4–5)     (start of com-
ment)
Control in
)      (2–4–7)     (end of
comment)
+      +     Plus sign 
–      –   Minus sign
Colon
:      ___ 
(address O)
Optional
/        /    
block skip
Period
.      .       (decimal
point)
Parameter
#       Sharp
(No. 6012)
$    ___  Dollar sign


&      &     Ampersand  
’      ___  Apostrophe  
Parameter
*       Asterisk 
(No. 6010)
,      ,       Comma
;        ___  Semicolon


Left angle
<        
bracket

449
C. LIST OF TAPE CODE APPENDIX B–63002EN/02

ISO code EIA code

Custom
Remarks macro B
Character 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 Character 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
Not
Used
used
Parameter
=         Equal sign 
(No. 6011)
Right angle
>        ___   
bracket
Question
?        ___   
mark
Commercial
@    ___   
at mark
Quotation
”   ___   
mark
Parameter Left square
[         
(No. 6013) bracket
Parameter Right square
]         
(No. 6014) bracket

NOTE
1 The symbols in the Remarks column have the following meanings:
Blank: Registered in memory as significant information. Any invalid use of these
codes in information other than a comment will cause an alarm.

: Not registered in memory (ignored)
 : Registered in memory but ignored during the execution of a program
 : Registered in memory. The use of these codes in information other than
a comment will cause an alarm.
 : Not registered in memory when used in information other than a comment.
Registered in memory when used in a comment.
2 Any code other than those listed in the table is always ignored, provided its parity
is valid.
3 Any code having an invalid parity will cause a TH alarm. Within a comment,
however, such a code is ignored and will not cause a TH alarm.
4 With EIA code, the code with all eight holes punched has special meaning. It is
ignored and does not cause any parity alarm.

450
B–63002EN/02 APPENDIX D. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS BASIC UNIT

D EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS BASIC UNIT

451
D. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS BASIC UNIT APPENDIX B–63002EN/02

Fig. 1 EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF CNC CONTROL UNIT WITH 7.2″/8.4″ LCD

At the rear of the metal panel, the area within 8 mm of the outside edge is left unpainted.

Mounting hole diagram

M4 stud

No optional slot Two optional slots Four optional slots

452
B–63002EN/02 APPENDIX D. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS BASIC UNIT

Fig. 2 EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF CNC CONTROL UNIT WITH 9.5″/10.4″ LCD

At the rear of the metal panel, the area within 8 mm of

the outside edge is left unpainted.

Mounting hole diagram

M4 stud

No optional slot Two optional slots Four optional slots

453
E. PRINT BOARD APPENDIX B–63002EN/02

E PRINT BOARD

454
B–63002EN/02 APPENDIX E. PRINT BOARD

Motherboard
(without PC functions)

Rear of the unit

COP10A (Connector on axis control card)

JD36B
JD36A

JD1A
JA40

JA41
CA54
CA55

CP1B
CP1A
Motherboard

CN3 CN8B
JNA

Motherboard CN2
JD36B
JD36A

JD1A
JA40

JA41
CA54
CA55

CP1B
CP1A

Axis control card Display control card CPU card

COP10A

Motherboard

455
E. PRINT BOARD APPENDIX B–63002EN/02

Connector name Function

COP10A Servo amplifier (FSSB)

CA55 MDI

CA54 Servo check

JD36A RS–232C serial port

JD36B RS–232C serial port

JA40 Analog output/high–speed DI

JD1A Serial I/O Link

JA41 Serial spindle/position coder

CP1B DC24V–OUT

CP1A DC24V–IN

JNA F–BUS interface

CN8B Video signal interface

CN2 PCMCIA interface

CN3 Inverter PCB interface

2 to 8 servo LCD control The following functions

axes circuit are built into flash ROM.

Basic function
Spindle control Boot function
circuit (ROM) Conversational
function or
macro executor
PMC–RB5/RB6
control circuit PMC–RB
function

Analog output/ Digital servo

high–speed DI function

456
B–63002EN/02 APPENDIX E. PRINT BOARD

Motherboard
(with PC functions)

Rear of the unit

COP10A (Connector on axis control card)

JD36A
JD36B
CA54

JD1A
CA55
JD33

JA40

JA41
CN2
CD32B

CP1B
CP1A
CD32A
CNY1 CD34

CNH1

Motherboard

CN3 CN8B
JNA

Motherboard CN2
JD36A
JD36B
CA54

JD1A
CA55
JD33

JA40

JA41

CD32B
CP1B
CP1A

CN2
CD32A
CNY1 CD34

CNH1

Axis control card PC function card CPU card

COP10A

457
E. PRINT BOARD APPENDIX B–63002EN/02

Connector name Function

JD33 RS–232C on PC side

COP10A Servo amplifier (FSSB)

CA55 MDI

CA54 Servo check

JD36A RS–232C serial port

JD36B RS–232C serial port

JA40 Analog output/high–speed DI

JD1A Serial I/O Link

JA41 Serial spindle/position coder

CP1B DC24V–OUT

CP1A DC24V–IN

CNY1 PC expansion

CD34 FDD signal

CNH1 HDD

CN2 FDD power

CD32A Keyboard

CD32B Mouse

JNA F–BUS interface

CN8B Video signal interface

CN2 PCMCIA interface

CN3 Inverter PCB interface

2 to 8 servo PC function The following functions

axes are built into flash ROM.

Basic function
Spindle control Boot function
circuit (ROM) Conversational
function or
macro executor
PMC–RB5/RB6
control circuit PMC–RB
function

Analog output/ Digital servo

high–speed DI function

458
B–63002EN/02 APPENDIX E. PRINT BOARD

Inverter PCB

With 4 option slots

CN39A CN39B CN39C CN39D

CP1 CP8

CN3

Without option slots or with 2 option slots

CN39A CN39B

CP1 CP8

CN3

Connector name Function

CN39A

CN39B
Fan power
CN39C

CN39D

CP8 Battery

CP1 LCD backlight power

CN3 Inverter PCB power

459
E. PRINT BOARD APPENDIX B–63002EN/02

Sub–CPU board

CPU card
Axis control card

COP10A

JNA
F–BUS connector

CA54 JA41 JA40

Connector name Function

COP10A Servo amplifier (FSSB)

CA54 Servo check

JA41 Serial spindle/position coder

JA40 Analog output

Sub–CPU for 2 to 8 servo Spindle

Analog output
2–path control axes control circuit

460
B–63002EN/02 APPENDIX E. PRINT BOARD

Loader control board

Axis control card CPU card

COP10A

JNA
F–BUS connector

CA54 JD1A

Connector name Function

COP10A Servo amplifier (FSSB)

CA54 Servo check

JD1A Serial I/O Link

2 or 4 servo Main memory for PMC control Loader control

axes loader control circuit function

461
E. PRINT BOARD APPENDIX B–63002EN/02

Serial communication
board (remote buffer/
DNC1/DNC2/HDLC)

CPU card

JNA
F–BUS connector

JD28A JD6A

Connector name Function

JD28A RS–232C serial port

JD6A RS–422 serial port

Communication
function

462
B–63002EN/02 APPENDIX E. PRINT BOARD

C board

CPU card

JNA
F–BUS connector

C function for PMC

463
E. PRINT BOARD APPENDIX B–63002EN/02

CAP–II board

CPU card

JNA
F–BUS connector

CP8B

Connector name Function

Connector name Function

CP8B For SRAM backup battery

CAP II function

464
B–63002EN/02 APPENDIX E. PRINT BOARD

RISC board

JNA
F–BUS connector

High–precision contour control function

465
E. PRINT BOARD APPENDIX B–63002EN/02

Data server board

JNA Add–on board

F–BUS connector

CNH1

CD27

CD27 is provided on the

add–on board.

Connector name Function

CNH1 IDE hard disk interface

CD27 Ethernet interface

Data server function

466
B–63002EN/02 APPENDIX E. PRINT BOARD

HSSB interface board

JNA
F–BUS connector

COP7

Connector name Function

COP7 High–speed serial bus interface

High–speed serial bus interface

467
F. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS MDI UNIT APPENDIX B–63002EN/02

F EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS MDI UNIT

468
B–63002EN/02 APPENDIX F. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS MDI UNIT

Fig. 1 EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF SEPARATE–TYPE SMALL MDI UNIT

Mounting hole diagram

At the rear of the metal panel, the area within 8 mm of the

outside edge is left unpainted.

469
F. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS MDI UNIT APPENDIX B–63002EN/02

Fig. 2 EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF SEPARATE–TYPE STANDARD MDI UNIT

Mounting hole diagram

At the rear of the metal panel, the area within 8 mm of

the outside edge is left unpainted.

470
B–63002EN/02 APPENDIX F. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS MDI UNIT

EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF SEPARATE–TYPE STANDARD MDI UNIT

(HORIZONTAL TYPE)
Fig. 3

Mounting hole diagram

At the rear of the metal panel, the area within 8 mm of

the outside edge is left unpainted.

471
F. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS MDI UNIT APPENDIX B–63002EN/02

EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF SEPARATE–TYPE STANDARD MDI UNIT

(VERTICAL TYPE)
Fig. 4

Mounting hole diagram

At the rear of the metal panel, the area within 8 mm of

the outside edge is left unpainted.

472
B–63002EN/02 APPENDIX F. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS MDI UNIT

EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF SEPARATE–TYPE STANDARD MDI UNIT

(VERTICAL TYPE) FOR 160i/180i
Fig. 5

Mounting hole diagram

At the rear of the metal panel, the area within 8 mm of

the outside edge is left unpainted.

473
F. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS MDI UNIT APPENDIX B–63002EN/02

Fig. 6 EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF FA FULL KEYBOARD

Mounting hole diagram

M4 stud

At the rear of the metal panel, the area within 8 mm of

the outside edge is left unpainted.

474
B–63002EN/02 APPENDIX F. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS MDI UNIT

Fig. 7(a) EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF 101–TYPE FULL KEYBOARD (ENGLISH)

Specification No.: A86L–0001–0210

NOTE
This keyboard is not dust–proof. It should be used for
program development only. It can be used at temperatures
of between 0 and 40°C.

475
F. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS MDI UNIT APPENDIX B–63002EN/02

Fig. 7(b) EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF 106–TYPE FULL KEYBOARD (JAPANESE)

Specification No.: A86L–0001–0211

NOTE
This keyboard is not dust–proof. It should be used for
program development only. It can be used at temperatures
of between 0 and 40°C.

476
B–63002EN/02 APPENDIX F. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS MDI UNIT

Fig. 8 EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF MOUSE

Specification No.: A86L–0001–0212

66±2

13±1

25±1.5

104±2
41.5 ± 2

1.5±1

Units: mm

NOTE
This mouse is not dust–proof. It should be used for program
development only. It can be used at temperatures of
between 0 and 40°C. The mouse is fitted with a 2.7–m
cable.

477
G. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF EACH UNIT APPENDIX B–63002EN/02

G EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF EACH UNIT

478
B–63002EN/02 APPENDIX G. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF EACH UNIT

EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF HIGH–SPEED SERIAL BUS INTERFACE

BOARD TYPE 2 (FOR PC)
Fig. 1
Specification No.: A20B–8100–0100

479
G. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF EACH UNIT APPENDIX B–63002EN/02

Fig. 2 POSITION CODER

Specification : A86L–0026–0001#102 (Max. 4000rpm)

A86L–0026–0001#002 (Max. 6000rpm)

2 +0
–0.11

φ14.3
φ68
–0.006 –0.009
–0.017 –0.025
φ16
φ15 φ50
1.15 +0.14
–0

20
5
Connector 30
3

98

4 φ5.4

Note : Mechanical specifications of the position coder

are as follows :
(1) Input axis inertia
1.0_10–3kgcmsec2 or less
+0.012 (2) Input axis starting torque
5 –0 100gcm or less
(3) Input axis permissible loads
(4) Weight : 1kg or less

Radial Thrust
3 +0.05
–0
Operation 1kg or less 1kg or less
Idle 20kg or less 10kg or less

Attach a pulley directly to the position coder

shaft and drive the timing belt. Confirm that the
loads conform with the above allowable value.

¢56
¢68

480
B–63002EN/02 APPENDIX G. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF EACH UNIT

Fig. 3 MANUAL PULSE GENERATOR

Specification : A860–0202–T001

83.5
φ80.0
φ55.0
50.0
30.0

M4X8.0

60.0

3 holes equally spaced

on a 72 dia
11.0

PULSE GENERATOR

FANUC LTD

0V A 5VB

M3 screw terminal
120.0°

481
G. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF EACH UNIT APPENDIX B–63002EN/02

Fig. 4 PENDANT TYPE MANUAL PULSE GENERATOR

Specification : A860–0202–T004 to T015

A860–0202–T004 to T009

90 38.0 M3 screw
terminal
25
140

100.0
39.0
M3 screw
terminal

A860–0202–T010 to T015

90 38.0 M3 screw
terminal
25
140

100.0
39.0

M3 screw
terminal

482
B–63002EN/02 APPENDIX G. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF EACH UNIT

Fig. 5 EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF SEPARATE DETECTOR INTERFACE UNIT

483
G. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF EACH UNIT APPENDIX B–63002EN/02

Fig. 6 BATTERY CASE FOR SEPARATE TYPE ABSOLUTE PULSE CODER

Specification : A06B–6050–K060

103 Minus polarity indication

4–M4 counter sinking Plus polarity indication

Plus terminal with

3–M3 screw holes

Minus terminal with

3–M3 screw holes

FANUC

40
4–ø4.3 Mounting holes
Arrow view A

14.1

13.2
78 78

484
B–63002EN/02 APPENDIX G. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF EACH UNIT

Fig. 7 EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF TAP

50

25 25
5 5

65

5 32.5
1 2 3

100
35

120

Fig. 8 EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF TERMINAL RESISTANCE UNIT

39.3 16.0

ÔÔÔ
ÔÔÔ
ÔÔÔ
47.0

485
G. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF EACH UNIT APPENDIX B–63002EN/02

Fig. 9 EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF EXTERNAL CNC BATTERY UNIT

Main unit
Cover

103 115
M4 tap
4
70

81 93

13.5 47 Mounting panel hole drilling

Mounting hole
(countersink)

145

The battery unit is fitted with a 14–m battery cable.

486
B–63002EN/02 APPENDIX G. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF EACH UNIT

Fig. 10 EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF PUNCH PANEL (NARROW TYPE)

Mounting hole diagram

At the rear of the metal panel, the area within 8 mm of

the outside edge is left unpainted.

487
G. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF EACH UNIT APPENDIX B–63002EN/02

Fig. 11 PORTABLE TAPE READER WITHOUT REELS

Specification : A13B–0074–B001

380 240

Paint : Munsell No. 5GY3.5/0.5 leather tone finish

Weight : Applox. 15kg

488
B–63002EN/02 APPENDIX G. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF EACH UNIT

Fig. 12 PORTABLE TAPE READER WITH REELS

Specification : A13B–0087–B001

530

489
G. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF EACH UNIT APPENDIX B–63002EN/02

Fig. 13 STANDARD MACHINE OPERATOR’S PANEL

Specification : A02B–0080–C141 (T series)

A02B–0080–C142 (M series)

490
B–63002EN/02 Index
Numbers Basic addresses and command value range, 121
Bell–shaped acceleration/deceleration after cutting feed
1–block plural M command, 114 interpolation, 71
2nd, 3rd and 4th reference position return (G30), 79 Buffer register, 271
Built–in personal computer function, 354
Butt–type reference position setting, 81, 82
A
Abnormal load detection, 345
Absolute and incremental programming (G90, G91), 96 C
Acceleration/deceleration before interpolation by pre-reading C Language executer function, 223
multiple blocks, 235
Canned cycles (G73, G74, G76, G80-G89, G98, G99) (M
Accuracy compensation function, 193 series), 125
Activation of automatic operation, 271 Canned cycles for cylindrical grinding (T series), 158
Actual spindle speed output (T series), 102 Canned cycles for drilling (G80-G89) (T series), 149
Addition of tool pairs for tool life management <512 pairs (M Canned cycles for turning (T series), 134
series) /128 pairs (T series)>, 112
Chamfering and corner R ( T series), 150
Additional optional block skip, 123
Changing of tool offset amount (Programmable data input)
Additional workpiece coordinate systems (G54.1 or G54) (M (G10), 188
series), 91
Chopping function (G80, G81.1), 249
Alarm signal, 347
Chuck/tail stock barrier (T series), 342
All axes interlock, 344
Circular interpolation (G02, G03), 42
All-axes machine lock, 279
Circular threading (G35, G36) (T series), 62
Applicable machines, 361, 368, 375
Clearing the screen, 317
Arbitrary axis angular axis control, 248
Clock function, 294
Automatic acceleration/deceleration, 68
CNC control unit with 7.2″/8.4″ LCD, 281
Automatic coordinate system setting, 87
CNC control unit with 9.5″/10.4″ LCD, 282
Automatic corner deceleration (M series), 228
Color setting screen, 319
Automatic corner override (G62) (M series), 74 Constant surface speed control, 102
Automatic operation, 268 Constant surface speed control signal, 348
Automatic operation signal, 347 Continuous feed plane grinding cycle (G78), 165
Automatic operation start signal, 347 Continuous high–speed skip function (G31, P90) (M series),
Automatic operation stop, 272 204

Automatic reference position return (G28, G29 (Only for M Continuous thread cutting (T series), 62
series )), 78 Contrast adjustment screen, 319
Automatic tool offset (G37, G36) (T series), 206 Control axis detach, 239
Automatic velocity control function, 236 Control-in/control-out, 123
Auxiliary function lock, 279 Controlled axes, 24
Axes control, 238 Conversational automatic programming function, 376
Axis control by PMC, 26 Conversational automatic programming function for lathes, 360
Axis control with PMC, 247 Conversational automatic programming function for machining
Axis move direction signal, 348 centers, 388

Axis names, 27 Conversational programming Of figures (Only at 1–path

control), 323
Coordinate system conversion, 197
Coordinate system rotation (G68, G69) – (M series) (G68.1,
B G69.1) – (T series), 198
Coordinate systems, 83
B–axis control (T series), 248
Coordinate value and dimension, 95
Background drawing (M series), 305
Copying a program between two paths, 261
Background editing, 321
Corner circular interpolation function (G39) (M series), 183
Backlash compensation, 195
Corner circular interpolation function (G39) (T series), 178
Backlash compensation specific to rapid traverse and cutting
feed, 195 Count input of tool offset values (T series), 212
Balance cut (G68, G69) (T series), 257 Cs contour control, 26, 106

i–1
INDEX B–63002EN/02

Custom macro, 213, 214 Expanded part program editing, 322

Cutter compensation (M series), 181 Explanation of the function keys, 288
Cutter compensation B (G40 - 42), 181 Explanation of the keyboard, 287
Cutter compensation C (G40 - G42), 181 Explanation of the soft keys, 289

Cutting cycle A (G77) (with G code system A: G90), 134 Exponential function interpolation (G02.3, G03.3) (M series),
51
Cutting feed rate, 65 Extended tool life management (M series), 112
Cutting feed rate clamp, 65 External alarm message, 350
Cutting mode (G64) (M series), 74 External control of I/O device, 322
Cycle start, 271 External data input, 349
Cylindrical interpolation (G07.1), 48 External deceleration, 345
External dimensions basic unit, 451
External dimensions MDI unit, 468

D External dimensions of each unit, 478

External machine zero point shift, 350
Data input/output, 326
External memory and sub program calling function, 120
Data input/output function based on the I/O link and data
input/output function B based on the I/O link, 333 External operation function (G81) (M series), 133

Data protection key, 314 External operator’s message, 351

External program input, 328
Data server, 332
External program number search, 350
Decimal point input/pocket calculator type decimal point input,
98 External tool compensation, 350
DI status output signal, 348 External workpiece coordinate system shift, 350
Diagnosis functions, 324 External workpiece number search, 270

Diameter and radius programming (T series), 98 Externally setting the stroke limit, 341

Direct drawing dimensions programming (T series), 153

Direct input of tool compensation measured value/direct input
of workpiece coordinate system shift amount (T series), 208 F
Direct input of workpiece zero point offset value measured, 212 F1–digit feed, 66
Directory display and punch for a specified group, 317 FANUC floppy cassette, 328
Directory display of floppy cassette, 297 FANUC handy file, 328
Display, 291 FANUC program file mate, 328
Display screen, 385 Features, 381
Displaying and setting data, 290 Features of symbolic CAP T, 375

Displaying operation history, 314 Feed functions, 63

Feed hold, 272
Distribution end signal, 347
Feed hold signal, 347
DNC operation, 269
Feed rate override, 67
DNC1 control, 330
Feed stop, 242
DNC2 control (Only at 1–path control), 331
Feedrate clamp by circular radius (M series), 229
Dry run, 279
Figure copying (G72.1, G72.2) (M series), 170
Dwell (G04), 75
Finishing Cycle (G70), 144
Dynamic graphic display, 299 Floating reference position return (G30.1), 80
Follow up function, 239
Foreground editing, 321
E Functions and tape format list, 436

Emergency stop, 336 Functions for high speed cutting, 226

Functions specific to 2–path control, 253
Equal lead thread cutting (G33) (with G code system A: G32),
60 Functions to simplify programming, 124
Error detection, 73
Exact stop (G09) (M series), 74
Exact stop mode (G61) (M series), 74 G
Execution of automatic operation, 271 Graphic display function, 298

i–2
B–63002EN/02 INDEX

Grinding wheel wear compensation (G40, G41) (T series), 192

J
Grinding-wheel wear compensation by continuous dressing (M
series), 190 Jog override, 67

Grooving in X-axis (G75), 146

Guidance programming function, 424
K
Key input from PMC (External key input), 352

H
Handle feed in the same mode as for jogging, 264
L
Handle interruption, 275
Label skip, 123
Helical interpolation (G02, G03), 44 Language selection, 294
Helical interpolation B (G02, G03) (M series), 45 Linear acceleration/deceleration after cutting feed interpolation,
70
Help function, 312
Linear acceleration/deceleration before cutting feed
High–precision contour control (Only for one system) (M interpolation, 72
series), 235
Linear axis and rotation axis, 99
High–speed linear interpolation (G05), 237
Linear copy, 172
High–speed remote buffer A (G05) (Only at 1–path control),
233 Linear interpolation (G01), 41

High–speed remote buffer B (G05) (At 1–path control) (M List of specifications, 6, 402
series), 234 List of tape code, 448
High–speed serial bus (HSSB), 356 Loader controlled axes, 27
High-speed cycle machining (Only at 1–path control), 227 Local coordinate system (G52), 89
High-speed M/S/T/B interface, 115 Look–ahead control (G08) (M series), 230

High-speed skip signal input, 204

Hobbing machine function (G80, G81) (M series), 251
Hypothetical axis interpolation (G07), 54
M
M code group check function, 116
M series, 34, 433, 442
Machine controlled axes, 26
I Machine coordinate system (G53), 84
In–position signal, 347 Machine lock on each axis, 279
Inch input signal, 348 Machining guidance function, 420
Inch/metric conversion (G20, G21), 98 Machining time stamp function, 314
Increased custom macro common variables, 220 Macro executer function, 222
Increment System, 28 Main program, 118

Incremental feed, 263 Maintenance information screen, 318

Manual absolute on/off, 264
Index table indexing (M series), 157
Manual feed, 263
Infeed control (M series), 169
Manual guide, 381
Input Unit (10 Times), 29
Manual handle feed (1st), 263
Input/output devices, 328
Manual handle feed (2nd, 3rd) (T series: 2nd), 263
Interlock, 344
Manual interruption during automatic operation, 275
Interlock for each axis direction, 344 Manual intervention and return, 274
Interlock per axis, 344 Manual linear/circular interpolation (Only for one path), 266
Intermittent feed plane grinding cycle (G79), 167 Manual numeric command, 267
Interpolation functions, 38 Manual operation, 262
Interruption type custom macro, 220 Manual per-rotation feed (T series), 264

Inverse time feed (G93) (M series), 66 Manual reference position return, 77

Involute interpolation (G02.2, G03.2) (M series), 50 Manual rigid tapping (M series), 266
Maximum stroke, 29

i–3
INDEX B–63002EN/02

MDI operation, 269 Overtravel functions, 338

Measurement functions, 202
Mechanical handle feed, 239
Memory card interface, 329 P
Memory common to paths, 258 Part program storage and editing, 320
Memory operation, 269 Part program storage length, 322
Mirror image, 239 Password function, 323
Mirror image for double turrets (G68, G69) (T series), 156 Path interference check (T series), 257
Miscellaneous functions, 113, 114 Pattern data input, 221
Move signal, 347 Pattern repeating (G73), 143

Multi–spindle Control, 107 Peck drilling in Z-axis (G74), 145

Multiple repetitive cycles for turning (G70 - G76) (T series), Per minute feed (G94), 65
138 Per revolution feed (G95), 66
Multiple–thread cutting (G33) (T series), 61 Periodic maintenance screen, 318
Multi-step skip function (G31 P1 - G31 P4), 204 Personal computer function, 353
Plane selection (G17, G18, G19), 94
Play back, 322
N Plunge direct grinding cycle (G77), 164

NC ready signal, 347 Plunge grinding cycle (G75), 162

Polar coordinate command (G15, G16) (M series), 97
Normal direction control (G40.1,G41.1,G42.1) (M series), 243
Polar coordinate interpolation (G12.1, G13.1), 46
Number of basic controlled axes, 26
Polygonal turning (G50.2, G51.2) (T series), 245
Number of basic simultaneously controlled axes, 26
Polygonal turning with two spindles (T series), 247
Number of controlled axes expanded (All), 26
Position switch function, 348
Number of controlled paths (T series), 26
Positioning (G00), 39
Number of registered programs, 322
Positioning by optimum acceleration, 75
Number of simultaneously controlled axes expanded (All), 26
Power motion manager, 334
Number of the all controlled axes, 25
Preparatory functions, 30
Number of tool offsets, 187
Print board, 454
Number of tool offsets (M series), 187
Program configuration, 117
Number of tool offsets (T series), 187
Program end (M02, M30), 272
Nurbs interpolation (G06.2), 57 Program name, 118
Program number, 118
Program number search, 270
O Program restart, 273
Operation, 384 Program stop (M00, M01), 272
Operation mode, 269 Program test functions, 278

Optional angle chamfering/corner rounding (M series), 152 Programmable mirror image (G50.1, G51.1) (M series), 155

Optional block skip, 123 Programmable parameter entry (G10, G11), 196

Oscillation direct gauge grinding cycle (G74), 160

Oscillation grinding cycle (G73), 160
Other optional functions, 395 R
Outline of conversational automatic programming, 359 Range of command value, 429

Outline of hand CNC (Series 20i), 401 Rapid traverse, 64

Outline of the conversational automatic programming function, Rapid traverse bell–shaped acceleration/deceleration, 69
362, 369, 392 Rapid traverse override, 67
Outline of the macro library, 390 Rapid traversing signal, 348
Override, 67 Reader/punch interfaces, 327
Override cancel, 67 Reference position, 76
Overtravel, 338 Reference position return check (G27), 79

i–4
B–63002EN/02 INDEX

Reference position shift, 81 Simple electric gear box (G80, G81) (M series), 252
Remote buffer, 231 Simple high–precision contour control (G05.1) (M series), 237
Remote buffer (Only at 1–path control), 231 Simple spindle synchronous control, 108

Remote diagnosis, 315 Simple synchronous control, 240

Simultaneous input and output operations (At 1–path control)
Reset, 272 (M series), 277
Reset signal, 347 Single block, 279
Restart of automatic operation, 273 Single direction positioning (G60) (M series), 40
Retrace function (M series), 277 Skip function (G31), 203
Rewind, 270 Slanted axis control, 248
Rewinding signal, 347 Smooth interpolation (G05.1) (M series), 53

Rigid tap, 131 Software operator’s panel, 295

Spindle adjustment screen, 308
Rigid tapping return (M series), 277
Spindle functions, 100
Rotation axis roll–over function, 99
Spindle monitor screen, 309
Rotation copy, 171
Spindle orientation, 108
Run time & parts number display, 294
Spindle output control by the PMC, 101
Spindle output switching, 108
Spindle override, 102
S Spindle positioning (T series), 103
S code output, 101 Spindle setting screen, 308

Safety functions, 335 Spindle speed analog output (S analog output), 101
Spindle speed fluctuation detection (G25, G26), 104
Scaling (G50, G51) (M series), 199
Spindle speed serial output (S serial output), 101
Scheduling function, 276
Spindle synchronization control, 108
Screens for servo data and spindle data, 307
Spiral interpolation, conical interpolation (M series), 55
Second feed rate override, 67
Start lock, 344
Second miscellaneous functions, 114
Status output, 346
Selection of execution programs, 270 Stock removal in facing (G72), 142
Self diagnosis functions, 325 Stock removal in turning (G71), 138
Separate–type FA full keyboard (vertical type) (for Stored pitch error compensation, 194
160i/180i/210i), 286
Stored stroke check 1, 338
Separate–type small MDI unit, 283
Stored stroke check 2 (G22, G23) (M series), 338
Separate–type standard MDI unit (horizontal type), 284 Stored stroke checks 2 and 3 (T series), 339
Separate–type standard MDI unit (vertical type), 285 Stored stroke checks 3 (M series), 339
Sequence number, 120 Straightness compensation, 194
Sequence number comparison and stop, 272 Stroke limit check before movement, 340
Sequence number search, 270 Sub program, 119
Series 15 tape format, 225 Substitution of the number of required parts and number of
machined parts, 351
Series 15 tape format/Series 10/11 tape format, 224
Super Capi, 368
Series–10/11 tape format, 225 Super CAPi M, 389
Servo adjustment screen, 307 Supported machine tools, 383
Servo off, 239 Surface grinding canned cycle (M series), 161
Servo ready signal, 347 Symbol Capi T, 361
Servo setting screen, 307 Symbolic CAP T, 375
Servo waveform function, 306 Synchronization control (Only at 1–path control) (T series), 241

Servo/spindle motor speed detection, 345 Synchronization/mix control (T series), 259

System configuration display function, 310
Setting a workpiece coordinate system (Using G54 to G59, 88
Setting a workpiece coordinate system (Using G92) (with G
code system A: G50), 85
Setting and display unit, 280, 281 T
Setting the reference position without dogs, 77 T code output, 110

i–5
INDEX B–63002EN/02

T series, 31, 430, 437 Tool length/workpiece origin measurement B (M series), 212
Tandem control, 249 Tool life management, 111
Tangential speed constant control, 65 Tool nose radius compensation (G40, G41, G42) (T series), 176
Tape codes, 120 Tool offset (G45, G46, G47, G48) (M series), 180
Tape format, 123 Tool offset (T code), 174
Tape horizontal (TH) parity check and tape vertical (TV) parity Tool offset (T series), 174
check, 123
Tool offset amount memory (T series), 185
Tapping mode (G63) (M series), 74
Tool retract & recover, 273
Tapping signal, 348
Torque limit skip (G31 P99, G31 P98) (T series), 204
Thread cutting, 59 Touch pad, 318
Thread cutting cycle (G76), 147 Traverse direct gauge grinding cycle (G72), 159
Thread cutting cycle (G78) (with G code system A: G92), 135 Traverse grinding cycle (G71), 159
Thread cutting cycle retract (T series), 272 Turning cycle in facing (G79) (with G code system A: G94),
Thread cutting signal, 348 137

Three–dimensional coordinate conversion (G68, G69) (M

series), 201
Three–dimensional tool compensation (G40, G41) (M series),
191
V
Three–spindle serial output (Only for single–path control), 108 Variable lead thread cutting (G34) (T series), 61

Tool axis direction handle feed, 265

Tool axis direction handle feed and tool axis direction handle
feed B (for M Series), 264 W
Tool axis normal direction handle feed, 265
Waiting Function, 256
Tool compensation function, 173
Workpiece coordinate system, 85
Tool compensation memory, 184
Workpiece coordinate system preset, 92
Tool compensation memory (M series), 184
Workpiece coordinate system shift (T series), 93
Tool compensation value measured value direct input B, 209
Workpiece origin offset value change (Programmable data
Tool functions, 109 input) (G10), 90
Tool geometry compensation and tool wear compensation, 175
Tool length automatic measurement (G37) (M series), 205
Tool length compensation (G43, G44, G49) (M series), 179 Y
Tool length measurement (M series), 207 Y axis offset, 175

i–6
 Revision Record

FANUC Series 16i/18i/21i/20i/160i/180i/210i–MODEL A DESCRIPTIONS (B–63002EN)

02 Aug., ’99 Addition of Series 20i–A

01 Apr.,’97

Edition Date Contents Edition Date Contents

· No part of this manual may be
reproduced in any form.

· All specifications and designs

are subject to change without
notice.